How to defend yourself against a trespasser who sues for injuries

What are Some Defenses to Civil Trespassing?

While you can be criminally charged for trespassing, you can also be sued civilly for trespassing under tort law. Most commonly, civil trespassing will refer to interference with another person’s land or personal property (also known as “chattel”).

If you are sued for trespass, you may have some defenses available to you. These defenses include consent, public necessity private necessity and/or privilege.

Contents

  1. When is the Consent Defense Available?
  2. When is the Public Necessity Defense Available?
  3. When is the Private Necessity Defense Available?
  4. When is the Privilege Defense Available?
  5. Should I Contact a Lawyer if I am Sued for Trespass?

When is the Consent Defense Available?

One common defense that can be used if you were sued for trespass is that you were given consent by the owner of the land or property.

Consent can be given to you by both words and actions. For example, if someone tells you that you can enter their property, you can argue that you were given consent. Additionally, an example of an action that may give you consent is if someone waves you onto their land.

You may also be able to argue consent if the owner of the land or property did not take any action or remained silent when you entered their land or used their property. However, this is a harder defense to argue and prove.

Lastly, keep in mind that your consent argument will be determined to be invalid if it was induced by fraud or was given by someone who is incompetent, intoxicated or a minor.

Read More About:

When is the Public Necessity Defense Available?

If you have interfered with someone else’s land or chattel because of a public necessity, you will have a defense to trespass. To invoke this defense, the situation that triggers your action must be:

  • An immediate and imperative necessity; and
  • An act that is done in good faith for the public good.

An example of this would be a firefighter entering another person’s land to help prevent a fire from spreading throughout the neighborhood.

The rationale is that when something threatens the whole community and the public interest is involved, you are able to take action to protect the public interest. However, understand that this defense is not available if the act becomes unreasonable under the circumstances.

When is the Private Necessity Defense Available?

If you have interfered with someone else’s land or chattel because of a private necessity, you will also have a defense to trespass. The privilege of private necessity is only allowed when your actions are necessary to protect:

  • Any person from death or serious bodily harm; or
  • Any land or chattel from destruction or injury.

Thus, the rationale behind this defense is that the preservation of life is more important than property rights. For example, if you are running away from someone who is trying to shoot you and enter another person’s land, you could argue private necessity.

When is the Privilege Defense Available?

Lastly, you may argue that you had privilege to trespass if you are attempting to recover land or chattel that is rightfully yours. Trespass is allowed in this situation if the reason you do not have your land or chattel was:

  • The landowner’s fault;
  • The chattel owner’s fault; or
  • An act of god, such as a storm or flood.

Should I Contact a Lawyer if I am Sued for Trespass?

If you are sued for civil trespass, you should speak to a local property lawyer to determine if you have any of the above defenses available in your situation. A lawyer can help you formulate a strong defense and represent you in court.

Criminal trespassing is the legal term for trespassing onto someone else’s land or using that person’s chattel without permission. On the whole, law enforcement agents such as sheriffs, park rangers and police officers enforce the laws for trespassing. In cases where charges are brought against you for crossing onto another person’s land, you do have the right to defend yourself.

There are several defenses to trespassing. One is that you have consent to be there. Here’s an example of how this may come up. Perhaps the homeowner is not at home, but you have gained permission to enter the property. If a neighbor sees you and believes you’re trespassing, he or she may call the police or local sheriff. While you may be arrested initially if the homeowner is not able to be contacted, it’s likely the charges would be dropped as soon as the homeowner cleared up the confusion.

Public necessity is another good defense for trespassing. This is why you have to trespass to protect the public due to an emergency. For instance, if there is a violent storm headed toward you and it’s faster to cross a person’s yard to get to shelter than it is to walk around the land, you may be in the right. The important thing to remember in that case is that the trespassing must be reasonable.

Your charge for trespassing may be due to a misunderstanding, immediate need to cross the land or for other reasons. Your attorney can help you protect yourself and explain the situation, so you can move forward with your life.

Source: FindLaw, “Are There Defenses to Criminal Trespassing?,” Aditi Mukherji, JD, accessed June 20, 2017

How to defend yourself against a trespasser who sues for injuries

How to defend yourself against a trespasser who sues for injuries

October 22nd, 2021 by mikeglaw | Posted in Court Hearings, Criminal Defense |

Criminal trespassing of private property in Florida law is a serious crime, as it can lead to probation, fines, or significant jail time. It can also stay on your public record and appear in background checks, posing as a roadblock for things such as hiring or leasing.

If you have been charged with trespassing, it is in your best interest to do what is necessary to beat this criminal offense charge.

In this guide, our team at Mike G Law will cover how to beat a criminal offense, such as criminal trespass. We will use our extensive experience and knowledge to educate you on everything you need to know about the criminal tresspasing and inform you of what to expect along the way to dropping those criminal trespass charges.

How Is Trespassing Defined in Florida Law?

According to Florida law, criminal trespass is when a person willfully enters another person’s property without receiving an acceptable invitation or acquiring the proper licensing or authorization. Criminal trespassing of a property can also occur if a person enters someone else’s property with permission of property owners but refuses to leave even after the rightful occupant’s or owner’s verbal warning to do so.

What Is the Punishment for Those Charged With & Found Guilty of Criminal Trespass?

The punishment for individuals charged with and found guilty of trespassing charges will vary depending on the circumstances of this legal issue and the outcomes of a civil lawsuit.

Florida law classifies criminal trespass on private property other than a structure or conveyance as a first-degree misdemeanor crime. This charge can result in up to one year of jail time and a $1,000 fine.

The punishments for first-degree trespass will become much more severe based on the specifics of the property crime and the defense that the person convicted is willing to find. For example, if the individual was carrying a firearm or possessing another dangerous weapon around another person’s home or property, they will face more serious consequences. An individual would also face harsher punishments if they were hunting an endangered game or fur-bearing animal.

The location of the trespassing crime can also impact a person’s punishment. If an individual got caught trespassing in any of the following areas, a court could upgrade the trespassing charge to a third-degree felony:

  • An agricultural chemicals manufacturing facility
  • A domestic violence center
  • An agricultural site for research or testing purposes
  • A posted construction site
  • A power plant

Based on Florida state law, an offender who commits a third-degree felony can face up to five years of probation, five years of jail time, or a $5,000 fine for their crimes.

It is essential to enlist the services of an experienced criminal defense attorney to achieve the best possible outcome. Without the professional legal help of the right lawyer, an individual may face severe punishments for trespassing that were otherwise avoidable. It is best to contact an experienced criminal defense attorney like Mike G, who can help you understand your situation and follow the best course of action to drop those criminal penalties against you.

How to Get a Trespassing Charge Dropped?

A court will sometimes drop a criminal trespass charge, and the reasons will vary. For instance, the property owner of the premises or building where the misdemeanor crime took place might submit a notice or a brief description to the court that their trespassing harm has been satisfied or that the owner did provide consent to the person trespassing. In this case, the court can drop the criminal charges altogether.

However, this scenario is rare for a felony case. This is because the state of Florida, rather than a private citizen, brings a criminal tresspasing sentence against a potential offender.

A court might also drop a criminal trespass case if it lacks sufficient incriminating evidence. For example, if the arresting officer did not actually witness the crime, they have no grounds for a solid case and may be forced to drop it.

What Are Common Defenses of Trespassing?

A knowledgeable and experienced criminal defense lawyer will evaluate your scenario and prepare a well-rounded defense for your trespassing cases.

Some common defenses to familiarize yourself with when learning how to beat trespassing criminal charges include:

Lack of Presence

This defense is one of the most basic and not necessarily secure; however, a defendant can consider it when understanding how to beat trespassing charges. Security cameras might have captured an individual who looked like you on the property at the time of the crime, but if you know you were not present, an experienced attorney can help you prove this fact. They will develop an alibi to confirm that you are innocent.

Lack of Notice or Improper Notice

If an individual was unaware that they were not allowed on a property, they might have sufficient grounds to dismiss a charge.

“No trespassing” signs must be visible and meet certain requirements. These requirements vary depending on the nature of trespassing signs, but some of the requirements include:

  • Signs must be clearly visible from beyond the boundary of the property
  • Signs may be placed no further than 500 feet apart
  • Sign lettering must be no less than two inches in height for visibility
  • Signs must be placed at all typical entrances to the property

If a property owner fails to have an adequate trespass warning (or any trespassing signs altogether), a court can assume that an offender was unaware that their presence was not welcome and possibly drop the trespassing sentence. Although, you would still need an attorney to defend you in court.

No Notice to Depart

This defense can be one of the most effective when approaching a trespassing property charge.

An individual may assume it is okay to remain on private property if the owner allowed them onto it and did not notify them to depart. A property owner needs to give a once-welcomed visitor a warning that they need to leave. If they do not, there are likely no grounds for a legitimate trespassing charge.

Lack of Intent

In some cases, prosecutors can lean on an individual’s stealthy entry as a means to prove that said individual entered the property with negative intent. If the entrance can be seen as more public or casual, especially without the presence of a locked door, find criminal defense lawyers who will argue a lack of malicious intent.

Public or Private Necessity

Did you enter a property to protect public safety, yourself, or a family member from death or serious bodily injury? Whether you entered the property to seek safety or refused to leave to maintain safety, you might have a solid defense.

Call Mike G Law to Take on Your Trespassing Charge

Are you facing a criminal trespassing charge? Do not navigate your case alone and find an experienced law firm that will defend your rights. Contact Mike G Law for legal assistance today; with 25 years of experience as a prosecutor, he is well-equipped to handle the fine details of your case. Schedule a free consultation, and you can discuss the specifics of your case. From there, Mike G will establish realistic expectations and help achieve the best possible outcome for your situation.

Have you ever heard the rumor about a burglar getting injured while breaking into someone’s home or business, and then suing for their injuries? How likely is this situation? Could it ever happen? Would they ever win?

The short answer is, no. They could try, but they wouldn’t get far.

In most circumstances, property owners are required to protect visitors on their properties, whether those are guests at their homes or customers at their businesses. This means actively identifying any potential hazards and either removing the hazards or sufficiently warning visitors about them if they can’t be removed.

This legal duty to protect visitors from hazards doesn’t apply to trespassers. However, you may still have a responsibility to warn potential trespassers of hazards if you know there is a high probability your home or business will be broken into. Think of a “Beware of Dog” sign as an example of this.

Are There Exceptions?

There are two big exceptions to this rule where you may still be held liable for a trespasser’s injuries.

Intentional Injuries

Trespassers can’t sue you for injuries they incur from accidents, such as slipping and falling on your property. However, if you injure the trespasser intentionally, such as by setting out booby traps like in Home Alone, then you won’t be protected by the law.

For example, have you ever seen a sign saying, “Private Property: Trespassers Will Be Shot”? Posting this sign is not a legal defense for shooting someone. Even Louisiana’s Stand Your Ground laws say you have to believe your life is in danger before acting in a violent manner. Someone simply entering your property isn’t enough.

Child Trespassers

Most states, including Louisiana, have something called Attractive Nuisance laws. These laws say that children are not capable of recognizing danger and can be expected to trespass to get to something that is attractive to them, such as swimming pools and trampolines.

Other examples of property that may qualify as Attractive Nuisances are playgrounds, treehouses, dangerous animals, and construction sites. If it looks like it could be a fun place to play, consider it an attractive nuisance.

This means that property owners have a legal duty to take extra precautions to keep children out and safe from the danger. Installing a fence with a locked gate that can’t be easily opened or climbed by children is a good example of how to protect yourself from liability in this type of trespassing case.

What’s Needed for a Premises Liability Compensation Claim?

To successfully file a lawsuit after being hurt on someone else’s property, an injured person will need to prove the following:

  • They were injured by a dangerous condition on the property.
  • They were on the property legally (excluding the exceptions discussed above).
  • The property owner knew about the dangerous condition, or at least should have known (for example, after a strong storm, it’s reasonable to assume there may be downed tree limbs or power lines).
  • The property owner didn’t do anything to remove the danger after learning about it, or didn’t take steps quickly enough to prevent someone from being injured.

At Dudley DeBosier, Your Case Consultation Is Free

Many injury victims hesitate to get legal representation because they are afraid they can’t afford it, especially when they may already be going into debt over their injury-related expenses. At Dudley DeBosier Injury Lawyers, we never charge for initial consultations, and even after hiring our team, you pay us nothing unless we win.

Browse US Legal Forms’ largest database of 85k state and industry-specific legal forms.

  • Last Will and Testament
  • Power of Attorney
  • Promissory Note
  • LLC Operating Agreement
  • Living Will
  • Rental Lease Agreement
  • Non-Disclosure Agreement

In cases of trespass, there are some defenses available to the defendant to justify the trespass. However, ignorance or mistake of law or fact is not an excuse for trespass[i].

One of the defenses is the title and possession of the property[ii]. To invoke this defense, the person must have the actual ownership of property along with the title. The person in actual possession has the right to maintain an action for trespass against all persons other than the original owner[iii]. Thus, a trespass is privileged if the defendant is a bonafide purchaser, and has an ownership claim over the property.

An action for trespass may not be entertained where the defendant has acquired a right of easement. An easement is the right to use the real property of another without possessing it. But the defendant is liable, if s/he exceeds or misuses the extent and scope of the right. In Phillips v. Jacobsen, 117 A.D.2d 785 (N.Y. App. Div. 2d Dep’t 1986), the court observed that an easement granted in general terms must be construed to include any reasonable use which is lawful and is contemplated by the court.

The statute of limitations is a defense that is ordinarily asserted by the defendant to defeat an action brought against him/her after the appropriate time has elapsed. The defendant has to prove the entitlement to limitations.

The doctrine of estoppel is an important defense to the action of trespass. Estoppel arises when a person who had a duty to speak or act, intentionally or negligently made another through his/her action or silence to believe in the existence of a fact that does not exist, and another acted by relying on such an act or omission[iv]. The doctrine of estoppel is not applicable if the defendant has consented to it.

Apart from the defenses above mentioned, there are some exceptions. Infancy is not considered as a defense for the liability of trespass. The plaintiff’s conduct and contributory negligence can be taken into consideration to determine if a trespasser was entitled to enter a land to claim chattel. However, it is not a ground for defense.

An action will not amount to trespass if it is privileged. People who commit trespass may not be liable if they have a legal defense for their actions. A trespass may occur only when the holder of the privilege acts unreasonably or unnecessarily. Following are some of the privileges enjoyed by a trespasser:

  • Necessity is a privilege against trespass. A defendant is excused from liability for trespass to land if the action is strictly necessary to prevent public disaster. The action is not liable if it is for the benefit of the defendant or a third person. But if they cause any damage while on the property, they could be held liable for any losses. For example, A, an aviator, while carefully and skillfully operating his/her airplane makes a forced landing on B’s field in the reasonable belief that it is necessary to do so for the protection of himself/herself and his/her plane. A is not liable for his/her mere entry, but s/he is subject to liability for any harm thereby caused to B or to B’s buildings, crops or other belongings.
  • An action will not amount to trespass if the defendant enters another’s property to abate any public or private nuisance. Any public nuisance which causes harm can be abated and it will not amount to trespass. The act of the defendant must be reasonable for the purpose of abating a private nuisance. A public officer who is authorized to abate public nuisance is privileged to enter any person’s land for the same purpose at a reasonable time and manner[v].
  • Consent is another common privilege in trespass. A defendant’s action is privileged if the entry to the land is with the consent or license of the person who has a rightful and legal possession of land. Consent can be implied from custom, usage or conduct. The action becomes trespass if it is beyond the scope of the consent or license. The acts of the defendant should not exceed or conflict with the purposes of the consent. Privilege of consent has to be established by the defendant. A person who enters a public area in a reasonable time and manner has the implied consent of the owner and his/her action does not amount to trespass. Consent will not be considered as a privilege to trespass if it is obtained by fraud, misrepresentation or under compulsion[vi].
  • A law enforcement officer performing his/her duty in a reasonable manner without causing any harm is privileged to commit a trespass. A law enforcement officer is privileged to make an entry to arrest or summon up an already arrested person. Acts of persons like union agents, firefighters, physicians, conservator, power companies and telephone companies are justified under the reason of authority.
  • Where a person, with the prior consent of the landowner enters the latter’s land to remove or fix any personal property, enjoys the privilege of trespass. One is privileged to enter other’s land for the purpose of removing a chattel at a reasonable time and manner without causing any damage. A person is privileged to enter other person’s land to demand the return of his/her property which is placed or left on the other person’s land. Moreover, a person can enter another person’s land to return a thing. A landowner is privileged to remove another’s personal property which is placed on the land illegally. S/he can exercise this privilege once defendant fails to comply with the landowner’s notice to remove the same[vii]. Landowner shall use due care to remove things that are wrongfully on his/her land. S/he is privileged only when the action is within the control and extent over the trespassing item as is necessary to remove it. Finally, the harm caused while exercising the privilege should be reasonable and necessary.

Property owners have a duty of care to maintain the safety of the premises for those who come onto the property. Can a burglar sue for personal injury in Bakersfield? The short answer is yes, it is possible to sue for almost anything, though many claims will be dismissed as frivolous and may cost those attempting to litigate the issue for both their own court costs and the costs of those they intended to sue. However, there are some circumstances under which even burglars may be able to successfully sue for personal injury on your property.

A Duty of Care

The duty of care property owners have extends not only to store owners or other businesses but to homeowners as well. Homeowners must take reasonable measures to ensure the safety of those who come on their property. This includes ensuring sidewalks and driveways are free of ice during the winter and making sure trip hazards are addressed as needed.

This duty of care extends to those invited onto your property for a specific purpose. This can include a plumber who comes into your home to fix a leak, landscapers taking care of your yard, and contractors performing work in or around your home.

Licensees are people who have the consent of the homeowner to enter the home for their own purposes. This includes guests you may invite to your home for dinner, neighbors invited to a backyard cookout, and friends your children invite home after school. The homeowner has a duty to exercise reasonable care to ensure the licensee is protected from known dangers.

Trespassers, however, do not have a right to be on the homeowner’s property. In most cases, the homeowner has no obligation to protect the trespasser from dangers. This would include those invited to the home or licensees in the process of committing a crime in the home. For example, should an overnight guest attempt to steal your television in the night and injure themselves by dropping the television on their foot, the homeowner would not have a duty to protect from this danger.

Booby Traps

There are some exceptions, however, in which the homeowner may be responsible for the safety of a trespasser. A homeowner cannot set up booby traps designed to injure trespassers. Any conduct designed to willfully injure trespassers is not excused, and the burglar may sue for personal injuries that result. Home Alone may succeed as a comedy, but the bandits would likely have grounds to sue for the injuries they sustained.

Deadly Force

Homeowners do have the right to use deadly force to defend their lives in most states. However, you may never use deadly force to protect personal property. Unless you have reason to believe your life is in danger, any injuries or fatalities you cause a trespasser intentionally may result in a successful suit against you for injuries suffered by the trespasser.

While most suits for personal injury brought by a trespasser may be frivolous, it is always a good idea to consult a Bakersfield premises liability lawyer, should you ever find yourself in the position of being sued by a trespasser.

If someone sustained injuries in a car accident, a fall on your property, or another mishap that they say was your fault, you need to know how to defend yourself against a claim for damages. The first thing that you must do is obtain legal advice and representation from a Bend personal injury attorney.

A personal injury claim made against you is a serious matter that you must not ignore. The other party could win by default and obtain a judgment for monetary damages against you. So, here are a few tips for defending against a claim for damages after an accident.

Notify your insurance company

The insurance policies that you purchase for your car, motorcycle, home, or boat do more than pay for damage to what they insure. These policies also contain liability coverage, which pays for claims made against you by other parties for damages incurred in accidents that you cause. Your insurance company will pay the legal fees for an attorney to defend you in any lawsuit filed by another party.

Liability insurance policies usually contain language requiring that you give notice to the insurance company of an accident or claim within the time specified in the policy. Failure to comply with this notice requirement may allow the insurance company to refuse to provide a defense or pay the claim.

Do not admit fault

Even something as innocent as saying, “I’m sorry,” after an accident may be used as evidence to prove that the accident was your fault. If you are involved in an accident, do not make statements about what happened to anyone other than the police. Statements that you make should be limited to the facts as you know them. Do not speculate or make assumptions.

Preserve the scene

Personal injury claims can arise through various circumstances and situations, including:

  • Car accidents and other types of motor vehicle collisions.
  • Pedestrian accidents.
  • Slip-and-fall accidents.
  • Defective consumer products.
  • Assault and other intentional conduct.
  • Workplace injuries.
  • Wrongful death.

Regardless of the cause of an accident, you need to document the accident scene and preserve evidence, which your attorney will need in order to defend you from claims by other parties and to pursue your own claim for injuries that you sustained in the accident. Common methods for documenting what occurred and preserving evidence include the following:

  • Use the camera on a smartphone to take photos and videos of the location of the accident, including the position of vehicles or other objects, such as a defective machine or another type of product.
  • Take photos and videos of skid marks, debris, burn marks, and other physical evidence that may be moved or disturbed by weather or other factors after the accident.
  • Obtain the names and contact information for all parties involved in the accident and any other people who happened to be in the area and may have seen or heard something that could be useful to defend you from or pursue a claim.
  • Make note of any security or traffic cameras in the general vicinity that may have captured video of the accident.
  • If police, fire, or emergency medical personnel respond to the scene of the accident, note their department or agency names so your attorney can contact them for copies of the reports that each agency must prepare about the incident.

Researchers studying how the human brain works when a person faces a traumatic event, such as a car crash, have concluded that what participants recall may not be particularly reliable. The human brain focuses on finding ways to protect you during an accident rather than on collecting and storing memories of what happened. The photos and other information that you gather immediately after an accident give your attorney and investigators working on your behalf something concrete to use in order to determine the cause of an accident and the party or parties at fault.

Rely on the knowledge and skills of your personal injury attorney

Someone making a claim against you for personal injuries does not necessarily mean an accident was your fault. Anyone can file a personal injury claim after an accident, but any reward requires evidence to prove who was at fault in causing it to occur.

When you retain the services of a Bend, Oregon, personal injury attorney, you will have someone on your side to look out for your interests, which may include pursuing a claim for damages on your behalf. Rely on your attorney to determine what rights you have following an accident and the best action to take to protect them.

As a property owner, you have a legal obligation to take reasonable steps to protect someone from being injured on your property. In the legal world, it is called the duty of care. You must make sure that a person on your property is safe and protected from the potential of injury. While the exact legal definition can vary from state to state, there are still similarities in ways that you can protect yourself from legal liabilities when a person is injured or harmed on your property.

How to defend yourself against a trespasser who sues for injuries

Identify

An overall assessment of the property is a good place to start when evaluating your potential liabilities. You walk around the property with a piece of paper and mark down areas that need to be addressed. You locate gaps in fencing that need to be repaired or sidewalks that are cracked. Perhaps, you identify boards that have become rotten on the deck or power tools that are easily accessible. Once you have completed the assessment, you develop a plan on ways to reduce your liability from these problems. You start marking the items off the list until you have limited your overall exposure.

Four Types of People

When lawyers consider a personal injury lawsuit, one of the first things they consider is the classification of the person who was injured on the property. These can change slightly from state to state, but generally, there are four types of people on a property — invitee, social guest, licensee, or trespasser. Each classification has a different legal status. An invitee is someone who was invited onto the property. This might be like a customer at a store. A licensee is a person who is on the property as a guest of the owner. For example, a friend having dinner at your house could be considered a licensee. A social guest is a welcome visitor to the property, but a social guest can be classified as either a licensee or an invitee. A trespasser is someone on the property without permission. Negligence on the part of a property owner can be easier or harder to prove depending on the victim’s classification.

Safeguard Dangerous Areas

A swimming pool on your property needs to be secured. The same is true of a shed with chemicals, tools, and equipment. These areas must be secure in order to limit the chance that someone is injured. You have a legal obligation.

Inform Visitors

To reduce your risk of liability, it is a good idea to inform visitors about potential dangers on the property. You can tell guests to avoid the steps off the back porch or to be careful when getting in and out of the hot tub. That way, if someone is injured, you claim that you informed the person about the potential risks.

How to defend yourself against a trespasser who sues for injuries

Trespassing Children

Children occupy a special classification in liability law, and you must take extra precautions to prevent an injury to a child. This is often referred to as attractive nuisance. For example, a hot tub might be classified as an attractive nuisance. Even if a child is trespassing on your property, you might still be liable if the child is harmed by the hot tub. The same can be true for a tree fort or swing. These are objects that could be known to attract the attention of children, and the children’s parents would have to prove in court that the child did not understand the risks. If you have reason to believe that children might come onto your property, the law places a special responsibility on you to prevent harm.

Condition of the Property

Hazards on your property can cause a person to suffer serious injuries if he or she trips, slips, or falls, and in many states, the condition of the property plays a role in the owner’s liability. Property owners must exercise a reasonable amount of care under a uniform standard. There are a variety of factors that determine if the property owner was acting responsibly when caring for a property, such as the circumstances under which the injured person was on the property and the way in which the property was being used. As well, the court will look at whether the property owner informed the visitor about potential safety hazards.

Comparative Fault

Calculating legal liability when someone is injured on your property is complicated. In many states, the liability is divided between the property owner and the person who was injured. It’s called “comparative fault,” and damages are based on the amount of fault attributed to the injured person. Your lawyer might claim that a reasonable person would not have walked on the cracked sidewalk or would have noticed that the railing on the deck was broken. In that case, a jury might find that the property owner was only 60% at fault and damages would be calculated damages accordingly.

Created byВ FindLaw’s team of legal writers and editors | Last updated March 26, 2019

Defending yourself against a criminal charge is no easy matter. You must understand the elements of the crime that you have been charged with and see what defenses you may have against the various elements. You do not need to defend against all of the elements, as it only takes a reasonable doubt by the jury for one of them. Every case is different, but here are a few of the most common defenses to a criminal charge.

Reasonable Doubt

In order to convict you of a criminal charge, the prosecutor must prove your guilt beyond a reasonable doubt. This is a pretty lofty standard, and during any trial the defendant may present a defense in order to raise such a reasonable doubt. Most defenses break down into one of two categories:

  1. I didn’t do it; or
  2. I did it, but I shouldn’t be held responsible.

I Didn’t Do It

The most basic defense to any criminal charge is to simply prove that you didn’t do it. When you are defending yourself against a criminal charge, this is probably the easiest defense, because the burden is on the prosecutor to prove each of the elements to the crime. The defendant can just sit back and let the prosecutor do all of the work, but if the defendant has something that proves that they could not have committed the crime, now is the time to speak up.

1. Innocent Until Proven Guilty

One of the hallmarks of the American legal system is the presumption that you are innocent until proven guilty. This isn’t just an ideal, it’s an actual legal presumption, which means the judge and jury must assume you’re innocent until they are shown otherwise. This is why a defendant can “plead the fifth,” remain silent, and not offer a shred of evidence to support his or her claim of innocence and still prevail. It is the prosecutor’s job to prove a defendant is guilty, not a defendant’s job to prove that he or she is innocent. So what does a prosecutor have to show?

2. Beyond a Reasonable Doubt

The prosecutor must demonstrate to the judge or jury that there is no reasonable doubt of your guilt. If any reasonable doubt can be shown, any at all, then the prosecutor has failed and you should be found innocent. Because this standard is so high, most defendants concentrate on raising some reasonable doubt to the prosecutor’s allegations.

3. I Have an Alibi

One of the primary ways defendants prove that they didn’t do it is to demonstrate that they couldn’t have done it. An alibi defense is evidence that you were somewhere else, often with someone else, and thus couldn’t have been the perpetrator. By demonstrating to a judge or jury that it is likely that you weren’t present at the crime scene, you are creating a reasonable doubt of your guilt.

I Did It, but Shouldn’t Be Held Responsible

You may have actually committed the act for which you are being charged, but you have some mitigating reason or circumstances that excuse your actions. When defending yourself against a criminal charge in this situation, the burden will be on you to prove why your actions should be excused. You will not be able to sit and wait for the prosecutor to prove their case, you will have to provide evidence of your defense. Here are a few examples of this of defenses for which a criminal act may be excused:

1. Self-Defense

This is a common defense when someone is charged with causing some form of physical violence (assault, battery, etc). The defendant flips the story, and demonstrates that rather than being the aggressor, he or she was actually the victim and was acting to protect themselves from harm.

Self-defense is an ancient defense that exists in most legal systems, and is predicated on the belief that people have a right to defend themselves from physical injury. Proving such a defense can be tricky since a defendant will generally have to demonstrate that self-defense was necessary, the belief of physical harm was reasonable, and that the response was reasonable. For example, responding to an assailant’s threat to punch you by shooting them is almost certainly an unreasonable response.

2. Insanity Defense

Although it makes for fascinating TV dramas, in real life defendants rarely plead insanity as a defense. Judges and jurors are very skeptical of these claims, and because of the abstract nature of this defense, it can be very difficult to actually prove.

The theory behind an insanity defense is the notion that in almost every criminal law, there is a “mental” or “intent” element. Often, the required mental state is that you must have intended to perform the criminal act. If a defendant is precluded from an understanding of what they’re doing because of mental illness, then they can’t possess the mental state that the criminal charge requires. From a policy standpoint, we also tend to think that it would be more appropriate to send someone who is truly insane to psychiatric care, not to prison. Thus, even if a defendant is successful in an insanity defense, they will be sent to a psychiatric institution, not set free.

So how do courts define “insane”? The most popular definition is the M’Naghten test which defines insanity as “the inability to distinguish right from wrong”. To successfully win an insanity defense, a defendant will rely on testimony from a psychiatrist, and will undergo extensive psychiatric testing which can be painful and humiliating.

3. Under the Influence Defense

Related to the insanity defense, some defendants defend themselves by claiming that they were under the influence of drugs, and could not have had the mental state necessary to commit the crime. In other words, they were too high to really know what they were doing. Only a few states allow this defense, and even then, it is only a partial defense. At best, it will lower the crime you are convicted of to a lesser crime.

4. Entrapment Defense

An entrapment defense is appropriate when an official induces you to commit a crime. Common examples of this are prostitution stings or drug sales. The theory is that the government shouldn’t be allowed to push you into committing a crime and then convicting you for it.

This defense won’t be successful if the judge or jury believes you were predisposed to committing the crime, however. So even if an undercover officer offered to sell you illegal drugs, if you have a history of drug use, then an entrapment defense isn’t likely to be successful.

Get Legal Help Defending Yourself Against a Criminal Charge

Defending yourself against a criminal charge has many facets. No one individual can understand the full ramifications of every charge and every defense to a criminal case without a good criminal defense attorney. So if you’re being investigated or charged with a crime, you’d be wise to seek out a local criminal defense attorney as soon as possible.

A frivolous lawsuit is one in that has no legal merit and, therefore, has no chance of actually succeeding. A frivolous lawsuit is often filed with the intention of harassing, annoying, or disturbing the other party in question. In some cases, the lawsuit is filed to limit the collection and/or foreclosure proceedings on an outstanding debt as a possible strategy to settle the case for less.

Litigious people will threaten to sue for petty reasons, such as being unsatisfied with a product or because they’re holding a personal grudge against another party. These types of cases can have taken up valuable court time and resources and can have a negative impact on the lives of the individuals being sued.

Unfortunately, threats of these types of lawsuits are becoming more common in today’s society, and there are many people who a have a “lawsuit history” when it comes to frivolous litigation.

Business owners and wealthy individuals are often the targets of frivolous lawsuits because they have “deep pockets” and knowing this, the plaintiffs and their lawyers are counting on a settlement rather than drawn out litigation.

Avoiding Them in the First Place

While having money may certainly improve the quality of your life, it can also have its share of problems. Your odds of being the target of a frivolous lawsuit increase, and there are people who will use any and every opportunity to get a “piece of your pie” by filing a frivolous lawsuit against you.

According to the 2014 ACE Private Risk Services Survey on Personal Liability Perceptions and Behavior Among Wealthy Households, more than two-thirds of the high net worth community believe that the public’s perception of the wealthy makes them at risk for lawsuits. But, when asked what their greatest concern is with respect to being sued, the respondents seemed to be less concerned about losing a significant amount of their assets vs the stress and time involved in mounting a legal defense.

When it comes to avoiding frivolous lawsuits, comprehensive estate planning can protect your assets and leave you less vulnerable to scams and fraud. A comprehensive estate plan involves conventional estate planning structures to maximize the amount of assets that you can pass on after your death. But it also includes effective asset protection structures to protect your wealth from potentially devastating lawsuits.

Asset protection strategies that allow you to control your wealth may include:

  • Limited partnerships
  • Limited liability companies
  • Foreign asset protection trusts
  • A Private Retirement Plan (for California residents)

Protecting Your Interests

Whether you’re a business owner or a wealthy individual, without proper asset protection strategies as part of your comprehensive estate plan, you’re increasing the risk of losing everything to frivolous lawsuits.

Asset protection is all about planning in advance for that unforeseen, catastrophic lawsuit. At the Jeffrey M. Verdon Law Group, our goal is to protect your family, your legacy, and your assets from a frivolous legal attack. Take our online risk exposure test to determine whether asset protection and privacy is beneficial for you.

How to defend yourself against a trespasser who sues for injuries

By FindLaw Staff | Reviewed by Chris Meyers, Esq. | Last updated November 29, 2021

Trespassing is a legal term that can refer to a wide variety of offenses against a person or against property. Trespassing as itВ relates to real estate lawВ means entering onto land without the consent of the landowner. There are bothВ criminalВ and civil trespass laws. Criminal trespass law is enforced by police, sheriffs, or park rangers. Civil trespass requires that the landowner initiate a private enforcement action in court to collect any damages for which the trespasser may be responsible (regardless of whether a crime has been committed).

Intent and Knowledge Requirements

Traditionally, for criminal or civil trespass, there is someВ level of intentВ required. The trespasser must not simply accidentally cross another’s land but must knowingly go onto the property without permission. Knowledge may be inferred when the owner tells the trespasser not to go on the land, when the land is fenced, or when a “no trespassing” sign is posted.

A trespasser would probably not be prosecuted if the land was open, the trespasser’s conduct did not substantially interfere with the owner’s use of the property, and the trespasser left immediately on request.

Express Consent

The landowner may indicate verbally or in writing the grant of permission to enter onto the land. Make sure you have a start date and end date. In most states, a landowner may give permission to enter their land for a limited time or purpose. However, the license is revocable at any time by the landowner.

Implied Consent

The existence of consent may be implied from the landowner’s conduct, from custom, or from the circumstances. Consent may be implied if the landowner was unavailable to give consent, and immediate action is necessary to save a life or prevent a serious injury.

Homeowner Liability: What if a Trespasser Gets Hurt?

As bizarre as this may sound, there are some limited protections for trespassers if theyВ get injuredВ while in the act, so to speak. Homeowners can sometimesВ beВ liable to trespassersВ if they willfully injured the person or knew or should have known about the presence of frequent trespassers and kept an unsafe condition.

What does all this mean? Well, let’s say you, as a homeowner, set up a booby trap for a trespasser with a trip wire. If a trespasser trips on the hidden wire and suffers injury, the homeowner may be liable for injuries.

What are some things you can legally do? If you are concerned about trespassers coming onto your land, start with a “Private Property” or “No Trespassing” sign in a visible place. Not only does it put the trespassers on notice but it also conveys your intent to keep your land to yourself and not as a make-shift easement for others.

You may also consider installing video cameras or trail cameras in the traveled area. The presence of the camera itself can be a deterrent to some. Be sure you are up-to-date on your state’s laws regarding videotaping or filming before installing a camera. You can do this by speaking with a local attorney.

Trespassing Basics: Additional Resources

  • Select State Laws on Hunting and Trespassing
  • Adverse Possession: Continuous Trespassers’ Rights
  • Land Use and Zoning Basics

Have Questions About Trespassing? Talk to an Attorney

If you think someone is entering your property unlawfully, it will help to get an understanding of trespassing law and the various exceptions. Get in touch with a skilledВ real estate attorneyВ near you to learn how the law applies to your particular situation.

While there is no pan-India legislation that specifically targets land grabbing, the same is considered illegal and criminal under various provisions of the Indian Penal Code.

Land grabbing refers to any activity by which someone occupies or attempts to occupy any land over which they do not have any lawful entitlement. They may or may not use force, threats or intimidation with a view to illegally possess the land or create illegal tenancies or sell or construct unauthorized structures thereon.

This may be done by individuals, groups such as “land mafias” or companies and may be carried out by means of fake and fraudulent documentation, corruption or even muscle power. In certain cases, it is possible that someone who had entered the land with the consent of the owner – such as a tenant – may refuse to leave after expiration of the tenancy and attempts to keep wrongful possession of the land.

While there is no pan-India legislation that specifically targets land grabbing, the same is considered illegal and criminal under various provisions of the Indian Penal Code. While the exact applicable provisions will vary case to case, the following sections of the Indian Penal Code (IPC) are most commonly used in such situations.


#Section 441 (Criminal Trespass):
When someone unlawfully enters a property, or lawfully enters a property but unlawfully remains there (such as a tenant after expiration of tenancy) with the intent to commit an offence, or to intimidate, insult or annoy the person in possession of such property, it amounts to criminal trespass.

#Section 425 (Mischief):
When someone intentionally or knowingly causes destruction of a property or any change in a property that diminishes its value or utility, they are said to commit “mischief”.

#Section 420 (Cheating): This provision is applied when someone cheats and deceives you into delivering any property to someone else.

#Section 442 (House Trespass): This is a form of “criminal trespass” wherein the trespasser unlawfully enters a human dwelling, or any building used as a place of worship or as place for the custody of property.

#Section 503 (Criminal Intimidation): Any threat of injury to person, reputation or property with the intent to cause them to do something which they are not legally bound to do is a form of “criminal intimidation”.

Certain states like Karnataka and Andhra Pradesh have passed Acts which focus solely on land grabbing, and in which land grabbers are liable for imprisonment as well as fine. The state of Odisha has also formulated similar rules. Recently, the state of Gujarat passed an act with stringent punishment for land grabbers, wherein the imprisonment may very between 10 to 14 years and the fine will depend upon the Jantri value of the property. Gujarat has even appointed special courts to handle such matters. This Act also puts the burden of proof on the grabber once the basic rights of the landowner have been established at least on the face of it.

Actions to be taken if your land has been grabbed
Gather all the requisite documents showing your lawful claim over the property. However, documents such as sale agreement, power of attorney and wills alone may not suffice, and therefore, more documents must be collected to show ownership of residential property. For example, title deeds, conveyance deeds, duly paid property tax returns, khata, etc. In the case of agricultural land, such documents may include the record of rights (RoR), tenancy and cultivation, relevant extract from mutation register from tahasil office, akarbandh, etc. These documents establish your right over the land in question.

Criminal Action
Approach the Police: In states where specific land grabbing legislation is not available, you may file a police complaint on the basis of the above-mentioned IPC sections. In states with Land Grabbing Prohibition legislations, the complaint will be filed as per the provisions of that particular legislation.

Civil Action
Approach the Court: You may file a civil suit in a civil court under Section 5 of the Specific Relief Act, 1963 (SRA) in accordance with the Code of Civil Procedure, 1908 (CPC) for recovery of a specific immovable property/ land. In case you have been wrongfully dispossessed of a property then you can file a civil suit under Section 6 of SRA within six months from the date of dispossession. In addition to recovery, you can also pray for temporary and permanent injunction against the land grabber/trespasser. Permanent injunctions are granted at the final disposal of the suit while temporary injunctions operate during the pendency of the suit. If you secure the judgement in your favour, it will be followed by filing of an execution petition under Order XXI Rule 35 of CPC to get the order/decree executed. Your chances of winning such a suit are higher when you have the appropriate documentation that proves your rights on your land. You may also seek damages as compensation for all the losses you may have incurred due to the land grab.It is advisable to approach a lawyer to decide the right course of action from the available options to determine what approach would be best in your scenario.

If your land in the city of Hyderabad is grabbed, you may call 1800-599-0099 which is a number set up by the local Municipal Corporation.

The state of Uttar Pradesh has established an Anti-Land Mafia Task Force. One may register their complaint on the website: http://jansunwai.up.nic.in/ABMP.html.

Precautionary Measures to Prevent Land Grabbing
It is generally advisable to carry out the following preventive measures in order to avoid the risk of having your land grabbed.

* Keep your property documents in order
* Pay utility charges (water, electricity, etc.) and government taxes on time; keep a record of the receipts
* Register your property in accordance with state laws
* If you don’t live at your property, make sure to regularly conduct inspections; put up appropriate fences and sign- boards to ward off trespassers.


(The writer is an advocate, specializing in the domain of intellectual property rights and presently working as a Managing Associate with LexOrbis, an IP boutique firm based in New Delhi, Mumbai and Bengaluru.)

How to defend yourself against a trespasser who sues for injuries

Personal injury lawsuits are often valid and difficult to defend when the plaintiff legal counsel can establish the case with supporting documentation and identify the appropriate respondents who may have been negligent with respect to a reasonable duty of care owed to the injured plaintiff. This component of a personal injury lawsuit is often accomplished relatively easy following automobile accidents where the police have performed an investigation and listed all parties involved. Lawsuits also usually are filed after an extensive negotiation concerning the specific injuries that become items of damage recovery in the formal filing. Those negotiations consist of the legal positions of each party regarding the level of negligence and degree of responsibility for each respondent. In slip and fall personal injury cases, the dynamic is somewhat different, but automobile accidents regularly involve several parties who contributed to the accident in some manner who are also attempting to recover damages. This commonly results in very complicated cases where defendants and their insurance companies are attempting to lessen their level of fault and deflect responsibility to other involved parties. This is also why it is absolutely necessary to have an experienced personal injury lawyer defending your legal case.

Assertions of the Plaintiff are Invalid or Overstated

Invalid assertions can be stricken from the record in some instances when the plaintiff legal counsel cannot prove the claims. Some claims are filed with overstated pain-and-suffering claims as well as overly-calculated loss of future wages. The diagnosis and prognosis of medical treatment professionals can be evaluated and defended as well, many times by a second opinion from an impartial medical professional who is legally qualified to present a competing analysis. While this may not always result in a case dismissal, certain items can be eliminated and injury claims regarding the degree of injury can require closer evaluation, which normally results in a reduced amount of financial damages available.

Respondent Did Not Owe a Duty of Care to the Plaintiff

All lawsuits will include the actual legal claims of the plaintiff, and many times the original filing fails to meet the standard of establishing a reasonable duty of care by connecting the respondent to the accident that caused the injury. This is a more common defense in premise liability personal injury claims, as automobile accidents are often better supported by documentation such as police reports and ambulance records. Premises liability cases filed against a business operator may be misdirected when a property owner is the one who is actually liable. This defense depends the specifics of the lawsuit claims.

Plaintiff Was Responsible for Their Own Injuries

This defense falls into the category of comparative negligence, which each state uses in some manner. Some states use pure comparative negligence that allows any injured party in an accident injury to receive some amount of financial compensation unless they are totally at fault for the injury, such as an intentional act or they were convicted of drunk driving. Most states use modified comparative negligence law that states plaintiffs are barred from any financial recovery if their comparative negligence percentage is greater than the respondent. The bar level is usually either 50% or 51% to deny a claim. In pure contributory negligence states, any contribution to the causation of the injury will be an effective defensive strategy. In premises liability cases, the focus is on individual reasonable assumption of risk based on the actions of the plaintiff. An example of this defense would be trespassers who are injured and normally lose their claims based on no authority to occupy the property. This means that technicalities can matter greatly, depending on the state of occurrence, and the particulars of the claim are all potential reasons for a case dismissal, or at least a reduced financial liability.

Lawsuit Was Filed Late

Many personal injury claims are the result of an injury that did not appear as serious when it first occurred, but later manifested to a serious situation that required ongoing medical treatment and created a pain-and-suffering compensation situation. All states have a statute of limitations law that is assessed for each particular personal injury lawsuit. This can be an effective defense in cases that are filed at the end of the limitations time period, even when the injury was recognized at a significantly earlier time. Why the plaintiff waited until the end of the limitations time period can be an issue as well because it could indicate that the injury is not as serious as claimed. This could result in a dismissal based on being a frivolous claim.

Insurance companies are in business to turn a profit, just as any other business, and they are always willing to investigate a claim fully. It is important to understand that your insurance company may be your best friend when defending against a personal injury lawsuit. In most instances, they actually provide the legal counsel for their clients because it is in the best interest of both the client and the company to look at all avenues of defense. Insurance claims adjusters and claim defense attorneys deal with personal injury claims regularly and understand all components of a negotiation, including taking a case to a full jury trial in hopes of an acquittal by a jury that thinks the claims of the plaintiff are excessive and often erroneous. Even valid personal injury claims can result in a much better final outcome when each and every detail regarding material case facts can be addressed in court. Hiring a qualified Las Vegas or Summerlin personal injury lawyer is the best way to ensure the best possible result when defending against a personal injury case.

Legal Disclaimer

This webpage is not intended to be an advertisement or solicitation. The hiring of a lawyer is an important decision that should not be based solely upon advertisements. Material contained in our website is for general information only and does not constitute legal advice or solicitation of legal services.

Transmission of information from this site is not intended to create, and its receipt does not constitute, an attorney-client relationship between Adam S. Kutner and the user of this site. In the event that any information on this web site does not conform fully with regulations in any jurisdiction, this law firm will not accept representation based on that information.

Adam S. Kutner Personal Injury Lawyer

With more than 30 years of experience fighting for victims of personal injury in the Las Vegas valley, Attorney Adam S. Kutner knows his way around the Nevada court system and how to get clients their settlement promptly and trouble-free.

Start Your Free Consultation
No Fees Unless We Win!

How to defend yourself against a trespasser who sues for injuries

Finding yourself or your business in a situation in which you are wondering exactly how to stop a frivolous lawsuit is unfortunately becoming a common occurrence. This is especially true in states like California and in labor disputes, where one side is given a significant advantage and protections. This opens up the potential for more frivolous litigation. What…

Finding yourself or your business in a situation in which you are wondering exactly how to stop a frivolous lawsuit is unfortunately becoming a common occurrence. This is especially true in states like California and in labor disputes, where one side is given a significant advantage and protections. This opens up the potential for more frivolous litigation.

What is a Frivolous Lawsuit?

The official frivolous lawsuit meaning, according to the US Legal system is a legal claim that is filed by any entity or individual who is well aware that the lawsuit has no facts or basis to support it.
Frivolous lawsuits may also be filed to delay other legal proceedings. For example, certain real estate proceedings cannot commence if the real property at issue is involved in a lawsuit. A frivolous suit may be filed for strategic reasons as opposed to meritorious reasons.

If you’re at the receiving end of a similar situation, here’s what you need to know

Stay Calm and Don’t Panic

Before you start to panic and lose sleep over the situation, understand that you’re not alone. Even as you plan on how to stop a frivolous lawsuit, consider these examples.

  • An obese customer suing a restaurant because of the small size of the booths.
  • A client or shopper suing the store to claim compensation for a false or exaggerated injury.
  • A thief breaking into a house suing the owners because he tripped over a wire and hurt himself.
  • A convicted murderer suing his hostages because they escaped when he fell asleep.
  • A woman trying to get back at her ex-boyfriend for dumping her by accusing him falsely of violent behavior.
  • A fellow commuter threatening assault and battery because you mistakenly brushed against her in the bus.

Not only are such lawsuits very common but know that most litigious people simply threaten to take you to court without having the intention to do it. The behavior they display is vindictive and spiteful and typically intended to get back at you by causing emotional and mental anguish along with monetary loss. Whether you are facing a silly lawsuit, a clearly crazy lawsuit or a simply outrageous lawsuit without any basis in reality, it’s important to stay calm but focused.

Count on the Discretion of the Court

Attorneys, judges, and the judicial system are faced with frivolous lawsuits frequently and there are measures to deal with them quickly. In fact, if your attorney were to plead a motion to dismiss, the lawsuit could get thrown out even without being heard. Also, be aware that attorneys who represent litigious people can be sanctioned for filing such frivolous legal actions in court. While there are certainly examples of frivolous lawsuits that actually won, most of them do not end that way.
Here’s another factor: in some states, people who bring frivolous litigation on a frequent basis, are punished and added to the list of “vexatious litigators.” In many cases, filing a frivolous claim will lead to a civil fine and may also lead to a contempt order if you have an attorney who is knowledgeable in this area of law and knows what types of motions to file before the court. Attorneys who knowingly file frivolous lawsuits may also be fined, sanctioned or face suspension of their license to practice law. Abusing the legal system happens frequently but it is not treated lightly. Filing a lawsuit comes with great responsibility. Discuss all these factors with your attorney when discussing how to stop a frivolous action.

Collect All Documents and Evidence

Collect all the communication you had with the person or entity suing you such as contracts, letters, affidavits, signed statements, financial records, and hard copies of emails. Create a written account of your interactions including dates, times, and any other details you can remember. When planning your defense on how to stop a frivolous lawsuit, talk to all the potential witnesses who can testify on your behalf. If you can find professional experts who are not directly involved in the lawsuit, their testimonies can help.

Refrain from New Communication

Make it a point not to contact the suing entity directly or respond if she tries to get in touch with you. Whatever interactions you have must be through your attorney. Do not agree to any claims or give something without checking with your attorney. Work on the assumption that the litigator will try to intimidate you by lying and adding untrue facts to the situation. Also, know that bringing a lawsuit and proving the claim are two different things in court.

How to Stop a Frivolous Lawsuit? Get Expert Legal Representation!

If you’re wondering about how to stop most frivolous lawsuits, you must contact an experienced attorney who can advise you on the best course of action to take. Very often, a wise option is to settle out of court by apologizing or offering a small compensation to resolve the issue even if you were not at fault. But, if you feel that the matter can’t be settled, go ahead and work with your attorney. Remember, depending upon your case, the law may direct the prevailing party in a lawsuit to pay attorney’s fees if it is proved that he sued in bad faith. When someone is threatening you with an illegal lawsuit, remember that with the right legal representation, your rights will be protected.

Commonly Asked Questions About Frivolous Lawsuits:

  • Can you counter sue for a frivolous lawsuit?
  • Can you sue someone for wrongfully suing you?
  • What to do if someone is suing you?
  • What is a litigious person?

References:
How to Deal With Litigious People and Frivolous Lawsuits
Frivolous Lawsuit Law & Legal Definition
The Countersuit: How to Fire Back at Frivolous Lawsuits

New Jersey Self defense exists when the defendant reasonably believes that such force is immediately necessary to protect himself against the use of unlawful force by another person on the present occasion.

The defendant’s honest belief in the necessity of using force is a requirement for the justification of self defense.

New Jersey self defense requires the defendant to have a reasonable belief about three subjects:

The force defendant is using must be immediately necessary – in other words the defendant must believe that the unlawful force will be used against him at the time that he acts;

the force used against the defendant must be unlawful – this defense is not available to the aggressor;

the amount of force which the defendant uses must be necessary – this defense is unavailable if the actor is unreasonable in his belief about the amount of force necessary and if acting on this unreasonable belief the actor uses an excessive amount of force.

The defense is unavailable if the defendant’s belief about any of these three subjects is unreasonable.

In determining whether the belief is unreasonable the trier of fact – Judge or Jury – must consider the particular facts of the case.

These would include the age, size and physical condition of the parties.

Other facts to be considered are threats made or prior altercations between the parties.

The trier of the fact can also consider the reputation for violence of the other party as it was known to the defendant.

The reasonableness of a defendant’s belief is to be determined by the jury and not the defendant in light of the circumstance existing at the time of the offense.

If the defendants belief about the need to use force to protect himself is unreasonable then the defense of self defense is unavailable.

A victim’s character is admissible to prove that the victim was the aggressor, so a victim’s conviction of a violent crime may be admitted to establish that he or she was the aggressor.

Deadly force is justifiable only if the actor believes it to be necessary to protect himself against death or serious bodily injury.

There is a duty to retreat first.

New Jersey Self defense will be allowed as an excuse to a charge of unlawful possession of a firearm only in those circumstances where an individual arms himself to meet an “immediate” danger.

Use of Force For Protection Other Persons

New Jersey self defense allows for the use of force against another to protect a third person when the actor would have been justified in using force to protect himself against injury.

In order for this defense to be available the actor must reasonably believe that under the circumstances the person he seeks to protect would be justified in using such protective force, and that this intervention is necessary for the protection of that person.

The defense is available if the actor is mistaken about his belief about the facts or the need to aid the victim, but the mistake is reasonable under the circumstances as they appear to the actor.

There is no duty to retreat as in the case of use of deadly force in self defense.

The burden of disproving the claim of defense of another is on the state.

Use of Force in Defense of Premises or Personal Property

New Jersey self defense gives a person the right to use force against another to protect real property – home – but first the defendant must be in possession or control of the premises or licensed or privileged to be there.

In addition, the defendant must reasonably believe that the force is necessary to prevent or terminate what he reasonably believes to be the commission or attempted commission of a criminal trespass – unlicensed or unprivileged entry – or against a person committing a more serious offense.

Prior to using force the defendant must request the intruder to stop interfering with the property unless the request is useless or dangerous to himself or another to make the request or if substantial harm would be done to the property before the request can effectively be made.

A trespasser cannot be expelled by the use of force if the defendant knows that the exclusion will expose him to a substantial danger of serious bodily harm.

Deadly force may be used to repel a person attempting or actually committing arson, burglary, robbery, or other criminal theft or property destruction.

However, either of two sets of circumstances must be present before deadly force can be used for the protection of premises.

First, the occupant reasonably believes that the person against whom it is employed is using or threatening to use deadly force in the occupant’s presence.

Or second, a person reasonably believes he could terminate or prevent the commission of a crime but if he used less than deadly force he would expose himself or another to a substantial danger of bodily harm.

Same standards apply to protecting personal property except there is never a justification to use deadly force in defense of personal property – no justification for shooting at thief attempting to steal one’s automobile.

Related Articles

Property owners have legal rights to control what happens on their property, including who enters or stays, giving them some rights to remove trespassers. The legal definition and severity of each violation of those rights is sometimes unclear, and it depends on the situation. Trespassing, intentional trespassing and trespassing with criminal intent are all different scenarios with different legal consequences. To ensure the best outcome, understand the relevant terminology, property owners’ rights against trespassers, and how to respond when someone does trespass.

What Defines Trespassing?

Cornell Law School reports that the legal definition of trespassing describes situations in which an area has clearly defined boundaries, and a person intentionally enters or remains within those boundaries, including introducing physical items into the area without the permission of the owner(s). There are two conditions necessary to qualify as trespassing.

Defining a property boundary: “Clearly defined boundaries” include fences, walls and doors or even sidewalks or natural landmarks such as a river or treeline. Basically, if you can point out a visible line where ownership of the property changes, it is a clearly defined boundary.

Communicating lack of permit: To sufficiently communicate your denial of permit you must communicate, or have proof of a reasonable effort to communicate, that fact to anyone who might trespass. This is usually done by posting clearly visible “No Trespassing” signs at regular intervals along the property’s boundaries. Implied consent is when the landowner has no posted denial of permit, entering/crossing the property is an established custom, or immediate action is necessary to save a life or prevent a serious injury.

Different Categories of Trespassing

Legal Match reports that intentional trespassing occurs when a person is aware of both the boundary and the lack of permission to enter, but crosses it anyway. Throwing rocks or litter onto a property intentionally is also counted as trespassing, but loud noise or smoke is not, though it could be a nuisance. Another form of intentional trespassing is if a person is allowed to be on a property for a limited time and overstays that allotted time. This is a civil wrong, and usually a misdemeanor.

Unintentional trespassing occurs when a person is unaware of having crossed a boundary, or doesn’t realize that entrance is not permitted. This is not an offense in which the trespasser will be charged, so long as they promptly leave the property when asked.

Criminal trespassing is intentional trespassing with intent to commit an offense or intimidate, harm or insult anyone permitted to be on the property. Punishment can include imprisonment or fines, although the severity of punishment differs from region to region.

Removing Trespassers Legally

The best way to keep trespassers off your property is to establish clear boundaries and make an effort to create physical boundaries to prevent trespassing. Post clearly visible “no trespassing” signs or notices at entrances or at regular intervals along your boundaries. Indicate intention to litigate to the fullest extent allowable.

Despite the frustration of the situation, you are not allowed to physically remove trespassers. You must first give them notice, then call the police if they fail to leave. That notice can be in verbal or written form, so the best way to keep trespassers off your property is to post clearly visible “no trespassing” signs where any potential trespassers will see them.

If someone is trespassing on your property, you cannot legally detain the person until police arrive if he attempts to leave of his own accord. If the trespasser has caused damage or committed other offenses, be certain to document them, as well as to record an image, video or at least a description for later identification and persecution. That said, if a trespasser threatens you or others who are on your property with permission, or threatens to damage your property, you are allowed to take appropriate action. Familiarize yourself with your region’s laws to avoid facing legal action from the trespasser.

Trespassing is the legal term that refers to the act of entering onto another person’s property without express consent or permission. A criminal trespassing charge will often only apply if there is intent, i.e., knowledge that the property is private before entering. You can also be charged with trespassing on public property if it is a restricted area.

Trespassing a charge that can be associated with other criminal offenses, like harassment, stalking, or violation of a restraining order in domestic cases, or burglary in theft cases. It can also be applied to electronic trespassing or hacking/computer crime.

Trespassing laws are also applied in cases of disorderly conduct, loitering, and situations where homeless people are being harassed.

As you can see, these broadly applied statutes require legal experience to unpack and determine what is really going on in any particular criminal trespassing case.

Every state will have different laws and statutes pertaining to trespassing, but we will provide a general overview of the laws and penalties associated with those who are accused of trespassing on another’s property. You will find the best advice on how to address your specific situation by discussing it with an experienced criminal defense attorney in your state. They will be able to give you detailed, one-on-one advice about your best course of action to take care of the charges placed against you.

The reason that you trespassed is important to the legal process in this case. If you trespassed with ‘intent,’ i.e., you knew that you were entering private property without permission; the penalties will be more severe. If you just wandered onto the property without knowing that you were on someone else’s land, your case may be dropped.

For you to understand that you were trespassing on private property, the land would have to have a fence or a ‘no trespassing’ sign posted. Without proper notification, you would have to actually damage the property to be charged with trespassing. Knowledge of the nature of the property is almost always the most important indicator in this type of case.

Similarly, trespassing on public property can be charged if you walk into an area restricted for pedestrians other unauthorized use, such as walking through a tunnel or across a public bridge that has been marked for no pedestrians.

Trespassing on restricted government property or sensitive security areas

If the state or the Feds are concerned about what you were doing in a sensitive location, they may charge you with trespassing as a pretext to investigate your behavior further.

If they have any reason to suspect that your action could be a public safety threat, you can expect a lot of scrutiny by the authorities, fair or not. Threats and fear of terrorism can make even taking photos of bridges or tunnels, electrical power stations, or wandering into protected areas with a public water supply a serious issue.

In addition, if you are there to protest, the police may charge you with trespassing to get you off the property and discourage further actions by others.

Hunting

If you are a hunter, you are not permitted to trespass on another’s property. However, some states will treat the situation differently if you were hunting when you trespassed on the property. Some states allow hunters to enter property that is not labeled with a fence, sign, or some other marker, and others may have a legal provision that allows hunters to trespass to save a wounded animal or hunting dog.

Trespass by Animals

If your livestock are found off of your property, you may be liable for damages that they cause. Most states have adopted laws that only require livestock owners to pay for damages made within a fenced in area.

Technology Trespassing

With the advent of the Internet, many different methods for trespassing into someone’s private life online have surfaced. This type of crime may also be punishable by law since the unlawful use of software or viruses to extract information is prohibited. Electronic trespassing laws are expanding into criminal statutes nationwide.

Penalties for Trespassing

Simple trespass is the act of entering property unlawfully without the intent to harm or damage individuals or the property. The penalty for this type of trespassing is usually a summons, and this type of sanction does not appear on your court record.

However, you can be arrested for misdemeanor trespassing, usually in cases where the police believe you are either being willfully disruptive, or trying to gain access to sensitive areas.

First Degree Trespassing is the act of trespassing with intent, knowing that he or she does not have permission to enter the property. Penalties for this crime usually will not exceed one year in jail and a fine.

Second Degree Trespassing is another form of trespassing that is accidental, and the fines are significantly less. If you are charged with second-degree trespassing, you will typically be fined $1,000 or be sentenced to 6 months in jail.

How to defend yourself against a trespasser who sues for injuriesDefending Yourself Against a Trespassing Charge

Regardless of whether you intentionally entered the property or you are being falsely accused of trespassing with intent, an attorney can help you understand the best actions that you can take to help reduce your sentence. Since the laws are complex, talking to a local defense attorney who knows how trespassing laws are prosecuted and applied in your state is the only way to know where you stand.

And because trespassing is a fairly trivial charge that is often not pursued, the fact that you were charged with a crime often means there is more going on in the case than simply wandering onto property where you are not allowed.

A trespassing arrest or criminal citation is much more likely to occur because:

  • You were being disruptive or engaged in a political protest
  • You were deliberately violation trespassing laws to be disruptive
  • You trespassed onto a sensitive security area, either on purpose or accidentally

In all of these cases, there is more to the story than a very minor accidental offense. For these reasons, you need a criminal defense attorney to advocate for you, and protect your rights against an aggressive prosecution, whatever the situation.

Please call us today to arrange a free consultation with a local defense lawyer today!

How to defend yourself against a trespasser who sues for injuries

Can you think of anything more infuriating than being sued by someone trespassing on your property? Maybe you’ve even heard those aggravating tales of burglars suing for personal injury after they were injured breaking into someone’s store or home. Though these lawsuits seem petty and frivolous, some trespassers do have legitimate claims. And, in these cases, the burglars and trespassers don’t always lose. There are several circumstances in which burglars and trespassers can sue you for personal injury and win.

If the idea of a burglar suing you after slipping on a puddle in your kitchen makes you angry, you’re not alone. Though, you are responsible for keeping your home safe for invitees, licensees, and guests, you are not responsible for keeping your home safe for trespassers. So if a burglar slips on a puddle, or trips over an object on the floor, you are not likely to be found responsible for their injuries.

If you notice footprints around your home or other signs of attempted break-ins, it may be tempting to set up traps to catch the trespasser. However, just because you aren’t responsible for protecting trespassers, that doesn’t mean you can rig your home like Kevin McCallister from Home Alone . Setting up snares can expose you to liabilities beyond your wildest imagination: do not set up traps in hopes of doling out justice. Otherwise, you may find yourself as the defendant in a criminal case.

You may also find yourself on the wrong side of a court case when the trespasser was a child. This typically occurs when your property contains an attractive nuisance. An attractive nuisance is defined by Cornell Law as, “a hazardous object or condition on the land that is likely to attract children who are unable to appreciate the risk posed by the object or condition.” An attractive nuisance can be slides, swing sets, a pool, and animals — even trampolines can be an attractive nuisance. If an attractive nuisance causes a child injury on your property, you may be liable for their injuries even if they were trespassing.

A lot of people mistakenly believe that they are allowed to use deadly force whenever a trespasser enters their home. However, this is not necessarily the case; Utah’s laws surrounding burglars and deadly force are nebulous at best. Though you are able to use deadly force when your life is threatened (self-defense), you are not legally permitted to use deadly force to protect your personal property. This means you cannot shoot a burglar in order to protect your computer or television.

When home invasions result in injury, it’s most likely the victims who are injured. If you were injured when someone decided to break into your home, Moxie Law Group is here for you . Facing the consequences of someone else’s criminal behavior is an incredibly frustrating and unfair experience. This is especially true when another person’s illegal activities have caused you physical and psychological damage. At Moxie Law Group, we’re dedicated to protecting the injured. If you have been injured during a home invasion, give us a call to find out how we can help you get the compensation you deserve.

Florida Squatter’s Rights

Related Articles

  • Florida Squatter’s Rights
  • How to Sue for Trespass
  • Criminal Trespassing Laws in Arkansas
  • Penalties for Trespassing in Texas

Trespassing is a broad legal term that can refer to a variety of wrongful or unlawful acts. Typically, it is defined as knowingly and intentionally entering the property of another person without the owner’s permission. More broadly, it can refer to a number of unlawful acts that are committed on another person’s body or that person’s property. Committing trespass can result in both criminal and _civil legal liabilit_y.

Specific laws and penalties for violating those laws vary by jurisdiction, but in general, trespassing is a misdemeanor offense. In some cases, however, trespassing can become a felony offense if the circumstances warrant, such as when the trespasser is armed with a weapon.

Making a Report to the Police

To ensure that another person is properly charged for criminal trespassing, the property owner will need to identify and describe the person to local law enforcement. Typically, this is either the sheriff’s office or the local police department for the county or municipality in which the property is located. The owner should also describe the individual’s basic physical appearance, including approximate height and weight, apparent gender, race and clothing.

Ideally, the property owner should arrange to meet the police officer or sheriff’s deputy at the physical location of the trespass. If the person trespassing has left the premises, the owner can walk the property and describe the trespass to the law enforcement official. However, it is important to remember that some trespassers may harbor violent intentions, and people making trespass reports should never put themselves in additional danger by waiting outside or attempting to confront the trespasser themselves.

Describe the circumstances, such as whether the individual was asked to leave the area or establishment and did not comply. If signage is posted warning against trespassing, this should also be called to the officer’s attention. It’s important to explicitly state to the police officer or sheriff’s deputy that you would like to press or file criminal trespass charges.

Obtaining Information About the Case

As the victim in the case, the property owner will receive a copy of a no-trespass citation or order. You are also entitled to information about the disposal of the case, such as whether the trespasser enters a plea, pays a fine, or requests a trial.

Criminal Penalties for Trespass

In most cases, trespassers will not be sentenced to any substantial imprisonment terms. Typically, penalties for misdemeanor trespass include a few days to a few months in the local jail. In some cases, where the defendant has been arrested and placed in the local detention center pending trial, the court may impose a sentence of “time served.” This means that the judge is crediting the defendant with the number of days spent in detention as part of the eventual trespass penalty.

Courts will also often impose a fine either in lieu of or in addition to any jail sentence. Fines are usually established by state criminal statutes, and they may be as little as a few hundred dollars or as steep as several thousand dollars. Judges typically are granted wide discretion in imposing criminal fines for trespass and other crimes. Defendants may also be required to pay court costs of $100 or more.

Bringing a Civil Lawsuit Against Trespassers

In addition to seeking criminal charges, a property owner may also file a civil action against an individual who trespasses on private property. Unauthorized entry onto private property interferes with the owner’s exclusive right to enjoy their property.

Civil lawsuits for trespass can compensate the property owner for any actual damage to the property as well as potential damages for the trespass itself. To prevail on this type of tort action, a plaintiff must prove the following:

  1. The defendant had a legal obligation not to enter the property of the plaintiff;
  2. The defendant knowingly and intentionally came on the plaintiff’s property despite that obligation;
  3. As a result, damage was done to the property or the plaintiff.

Defending Property Against Trespassers

Often, when trespasses recur frequently or damage is inflicted on the property in question, property owners are tempted to defend their property in some fashion. Doing so can, in some jurisdictions, expose the homeowner to legal liability to the trespasser for any resulting injuries.

Owners are not obligated to protect trespassers, as they are unauthorized “guests” on the property who are present on the property without permission to be there. However, in some circumstances, the owner may be liable if the trespasser is injured on the property.

Typically, an injured trespasser must prove four elements before holding a property owner liable for injuries sustained during a trespass:

  1. The property owner created or maintained a dangerous condition on the property;
  2. It was foreseeable that the condition would likely cause serious physical injury or death;
  3. The owner had reason to believe that people trespassing on the property would not learn of the condition in time to avoid injury; and
  4. The property owner did not take reasonable precautions or actions to warn others about that condition and the dangers inherent in it.

If the trespasser adequately establishes these four facts, the homeowner may be held liable for the individual’s damages, including the costs of medical care.

By John Barnes | November 15, 2018

Most people know that they have the right to defend themselves from harm. However, the law does not allow you to justify violence by claiming self-defense in any given situation. It is important to understand the basics of self-defense under Tennessee law, both to prevent criminal charges and to defend against them.

The following is a brief overview regarding how Tennessee treats self-defense. To discuss how the law may apply to a specific situation, please contact Barnes Law directly to consult with an experienced Knoxville criminal defense attorney.

How a Self-Defense Claim Works

Claiming self-defense means that you admit that you acted in violence toward another person, but you claim that you had legal justification for the violence. This is a common claim when someone is accused of assault or murder, and they allege that the harm was necessary to protect themselves from violence. There are some requirements for when you can lawfully claim self-defense:

  • You were not engaging in illegal activities at the time
  • You had the right to be in that location at that time
  • You had a real honest belief that the threat of bodily harm was imminent and that your actions were necessary to protect you from the imminent harm
  • Another reasonable person would have also feared imminent harm and believed the actions were necessary under the same circumstances

It is important to emphasize that you must prove you feared imminent harm, such as someone coming at you aggressively, swinging a punch, or driving toward you in their car as if to hit you. Self-defense would not be justified if someone threatened later violence against you. For example, if a person at a bar said they were going to fight you outside in 20 minutes, you would not be justified in using violence right then to prevent later harm.

In most cases, the other person must be the initial aggressor in the situation. If you push someone and start a fight and they push you back, you cannot lawfully continue to use violence to protect yourself from them. One exception to this requirement is if the other person substantially escalates the violence. If you push someone and then they pull out a gun, you can then protect yourself from deadly harm. Additionally, you may be able to claim self-defense if you start a fight, try to retreat from the fight, and the other person continues to act violently and pose an imminent threat of harm. If the other person is the initial aggressor, however, there is no duty to retreat before you act in self-defense in Tennessee like there is in some other states, due to the “Stand Your Ground” law.

Using Deadly Force in Self-Defense

In some cases, an act of self-defense may cause or threaten death to another person. Deadly force is only justified to protect against serious bodily harm or death. For instance, if someone swings a punch at you, the law does not allow you to shoot or stab them to protect yourself. The deadly force must be proportional to the harm feared.

Tennessee does have a law called the “Castle Doctrine,” which allows people to use deadly force under certain circumstances to protect themselves in certain locations. The Castle Doctrine is based on the idea that your home is your castle and you should be able to protect yourself in your home and similar location. The Castle Doctrine creates a legal presumption that self-defense may be justified if someone forcibly enters the following locations:

  • A home that you own, lease, or in which you are an invited guest
  • A business establishment that you own or in which you work as an employee or an agent of the owner to protect the premises
  • A building or dwelling of any kind with a roof over it that is intended for use by people, including mobile homes and tents
  • Any type of motorized vehicle designed for people to use on public roads to transport people or items

In order for the Castle Doctrine to apply, you must be lawfully in the location and you must know or reasonably believe that the other person unlawfully entered. The law does not permit deadly force in the following situations:

  • The victim of the deadly force had the right to enter the home or location
  • The victim of the deadly force was trying to remove a child or person over which they have legal custody or guardianship
  • The person using deadly force was engaging in unlawful activity or using the building to conduct unlawful acts
  • The victim of the deadly force was a law enforcement officer entering the building or operating a roadblock or traffic stop as part of their duties as an officer, and the person using force had reason to believe the victim was an officer

If someone has the right to enter a home or building, the Castle Doctrine does not protect you if you use deadly force against them. You also cannot provoke the person into entering the home of using force. Deadly force is never warranted to protect items of personal property or to get a trespasser off a property if they are not trying to enter the building or its dire

Claiming Self-Defense

A successful self-defense claim requires careful strategizing and presentation of evidence. If police arrest you, it may be tempting to tell them you acted in self-defense right then and there. However, if you cannot later prove self-defense, your claim may be used as an admission of a violent act. Instead, always call a criminal defense lawyer before answering any questions or making any claims to police or prosecutors.

Find Out How Our Knoxville Criminal Defense Lawyer Can Help You

At Barnes Law, we regularly represent clients facing violent criminal charges, identifying all possible defenses such as self-defense claims. After an arrest, it is always wise to exercise your right to an attorney immediately and contact our office for assistance. We can also help if you already face criminal charges and will work to reach the most favorable outcome possible.

Criminal Law Blog by The Law Office of Greg Tsioros

How to defend yourself against a trespasser who sues for injuries

What to Do If You’ve Been Falsely Accused of Elder Abuse

    October 11, 2017

Other than children, elderly individuals are often the most vulnerable in our society. Ninety percent of the time, family members—not hired professionals—are reported for elder abuse.

The most common types of elder abuse include: 1) physical abuse, 2) undue influence, 3) verbal-emotional abuse, 3) psychological-nonverbal abuse, 4) neglect, 5) fraud, 6) scams, 7) fiduciary abuse, 8) theft and conversion.

Being falsely accused of elder abuse is a shocking experience. If you or someone you love has been charged with elder abuse in Texas, you need an experienced criminal defense attorney as soon as possible.

Types of Elder Abuse

There are many different types of elder abuse. Among the most common types include:

  • Physical abuse involves the (non-accidental) use of force that results in an impairment, physical pain, or bodily injury to an elder. Physical abuse includes confinement, hitting/shoving, shaking, inappropriate drugs, and restraints used on a senior citizen. A caretaker entrusted with providing physical care to an elder may face a charge of physical abuse if he or she is injured. The caretaker may face enhanced criminal charges when an alleged crime involves an elder. If convicted, the penalties may be severe. Because an older person is more susceptible to physical injury, pain, or impairment, it’s possible that the accused did nothing wrong.
  • Undue influence (financial abuse) is often a primary element in a financial abuse case involving an elder. The prosecutor must prove that the accused coerced, tricked, or manipulated the older person, resulting in his or her loss of money or property to the perpetrator. This element may also be related to fiduciary or power of attorney abuse. For instance, the trustee of a senior individual’s estate is sued for allegedly committing financial misdeeds. He or she is accused of embezzling from the elder’s trust. In this example, the defendant may face civil or criminal charges if the accuser takes the case to the state attorney in Texas.
  • Verbal-emotional abuse involves gaining control of the elder through intimidation, ridicule, or humiliation of the elder. This is another example of “taking advantage of the older person’s weaker mental state to gain control of him or her. Consistently blaming the elder, or using him or her as a scapegoat, may be used by a prosecutor to prove that verbal-emotional abuse has occurred.
  • Nonverbal-psychological abuse may include menacing or terrorizing, isolating, or ignoring him or her.
  • Neglect involves the failure of a caretaker to fulfill his or her obligation to an elder. Neglect is cited is more than 50 percent of elder abuse cases in Texas. The prosecutor may allege passive (unintentional) or active neglect.
  • Fraud involves misuse of a senior’s financial accounts, such as bank or credit card accounts. The defendant may be accused of stealing the elder’s household goods, cash, or income checks, forging his or her signature, or engaging in identity theft.
  • Scams, such as phony charities, “prizes,” or investment fraud, that prompt the elder to lose money or property.
  • Fiduciary abuse (power of attorney, breach of trust) occurs when a person responsible for management of the elder’s assets uses his or her fiduciary power to access money or property in an illegal or unethical manner. Fiduciary abuse may be committed by a family member, financial adviser, or power of attorney.
  • Theft by conversion involves another person’s lawful possession of the elder’s funds or property but converts this property into money for his or her personal use, without the elder’s permission.

If you are falsely accused of abusing an elder, do your best to stay calm. Sometimes, your attempts to assistant a senior family member, friend, or client can go awry. Your efforts to help may be misunderstood. Realize that many good people face charges of elder abuse.

That said, don’t assume that the truth is enough to defend yourself against a malicious charge of elder abuse. You need a strong legal defense.

Never speak inappropriately about the accuser to others. Don’t say that he or she is crazy or demented. Reserve any comments about your case for a conversation with your defense lawyer.

How to Clear Your Name When Charged with Elder Abuse

If you have been charged with elder abuse, you want to clear your name. If you’re facing a criminal elder abuse charge, you need an experienced criminal defense attorney:

  • For a case involving finances, you need a criminal defense attorney with a network of experts, such as forensic accountants.
  • For an elder abuse case alleging injury, you need a detail-oriented defense attorney who will thoroughly review medical records.
  • Authorities might have failed to properly gather evidence—a knowledgeable defense attorney will argue that the evidence should be deemed inadmissible.

If you’re not guilty, an experienced defense attorney will do everything possible to exonerate you or have the charges dropped.

When a prosecutor recognizes that the facts of the case aren’t strong enough to obtain a conviction, he or she may agree not to pursue additional actions against you.
Look for a criminal defense attorney with experience in Texas elder law. He will do everything possible to defend your legal rights and help you survive the experience with your reputation intact.

If your accuser has previously made false accusations or has a history of mental illness, the prosecutor may wish to negotiate a plea.

How to Protect Yourself from Elder Abuse in Texas

If you’re a caregiver of a senior individual, it’s very important to understand your legal obligations to him or her and know the Texas laws surround it:

  • Speak with an attorney if you provide physical oversight or caretaking of an elder. Discuss your legal responsibilities to him or her. Even if the idea of ever being charged with elder abuse seems unlikely, ask questions about how to protect yourself from elder abuse.
  • Consult with an attorney if your elder names you trustee of an estate or provides you with fiduciary responsibility.

Why Speaking to an Elder Abuse Attorney Can Help

False charges of elder abuse are rising throughout the United States. A caregiver, financial adviser, family member, friend, conservator, or trustee can be accused of elder abuse. It’s important to mount a vigorous defense against any elder abuse charge. You can protect yourself if an elder, perceived as a vulnerable individual, has accused you of any type of elder abuse.

Taking a legally proactive stance can help you prevent more heartache in the future. The Law Office of Greg Tsioros will take action to protect you against false charges of elder abuse—whether you’re a friend, family member, fiduciary, trustee, or adviser. Contact us to schedule an initial case evaluation at 832-752-5972.

What Are Some Effects of Slander?

Related Articles

  • What Are Some Effects of Slander?
  • Laws for Suing Someone for Defamation of Character
  • How to Sue Someone for Slander
  • Two Types of Defamation

You can’t stop people from filing police reports, even if they are false. It’s up to the police to investigate the complaint and take the appropriate action. If someone lied out of hand, then the police may charge the person with obstructing a police investigation but again, this is the police’s call, not yours. The only option you have is suing someone for defamation of character if the statements made against you were completely untrue but were not expressed as an opinion.

Defamation Explained

If someone made untrue statements about you to the police and these statements caused you material harm, then you may be able to sue for defamation of character. Defamation is a catch-all term covering two different types of lawsuits – “libel” for written defamation and “slander” for spoken defamation. Filing a false police report could be either, or both, depending how the accusation was made. Defamation is not a crime, and you can’t press charges for it. Rather, you would sue the person who made the untrue statements in a civil court.

Police Reports May be Privileged

Generally, false police reports are protected from defamation claims because the law deems them to be privileged to a certain degree. This means the person cannot be held liable for the statements he made even if they could be considered defamatory. The reasoning here is that citizens should be encouraged to report potential criminals to the police without the threat of legal action if they get the facts wrong. In most states, the privilege applies as long as the person filed the report in good faith. If she did it just to annoy or harass you, then you may be able to argue that privilege does not apply. The law is complicated, so speak to a lawyer about your options.

Proving Material Harm

One of the tests for defamation is material or “cognizable” harm. This means you must suffer substantial damage that is generally measurable in terms of dollars. For example, if you were fired from your job as a direct result of someone’s false accusations against you, that would be a cognizable harm. Defamation law does not recognize emotional injury in most cases. It’s unlikely that you could file a defamation claim if all you suffered was temporary anxiety or the inconvenience of having the police question you.

Proving the Untrue Statements

In a civil defamation case, the burden is on you to prove that the accusations made against you were false. Truth is an absolute defense to defamation, so if there are facts to back up the person’s statement, you are not entitled to compensation – it’s not enough to show that the person was wrong about some of the details. You also can’t sue someone for defamation for merely expressing an opinion. You must have clear and convincing evidence that what was said about you was categorically untrue, such as documents, emails, timelines and witness testimony.

You can’t press charges for false accusations, but you may be able to sue the person who made the untrue statements in civil court and obtain a monetary award against him.

The biggest concern most people have after getting involved in an accident is whether or not their insurance will cover the damage to their vehicle. After this concern, people often worry about the other driver, particularly if they are going to file a personal injury claim against them. Though personal injury lawsuits don’t happen in all car accident cases, they do occur, which means our Albany readers may need to defend themselves against one down the road.

The first thing to keep in mind when facing a personal injury lawsuit is that, just like the plaintiff who is filing a claim against you, you too have the right to legal representation. Because you likely only have a vague understanding of the law, it’s highly advised that you seek the help of a skilled attorney who has experience defending clients against injury claims, like the attorneys here at O’Connor, O’Connor, Bresee & First, P.C.

After obtaining a lawyer, you’ll then want to sit down with them and discuss the facts of your case – what your role in the accident was, how you were driving, were you even at fault in the crash. With your side of the story in place, your attorney can begin putting together a defense strategy to refute the plaintiff’s case – perhaps even getting their claim dismissed in the process.

Aside from presenting a proper defense, there are other things that can cause a personal injury lawsuit to be dismissed. One thing is New York’s statute of limitations, which only gives plaintiff’s three years after an accident to file a claim. After that time, they lose their ability to seek compensation.

Another thing can cause a lawsuit to get dismissed is a determination from a judge stating that the plaintiff does not have grounds for compensation. Getting these types of determinations can be a challenge, though, on your own, which is why talking to and obtaining a lawyer is important when facing a personal injury lawsuit.

Sources: The New York City Bar, “Statutes of Limitation,” Accessed Nov. 13, 2015

Categories

  • Bankruptcy (28)
  • Blog (19)
  • Car Accident Defense (30)
  • Car Accidents (29)
  • Fatal Motor Vehicle Accidents (11)
  • Insurance Defense (26)
  • Insurance Law (20)
  • Medical Malpractice (22)
  • Medical Malpractice Defense (48)
  • Motorcycle Accidents (4)
  • Nursing Home Neglect (8)
  • Premises Liability (40)
  • SUV Accidents (1)
  • Truck Accident Defense (28)
  • Truck Accidents (15)
  • Workers’ Compensation (5)

Archives

  • February 2022 (1)
  • October 2021 (1)
  • August 2021 (2)
  • April 2021 (1)
  • January 2021 (1)
  • September 2020 (1)
  • July 2020 (1)
  • April 2020 (1)
  • January 2020 (1)
  • October 2019 (1)
  • July 2019 (1)
  • April 2019 (1)
  • January 2019 (1)
  • October 2018 (1)
  • September 2018 (1)
  • August 2018 (4)
  • July 2018 (7)
  • June 2018 (4)
  • May 2018 (6)
  • April 2018 (5)
  • March 2018 (5)
  • February 2018 (6)
  • January 2018 (5)
  • December 2017 (6)
  • November 2017 (5)
  • October 2017 (6)
  • September 2017 (5)
  • August 2017 (6)
  • July 2017 (5)
  • June 2017 (6)
  • May 2017 (5)
  • April 2017 (5)
  • March 2017 (5)
  • February 2017 (5)
  • January 2017 (5)
  • December 2016 (5)
  • November 2016 (6)
  • October 2016 (5)
  • September 2016 (4)
  • August 2016 (7)
  • July 2016 (5)
  • June 2016 (7)
  • May 2016 (4)
  • April 2016 (6)
  • March 2016 (6)
  • February 2016 (5)
  • January 2016 (4)
  • December 2015 (5)
  • November 2015 (4)
  • October 2015 (5)
  • July 2015 (3)
  • June 2015 (4)
  • May 2015 (4)
  • April 2015 (5)
  • March 2015 (4)
  • February 2015 (4)
  • January 2015 (4)
  • December 2014 (5)
  • November 2014 (5)
  • October 2014 (4)
  • September 2014 (3)
  • August 2014 (4)
  • July 2014 (5)
  • June 2014 (4)
  • May 2014 (5)
  • April 2014 (4)
  • March 2014 (5)
  • February 2014 (4)
  • January 2014 (5)
  • December 2013 (4)
  • November 2013 (5)
  • October 2013 (5)
  • September 2013 (2)
  • August 2013 (2)
  • July 2013 (1)
  • April 2013 (2)
  • March 2013 (4)
  • February 2013 (4)
  • January 2013 (5)
  • December 2012 (4)
  • November 2012 (5)
  • October 2012 (4)
  • September 2012 (4)

Recent Posts

  • Who files for bankruptcy in the U.S.?
  • Which debts can I discharge with Chapter 7 bankruptcy?
  • Is Chapter 7 right for everyone?
  • Common myths about bankruptcy
  • What property is exempt from creditors during bankruptcy?

How to defend yourself against a trespasser who sues for injuries

Speak To An Experienced Attorney.

High-Quality Representation At An Affordable Price. Contact Us Today.

Learn more about how we can help you by calling the firm at 877-886-4029 .

How to defend yourself against a trespasser who sues for injuries

Being sued is already bad in and of itself. But to make matters worse, the specifics of the complaint are outright lies with no legal merit. These are called frivolous lawsuits — aimed at hurting your reputation and causing people to lose trust in you and your business . So what do you do when you have been sued with a frivolous lawsuit?

In this article, we will walk you through the definitions of frivolous lawsuits, their most common examples, and what you can do to counter sue for a frivolous lawsuit.

What is a Frivolous Lawsuit?

Frivolous lawsuits are cases with no legal merit . These involve claims that are filed despite lacking quality legal arguments or evidence. Some examples of frivolous lawsuits are:

  • A person who you bumped at the bus who wasn’t actually injured
  • A lawsuit against an Uber driver by a passenger who was simply irked at the driver’s choice of music
  • Your neighbor suing you for trespassing because your dog walked into their pathway

Usually, the plaintiff who filed the lawsuit knows that they do not have a chance of winning the case. In fact, frivolous lawsuits are often used as a bargaining chip in negotiations. More purposes of frivolous lawsuits include:

  • Harassing the defendant and forcing him/her to spend time, energy, and resources to appeal for the case to be dismissed
  • Tarnishing the defendant’s reputation
  • Generating media coverage i.e. advocacy groups wishing to bring buzz to an issue

Legal Grounds for Counter Suing for Frivolous Lawsuits

When faced with a frivolous lawsuit, your first reaction probably is to look into suing for defamation. However, you cannot counter sue someone for defamation when it is based on false statements. Nonetheless, you still have other options as there are legal grounds for counter suing for frivolous lawsuits, such as:

Legal Ground What It Is
Rule 11 of the Federal Rules of Civil Procedure This requires lawyers to investigate if the lawsuit has a factual basis and prevents them from serving a pleading that’s only intended to harass the defendant.
Rule 3.3: Candor Toward the Tribunal This requires lawyers to correct any errors or misstatements in their pleadings.
The Lanham Act In “exceptional cases”, the court may award damages to the winning party; in this case “exceptional cases” include frivolous litigations.
Malicious prosecution and abuse of process This holds the plaintiff who files a frivolous lawsuit liable in case the defendant can prove that the plaintiff filed the lawsuit out of malice.

How to Deal with a Frivolous Lawsuit?

When faced with a frivolous lawsuit, here are some ways to deal with it:

  1. File a motion to dismiss immediately – You may want your lawyer to reach out to the plaintiff’s attorney and try to settle for a dismissal. However, if that is unsuccessful, you may proceed to file a motion to dismiss.
  2. File a counterclaim – If you are able to have the frivolous lawsuit dismissed, you may file a claim for abuse of process or a different civil claim in regards to the frivolous lawsuit. However, in some states, you may be required to file a counterclaim instead.
  3. Pursue a declaration of “vexatious litigant” – This applies to businesses that have been sued by the same plaintiff numerous times with frivolous claims. A vexatious litigant declaration will require the plaintiff to get a judge’s approval before they can file any more lawsuits. The state courts may also publish their name in the list of vexatious individuals.

How to Counter Sue with DoNotPay?

In theory, filing a countersuit can be straightforward. However, most of the time it requires you to go through a lot of bureaucracy, court forms, and demand letters. DoNotPay helps make the suing process faster and easier . All you have to do is:

  1. Log in to DoNotPay and select the Sue Now product
  2. Quantify your damages in monetary terms
  3. Select whether you want a demand letter or court filing forms
  4. Describe the reason for the lawsuit and submit any applicable evidence

That’s it! DoNotPay will then generate a demand letter or court filing forms for you!

DoNotPay is Your Personal Lawyer

How to defend yourself against a trespasser who sues for injuries

Thousands of users have used DoNotPay to small claims suits against individuals and big companies, such as

  • Verizon
  • ATT
  • Insurance companies
  • Airlines
  • And so much more!

How to identify female and male marijuana plants

How to identify female and male marijuana plants

How to identify female and male marijuana plants

The cannabis plant isn’t unisex. Throughout most of its history, cannabis naturally evolved via sexual reproduction. It’s only in recent years that “sterile” techniques like cloning and tissue propagation have become industry standards.

The reasons mainstream cultivators don’t pollinate cannabis are simple: males don’t produce big buds, and pollinated female plants focus their energy on producing seeds instead of quality buds. Only unpollinated female plants will reward growers with the resinous buds tokers enjoy. Thankfully, there are many simple techniques growers could use to spot pesky males before their pollen sacs burst.

How to tell if a marijuana plant is male or female

There’s only one foolproof method to properly determine the sex of your cannabis plant: examine the nodes. At these junctures between the main stem and branches, you should see early signs of a male or female plant.

Male plants will grow ball-shaped pollen sacs, but females will have wispy white hairs. These thin hairs are called “pistils,” and they’re designed to catch pollen from male plants. Some plants will develop both pollen-sacs and pistils — these are hermaphrodites and must be treated as males (more on that later).

Until you see the bright white pistils break through, it can be tricky to verify you’ve got a girl in your garden. However, male plants tend to “show their sex” well before females. So, if you notice these protrusions early in the vegetative stage, it’s more likely you have a male plant.

It’s also worth mentioning that pollen sacs look similar to aces in a standard deck of cards. Female calyxes, however, typically have a narrower tip where the pistil will emerge.

As a side note: please don’t be alarmed when you see these pistils change color. In fact, you should be worried if your pistils don’t turn from white to amber. Pistils on all healthy cannabis plants will gradually darken as they mature.

When can you tell the sex of a marijuana plant?

There’s no set time when cannabis plants express male or female traits. However, you’ll probably notice the first signs of your plant’s sex just before flowering (about six weeks).

According to most cultivators, male plants develop quicker than female plants. Indeed, it’s not unheard of for pollen sacs to emerge within two to three weeks of vegetation.

If you’re unsure what your plant’s gender is in the vegetative stage, please be careful before switching to a flowering light schedule. Once you flip the flowering switch, you will send the signal to any potential males that it’s time to pollinate. So, if you don’t catch a male plant quickly enough, you risk pollinating your plants.

Are there other ways to distinguish male vs. female marijuana?

The only sure-fire way to differentiate male vs. female marijuana is to look at the nodes. However, there are a few secondary gender indicators to be aware of.

For instance, some cannabis growers claim the stipules around a plant’s nodes have sharper edges on female plants. If these tiny leaves are more rounded, there’s a greater chance your plant is a male. Also, some gardeners say there are more stipules on females as opposed to males. Just bear in mind, there’s no science to support this “stipule theory.”

Another feature to examine is the main stem’s size. Typically, male plants have fatter stems than female plants. Plus, a few growers say male plants grow taller and have fewer fan leaves than females.

Can you tell a plant’s gender from cannabis seeds?

Unfortunately, nobody can tell the gender of a cannabis plant just by looking at the seeds. All healthy cannabis seeds have the same traits (i.e., brown color with streaks of grey, a shiny exterior, and a firm feel). Always avoid seeds that look green, feel squishy, or crack under gentle pressure.

While you can’t determine a seed’s sex by its appearance, you can find many breeders that offer pre-sexed seeds. Plenty of seed banks now have feminized seeds that take the guesswork out of growing marijuana. As long as you grow these seeds in a reliable, low-stress environment, they should all express female traits during vegetation.

Anyone who purchases “regular seeds” must take extra time to analyze every plant’s nodes. In most cases, about 50 percent of seeds in an un-feminized batch will become males.

Are lab tests for cannabis gender legit?

If you don’t want to wait for your weed’s nodes to appear, there is a quicker way to figure out your plant’s gender: order a cannabis lab test! Yes, many legitimate labs offer cannabis gender tests for curious cultivators.

Simply send a seedling sample to your chosen lab and wait for the results. Typically, labs will accept leaf samples once your marijuana plant reaches two to three weeks old.

Even though gender testing is relatively new in the cannabis industry, it is legitimate if you’re working with a high-quality lab. It will cost a little extra for this test, but some cultivators say it’s money well spent.

What the heck is a hermaphrodite cannabis plant?

Interestingly, hermaphroditism isn’t all that uncommon in the cannabis kingdom. Even if you’re working with feminized seeds, you’ll probably notice a few cannabis plants “herm out” throughout your cultivation career.

If your plant has gone hermaphrodite, you’ll most likely see both pollen sacs and pistils throughout your cannabis plant. You might also see a distinctive “banana-shaped” pollen sac form over female flowers. Both of these conditions are clear signs your plant is a hermaphrodite.

Although hermaphrodite plants are technically male and female, you have to treat them as males. These plants still have plenty of pollen sacs that will burst during the flowering stage. To avoid pollinating your ladies, it’s best to remove hermaphrodites ASAP. Alternatively, you could carefully remove pollen sacs on hermaphrodites, but this technique is only recommended for expert cultivators.

So, why would a cannabis plant turn into a hermaphrodite? The leading theory is that hermaphroditism is a response to environmental stressors. If your plant feels it doesn’t have enough energy to receive pollen from males, it will create pollen sacs of its own. Therefore, the best way to avoid hermaphroditism is to maintain a stable, stress-free environment in your grow tent.

When it comes to growing cannabis, it truly is essential that you learn the difference between male and female cannabis plants. By learning this simple technique, you can easily decide what you want to pollinate and what you don’t.

Understanding Plant Reproductive Morphology

First, let’s take one step back to fully grasp why we need to separate cannabis plants by male and female in the first place. This is commonly referred to as the plant reproductive morphology, which is simply the study of the physical form and structure of a plant’s sexual reproduction parts.

While there are actually many complex forms of morphology, for the sake of keeping it simple, we’re only going to cover three of the most common ones.

Hermaphrodite (bisexual):

This is a type of plant that forms both male and female parts on the same plant. Therefore, this plant will be able to reproduce on its own. However, in cannabis plants, you can discover a “hermied” plant by banana looking shoots, which form on the flowers. While this can be the genetics of the cannabis strain, it may also be an indication of the plant getting too stressed out. When a plant gets too stressed and fears it will die, it may begin to form male reproductive parts. This is to ensure that seeds can drop for its survival (keep reading for more info on detecting “hermied” cannabis plants).

Monoecious:

For this type of plant, it will form both male and female reproductive parts. However, they will not be on the same flower as they are with hermaphrodite plants. Within monoecious plants, you will find one flower has female parts, while another has male parts. In cannabis, this is very uncommon to find. Actually, it’s only been reported a few times in history and something that we’ve never personally seen. If this were to happen, you would find one stalk with definitive male characteristics and other branches of the same plant with definitive female characteristics.

Dioecious:

Now, with a dioecious plant, you will find that the plant either produces all male parts or all female parts. This means that no single plant can reproduce on its own. The female actually needs its male counterpart to continue producing seed for the following year. And, you guessed it, this is the category cannabis falls into and why you must separate your males from females. If you fail to separate them all, you will likely find that the male plants pollinated your females. Therefore, leaving you with a handful of buds chalked full of seeds.

How to Tell the Difference Between Male and Female Cannabis Plants

Now, with an understanding of the various sexual organs within cannabis plants, let’s get to the fun part – separating your lady friends from their male counterparts.

After the seeds have sprouted and the plants have had a chance to grow, it will be time to find out which ones you’ll be keeping to flower out and which ones you will be chopping down to avoid seeded buds.

Usually, when starting from seed, you will need to wait about four to six weeks before the male and female parts will be formed well enough for you to see the difference.

How To Spot Treat And Prevent Aphids On Cannabis Plants. The Office of National Drug Control Policy ONDCP leads and coordinates the nations drug policy so that it improves the health and lives of the American people.

How to identify female and male marijuana plants
Pin On Weed Art

As soon as the length of daylight falls below eighteen hours per day you will begin to see responses in the male plants.

How to identify female and male marijuana plants

How to identify male marijuana plants. The marijuana is one of the most diverse plants when it comes to flavors and smells. These mutants carry the potential to pollinate and ruin your psychoactive sinsemilla. This is because only female plants make potent budsflowers while male cannabis plants make non-potent pollen sacs where female plants would grow buds.

The pictures of the poison oak and ivy make it easier for me to identify the plants. The delicate flavors of each strain depend on over 100 flavorful flavonoids and terpenes contained in the plant. Cloning is a simple process of taking a cutting from a plant and.

ONDCP accomplishes this through. Trying to identify a plants sex by height and volume alone is not fail-proof but there is a way to determine a plants gender before it matures that works every single time cloning. How female plants turn male The best compost tea recipe.

You should start being able to do this once the season starts to change. Identify Female and Male Marijuana Plants. Identify Common Poisonous Berries in North America.

If you dont dry and cure your weed properly you can destroy these molecules resulting in tasteless weed that smells awful. The first step in making these crucial decisions is to determine which plants are male and which are female. Females will have a calyx and a pistil.

How to identify and prevent growing mold on weed How to clone a cannabis plant Root aphids other pests and how to avoid them How to make super soil for growing cannabis Indica sativa or hybrid. So be careful if you use seeds because you wont be able to tell if your plants have male. Sexing the marijuana plant can be done as the marijuana plants enter their flowering stage.

Female plants do not have these white flowers as they release the pollen which is to then pollinate the females. They produce large seedless buds that marijuana users consume. However this time were the dealing with the opposite problem.

Read on for a detailed look at what they are how to spot them and how to control and protect your cannabis plants against an aphid infestation. You can identify female plants also known as sinsemilla by the white hairs that emerge from the pear-shaped bracts at their plant nodes. Identify Oaks by the Acorns.

Assuming that there are female plants are growing the flowering stage is when the marijuana plant will start developing buds. Hopefully this guide has helped you better understand the differences between male and female marijuana plants. Its important to remain vigilant and to separate and destroy any hermaphroditic plants with female glands and male leaves.

Knowing the plants sex is helpful because most hobbyist cannabis growers would like to identify and remove male plants from the grow room early in the growing process. Identify Female and Male Marijuana Plants. For marijuana plants when they dont get enough nitrogen the bottom leaves start turning yellow and dying.

Learning the basics is the first step in becoming a master cannabis cultivator. A dream yield of healthy robust female buds is the objective for nearly all growers. Seeded buds which come from male plants are thought of as lesser-quality cannabis.

How to dry marijuana. Start looking for pollen sacs that identify male plants. How to read a cannabis leaf Herming.

In order to get close enough to the plant to identify it use a stick or a gloved hand to examine it more closely. However when growing marijuana it is paramount that you identify and remove hermaphrodite plants from your cannabis crop to avoid pollination that could cause your whole garden of female plants to start forming seeds significantly lowering the quality of your harvest. Aphids are a common pest affecting cannabis growers around the world.

Female Plants vs. Left unchecked a nitrogen deficiency can cause the whole plant to eventually die. How to sex plants Male and Female Marijuana.

Nitrogen toxicity or too much nitrogen. Marijuana Flowering Stage.

How to identify female and male marijuana plants
Pin Auf カタログ

How to identify female and male marijuana plants
Pin On Cannabis Hemp Facts

How to identify female and male marijuana plants
Read Our Weblog For A Little More Pertaining To This Excellent Photo Landscapetreeplants Maple Tree Maple Tree Landscape Tree Care

How to identify female and male marijuana plants
Pin On Cbd Knowledge

How To Spot Treat And Prevent Aphids On Cannabis Plants. The Office of National Drug Control Policy ONDCP leads and coordinates the nations drug policy so that it improves the health and lives of the American people.

How to identify female and male marijuana plants
Pin On Weed Art

As soon as the length of daylight falls below eighteen hours per day you will begin to see responses in the male plants.

How to identify female and male marijuana plants

How to identify male marijuana plants. The marijuana is one of the most diverse plants when it comes to flavors and smells. These mutants carry the potential to pollinate and ruin your psychoactive sinsemilla. This is because only female plants make potent budsflowers while male cannabis plants make non-potent pollen sacs where female plants would grow buds.

The pictures of the poison oak and ivy make it easier for me to identify the plants. The delicate flavors of each strain depend on over 100 flavorful flavonoids and terpenes contained in the plant. Cloning is a simple process of taking a cutting from a plant and.

ONDCP accomplishes this through. Trying to identify a plants sex by height and volume alone is not fail-proof but there is a way to determine a plants gender before it matures that works every single time cloning. How female plants turn male The best compost tea recipe.

You should start being able to do this once the season starts to change. Identify Female and Male Marijuana Plants. Identify Common Poisonous Berries in North America.

If you dont dry and cure your weed properly you can destroy these molecules resulting in tasteless weed that smells awful. The first step in making these crucial decisions is to determine which plants are male and which are female. Females will have a calyx and a pistil.

How to identify and prevent growing mold on weed How to clone a cannabis plant Root aphids other pests and how to avoid them How to make super soil for growing cannabis Indica sativa or hybrid. So be careful if you use seeds because you wont be able to tell if your plants have male. Sexing the marijuana plant can be done as the marijuana plants enter their flowering stage.

Female plants do not have these white flowers as they release the pollen which is to then pollinate the females. They produce large seedless buds that marijuana users consume. However this time were the dealing with the opposite problem.

Read on for a detailed look at what they are how to spot them and how to control and protect your cannabis plants against an aphid infestation. You can identify female plants also known as sinsemilla by the white hairs that emerge from the pear-shaped bracts at their plant nodes. Identify Oaks by the Acorns.

Assuming that there are female plants are growing the flowering stage is when the marijuana plant will start developing buds. Hopefully this guide has helped you better understand the differences between male and female marijuana plants. Its important to remain vigilant and to separate and destroy any hermaphroditic plants with female glands and male leaves.

Knowing the plants sex is helpful because most hobbyist cannabis growers would like to identify and remove male plants from the grow room early in the growing process. Identify Female and Male Marijuana Plants. For marijuana plants when they dont get enough nitrogen the bottom leaves start turning yellow and dying.

Learning the basics is the first step in becoming a master cannabis cultivator. A dream yield of healthy robust female buds is the objective for nearly all growers. Seeded buds which come from male plants are thought of as lesser-quality cannabis.

How to dry marijuana. Start looking for pollen sacs that identify male plants. How to read a cannabis leaf Herming.

In order to get close enough to the plant to identify it use a stick or a gloved hand to examine it more closely. However when growing marijuana it is paramount that you identify and remove hermaphrodite plants from your cannabis crop to avoid pollination that could cause your whole garden of female plants to start forming seeds significantly lowering the quality of your harvest. Aphids are a common pest affecting cannabis growers around the world.

Female Plants vs. Left unchecked a nitrogen deficiency can cause the whole plant to eventually die. How to sex plants Male and Female Marijuana.

Nitrogen toxicity or too much nitrogen. Marijuana Flowering Stage.

How to identify female and male marijuana plants
Pin Auf カタログ

How to identify female and male marijuana plants
Pin On Cannabis Hemp Facts

How to identify female and male marijuana plants
Read Our Weblog For A Little More Pertaining To This Excellent Photo Landscapetreeplants Maple Tree Maple Tree Landscape Tree Care

How to identify female and male marijuana plants
Pin On Cbd Knowledge

Assuming half of the seeds planted are. A male preflower will look like a tiny tightly closed bud.

How to identify female and male marijuana plants
How To Distinguish Marijuana Males From Females Alchimia Grow Shop

You can identify these differences and determine the sex of your cannabis plant grown from seed fairly early on.

How to identify female and male marijuana plants

How to identify male marijuana plants early. Knowing the plants sex is helpful because most hobbyist cannabis growers would like to identify and remove male plants from the grow room early in the growing. If the hairs are white then its a female plant however if they are green then its. The differences will appear weeks before the.

Once the sex of the plant is. Very early the male pre-flower early pollen sacs simply looks like a more round version than the female pre-flower part. The male marijuana plants will develop pollen sacs to spread their seeds and the female plant.

Marijuana plants display their sex by what grows between the nodes. If a cannabis plant is male it will begin to develop little sacks of pollen at its nodes the area where branches meet stem. Early Signs to Help Identify a Male Plant of Cannabis Cannabis plants that are thick and tall are possibly believed as male plants.

They will look like little balls. For pot plants grown outdoors males can show their sex 3 weeks before a female plant while for cannabis grown indoors male plants will generally reveal their. Male cannabis plant photo courtesy of Royal Queen Seeds.

Even when all-male plants are recognized and removed it is still early to relax. The female plant grows white hairs where the buds are supposed to grow soon. At a certain point most strains will reveal their sex via pre-flowers at the joints.

Some varieties are more genetically. One of the best methods for knowing how to tell if your plant is male or female before flowering is with a jewelers glass or small hand-held microscope. A female preflower will produce a calyx with one long white pistillate hair.

There is a possibility of hermaphroditism. Fewer leaves and sporadic. Until now the plant will have grown branches and leaves opposite each other from the main stem however at this point they will start to alternate.

This can occur as young as 3 weeks old with male plants and around 4-6 weeks old. Identifying a Male Cannabis Plant. Pre-flowers will appear at the base of the leaves when male plants are about three to four weeks old.

Without early identification cultivators need to grow plants an average of six weeks before they can see signs of sex.

How to identify female and male marijuana plants
3 Strategies To Identify Male Hemp Plants World Class Cbd Cbg Autoflower Hemp Seed Genetics

How to identify female and male marijuana plants
How To Identify Female And Male Marijuana Plants 9 Steps

How to identify female and male marijuana plants
How To Tell If Your Marijuana Plant Is Female Or Male First Time Growers Must Watch Youtube

How to identify female and male marijuana plants
How To Identify Female And Male Marijuana Plants 9 Steps

How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your period

Why do I get diarrhea during my period? This is a question we often get from our users. Today, we investigate the causes of diarrhea during your period and find out how to get rid of diarrhea on your period or before it.

How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your period

Reviewed by

Kate Shkodzik, MD

Contents

  • Diarrhea before your period
  • Diarrhea during your period

Diarrhea before your period

Cramps, bloating, back pain, sore breasts, and mood swings are all common symptoms of premenstrual syndrome (PMS). Diarrhea is another symptom you might experience before getting your period.

If you’ve found that your diarrhea appears before your period, you’re not alone. Many people experience severe diarrhea with PMS. Your menstrual cycle and digestive system are closely linked.

Why do you get diarrhea before your period?

Levels of progesterone and estrogen change during your menstrual cycle. There are receptor cells for these hormones in your gastrointestinal tract. This suggests that the gastrointestinal tract is designed to sense and react to these hormonal changes.

Apart from hormones, another cause for diarrhea before your period is the increased amount of prostaglandins. Prostaglandins can make the muscle that lines your bowels contract and push waste out quickly.

Take a quiz

Find out what you can do with our Health Assistant

Track my period

How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your period

Get pregnant

How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your period

Follow my baby’s growth

How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your period

Diarrhea a week before your period: is it normal?

Most premenstrual symptoms begin one to two weeks before your period. They might last up to seven days after the start of menstruation.

When your period is about to arrive, digestive symptoms tend to fall to the extremes. Some people get constipated, and others have diarrhea. One study has shown that 73 percent of women experience at least one of the primary gastrointestinal symptoms either before or during their period. Roughly 24 percent of women said they experience diarrhea before their period, while 28 percent experience diarrhea during their period.

Diarrhea right before your period: a symptom of PMS?

Experts in gastroenterology have found that you are more likely to experience bloating and constipation in the days of your cycle following ovulation.

However, things start to change as you get closer to your period. In the days right before your period, you are more likely to experience diarrhea and abdominal pain. Diarrhea right before your period is normal. In most cases, a healthy diet and medicine can make the symptoms go away.

How to treat diarrhea before your period

Here are some steps you can take to manage diarrhea:

  • Drinking plenty of water to ease your abdominal bloating
  • Maintaining a caffeine-free diet
  • Eating a nutritious diet to improve your overall health (fiber-rich or plain food is best if you have diarrhea)
  • Reducing your intake of sugar, salt, and alcohol

Your health care provider can also advise you on treatment and prescribe medication to treat your diarrhea.

How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your period

See your health care provider if your diarrhea starts to affect your daily life or if your symptoms don’t go away. Make sure to contact your health care provider immediately if you have one of the following symptoms: your stools are bloody or black, you become dehydrated, you have a fever, or you have severe abdominal or rectal pain. Your health care provider may do the following tests to rule out other medical problems:

  • Physical exam
  • Gynecological exam
  • Complete blood count
  • Blood tests
  • Colonoscopy

Diarrhea during your period

The severity of your symptoms may be linked to your period. Although diarrhea can occur before your period, many people find that their symptoms get worse when they have their period. For some, their bodies are more reactive to food in the days during menstruation, particularly gassy foods.

Is diarrhea a period symptom?

Some people find that symptoms such as diarrhea, bloating, and constipation get worse during the days immediately after ovulation. Others report that they have an increase in the severity of these symptoms during their period.

Is it normal to have diarrhea on your period?

Diarrhea during your period is a common complaint. During your period, the sex hormones progesterone and estrogen as well as prostaglandins can change the behavior of the smooth muscle in your intestines. As long as it doesn’t cause such severe gastrointestinal pain that it keeps you from leaving your home, it’s typically nothing to worry about.

If you notice that your diarrhea is bloody, you should see your health care provider as soon as possible. There can be different causes of bloody stools, such as trauma, infectious diseases, endometriosis, and a tumor.

Causes of diarrhea during period

Medical researchers don’t yet fully understand the exact reasons why diarrhea occurs during your period. The most likely cause is prostaglandins, which are chemicals released during your period that affect the contractions of smooth muscles in the uterus and the intestines. They send a “squeeze” message to your bowels and can sometimes go into overdrive.

How to treat diarrhea on period

Some of the things you can do to manage diarrhea during your period include:

  • Eating foods rich in soluble fiber like bananas, peeled apples, and oats
  • Staying well hydrated by drinking a lot of fluids
  • Taking medication that relieves menstrual symptoms
  • Avoiding foods that are highly insoluble, like whole grains, broccoli, and other high-fiber vegetables

How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your period

When Mother Nature (or Aunt Flo) decides to come and visit, it’s typically uncomfortable and inconvenient at best. Yes, it’s a totally natural thing that happens to every woman, but the few days we experience cramping and shed uterine tissue from our bodies always have us readjusting everything in our lives to make us feel more comfortable.

And then there are some of us who get really bad side effects during our periods, like nausea. I used to get cramps so bad that I had to be picked up from school and lie in bed all day. Luckily for me, the pain that comes with the cramps never led to nausea during my period, but according to Gunvor Ekman-Ordeberg, MD, Ph.D., ob-gyn andВ co-founder of DeoDoc, pain from cramps can lead to that sick feeling. Here, she explains why you might feel that way and how to treat nausea during your period.

How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your period

“There are several reasons to explain why a woman may experience nausea during their period. One of the most common reasons is pain caused by menstrual cramps,” says Eckman-Ordeberg. “Nausea can also occur from the hormonal changes in the body during the menstrual cycle.”

How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your period

She also explains that based on genetics, some women are more prone to nausea during their periods and before they get pregnant. “We know that nausea during menstruation is more common before women get pregnant for the first time. The reason for this is not yet known, but there are studies indicating that it is likely due to the uterus changes made after a pregnancy, like the uterus being able to handle increased pressure,” she says. “Additionally, there is a genetic factor involved: Studies show that women with pain-related diseases are more prone to nausea during menstruation.”

How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your period

There is bad news and good news when it comes to fighting off the urge to throw up, Ekman-Ordeberg told us. The bad news:В “There is no real way to prevent nausea, as it is caused by internal bodily functions,” she says. “If the tips do not help and the symptoms persist, I recommend seeing your ob-gyn, as some diseases, such as endometriosis, can cause nausea during the period.”

How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your period

Cavan Images/Getty Images

The good news, though, is there are options to help ease nausea during our periods. The first thing she recommends is anti-inflammatory medication.

“Before menstruation begins, the inner lining of the uterus starts to make prostaglandins, which are hormone-like substances/chemical compounds,” she says. “When the inner lining breaks down during menstruation, prostaglandins are released, causing inflammation and uterus contractions, thus creating painful cramps. Therefore, I recommend anti-inflammatory medication since it reduces bothВ inflammation and pain.”

Feeling sick or vomiting during your period is really unpleasant. In this article, we’ll talk about what causes menstrual nausea and what you can do to relieve the symptoms.

How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your period

Reviewed by

Iryna Ilyich, MD

Contents

  • What is the connection?
  • Treatment

Nausea from your period: are the two connected?

Nausea during your period is a common symptom linked to substances known as prostaglandins. Normally, among many other things, prostaglandins help your body launch an inflammatory response to pathogens. During your period, they help your uterus contract, shedding the lining. As a side effect, they can make you feel nauseous during your period, sometimes leading to vomiting, diarrhea, and headaches.

Nausea during your period can also be caused by a mild fluctuation of sex hormones, which prompts the stomach to overproduce gastric juices containing hydrochloric acid. This can cause mild heartburn or, in extreme cases, vomiting.

Your period may also come with a migraine, which can also cause nausea.

Take a quiz

Find out what you can do with our Health Assistant

Track my period

How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your period

Get pregnant

How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your period

Follow my baby’s growth

How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your period

How to alleviate period sickness

If menstrual nausea has you feeling down, don’t worry — there are several ways to treat it. There are several possible causes of nausea during menstruation:

  • Changes in the levels of hormones that sometimes initiate the overproduction of gastric juice, which contains hydrochloric acid
  • Your body’s reaction to the release of prostaglandins, which cause cramping not only in the uterus but also in the stomach

You can make some dietary changes to help you with nausea. Avoid fatty or spicy foods (opt for small portions of bland food instead), avoid intense odors, and stay hydrated. Ginger, chamomile, and mint tea may help calm your stomach. Take small sips of cold, clear, carbonated, or sour drinks.

You can also try an antacid. It can help alleviate symptoms by neutralizing hydrochloric acid.

Relieving the cramps may also relieve your nausea. Applying heat (like a hot water bottle) may reduce pain in your lower abdomen. Physical activity may also ease your pain in some cases.

If these methods are not enough, you can try over-the-counter or prescription pain medicine from your health care provider. Make sure to consult with your health care provider before taking any medication.

Besides riding a hormonal roller coaster and dealing with uncomfortable cramps, many women also experience diarrhea during their period.

How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your period

How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your period

You have enough to deal with during your period — diarrhea and changes in bowel habits are just more things you don’t want to put up with.

Though diarrhea is caused by the same bodily changes that cause period cramping, many women find it can be managed and prevented with medication.

Why Diarrhea Happens During Your Period

The exact reasons why diarrhea occurs during your period aren’t fully understood, but it is quite common and often tied to menstrual cramps. Believed to be at the root of the cause are prostaglandins, chemicals released during your period that allow the uterus, and thus the intestines, to contract.

Prostaglandins can also cause other pain associated with dysmenorrhea, the medical term for painful menstrual periods. Prostaglandin-related cramps and diarrhea usually occur in the first three days of your menstrual period.

“[Bowel movements] can change with differing hormone levels,” says Francisco J. Marrero, MD, a gastroenterologist with the Lake Charles Memorial Health System in Louisiana. In fact, some women may even notice the opposite and become constipated during their period, Dr. Marrero says.

Diarrhea, as well as other gastrointestinal symptoms, such as bloating and nausea, may also occur during the week prior to your period. In this case, the diarrhea may be part of a group of symptoms, usually including mild mood changes, called premenstrual syndrome (PMS).

Managing Diarrhea During Your Period

Women who often experience bouts of diarrhea during their period should prepare for what is about to come.

“Try some agent that will slow [diarrhea] down,” says Marrero, such as Imodium (loperamide) or Kaopectate (bismuth subsalicylate). “If women can predict when it’s going to happen, they can start taking medication before symptoms start.” If the diarrhea is only occasional or isn’t bothersome, you don’t have to do anything, since you know it will pass quickly.

How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your period

What to Eat and What to Avoid When You Have Diarrhea

Taking loperamide or another anti-diarrheal can help soothe or prevent diarrhea symptoms, but make sure to check with your doctor before taking these medicines. Also, be sure to stay well-hydrated by drinking a lot of fluids. Bulking up on extra fiber can also help solidify loose stools and perhaps reduce your diarrhea symptoms. Another tip is to try to eat foods that contain active cultures of beneficial bacteria (probiotics), like the ones found in yogurt.

But, Marrero cautions, if you’re experiencing significant pain or bloody stools, the cause could be more serious than just PMS symptoms or dysmenorrhea. Endometriosis, a chronic illness affecting the reproductive system, can (although rarely) have an effect on the bowels, causing bloody stools.

Juggling Diarrhea and PMS

You can manage and prevent some premenstrual symptoms and dysmenorrhea by taking a nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drug (NSAID) like Ibuprofen or Naproxen to inhibit the release of chemicals related to pain. Taking birth control pills to prevent ovulation may also help to prevent many painful symptoms for some women.

Believe it or not, exercise is one of the best medicines for managing PMS and menstrual pain. Moderate exercise can help alleviate cramps by improving blood flow — and what works on cramps may work on diarrhea, too. Also, avoid caffeine and junk foods, as both can cause diarrhea and worsen PMS.

Of course, a heating pad, warm water bottle, or warm cloth across your abdominal area can also help relieve the pain brought on by period cramps.

Remember that a healthy diet and regular exercise can keep your belly and your bowels happy all the time — especially during your period.

If you ever feel nauseous during your period, it may make you worry that something is wrong. But most of the time, it’s pretty normal. And it’s something many women deal with.

Hormones are usually the cause

For most women who experience nausea during or before their periods, it’s just a normal part of pre-menstrual syndrome (PMS). A hormone called prostaglandin circulates around your body during your time of the month. It can cause nausea, vomiting, diarrhea and headaches.

PMS typically begins a week or two before your period. Your breasts may be sore, and you may be constipated. Back pain, headaches and bloating or swelling may also occur.

Emotionally, you may feel anxious or irritable. Some women go through mood swings or find themselves crying for no reason. You may even have trouble sleeping.

Painful cramps can also cause nausea

If you suffer from dysmenorrhea, which is just a big word for painful cramps, you may also experience nausea. Strong pain in your back, stomach, legs, hips and pelvis can make you feel like you might throw up.

Two serious causes of nausea during your period

PMS is often harmless. However, there are two causes of nausea during your period that can be serious.

The first is endometriosis. If you have this disorder, the tissue in your uterus that sheds and causes your period each month grows outside your uterus instead. Sometimes, endometriosis is so painful that it can make you sick.

Other times, that tissue grows near your intestines. This can also make you nauseous. Other symptoms you may have include fatigue, diarrhea, constipation, bloating and heavy bleeding during your period. Some women with endometriosis also find sex to be painful. They may even feel pain while urinating or having a bowel movement.

Pelvic inflammatory disease (PID) is another serious cause of nausea during your period. Most women get this when bacteria move from the vagina to the uterus, ovaries and fallopian tubes. It can cause cramps, pain during sex, pain during urination and pelvic pain. In more serious cases, you may have a fever and chills. PID is usually due to bacteria from a sexually transmitted disease. It can also develop during childbirth.

Dealing with nausea during your period

If you find yourself feeling nauseous during your period, there are some things you can do to feel better. Sometimes, just getting some fresh air or going for a walk can help. A cool compress may also do the trick.

Make sure you’re drinking plenty of water and sticking to a bland diet. Ginger may also help. Drink some ginger ale or keep some ginger-flavored candy on hand. Many people swear by drinking peppermint or chamomile tea. If none of those help, try taking an antacid.

When to see your doctor

While nausea is normal during your period, you may want to see a doctor if you’ve never felt it before. If you start throwing up, especially to the point that you’re dehydrated or losing weight, seek medical help as soon as possible.

If you have a fever, feel severe pain or have unusual discharge from your vagina, you’ll also want to contact your doctor.

If you have questions about your period, we’re here to help. Learn more about the obstetrics and gynecology services we offered at Bon Secours.

Related Posts

  • How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your period
Hydration 101 with Dietitian Brianna

How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your period

Do Women Need an OB-GYN and a Primary Care Provider?

How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your period

Stephanie Explains Everything to Know About Vitamins

How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your period

6 Ways Men Can Practice Self-Care

Leave A Comment Cancel reply

Please review our Terms of Use before commenting.

How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your period

If you have diarrhea during your period, it’s not due to your period. This is not a normal symptom of what happens during PMS. So

technically there’s no such thing as PMS diarrhea. Therefore, there’s no treatment for PMS diarrhea because it doesn’t exist.

You may have been wondering why does PMS cause diarrhea, how long does PMS diarrhea last, and is diarrhea a symptom of PMS, but there technically is no medical connection. There may be a connection of a faulty intestinal tract with diarrhea, and during one’s period the intestinal tract gets more upset than usual, but that’s the extent of the connection.

If there is diarrhea with nausea and vomiting that happens to occur during PMS, it’s a sign that you may have other health issues. So you can have diarrhea during the same time you have PMS.

For example, any of the following are the reasons why diarrhea occurs:

  1. The bacterial flora in the intestines are not correct.
  2. You have irritable bowel syndrome.
  3. You ate something that contained a bacteria or virus in it that causes food poisoning.
  4. You are traveling and have traveler’s diarrhea.
  5. Your body is trying to purge itself.
  6. You have parasites.

How long does PMS diarrhea last?

Well, again, it’s plain old diarrhea, not PMS diarrhea! Diarrhea can last anywhere from a few hours to several months. For example, there’s a bacterial infection called Clostridium dificile that causes diarrhea for a few months, or until the doctor can get it under control.

Diarrhea can be a life-threatening condition if left unchecked. In fact, babies can die from diarrhea because they lose their electrolytes – and it’s the same thing with adults. You always want to do something about diarrhea whenever you have it.

Six Natural Ways to Treat Diarrhea (No such thing as PMS diarrhea)
  1. Take a probiotic with 150 billion colony forming units (cfu) per capsule. Take one twice daily about 8 hours apart. Continue this until the diarrhea leaves.
  2. Clean out the colon with regular colonic hydrotherapy sessions to regain health of the intestines from the irritable bowel syndrome.
  3. Take two capsules charcoal with a large glass of water twice daily until the diarrhea relieves itself.
  4. Be more careful with drinking water and ice and eating vegetables or fruits in foreign countries. In the meantime, take charcoal as explained in #3.
  5. Mix one heaping tablespoon slippery elm herb with ½ cup applesauce. Add cinnamon if you need more flavor. Eat this mixture. Repeat twice. This is a way to stop diarrhea (or if you want to call it PMS diarrhea…)
  6. Do a complete parasite cleanse for 90 days. You’ll have to find these online, complete with instructions.
Take Care of the PMS – It’s Easy

If you have PMS, you should be working on ways to eliminate the PMS. One of the easiest ways to do this is to take a Period Vitamin. The term period vitamin may be a new one that you are unfamiliar with. It means a multivitamin that contains vitamins and minerals but is made specifically for those women that are in their reproductive years. They still have their period and can still get pregnant.

Women who aren’t in their reproductive years don’t need the same amounts of vitamins and minerals as those who are. For example, women that have their periods lose a lot of iron via their menstrual periods whereas women in menopause don’t have this issue at all. The women with their periods therefore need extra iron whereas women in menopause don’t. There are other nutrients that have to be different for women in their reproductive years as well.

A period vitamin is taken once daily. Most women can remember to take something once daily so it’s an easy addition to the daily habits. You simply add it to a few other daily habits you are already doing.

Diarrhoea and vomiting are common in adults, children and babies. They’re often caused by a stomach bug and should stop in a few days.

The advice is the same if you have diarrhoea and vomiting together or separately.

How to treat diarrhoea and vomiting yourself

You can usually treat yourself or your child at home. The most important thing is to have lots of fluids to avoid dehydration.

stay at home and get plenty of rest

drink lots of fluids, such as water or squash – take small sips if you feel sick

carry on breast or bottle feeding your baby – if they’re being sick, try giving small feeds more often than usual

give babies on formula or solid foods small sips of water between feeds

eat when you feel able to – you do not need to eat or avoid any specific foods

take paracetamol if you’re in discomfort – check the leaflet before giving it to your child

do not have fruit juice or fizzy drinks – they can make diarrhoea worse

do not make baby formula weaker – use it at its usual strength

do not give children under 12 medicine to stop diarrhoea

do not give aspirin to children under 16

How long diarrhoea and vomiting last

In adults and children:

  • diarrhoea usually stops within 5 to 7 days
  • vomiting usually stops in 1 or 2 days

Diarrhoea and vomiting can spread easily

Important

Stay off school or work until you’ve not been sick or had diarrhoea for at least 2 days.

If you also have a high temperature or do not feel well enough to do your normal activities, try to stay at home and avoid contact with other people until you feel better.

To help avoid spreading an infection:

wash your hands with soap and water frequently

wash any clothing or bedding that has poo or vomit on it separately on a hot wash

clean toilet seats, flush handles, taps, surfaces and door handles every day

do not prepare food for other people, if possible

do not share towels, flannels, cutlery or utensils

do not use a swimming pool until 2 weeks after the symptoms stop

A pharmacist can help with diarrhoea and vomiting

Speak to a pharmacist if:

  • you or your child (over 5 years) have signs of dehydration – such as dark, smelly pee or peeing less than usual
  • you need to stop diarrhoea for a few hours

They may recommend:

  • oral rehydration sachets you mix with water to make a drink
  • medicine to stop diarrhoea for a few hours (like loperamide) – not suitable for children under 12

Call a pharmacy or contact them online before going in person. You can get medicines delivered or ask someone to collect them.

Urgent advice: Get advice from 111 now if:

  • you’re worried about a baby under 12 months
  • your child stops breast or bottle feeding while they’re ill
  • a child under 5 years has signs of dehydration – such as fewer wet nappies
  • you or your child (over 5 years) still have signs of dehydration after using oral rehydration sachets
  • you or your child keep being sick and cannot keep fluid down
  • you or your child have bloody diarrhoea or bleeding from the bottom
  • you or your child have diarrhoea for more than 7 days or vomiting for more than 2 days

111 will tell you what to do. They can arrange a phone call from a nurse or doctor if you need one.

Other ways to get help

Get an urgent GP appointment

A GP may be able to help you.

Ask your GP practice for an urgent appointment.

Check with the GP surgery before going in. A GP may speak to you on the phone.

Immediate action required: Call 999 or go to A&E if you or your child:

  • vomit blood or have vomit that looks like ground coffee
  • have green or yellow-green vomit
  • might have swallowed something poisonous
  • have a stiff neck and pain when looking at bright lights
  • have a sudden, severe headache or stomach ache

What we mean by severe pain

Causes of diarrhoea and vomiting

You probably will not know exactly what the cause is, but the main causes of diarrhoea and vomiting are treated in the same way.

The most common causes are:

  • a stomach bug (gastroenteritis)
  • norovirus – also called the “vomiting bug”
  • food poisoning

Other causes of diarrhoea or vomiting

Diarrhoea can also be caused by:

  • medicines – check the leaflet to see if it’s a side effect
  • a food intolerance or food allergy
  • irritable bowel syndrome (IBS)
  • inflammatory bowel disease
  • coeliac disease
  • diverticular disease

Vomiting can also be caused by:

  • pregnancy
  • migraine
  • labyrinthitis
  • medicines – check the leaflet to see if it’s a side effect
  • reflux – where a baby brings feeds back up (“spitting up”)
  • other infections – such as a urinary tract infection (UTI)

Page last reviewed: 07 December 2020
Next review due: 07 December 2023

How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your period

Having their menstrual cycle means riding the hormonal roller coaster for many women.

Besides dealing with painful symptoms, such as abdominal pain, menstrual pain, bloating, pains, and uncomfortable cramps, many healthy women also have to deal with experiencing gastrointestinal symptoms, such as diarrhea, during their period.

Menstrual cycle and other hormonal changes are enough to deal with, and no one needs drastic changes in bowel habits on top of everything else.

The same bodily changes cause PMS symptoms, period diarrhea, and period cramping, but many find that period diarrhea can be prevented and managed with medication, as well as natural remedies.

Why Does Period Diarrhea Happen?

Unfortunately, the exact reasons why these symptoms happen during the period aren’t fully known and understood.

Many experts and peer-reviewed studies believe that diarrhea is often connected to inflammatory bowel disease, irritable bowel syndrome, and a troubled digestive system. However, period diarrhea is one of the most common symptoms, and it is often tied to menstrual cramps.

Experts widely believe that the cause of period diarrhea and period cramps are prostaglandins, which are chemicals released during your period that cause the uterus to contract.

During your period, your body produces more prostaglandins than usual, and the prostaglandin causes the uterus and the intestines to contract, causing cramps, pain, and period diarrhea.

In most cases, prostaglandin-related diarrhea and cramps usually occur during the first three days of the menstrual period, while the uterus is actively shedding its uterine lining.

Diarrhea, as well as bloating and nausea, can occur during the week before your period as well. In this scenario, the diarrhea is a part of changes caused by premenstrual syndrome (PMS).

How Long Does Period Diarrhea Last?

The length of this uncomfortable symptom that causes more frequent bowel movements will depend on several different factors, and it is different for every woman.

In some cases, period diarrhea occurs often and might last up to seven days after the first day of menstruation.

How To Manage and Treat Diarrhea?

Period diarrhea is a very uncomfortable period symptom, and it requires some special attention and care in order to be managed.

Some of the ways to manage period diarrhea include:

Drinking plenty of water

Drinking plenty of water will ease your abdominal bloating and reduce diarrhea, and being hydrated never brings any harm.

If you experience diarrhea often, try battling it with hydration.

Maintaining a caffeine-free diet

Caffeine can worsen all period symptoms, but that is especially true for women who experience diarrhea.

If you happen to get period diarrhea every time you get your period, make sure to stay away from caffeine during those five to seven days.

Eating nutritious, healthy food

Eating a nutritious and healthy diet is going to improve your overall health.

Quality nutrition is also especially beneficial for those who suffer from period diarrhea and other issues with their gastrointestinal tract.

Make sure to make your food rich in extra fiber, and stick to plain foods, as those are the best choices if you have diarrhea.

Reducing your intake of salt, sugar, and alcohol

Sugary foods, spicy foods, salty foods, and alcohol can worsen all period symptoms, but that is especially true for period diarrhea.

All four kinds of foods have to be ingested and then passed through. Avoid them to ease gastrointestinal symptoms.

Birth control

Being on hormonal birth control can help regulate your cycle and reduce period diarrhea.

Using birth control will make the period lighter and shorter, and it will aid cramping, therefore helping with period diarrhea. If you think that this option might be feasible for you, make sure to talk to your healthcare provider to find out.

Stress reduction

To deal with period diarrhea, it is imperative to take steps to reduce stress in your daily life.

Excessive stress and excessive anxiety can worsen common symptoms of menstruation and they make the suffering even harder, cramping, diarrhea, bloody stools, and vomiting included.

When To See A Doctor Regarding Period Diarrhea as one of the menstrual symptoms?

Dealing with period diarrhea can be uncomfortable, and it can affect your daily life, but not every instance of period diarrhea requires a visit to the doctor.

However, in some instances, period diarrhea does require a visit to the healthcare provider.

Make sure to see your doctor if you experience any of the following:

  • diarrhea lasting more than two days
  • blood in the stool, which may indicate a different, underlying health condition, as well as an infection
  • severe physical or psychological symptoms before or during periods, which can indicate an underlying health condition that needs to be treated

You should also make an appointment with your doctor or other healthcare professionals if you think you might have endometriosis.

The healthcare professional is going to be able to diagnose the condition and provide appropriate medication to ease the symptoms.

Conclusion

Ultimately, abnormal period poop is actually quite normal because it is normal for a bowel movement to be affected by all of the hormonal changes going on during the cycle.

If you are experiencing uncomfortable period diarrhea, certain lifestyle changes can help prevent and manage it.

However, if the pain is unmanageable and this side effect is messing up your daily life, a visit to the doctor is recommended.

What you need to know about period poops.

How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your period

How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your period

You’re probably pretty comfortable commiserating with your friends about how much cramps, bloating, and aches and pains suck on your period. But there’s one problem we talk about far less, and that should change: getting diarrhea on your period. Yup, period poops are totally a thing.

In fact, crappy symptoms like abdominal pain, bloating, gas, diarrhea, and constipation can all be pretty common during that time of the month, says Christine Greves, MD, an ob-gyn at the Orlando Health Winnie Palmer Hospital for Women and Babies. Nearly three-quarters of menstruating women say they have GI issues before their period, and another two-thirds get these types of symptoms during their period, per a 2014 study published in BMC Women’s Health. The most common GI complaints, though, are abdominal pain and diarrhea.

So, why must the period fairy bless you with period diarrhea on top of everything else? Read on for the answer, plus how to make period poops and gas a lot more bearable.

Tell me: Why do some people get diarrhea before or during their period?

While more studies are needed to determine *exactly* why, research suggests that hormone-like substances called prostaglandins and the sex hormone progesterone could be to blame, says Dr. Greves.

Here’s what happens: A few days before your period, the lining of your uterus begins to break down and releases prostaglandins, which cue the smooth muscles in your uterus to contract. If you have an excess of prostaglandins, though, your uterus could really start squeezing (the result: painful cramps). If that “contract, now!” message spreads even further, your intestines might start to get movin’, too. When that happens, what’s inside (you know, fecal matter) doesn’t have much of a chance to harden, which might be why you get period diarrhea.

Here’s what hormones could be contributing to those unpleasant bathroom trips — and how to control them.

Getting your period can throw your entire day out of whack. Cramps, fatigue, headaches, and spotting are just a few of the annoying symptoms that many people deal with before and during their periods. But one of the lesser-talked-about bodily shifts that many women experience are stool changes like diarrhea and constipation.

Diarrhea during your period isn’t something to worry about, according to certified nurse practitioner Lois McGuire from Mayo Clinic. She told Woman’s Day that many of the women she has treated experience constipation before or during their periods, so the diarrhea can be a relief. For others, however, it can be incredibly inconvenient. And, unfortunately, medical experts aren’t sure exactly what causes it, but they have a few theories.

Stool changes during your period could be the result of progesterone levels and uterus contractions.

According to one theory, changes in stool during your period might have something to do with levels of progesterone, one of the sex hormones involved in menstruation and pregnancy. “In the luteal phase of the period, or second half of your menstrual cycle, which is just before you menstruate, the progesterone levels go up,” McGuire said. “And progesterone, we think, slows down the motility of the GI tract and might have some impact on why people have constipation first, and then frequent stooling or diarrhea as soon as that progesterone drops.” Levels of progesterone dropping is what also causes you to have a period, she said.

How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your period

Second, when your progesterone levels drop, your uterus will contract to help expel its lining (which produces the blood of a period). Prostaglandins, which are “hormonelike substances involved in pain and inflammation,” are what cause those muscles to contract, according to Mayo Clinic. “Prostaglandins can have sort of a laxative effect,” McGuire said, leading experts to believe that they may also contribute to diarrhea during your period.

There are a few different ways to control your stools just before and during your period.

McGuire suggests eating less roughage, which is the part of plant foods that you can’t digest, generally the outside or skin. The skins of fruits, beans, potatoes, whole grains, and whole-grain cereal products are all roughage and contain insoluble fiber, according to WebMD. Whole foods such as brown rice, broccoli, spinach, carrots, cucumbers, lettuce, celery, and zucchini, also contain insoluble fiber and could contribute to diarrhea. Cutting these foods out of your diet entirely might not be a good idea, though, since they are thought to help with weight management, lower some risk factors for heart disease, and are a source of good bacteria for your gut, according to Healthline.

How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your period

Food with soluble fiber, on the other hand, might help diarrhea by “absorbing water and adding bulk to stools,” dietician Hilary Shaw told WebMD. Foods with soluble fiber include oats, legumes, sweet potatoes, apples, mangos, plums, berries, peaches, kiwi, and figs, according to WebMD. McGuire also suggests using a stool supplement like Citrucel, which also contains fiber that absorbs fluid to help make stools a little bulker.

Additionally, people who struggle with diarrhea during their periods could also consider using a birth control pill with estrogen and progesterone continuously, McGuire said. Using a birth control pill continuously, versus cyclically, would mean skipping the white placebo pills and immediately starting a new pack. Mayo Clinic notes that this approach works best if you’re on a monophasic pill, which has “the same hormone dose in the three weeks of active pills.”

How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your period

But even just being on the birth control pill might help with diarrhea or changes in stool, McGuire said, because the pill helps prevent progesterone levels from increasing as much. It also stops you from ovulating, and ovulation is what causes progesterone to increase. So McGuire said that even if you took birth control the traditional way, with the placebo pills, “that might be helpful, or you could take it continuously just to avoid periods and avoid the other symptoms that go along with a period too.” She said that people often worry that taking a birth control pill continuously will hurt them in some way, but a number of studies have shown that there are no negative health consequences.

Other hormonal birth control methods, like some forms of IUDs, might also help relieve diarrhea or constipation because they usually help to prevent cramps, but McGuire noted that they don’t stop you from ovulating.

In some cases, you may want to contact your doctor.

McGuire said that diarrhea or constipation during your period usually isn’t something to worry about, but if it’s accompanied by significant pain — worse than cramps — you might want to see a doctor. “If they’re having cyclic pain and the diarrhea, then they may want to be evaluated for endometriosis,” she said. If your pain can’t be controlled with ibuprofen, for example, that might be a sign of endometriosis, according to the Winnie Palmer Hospital. People with Irritable Bowel Syndrome (IBS) may also experience an increase in symptoms during their periods, McGuire said, but that usually isn’t cause for concern.

Generally, stool changes during your period are totally normal, and a few lifestyle changes might be all you need to prevent those unpleasant bathroom trips.

How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your period

Rod Brouhard is an emergency medical technician paramedic (EMT-P), journalist, educator, and advocate for emergency medical service providers and patients.

How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your period

Michael Menna, DO, is a board-certified, active attending emergency medicine physician at White Plains Hospital in White Plains, New York.

Nausea is the feeling of having to vomit. Pregnancy, vertigo, motion sickness, digestive infections (such as food poisoning), reactions to medication, and alcohol are the most common causes of nausea, but there are others. Motion sickness—more specifically, seasickness—is actually where the word nausea comes from; it has the same roots as the word nautical.

First Figure out Why You Feel Like Throwing Up

” data-caption=”” data-expand=”300″ data-tracking-container=”true” />

Russell Underwood / Getty Images

The best way to fix nausea is to fix the problem causing it. If the victim is getting motion sickness from a ride in the car—stop the car and take a break. Some folks have an easier time if they are driving the car, so if that’s a choice, let them drive. Reading or concentrating while riding can also trigger nausea, and the earlier you stop reading, the better you’ll feel.

If alcohol caused the nausea, don’t drink any more alcohol. Hair of the Dog is complete nonsense, by the way.

Since you can’t “cure” pregnancy or many of the other causes of nausea, here are a few things you can do to try reducing this miserable feeling.

Breathe

There are a few studies indicating that inhaling the fumes of isopropyl alcohol calm the feelings of nausea. However, when isopropyl alcohol was compared to saline—saline doesn’t have a smell—both helped ease feelings of nausea equally well. The authors suggested, and I tend to agree, that it was the deep, slow breathing that really made the patients feel better. In through the nose, out through the mouth. Repeat.  

Ginger or Vitamin B6

Ginger is emerging as a pretty good anti-nausea treatment. Vitamin B6 also has had some success. There’s not yet enough information to say whether ginger or vitamin B6 are safe in pregnancy (see below). For everyone else, it appears that ginger (at least 1,000 milligrams or 1 gram) or vitamin B6 (10 milligrams) are worth a try.

Pregnant women should be very careful about taking any type of medication or dietary supplement to control nausea and vomiting. It’s very hard to test medications during pregnancy since the effects could be permanent and devastating. Because of that, little evidence exists to show how safe certain medications are for pregnancy and even less evidence exists for dietary supplements, a category that doesn’t have the greatest track record for research anyway.

Anti-Emetics (Anti-Nausea Medications)

Antihistamines—usually used for allergies—are pretty good anti-nausea medications, and a few are sold strictly for that purpose. Two other classes of anti-nausea medicines are also available. Anti-emetics, the official term for anti-nausea medications, are not perfect.

Food poisoning causes vomiting for a reason. It is the body’s way of emptying the stomach of the offending bacteria. For the first 24 hours at least, vomiting from food poisoning should just happen. Your body knows when it really needs to expel nasty stuff from your gut and, when it does, anti-emetics aren’t going to help much.

If vomiting doesn’t stop after 24 hours, victims of food poisoning may need to see a healthcare provider. Too much uncontrolled vomiting can lead to dehydration.

Just like dietary supplements, medications aren’t always safe for use during pregnancy. Like I said before, it’s very hard to test medications on a pregnant woman because failure can be absolutely devastating.

See the Healthcare Provider

If all else fails, go to the healthcare provider. Because of the issues with pregnancy and anti-emetics, pregnant women should always consult with a healthcare provider before trying to treat any condition with medications.

For the rest of us, going to the healthcare provider should be the last resort, but there are some important triggers:

  • Signs of dehydration, fatigue or confusion deserve a trip to the healthcare provider’s office. If you are sick enough to have any of these, you shouldn’t wait any longer.
  • Vomiting blood
  • Extreme vertigo (dizziness) that won’t go away

If you can’t make the nausea go away and it is affecting your daily life, seeing your healthcare provider is the next logical step.

In this section:

How can I treat my acute diarrhea?

In most cases, you can treat your acute diarrhea with over-the-counter medicines such as loperamide (Imodium) and bismuth subsalicylate (Pepto-Bismol, Kaopectate). Doctors generally do not recommend using over-the-counter medicines for people who have bloody stools or fever—signs of infection with bacteria or parasites. If your diarrhea lasts more than 2 days, see a doctor right away.

How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your periodIn most cases, you can treat acute diarrhea with over-the-counter medicines.

When you have acute diarrhea, you may lose your appetite for a short time. When your appetite returns, you can go back to eating your normal diet. Learn more about eating when you have diarrhea.

How can I treat my child’s acute diarrhea?

Over-the-counter medicines to treat acute diarrhea in adults can be dangerous for infants, toddlers, and young children. Talk to a doctor before giving your child an over-the-counter medicine. If your child’s diarrhea lasts more than 24 hours, see a doctor right away.

You can give your child his or her usual age-appropriate diet. You can give your infant breast milk or formula as usual.

How do doctors treat persistent and chronic diarrhea?

How doctors treat persistent and chronic diarrhea depends on the cause. Doctors may prescribe antibiotics and medicines that target parasites to treat bacterial or parasitic infections. Doctors may also prescribe medicines to treat some of the conditions that cause chronic diarrhea, such as Crohn’s disease, irritable bowel syndrome, or ulcerative colitis. How doctors treat chronic diarrhea in children also depends on the cause.

Doctors may recommend probiotics. Probiotics are live microorganisms, most often bacteria, that are similar to microorganisms you normally have in your digestive tract. Researchers are still studying the use of probiotics to treat diarrhea.

For safety reasons, talk with your doctor before using probiotics or any other complementary or alternative medicines or practices. If your doctor recommends probiotics, talk with him or her about how much probiotics you should take and for how long.

How can I prevent diarrhea?

You can prevent certain types of diarrhea, such as those caused by infections—including rotavirus and traveler’s diarrhea—and foodborne illnesses.

Infections

You can reduce your chances of getting or spreading infections that can cause diarrhea by washing your hands thoroughly with soap and warm water for 15 to 30 seconds

  • after using the bathroom
  • after changing diapers
  • before and after handling or preparing food

Rotavirus, which causes viral gastroenteritis, was the most common cause of diarrhea in infants before rotavirus vaccines became available. The vaccines have reduced the number of cases of rotavirus and hospitalizations due to rotavirus among children in the United States. 1

Two oral vaccines are approved to protect children from rotavirus infections:

  • rotavirus vaccine, live, oral, pentavalent (RotaTeq). Doctors give infants this vaccine in three doses: at 2 months of age, 4 months of age, and 6 months of age.
  • rotavirus vaccine, live, oral (Rotarix). Doctors give infants this vaccine in two doses: at 2 months of age and at 4 months of age.

For the rotavirus vaccine to be effective, infants should receive all doses by 8 months of age. Infants 15 weeks of age or older who have never received the rotavirus vaccine should not start the series.

Parents or caregivers of infants should discuss rotavirus vaccination with a doctor.

Travelers’ diarrhea

To reduce the chances of getting travelers’ diarrhea when traveling to developing countries, avoid

  • drinking tap water
  • using tap water to make ice, prepare foods or drinks, or brush your teeth
  • drinking juice or milk or eating milk products that have not been pasteurized—heated to kill harmful microbes—viruses, bacteria, and parasites
  • eating food from street vendors
  • eating meat, fish, or shellfish that is raw, undercooked, or not served hot
  • eating raw vegetables and most raw fruits

You can drink bottled water, soft drinks, and hot drinks such as coffee or tea made with boiling water.

If you are worried about travelers’ diarrhea, talk with your doctor before traveling. Doctors may recommend taking antibiotics before and during a trip to help prevent travelers’ diarrhea. Early treatment with antibiotics can shorten a case of travelers’ diarrhea.

Foodborne illnesses

You can prevent foodborne illnesses that cause diarrhea by properly storing, cooking, cleaning, and handling foods.

How can I treat or prevent dehydration caused by diarrhea?

To treat or prevent dehydration, you need to replace lost fluids and electrolytes—called rehydration therapy—especially if you have acute diarrhea. Although drinking plenty of water is important in treating and preventing dehydration, you should also drink liquids that contain electrolytes, such as the following:

  • broths
  • caffeine-free soft drinks
  • fruit juices
  • sports drinks

If you are an older adult or have a weak immune system, you should also drink oral rehydration solutions, such as Pedialyte, Naturalyte, Infalyte, or CeraLyte. Oral rehydration solutions are liquids that contain glucose and electrolytes. You can make oral rehydration solutions at home (PDF, 184KB) .

How can I treat or prevent my child’s dehydration caused by diarrhea?

To treat or prevent dehydration, give your child liquids that contain electrolytes. You can also give your child an oral rehydration solution, such as Pedialyte, Naturalyte, Infalyte, or CeraLyte, as directed. Talk to a doctor about giving these solutions to your infant.

References

[1] Rotavirus in the U.S. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention website. www.cdc.gov. Updated May 12, 2014. Accessed November 21, 2016.

This content is provided as a service of the National Institute of Diabetes and Digestive and Kidney Diseases (NIDDK), part of the National Institutes of Health. The NIDDK translates and disseminates research findings to increase knowledge and understanding about health and disease among patients, health professionals, and the public. Content produced by the NIDDK is carefully reviewed by NIDDK scientists and other experts.

Media reports earlier this week described a Queensland nurse with stomach pains who went on to test positive for COVID-19.

Could stomach pains be another symptom of COVID-19? And if you have stomach pains, should you get tested?

Although we might think of COVID-19 as a respiratory disease, we know it involves the gut. In fact SARS-CoV-2, the virus that causes COVID-19, enters our cells by latching onto protein receptors called ACE2. And the greatest numbers of ACE2 receptors are in the cells that line the gut.

COVID-19 patients with gut symptoms are also more likely to develop severe disease. That’s partly because even after the virus has been cleared from the respiratory system, it can persist in the gut of some patients for several days. That leads to a high level of virus and longer-lasting disease.

We also suspect the virus can be transmitted via the fecal-oral route. In other words, the virus can be shed in someone’s poo, and then transmitted to someone else if they handle it and touch their mouth.

What type of gut symptoms are we talking about?

A review of more than 25,000 COVID-19 patients found about 18% had gastrointestinal symptoms. The most common was diarrhea followed by nausea and vomiting. Abdominal pain was considered rare. In another study only about 2% of COVID-19 patients had abdominal pain.

Some people believe COVID-19 causes abdominal pain through inflammation of the nerves of the gut. This is a similar way to how gastroenteritis (gastro) causes abdominal pain.

Another explanation for the pain is that COVID-19 can lead to a sudden loss of blood supply to abdominal organs, such as the kidneys, resulting in tissue death (infarction).

Are gut symptoms recognized?

The US Centers for Disease Control has added diarrhea, nausea and vomiting to its list of recognized COVID-19 symptoms.

However, the World Health Organization still only lists diarrhea as a gastrointestinal COVID-19 symptom.

In Australia, nausea, diarrhea and vomiting are listed as other COVID-19 symptoms, alongside the classic ones (which include fever, cough, sore throat and shortness of breath). But abdominal pain is not listed.

Advice of symptoms that warrant testing may vary across different states and territories.

How likely is it?

Doctors often use the concept of pre-test probability when working out if someone has a particular disease. This is the chance a person has the disease before we know the test result.

What makes it difficult to determine the pre-test probability for COVID-19 is we don’t know how many people in the community truly have the disease.

We do know, however, COVID-19 in Australia is much less common than in many other countries. This affects the way we view symptoms that aren’t typically associated with COVID-19.

It’s far more common for people’s abdominal pain to be caused by something other than COVID-19. For example, about a quarter of people at some point in their lives are known to suffer from dyspepsia (discomfort or pain in the upper abdomen). But the vast majority of people with dyspepsia do not have COVID-19.

Similarly, irritable bowl syndrome affects about 9% of Australians, and causes diarrhea. Again, the vast majority of people with irritable bowel syndrome do not have COVID-19.

So how about this latest case?

In the Queensland case, we know the nurse was worried he could have had COVID-19 because he was in close contact with COVID-19 patients.

As he seemed otherwise healthy before developing new abdominal symptoms, and considering he worked on a COVID ward, his pre-test probability was high. Doctors call this a “high index of suspicion” when there is a strong possibility someone may have symptoms due to a disease such as COVID-19.

What does this mean for me?

If you have new gastrointestinal symptoms and you’ve potentially been in contact with someone with COVID-19 or if you also have other classic COVID-19 symptoms (fever, cough, shortness of breath and sore throat) you should definitely get tested.

If you have just gastrointestinal symptoms, you may need to get tested if you’re in a “hotspot” area, or work in a high-risk occupation or industry.

If you have gastrointestinal symptoms alone, without any of these additional risk factors, there is no strong evidence to support testing.

However, if COVID-19 becomes even more common in the community, these symptoms now regarded as uncommon for COVID-19 will become more common.

If you have concerns about any gastrointestinal symptoms, seeing your GP would be sensible. Your GP will provide a balanced assessment based on your medical history and risk profile.

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article. How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your period

How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your period

  • Many women experience fly-like symptoms while on their period.
  • The reason for this is the hormonal changes occurring in your body at that time.
  • Luckily, they are easy to treat.

PMS is the worst. It seems to sneak up on you every month like clockwork — even though you know approximately what’s coming and when to expect it. Maybe you’ve enlisted natural remedies like probiotics and exercise. Or maybe you’ve tried couples therapy to reduce your PMS symptoms . But if, despite all of your defenses, you still find yourself feeling really under the weather around that time of the month, you’re not alone. (Yet another reason why you really need to talk about your period .) The internet is full of people trying to get to the bottom of cold- and flu-like symptoms that coincide with their monthly cycles: things like sinus pain , dizziness , fevers , head and body aches , and stuffy noses .

There’s a simple reason for all of these symptoms, but you’re not going to like it: hormones. According to Dr. Nieca Goldberg, Medical Director of the Joan H. Tisch Center for Women’s Health at the NYU Langone Medical Center, “Hormonal changes prior to your period can cause a range of symptoms, fatigue, abdominal cramping, bloating, back pains, and other body aches.” In other words, it’s all connected. One sufferer’s cramps have the same root cause as someone else’s headache. Dr. Goldberg explains that these symptoms “may be due to hormonal changes [like] lower levels of estrogen around your period.” Estrogen levels fall the week before your period — hence the achy aspects of PMS. There are knock-on effects for other hormones, including the ones that regulate sleep — so sleep deprivation might explain the fatigue.

Dr. Molly O’Shea has another answer: prostaglandins. “Prostaglandins can cause intestinal cramps, diarrhea, nausea, vomiting, a feeling of being flushed, and general achiness.” Since these chemicals can also impact your body’s temperature, they’re likely responsible for the flu-like fluctuations between warm and chilly. These temperature shifts might feel like a fever, but a quick thermometer reading should reassure you that everything is just fine.

Luckily, “period flu” is a lot easier to treat than the real one. (Gentle reminder: You need a flu shot to prevent that.) “For the body aches and cramping, over the counter medication such as ibuprofen or naproxen may help,” says Dr. Goldberg. “Treatment should be based on the severity of the symptoms and you should speak to your GYN, particularly if the symptoms keep you from work or your activities.” And if you’re not sure what painkiller is right for your symptoms, check our guide to avoiding wrong and harmful period cramp meds.

Above all, keep an eye on your symptoms, just in case they’re trying to tell you something. “Unlike the flu, these symptoms do not cause fever, and they improve after your period,” clarifies Dr. Goldberg. “So if you have a fever or the symptoms do not improve, you need to see your doctor.”

Sign up here to get INSIDER’s favorite stories straight to your inbox.

In this Article

  • Remedies and Treatments for Nausea
  • When to See a Doctor
  • Emergency Care

Nausea or an upset stomach makes you feel uneasy, weak, and sweaty. The queasiness that comes from nausea may lead to vomiting, but it doesn’t always happen.

The feeling of nausea can be caused by numerous conditions, including:В

  • Chemotherapy В
  • Emotional distress
  • Food poisoning
  • Gastritis, or an inflammation of the stomach lining
  • Migraine
  • Morning sickness
  • Motion sickness
  • Stomach flu

Nausea is not a disease but a common symptom of many conditions — from bacterial or viral infections to problems with internal organs, like the brain. Some medications list nausea as an adverse reaction or side effect.

Remedies and Treatments for Nausea

Most of the time nausea is not a cause for concern. However, there are actions you can take to minimize the unpleasant feeling.

Because nausea upsets your stomach, eating food may temporarily make things worse. A diet of clear liquids can provide the sugar, salt, and some nutrients your body needs until you can eat solid food again. Clear liquids are easy to digest and don’t put extra strain on your stomach or intestines.В

The best things to drink when you’re nauseous are:

  • Clear broth
  • Clear juices
  • Clear sports drinks
  • Clear soft drinks such as ginger ale, lemon-lime soda, or club soda
  • Coffee or tea without milk
  • Plain popsicles
  • Water

You should avoid alcoholic beverages, dairy products, smoothies, and vegetable juice.

If your nausea causes frequent vomiting, doctors may give you oral rehydration therapy, which involves drinking a rehydration solution that replaces the minerals and body fluids you lost.

Because peppermint tea contains a range of vitamins, minerals, and antioxidants, it is used for a variety of ailments. One of its most well-known traditional uses is to reduce nausea by soothing your stomach.В In oil form and through aromatherapy, peppermint has been studied as a nausea remedy among pregnant people.

To make this kind of tea, steep 1 teaspoon of dried peppermint leaves in a cup of boiling water and strain it after ten or so minutes. When it becomes a safe temperature to drink, slowly sip the infusion and let the benefits take effect.

Ginger is an herb that is widely used for its medicinal properties. One of the most common uses of ginger is as a remedy for nausea.В Multiple studies show how taking ginger powder capsules or concentrated ginger syrup can reduce nausea and vomiting caused by chemotherapy.

Although some women report heartburn or reflux when taking ginger, it is considered a safe and effective treatment for pregnancy-related morning sickness. It can also help with digestion and the flow of saliva.

You can find fresh ginger root at your grocery store, or you can buy ginger supplements.В

When to See a Doctor

Although nausea often isn’t serious, you should reach out to your doctor if your vomiting lasts more than two days for adults, more than 24 hours for children, or more than 12 hours for infants. You should also schedule an appointment if you’ve dealt with bouts of nausea for more than a month, or are experiencing unexplained weight loss in addition to nausea or vomiting.В

While you wait to speak with your doctor, make sure to stay hydrated, get plenty of rest, and eat bland foods. Keep track of your symptoms and watch for any signs of dehydration.

Emergency Care

If you experience nausea along with any of the following warning signs, you should call 911 or your primary doctor immediately — or go to the nearest urgent care facility or emergency room:В

  • Dark urine or infrequent urination
  • Dizziness or confusion
  • Dry mouth and other signs of dehydration
  • Extreme abdominal pain
  • Extreme headache
  • High fever
  • Multiple bouts of vomiting during a period lasting more than 24 hours
  • Reason to think that nausea and vomiting is due to food poisoning
  • Severe stiff neck
  • Some blood in your vomit

Show Sources

Cedars-Sinai: “Clear Liquid Diet.”

Mayo Clinic: “Nausea and vomiting – Causes.”

Mayo Clinic: “Nausea and vomiting – When to see a doctor.”

Integrative Medicine Insights: “The Effectiveness of Ginger in the Prevention of Nausea and Vomiting during Pregnancy and Chemotherapy.”

Johns Hopkins Medicine: “Nausea.”

Journal of Reproduction & Infertility: “Effect of Aromatherapy with Peppermint Oil on the Severity of Nausea and Vomiting in Pregnancy: A Single-blind, Randomized, Placebo-controlled trial.”

Mount Sinai: “Peppermint.”

Stanford Health Care: “Chronic Nausea Treatments.”

In our latest question and answer, the pharmacist discusses what to do if amoxicillin is causing too much nausea or GI distress.

How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your period

How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your period

Katie asked

I have been taking Amoxicillin 125 mg tablets 2x/day for 5 days for an ear and sinus infection. Since the second day, my stomach has been hurting and has been worse each day. I have 3 more pills left and can’t stand the thought of taking it for two more days. My sinuses feel better but my ears still have fluid in them. Rolaids helps a little but only for a few minutes. Should I tough it out or call for something different? Is there anything I can do to ease this terrible stomach ache?

Answer

How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your periodNausea from courses of antibiotics are extremely common. With amoxicillin specifically, nausea and related GI problems (e.g. diarrhea, vomiting) are the most commonly reported side effects.

There are some strategies that could potentially help to reduce the nausea you are feeling from amoxicillin, including:

  • Taking amoxicillin after food.
  • Taking a probiotic continuously through the course of amoxicillin.
  • Taking amoxicillin with a large amount of water.
  • Remain standing and do not lie down after taking amoxicillin for 30 minutes.

We discuss these in more detail below. If these strategies don’t work to reduce the nausea you are feeling, be sure to reach out to your doctor for an alternative antibiotic that may be better tolerated for you.

Strategies To Reduce Nausea From Amoxicillin

Take Amoxicillin After Food

While it is a fairly common recommendation to take medication like amoxicillin with food to reduce nausea and GI upset, it generally is more beneficial to have food in your stomach before taking a dose of medication.

Eating stimulates gastric acid secretion, which will help to digest the amoxicillin. In addition, food generally delays gastric (i.e. stomach) emptying, which will help the medication to release a little slower into the GI tract, making it more likely to be better tolerated.

If eating any food in general causes nausea, with or without amoxicillin, you may have a problem with acid reflux or other related issues. In this case, it may be beneficial to take an antacid at the same time, such as Tums or Rolaids.

It should be noted that antacids interact with many medications so be sure to discuss the use of antacids with other medications with your doctor or pharmacist. Antacids are considered safe to use with amoxicillin however and may help.

If antacids only work temporarily, try continuous dosing for at least a few days with other antacids such as H2 blockers like Zantac or PPI medications like Prilosec. These generally are more effective for longer periods of time than antacids like Tums and Rolaids.

Taking Amoxicillin With Probiotics

Probiotics have growing evidence that they can be very effective for treating what is known as “antibiotic-associated diarrhea” as well as nausea caused from them.

Antibiotics, like amoxicillin, kill off the normal gut flora, giving an opportunity for pathogenic (i.e. disease causing) bacteria to overgrow. This can be a particular problem with antibiotics such as amoxicillin, which is a “broad spectrum” antibiotic, meaning it kills off many different kinds of bacteria, both good and bad.

Taking a probiotic is thought to help replenish normal, healthy bacteria in the gut, preventing and decreasing overgrowth of “bad” bacteria.

Both adults and children who take probiotics with antibiotics, like amoxicillin, reduce the risk of diarrhea by almost half according to some studies.

Taking an over the counter probiotic may be a good option and there are many different products to choose from. Most evidence points to lactobacillus species, such as lactobacillus acidophilus, being the most effective. Lactobacillus products include:

  • Culturelle
  • BioGaia
  • Bio-K+
  • Proviva
  • Florajen

Other bacteria species, such as bifidobacteria and Saccharomyces boulardii also have good evidence for benefit. They are available in such products as:

  • Florastor
  • Garden Of Life RAW Probiotics

Probiotics are generally considered safe to use and have a good safety profile. They are a good option to take alongside amoxicillin to reduce nausea.

Take Amoxicillin With Water

Drinking a large amount of water, at least 8 ounces, with amoxicillin may help reduce nausea. A sufficient amount of water allows the medication to properly dissolve in the stomach. Many times, the actual contents of medications (e.g. the powder) can be extremely irritating to the stomach, which can cause nausea. Water also helps dilute stomach acids, which can be irritating and cause nausea.

Do Not Lie Down After Taking Amoxicillin

Amoxicillin has been associated with esophagitis (irritation of the esophagus) in some individuals. Not only can esophagitis be irritating, it can actually induce nausea. To avoid the risk of esophagitis, it is important to not lie down for at least 30 minutes after taking amoxicillin. This is a common recommendation for many other medications as well.

Summary

There are many strategies to reduce the nausea caused by amoxicillin. They include:

  • Taking amoxicillin after food
  • Taking amoxicillin with an antacid
  • Taking amoxicillin with probiotics
  • Taking amoxicillin with plenty of water
  • Do not lie down for 30 minutes after taking amoxicillin

If all else fails, be sure to talk to your doctor about alternative antibiotics which may be better tolerated for you.

Have you ever wondered why poops are different during your period? While people might not talk about it, most women will experience a monthly change in their toilet habits. In addition to your period causing symptoms like headaches, bloating, and skin breakouts, your menstrual cycle can also affect your digestive system. One reason for this is because the same hormones that stimulate uterine contractions can also stimulate your bowels. The result: period poops.

Symptoms

So, what exactly are period poops? Although you won’t find this term in a medical dictionary, it’s a common way to describe changes in your bowel movements around the time of your period. A recent study showed that gastric symptoms (similar to those experienced with IBS), are common during your period.

Some symptoms of period poops can include:

  • Abdominal pain
  • Diarrhea
  • Nausea
  • Constipation
  • Bloating

In addition to proving that period poops are a common occurrence, the study also showed that you’re more likely to experience digestive issues during your period if you’re also experiencing emotional symptoms, like depressed mood and anxiety.
‍

What causes period poops?

Who’s the culprit? First off, it might be your hormones. Period poops can be caused by two hormones called prostaglandins and progesterone.

Additionally, your digestive symptoms might worsen due to stress levels or changes in your diet (like, for instance, how your period makes you want to eat a box of donuts for dinner).

1. Higher levels of prostaglandins

Before the start of your period, the cells in your uterus begin to release prostaglandins to kick start contractions that shed the lining of your uterus.

Prostaglandins may also be released into your bloodstream. While prostaglandins do a good (and sometimes painful) job of getting the walls of the uterus to contract as part of your monthly menses (aka, your period), these hormones can also cause the muscles of the intestines to contract.

This can cause symptoms such as:

  • Cramps
  • Nausea
  • Abdominal pain

Additionally, prostaglandins may cause the body to absorb more water and make stools softer, causing diarrhea. This may be worsened if you drink coffee while on your period, as caffeine has a laxative effect.

2. Higher levels of progesterone

Progesterone is another type of hormone released into your body as part of your monthly cycle. Progesterone helps regulate your period: levels of this hormone rise to prepare your body for conception and pregnancy, then drop at the start of your menses if no egg is fertilized.

Progesterone helps thicken the lining of the uterus so that a fertilized egg may develop, but this hormone can have other effects on the body too.

In some people, progesterone can also cause loose and watery stools and diarrhea. While for others, it can cause constipation. This is because high levels of progesterone can cause digested materials to travel more slowly through your system.

For people living with existing bowel issues, such as Crohn’s disease or irritable bowel syndrome (IBS), progesterone can make their symptoms worse. For example, people with IBS are more likely to experience additional symptoms, such as abdominal pain and headaches, during the period.

3. Changes in diet

Ever wondered why you reach for more sweet or salty foods during your period? Once more, your hormones are to blame. During the luteal phase (after ovulation and before you period) increased levels of progesterone may induce unusual cravings and influence your diet.

For people who eat a generally healthy diet, the sudden introduction of new or unhealthy foods can also change the smell of poop.

For example, eating foods high in fat and sugar lead to a change in the consistency, regularity, and smell of your stools during your period.

If you’re worried about your poop suddenly smelling worse during your period, try and avoid overeating and cut out refined sugars and processed foods.

4. Stress and anxiety

Changes in mood and stress levels are common during your period. Again, this can be linked to changes in hormone levels throughout your menstrual cycle. Studies have shown that your cycle can affect mood regulation and increase negative emotions and sensitivity to stress.

Stress and anxiety have been shown to affect bowel movements and can cause diarrhea or constipation. This is because what happens in your brain can affect what happens in your gut.
The nerves in your stomach are linked to the brain through an internal link called the gut-brain connection.

While this means stress and anxiety can directly upset your gut, it also means you have the power to help reduce physical symptoms with your mind.

A recent study by Australian researchers showed that hypnotherapy is an effective treatment for irritable bowel syndrome (IBS) because it helps people retrain their gut-brain connection.

  • Medical Author: Karthik Kumar, MBBS
  • Medical Reviewer: Pallavi Suyog Uttekar, MD
  • Medical Author: Dr. Jasmine Shaikh, MD

How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your period

People with diarrhea should eat small meals throughout the day instead of three big meals—clear liquids and plain foods that are easy to digest. Diarrhea, or loose watery stools, may be caused by stomach flu, food poisoning, radiation, chemotherapy, other medications, and infections. The following diet tips may help control diarrhea.

  • People with diarrhea should include binding foods such as bananas, plain white rice, applesauce, and white toast while they have active episodes of loose stools.
  • Drink plenty of water or low-sugarbeverages to replace the fluids lost from diarrhea.
  • Drink plenty of clear liquids and electrolyte beverages such as water, clear fruit juices, coconut water, oral rehydration solutions, and sports drinks. These drinks help replenish fluids and electrolytes in the body.
  • Add plain yogurt, buttermilk, and kefir to your diet.
  • Eat foods high in potassium and sodium to replace the minerals lost from diarrhea.
    • High-potassium foods include apricots, avocado, bananas, canned tomatoes, oranges, pears, potatoes and sweet potatoes (especially baked), and tomato juice.
    • High-sodium foods include broth or bouillon, canned soup, salty snacks (chips, crackers, pretzels), seasoned rice, and pasta packets.
  • Applesauce is an awesome aid to get your stomach back in working order. It’s easy to digest, but still delivers important nutrients such as pectin (a type of fiber) and potassium, a mineral that functions as an electrolyte to help keep fluid levels balanced.
  • Cooking vegetables such as carrots or spinach makes them easier to digest and they’re perfect in egg scrambles or broth-based soups. Eggs are an easier-to-digest alternative and an easy way to meet your protein needs without getting too full, too fast.
  • Adding whole grains can both soothe stomach ailments and prevent any future intestinal issues. Soluble fiber from oats draws water into your digestive tract and moves food through your body.
  • Try some ginger tea bags or simply grate fresh ginger into some hot water with lemon and sip it. Ginger is anti-spasmodic and is considered very good for soothing an unsettled stomach.
  • Chicken soup is also a classic choice when people are ill. The chicken component is lean meat (alternatives can also include turkey, white fish, or oven-boiled eggs) that allows you to benefit from some protein and not too much fat that could risk bogging down your system. Protein is required for repair and recovery processes around the body—just what you need after fighting off an infection.

What type of food and drinks should be avoided during diarrhea?

People with diarrhea may be on a clear liquid diet for a day until the body recovers. Below are a few foods and drinks that should be especially avoided during diarrhea.

Grains

  • High fiber, whole-grain foods (bran, whole-wheat bread, whole-wheat pasta, whole-grain cereals, whole-grain crackers, and brown rice)

Fruits

  • Raw fruits with skin, juices with pulp, prune juice, apple juice, and canned fruit in heavy sugary syrup

Vegetables

  • Raw vegetables and vegetables with skins and seeds
  • Gas-forming vegetables (corn, dark leafy greens, broccoli, cauliflower, cabbage, beans, and peas)

Dairy

  • Full-fat dairy products (whole milk, cream, sour cream, ice cream, and cheese)

Proteins

  • Spicy and high-fat meats (fried meats or fried fish, bologna, salami, bacon, and hot dogs) nuts, seeds, and chunky nut butter

Beverages

  • Caffeinated or sugary drinks (coffee, tea, soda, energy drinks, alcohol, and drinks that contain sugar alcohols such as xylitol or sorbitol)

Others

  • Fried, greasy foods, sweets, and desserts
  • Spicy foods (pepper, strong spices, and hot sauce)
  • Foods and drinks made with sugar alcohols (Sugar alcohols include xylitol and sorbitol. They are found in many sugar-free products such as candies, gums, and snack bars. Read ingredient lists to look for sugar alcohols.)

How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your period

QUESTION

Why does diarrhea develop?

In practical terms, diarrhea develops when there is a larger-than-normal amount of water in the stool. When your digestive tract is healthy, processed food from the stomach and small intestines proceeds to the colon. In the colon, water is absorbed from the remaining waste matter until a solid stool is formed. However, if excess water is absorbed or if the processed food moves through the gastrointestinal tract too quickly, the stool won’t be solid and it will be passed in a loose or watery form.

There are various possible reasons why the colon might not be absorbing enough water or why the digested food is moving too quickly through the intestines, but here are some of the most common causes.

  • Ingesting food or water that has been contaminated by bacteria and bacterial toxins
  • Ingesting food or water that has been contaminated by parasites
  • Inflammatory bowel disease (IBD) affects the gastrointestinal tract
  • Viruses such as norovirus, rotavirus, or the flu
  • Sensitivities or intolerances to certain types of foods; a classic example is lactose intolerance
  • Some medicines including cancerdrugs, antibiotics, or magnesium-containing antacids

Diarrhea and vomiting affects over a million people in the United States each year. It can be caused by viral gastroenteritis, bacterial infections, or even food poisoning. Eating undercooked fish or meats can also cause an infection.

Vomiting up food or having diarrhea is the body’s way of getting rid of something that is upsetting your digestive system. During this time, you don’t want to eat much and this helps to give things a rest so you can heal from whatever made you sick. This article will help you understand some of the common causes and what you can do to feel better.

Common Causes of Diarrhea and Vomiting

Virus Stomach Flu

The “stomach flu” isn’t actually a flu, but a viral infection known asviral gastroenteritis. There are several viruses that can cause the symptoms and they are very contagious. One way it can be spread is through contaminated food or water. This condition is often found in daycares, cruise ships, and school settings.

  • Symptoms

Symptoms of viral gastroenteritis include vomiting, nausea, diarrhea, headache, body aches, weight loss, and abdominal cramping. You may also have chills, fever, and cold sweats.

  • At-risk group

People at higher risk for the stomach flu include young children in daycare, elderly living in nursing homes, and people with low immune system function.

  • Treatment and prevention

Viral gastroenteritis usually clears up on its own in a few days to a little over a week. Treatment includes increasing fluid intake so you don’t get dehydrated. Some people have to be put in the hospital to receive extra fluids intravenously.

Stomach flu can be prevented through increased hand washing, drinking bottled clean water, and only eating foods and meats that are fully cooked. People who are suffering from the stomach flu should not prepare foods that others will be eating. In daycare centers, keep all toys clean and sanitized since small children tend to put toys in their mouths.

Food Poisoning

Food that is contaminated by either a virus or bacteria, and other contaminants can cause food poisoning. If hand washing isn’t a common practice prior to handling foods, it can transmit germs and make people sick. It can also be caused by undercooked foods likeeggs, meats, and seafood. Food poisoning is a common cause of diarrhea and vomiting and the illness can set in within minutes to hours after eating contaminated food.

  • Symptoms

The symptoms of food poisoning include nausea, vomiting, diarrhea, abdominal cramping, fever, headaches, and fatigue.

  • How long it lasts

Food poisoning usually lasts between 24 hours to 10 days depending on what caused the illness and your health condition.

  • Treatment

Food poisoning usually just has to run its course. In the meantime, it is important to drink plenty of fluids to avoid dehydration. In some cases, if the illness was caused by bacteria, antibiotics may be needed.

Other Causes of Diarrhea and Vomiting

There are a few other causes of vomiting and diarrhea that are unrelated to contaminated foods or viral infections. These include:

  • Appendicitis
  • Meningitis
  • Antibiotic side-effects
  • Chemotherapy
  • Narcotic drugs
  • Anti-inflammatories
  • Food allergies
  • Alcohol intake
  • Insect bites
  • Pollution
  • Eating toxic plants or wild mushrooms
  • Head injury/concussion
  • Anxiety or panic disorders
  • Bowel disease

How to Deal with Diarrhea and Vomiting

Prevent Dehydration

For anyone suffering from vomiting and diarrhea, the most important part of recovery is to prevent dehydration. Use the following instructions to help replace lost fluids:

  • Infants under one year: Breastfeed as normal if you are nursing your baby. Breast milk contains all the necessary electrolytes and fluids your baby needs. For bottle-fed babies, give he/she a formula that is lactose-free until the vomiting and diarrhea stop. If your baby continues to vomit or have diarrhea, your pediatrician may want to use only electrolyte replacement for 12 to 24 hours. Do not give plain water to infants.
  • Toddlers over one year and children: Give your child electrolyte replacement solution to prevent dehydration for the first day. For toddlers and children having diarrhea and vomiting, you can start clear liquid diet after the first 24 hours. Try not to use soda or plain water, because they do not have the proper electrolytes and can make your child worse.
  • For older children, adults, and elderly: Use an electrolyte replacement drink for the first 24 hours and try to drink at least seven 8-ounce-glasses of water daily. Elderly adults need to use electrolyte replacement until the illness clears off completely. Avoid caffeinated drinks and alcohol as they can dehydrate you more.

    Eat the Proper Foods

    If you can’t tolerate a full diet, eat nutrient-rich things that are easy to keep down. Make sure you eat foods high in potassium like baked potatoes with the skin on, bananas, high-sodium foods, and yogurt for the active bacteria. Try these recipes that contain electrolytes and nutrients:

    • Smoothie with banana, almond and kale

    How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your period

    Bananas will give you potassium, while kale has the important electrolyte calcium. You can also get lots of magnesium and extra potassium from almonds. A dash of salt will give you needed sodium to help balance everything. To make this smoothie, place two bananas in your blender and add a small handful of almonds and pour in some soymilk. Blend this mixture first and throw in some kale and a dash of sea salt. Blend for a minute more and enjoy.

    • Papaya tea

    How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your periodYou can get an electrolyte boost from papaya. Take a raw papaya and grate. Add grated papaya to boiling water and boil for ten minutes. Place extra tea in a jar and drink a few times a day while you are sick.

    • Follow the B.R.A.T. diet

    How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your period

    The B.R.A.T. diet consists of bananas, rice, applesauce, and toast. These are helpful during the first 48 hours of having vomiting and diarrhea.

    When You Should Get Medical Attention

    Diarrhea and vomiting usually go away on their own with no complications. However, you should get medical attention as soon as possible if the following occurs:

    • You begin vomiting blood or have blood in your bowel movements
    • You notice that your skin or white of your eyes are turning yellow
    • You develop severe abdominal pain with bowel movements
    • You cannot keep any fluids down for longer than a 12-hour period
    • If you are vomiting after a head injury with a headache
    • If you are running a fever over 101°F (38.3 °C) with diarrhea
    • Constant vomiting that lasts longer than a 12-hour period
    • Constant and severe pain in the abdomen
    • Your heart is beating very fast
    • Continuous diarrhea and vomiting
    • Diarrhea that does not subside after a 2-day period

    How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your period

    Diarrhea is a common ailment that most everyone experiences from time to time. It is characterized by the passing of loose, watery stool accompanied by abdominal pain and cramping.

    Diarrhea typically clears up on its own within a few days, but severe or chronic diarrhea that lasts for weeks can be a sign of a serious health problem that needs medical attention.

    Most Recent in Diarrhea

    Dos and Don’ts for Quick Relief of Diarrhea

    How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your period

    FDA Urges Makers of Diarrhea Drug to Help Stop Abuse

    How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your period

    How to Keep Antibiotics From Causing Diarrhea

    How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your period

    3 Ways to Treat Diarrhea

    How to treat nausea and diarrhea during your period

    Symptoms of Diarrhea

    The main and most recognizable symptom of diarrhea is the passing of loose, watery stool that occurs three or more times a day. Diarrhea may also lead to the following symptoms:

    • Pain or cramping in the abdomen
    • An urgent need to go to the bathroom
    • Nausea
    • A loss of control of bowel movements

    If diarrhea is caused by an infection, people may also experience:

    Diarrhea may also cause dehydration and malabsorption, each of which has its own symptoms.

    Signs of dehydration include: thirst, urinating less frequently than normal, dark-colored urine, dry mouth, feeling tired, sunken eyes or cheeks, light-headedness or fainting, and a decreased skin turgor (when the skin is pinched and released, it does not flatten back to normal right away).

    Symptoms of malabsorption include bloating, gas, changes in appetite, weight loss, and loose, greasy, foul-smelling bowel movements, notes the National Institute of Diabetes and Digestive and Kidney Diseases. (1)

    Common Questions & Answers

    Causes of Diarrhea

    Diarrhea can be caused by a number of factors. The most common causes of diarrhea are:

    Infection The three types of infections that cause diarrhea are:

    • Viral infections, including norovirus and rotavirus
    • Bacterial infections, which can enter the body through contaminated food or water. Common bacteria that cause diarrhea include Campylobacter, Escherichia coli (E. coli), Salmonella, and Shigella.
    • Parasitic infections, in which parasites enter the body through food or water and settle into the digestive tract. Common parasites that cause bacteria include Cryptosporidium, Entamoeba histolytica, and Giardia lamblia.

    Traveler’s Diarrhea This type of diarrhea is caused by eating food or drinking water contaminated with bacteria, viruses, or parasites while traveling abroad, usually in a developing country. Traveler’s diarrhea is usually acute, but certain parasites cause diarrhea to last longer.

    Side Effect of Medication Many medications may cause diarrhea. If you believe your medication is the cause of your diarrhea, talk to your healthcare provider. He or she may alter the dose or switch you to another medication.

    Food Allergies and Intolerance Sometimes diarrhea is caused by an allergy to certain foods, such as dairy, soy, eggs, or seafood. In these cases, diarrhea is often chronic.

    Lactose intolerance is a common condition that can cause diarrhea and other gastrointestinal symptoms after you eat foods or drink liquids containing cow’s milk or milk products. Celiac disease, which is caused by an allergy to gluten, can also lead to chronic diarrhea.

    Digestive Disorders Diarrhea can be a sign of a more serious health problem, such as a disorder of the digestive system. These can include irritable bowel syndrome (IBS) or an inflammatory bowel disease like Crohn’s disease or ulcerative colitis.

    Diarrhea may also be a sign of bacterial overgrowth in the small intestine. (1)

    Our content is not intended nor recommended as a substitute for medical advice by your doctor. Use for informational purposes only.

    According to studies, diarrhea after colonoscopy affects about 6.3% of people under colonoscopy ( reference ).

    Loose stool or diarrhea are considered minor complications. It is usually due to the preparation solutions before colonoscopy. This article will discuss the major causes of acute and chronic diarrhea after colonoscopy.

    The two major causes of ACUTE diarrhea after colonoscopy are:

    • Colon preparation after effects.
    • Infection (enteritis or colitis).

    The two major causes of CHRONIC diarrhea after colonoscopy are:

    • Persistence of the original bowel disease.
    • Disturbance of fecal microbiota.

    1- Normal “colon preparation after effect”

    Colonoscopy preparations such as MiraLax (Polyethylene glycol) intend to cause diarrhea. So, you should expect to have diarrhea or loose (thin) stools during the intake of colon preparation and after colonoscopy.

    Colonoscopy preparation is far the most common cause of diarrhea after colonoscopy ( reference ).

    For how long shall you have diarrhea after a colonoscopy?

    Diarrhea from bowel preparation may last for about 1-3 days. If diarrhea lasts for more than three days, it is better to call your doctor.

    Colon preparations (such as MiraLax) may also cause side effects as ( reference ):

    • Abdominal pain after colonoscopy .
    • Gas and bloating.
    • Abdominal discomfort.
    • Dehydration and disturbance of your body electrolytes (such as potassium and sodium).
    • Nausea.
    • Vomiting during or after colonoscopy preparation.

    How to deal with post-colonoscopy diarrhea due to colon preparation?

    • Avoid using laxatives or other medications that cause diarrhea.
    • Avoid fatty and difficult-to-digest foods.
    • Drink plenty of water or other fluids to prevent dehydration.
    • Avoid alcohol and caffeinated drinks.
    • Eat bland, easy-to-digest foods such as BRAT Diet (bananas, rice, apple sauce, and toast).
    • Diarrhea or loose stool often resolve after a couple of days. Call your doctor if diarrhea lasts for more than 3 days after colonoscopy.

    2- Infection.

    The gut or colon infection is rare after colonoscopy, but it happens. The risk increases with certain diseases or procedures such as polyposis, IBD, or polyp removal.

    Diarrhea due to infection after colonoscopy tends to be more severe. It can also be associated with systemic symptoms. The following may help you identify infection-related diarrhea:

    • The diarrhea is more intense with frequent bowel movements.
    • Abdominal cramps are unusually severe.
    • Fever may be present, and it can be high grade.
    • Muscle aches and fatigue.
    • Nausea and vomiting may also occur.
    • Passage of mucus or blood in the stool.

    Also, a systemic infection may occur due to the leakage of bacteria into your blood ( reference ).

    The infection is predominant during colonoscopy procedures. Common procedures include removing a polyp or taking a biopsy from a colon mass.

    What to do if you suspect infection as a cause of diarrhea after a colonoscopy?

    • You have to call your doctor if you have signs of inflammatory diarrhea.
    • Your doctor may prescribe an antibiotic and antispasmodic medication to treat the infection.
    • You should also bear in mind that this is a rare complication. And Antibiotic prophylaxis before a colonoscopy is still not recommended by The Americal Society of Gastrointestinal Endoscopy (ASGE) .
    • The general tips such as staying hydrated, eating bland food, and avoiding alcohol also helps.

    3- Allergy to the disinfecting solution (chemical colitis).

    Accidental contamination of the endoscope with a disinfection material called (glutaraldehyde) can result in inflammation of your colon.

    However, the condition is less common. Under normal circumstances, The colonoscope is rinsed after sterilization. This is to get rid of such a substance before its usage.

    The disinfecting solution causes chemical colitis which results in diarrhea after colonoscopy with severe symptoms such as ( reference ):

    • The symptoms start 1-3 days after colonoscopy.
    • Severe abdominal pain (cramps).
    • Mucoid and sometimes, bloody diarrhea.
    • Rectal bleeding.
    • Tenesmus (constant urge to poop, even immediately after bowel movements).
    • Nausea or vomiting can occur.
    • Fever.

    The condition is difficult to diagnose due to:

    • the symptoms are similar to infectious colitis, post polypectomy coagulation syndrome, and other causes of colitis.
    • There is no specific test to diagnose such a condition and re-endoscopy only reveals non-specific inflammation of the colon mucosa.

    The condition is unlikely to happen if the colonoscopy center adheres to the standard disinfection and rinsing protocols.

    Call your doctor if your diarrhea shows inflammatory signs (blood, mucus, fever, intense abdominal pain).

    4- Persistence of the original cause (chronic or recurrent diarrhea after colonoscopy.

    Often, You’re are undergoing colonoscopy for a reason. Some chronic bowel diseases may be the cause of your diarrhea after colonoscopy.

    Check if you already have been diagnosed with one of the conditions. The conditions below can be the cause of diarrhea after colonoscopy (rather than the colonoscopy itself):

    • Irritable bowel syndrome.
    • Celiac disease.
    • Crohn’s disease.
    • Ulcerative colitis.
    • Colorectal cancer.
    • Microscopic colitis.
    • Bile acid diarrhea.
    • Food intolerances Such as lactose intolerance.
    • Recurrent Clostridioides difficile diarrhea.
    • SIBO (small intestinal bacterial overgrowth).
    • And many others .

    If you’re already a chronic diarrhea sufferer before colonoscopy, the cause usually persists after colonoscopy.

    5- Disturbance of Microbiome (can lead to chronic diarrhea).

    We are still don’t understand the gut microbiome well enough. The microbiome is the colonies of beneficial bacteria that live inside your gut (including the colon).

    The microbiota helps to:

    • Regulate your bowel movements.
    • Digest food and nutrients.
    • Prevent indigestion, bloating, and abdominal pain.
    • Help to fight the bad gut bugs.
    • Improve your gut immunity.

    Bowel preparation essentially cleans out your entire small and large intestine.

    Theoretically, Bowel preparation will push the beneficial microbiome out of your body. Loss of gut microbiota may result in diarrhea after colonoscopy. Diarrhea from microbiome disturbance may become chronic.

    However, Current research states the “most” of the microbiota return to your colon within two to four weeks ( reference ).

    We don’t have strong evidence that disturbed gut microbiota leads to post colonoscopy diarrhea.

    We still don’t know if it reverts to 100% of its previous condition or less than 100%.

    Discuss the issue with your doctor if you have chronic diarrhea after colonoscopy.

    Your doctor may prescribe a probiotic for such a case. A probiotic is a living microbiota in the form of tablets or powders. Taking a probiotic may help your colon to restore its normal microbiota. Learn More.

    Around 80% of women have experienced stomach pain during periods, also known as menstrual cramps at some point in their life. Usually, menstrual cramp pain is mild. But sometimes it can be severe. The pains can vary from sharp stabs that make you double over to a nagging pain that spreads through the lower abdomen and lower back. Some women also experience dizziness, nausea, diarrhea or vomiting.

    Menstrual Cramps (Medical Term Dysmenorrhoea) are Classified as

    1. Primary Dysmenorrhoea

    • Arises in women under the age of 20.
    • One may feel mild to severe pain in the lower abdomen, back, and thighs. It starts right before the period and usually lasts between 12-72 hours.
    • Due to pain caused by uterine muscle contractions. During menses, a high level of prostaglandins has released that act as chemical messengers which shed the uterine lining (when fertilization has not taken place) by uterine contraction causing pain during menstruation.

    2. Secondary Dysmenorrhoea

    • One may feel mild to severe pain in your lower abdomen, back, and thighs. It starts right before your period and usually lasts between 12-72 hours.
    • It often first arises after a young woman has already been menstruating for several years. Here, women may also have pain at times of the month other than during menstruation.
    • Pain during menstruation such as benign uterine growths (fibroids and polyps), endometriosis – uterine tissue lining growing outside the uterus elsewhere in the abdomen or pelvis, PID(pelvic inflammatory disease) – infection of the upper part of the female reproductive system.

    Treatment for Stomach Pain During Periods

    Scientifically proven advice has always been the NSAIDs (non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs), these lower the level of prostaglandins. (eg- Ibuprofen, Naproxen, Meftal spas). Another piece of advice is to take on Oral Contraceptive Pills, these will prevent ovulation and before following these treatment options you must get consulted with the best doctor to identify the underlying causes of the pain.

    The Following Approaches also Should be Tried

    • Applying heat by using hot water bottles or heating pads, taking a warm bath or going to the sauna
    • Fortify: Vitamin B1 or magnesium supplements may reduce cramps, bloating and other PMS symptoms. (You know the parental approval deal). Special diets and dietary supplements
    • Herbal products and herbal teas for medicinal us, homeopathic medicines.
    • Procedures which target pain stimuli, such as acupuncture, acupressure or TENS (transcutaneous electrical nerve stimulation)

    Lifestyle Changes That Help Relieve Stomach Pain During Periods

    It may be possible to find ways to deal with the “painful” days so they are less of a problem. For example, many women try to take things a bit easier in those days. Some find that relaxation techniques, breathing exercises, yoga or tai chi help them feel more relaxed and reduce stress. Getting a lot of exercises also helps relieve stomach pain during periods in some women.

    Measures that may reduce the risk of Menstrual Cramps Include:

    • Eating fruits and vegetables and limiting the intake of fat, alcohol, caffeine, salt, and sweets
    • Exercising regularly
    • Reducing stress
    • Quitting smoking

    If these also do not help over 2-3 months, then you can ask a gynecologist, to rule out infection or growth. Hence invasive procedures might be done for diagnostic purposes.

    There is Another Type of Pain known as the Mittelschmerz
    Mittelschmerz is one-sided, lower abdominal pain associated with ovulation. German for “middle pain,” mittelschmerz occurs midway through a menstrual cycle — about 14 days before your next menstrual period.

    The Exact Cause of Mittelschmerz is Unknown, but Possible Reasons for the Pain Include these
    • Just before an egg is released with ovulation, follicle growth stretches the surface of your ovary, causing pain.
    • Blood or fluid released from the ruptured follicle irritates the lining of your abdomen (peritoneum), leading to pain.

    Mittelschmerz Pain Usually lasts a Few Minutes to a Few Hours, but it may continue for as long as a day or two.
    • On one side of your lower abdomen
    • Dull and cramp-like
    • Sharp and sudden
    • Accompanied by mild vaginal bleeding or discharge
    • Rarely, severe

    Mittelschmerz pain occurs on the side of the ovary that’s releasing an egg (ovulating). The pain may switch sides every other month, or you may feel pain on the same side for several months.

    If the cramp/pain occurs mid-cycle and goes away without medication it is more likely to be Mittelschmerz. That’s the way to differentiate between dysmenorrhea and Mittelschmerz, and this type of pain rarely requires medical attention as it goes on its own.

    Do you have diarrhea almost every month? If you are having diarrhea for fourteen days or less, it’s highly likely that the cause is linked to an infection, a new medication, stress, a certain item in your diet, running, or menstruation. In this article we will look at how diarrhea is linked to menstruation. Keep reading to find out why you might have diarrhea before menstrual cycle.

    The most common stress and pain causing factors during and before menses are bloating, acne, nausea, headaches, backaches. These are accompanied by emotional issues such as food carvings, mood swings, low tolerance levels, irritability, and reduced concentration.

    Diarrhea is also one of the common symptoms and problems for most women. When you have abdominal problems such as diarrhea, bloating, and constipation, they will help to cause bouts of pain during menstruation.

    Diarrhea before Menstrual Cycle

    Your hormones play a vital part during monthly menstruation as the estrogen and progesterone levels increase to trigger the discharge of chemicals from the uterus lining cells.

    These chemicals are prostaglandins, which are hormone-like compound, that cause the uterus muscles contract and the lining to shed. When the cells in the uterus lining produce more prostaglandins than needed, the contractions will become stronger and painful.

    The excessive amount of prostaglandins causes it to circulate throughout the blood stream. Once this blood gets to other organs the prostaglandins ability to simulate smoother muscle contraction will affect the intestines and digestive tract.

    Smooth muscles line the bowels in the body, so the effects of prostaglandins will cause the bowels and intestines to contract. This in turn triggers the bowels to release their substance and eventually leads to diarrhea [1].

    Causes of Diarrhea during Pregnancy

    Pregnancy-related causes

    These factors are related to the normal changes your body goes through as it adjusts to your baby. For instance, your pregnancy might have caused you to become sensitive to foods that didn’t affect you before, causing you to experience an upset stomach and loose bowel movements.

    Hormonal changes can also be the culprit. Some hormones can slow down bowel movement, leading to constipation, while others can speed it up and cause you to have diarrhea.

    Loose bowel movements can also be attributed to the lifestyle changes you make due to your pregnancy. For example, if you started to eat more fruits and vegetables when you found out you were pregnant, the increase of fiber in your diet can lead to diarrhea. This can also be the case if you’ve increased your water intake or are doing some pregnancy exercises.

    The prenatal vitamins you take may also cause diarrhea. Don’t stop taking them, though; after all, these vitamins are essential to your baby’s growth and development and help him have good health. Talk to your doctor to know whether you should stick to your current vitamin supplements until your body adjusts to them or if you need to take a different brand.

    Non-pregnancy related causes

    Of course, not all cases of diarrhea can be attributed to pregnancy-related factors. In many instances, it’s caused by medical issues unrelated to pregnancy at all. For instance, women who have Crohn’s disease, ulcerative colitis, celiac disease, or irritable bowel syndrome are more prone to having episodes of diarrhea during pregnancy and beyond than those who don’t.

    You might also experience loose bowel movements if you catch the stomach flu or if you get infected by any other type of virus or bacteria that affects your digestive system. This is also the case if you get intestinal parasites.

    Take note that certain medications can cause diarrhea. Some examples include antacids, antidepressants, antibiotics, and proton pump inhibitors (which are used to treat acid reflux and ulcers). Talk to your doctor if you have just been prescribed any of these medications.

    He might switch to a different drug that doesn’t cause diarrhea as a side effect and/or give you tips on how to manage loose bowel movements while pregnant.

    Diarrhea can also be caused by food poisoning, which can happen any time during your pregnancy. To avoid this, make sure the food you eat is always fresh and clean and prepared in a hygienic way. If you’re eating out and are not sure of the quality of the dishes served, it’s better to go home and prepare your own meal than risk the chance of getting food poisoning.

    Diarrhea and labor

    As mentioned above, you can get loose bowel movements at any time. However, they become more common in your third trimester as you near your due date and your body starts preparing itself for labor. There’s no need to be alarmed, though, since getting diarrhea doesn’t automatically mean you’ll go into labor right away.

    It’s also important to note that not all pregnant women will have loose bowel movements in their third trimester. Each person has a different experience, and the degree and frequency of diarrhea varies from one mother-to-be to another.

    Here are some tips to get relief from diarrhea

    Diarrhea before the monthly period is basically caused by hormone changes as well as the release of some hormone-like substances.

    In addition, studies show that women with Irritable Bowel Syndrome are more likely to experience diarrhea before and during periods. There are several home remedies that you can use to deal with diarrhea.

    These include keeping your body hydrated, eating foods with a lot of beneficial bacteria (including yogurt and various other related items), and maintaining a fiber rich diet.

    If you have moderate diarrhea, you can treat it at home with moderate exercise, adequate rest, as well as a heating pad that can help to relieve pain and cramps. In addition to those things, you can take drugs for diarrhea symptoms. You should consult your doctor to get the right treatment for severe cases.

    Home remedies

    In most instances, diarrhea will resolve itself after a day or two. Just make sure to drink plenty of water to replenish what you’ve lost. Remember: dehydration can lead to premature labor, so make it a point to increase your fluid intake.

    You’ll also want to avoid foods and drinks that can contribute to loose bowel movements. Milk and dairy products are great for pregnant women, but you’ll want to stay away from them while you’re experiencing diarrhea since they can upset your stomach. This is also the case for oily, fatty, spicy, and high-fiber dishes.

    Instead, stick to foods that are gentle to your stomach and won’t make your diarrhea worse. The recommended diet is BRAT, which stands for bananas, rice, applesauce, and toast. You can also add crackers, potatoes, and unsweetened cereal (without milk) as well as rice- or noodle-based soups made without any dairy products.

    Hopefully, this information will help you to know more about diarrhea before menstrual cycle. You should take a little extra care and follow the simple tips above to get relief from the symptoms.

How to make a toothpick gun

Thanks for supporting our news site
by shopping our easy click ads

How do you shoot/throw toothpicks like this?

48 Replies to “How do you shoot/throw toothpicks like this?”

Film yourself doing it 1000 times, then only show the successful attempt.

Pretty sure if I learned this, I would immediately show up at a buddies house, and put a toothpick in the side of his leg showing him this new trick I learned.

Have creepily long fangers

Hold it like she does and flick it with your middle finger (just watch the video by slooowwlly scrolling through, and you’ll easily see).

Toothpick crossbow $10 on amazon

Those are some fucking nails

Why do I feel like she’s the Netflix adaptation of an anime villain

Wait til you see the dude cutting carrots in half with playing cards.

U have to concentrate your Qi to the tips of your fingers and transfer the energy to the tip of that very toothpick. When u flick it, u have to roll the toothpick on your nails to create a spiral motion so there is a penetrative force with the aerodynamic flight path. Oh, and when u do it right, you will see a small flash before it hits.

Step 1) be an assassin

Haku is that you? I’ve been looking everywhere for you – zabuza

[Here](https://youtu.be/-a-HXRxuQzo) is a link of a guy teaching how to. The second method is better

Looks like her middle finger is pressed against the pick before it’s flicked so no impact on the stock. Also assuming she’s putting some kind of spin on the tooth pick to help stabilize it in flight.

Should use this tactic on anti-vaxxers for the covid vaccine.

How to pray the rosary with a child

In continuing with my passing on the faith to your Catholic kids series, today I am talking about how to start incorporating praying the rosary with your kids and in your home. Praying the rosary is a beautiful Catholic devotion, and obviously worthy of passing onto the next generation. How do we do this? Well I believe that in order to make an impression on children, we need to make things relevant and appealing to them and also on their level, but without watering it down. And what better time to focus on the rosary than in October, the month dedicated to the rosary!

How to pray the rosary with a child

With the rosary, I also think it’s a great idea to start the children early, and have it as part of your home and your routine for as long as they can remember. There is no wrong time to start praying the rosary as a family. The time is now! So let’s take a look at how to accomplish praying the rosary with littles.

Also, be sure to check out my video here with tips for starting kids on the rosary.

Ideas For Praying The Rosary With Kids

  1. Don’t expect a longer attention span from your child than is developmentally appropriate for their age and/or personal situation. That is just a recipe to frustrate everyone. It might be better to start small and build up their habit of paying attention. Think of this as a zero depth entry into a pool rather than jumping straight off the high dive.
  2. Start by teaching your children the prayers in the rosary. Of course, hearing the prayers repetitively during the rosary will help with this process, but sometimes they just learn to say the sounds they hear without actually understanding what words they are praying. I recommend prayer copy work when they are a little older to make sure they are actually getting all the words.How to pray the rosary with a child
  3. Have a variety of rosaries for children to choose from. Kids love digging through the rosary basket and finding something sparkly, colorful, or whatever is appealing to them. Make sure to have some child friendly ones, and put the ones you would rather they didn’t use somewhere else before the choosing begins. I have had waaaaaay too many of my beautiful rosaries snapped by children! Lol.
  4. Display your rosaries prominently in the home, such as on hooks or in an easy to get to location in the living room. Perhaps they would work well somewhere near your home altar. Don’t hide them away under a bushel basket!
  5. Work to have good associations with rosary time. So when I am starting preschoolers on the rosary, I allow them to hold it however they like as long as they aren’t swinging it around in a manner that might hurt someone. So if they want to wear it like a necklace, I let them. I will instruct them as to what bead to hold, but if they don’t hold that one, that’s ok. It will come with time.
  6. Set a prayerful atmosphere. This could involve turning on some music, turning off the lights, and perhaps even lighting some candles.
  7. Pray the rosary around your children, even when you aren’t expecting them to participate. This sets a good example, and again, when they are older and ready they will begin joining in. Their season is coming- they won’t be little forever.
  8. Start by praying just one decade at a time. I used to pray one decade of the rosary with my children each time we got in the car. This worked beautifully because they were strapped with with nowhere to go- a perfectly captive audience lol. Bedtime, or breakfast time could also be a great time to incorporate praying one decade of the rosary. Be creative in thinking about where this could fit into your family life.
  9. Move onto praying a shortened version of the rosary. You may try saying just 3 Hail Mary prayers per decade while still teaching your littles. This may give more of an authentic “rosary feel” rather than just saying 1 decade. You can increase the number of Hail Mary prayers you say slowly as the children learn the habit of attention.
  10. Eventually, try praying one family rosary per week. My mom did this when I was little, rotating the mysteries each week, and it really made me familiar and comfortable with the rosary. You could also try incorporating the rosary once a month before the family attends confession together.

Bonus Tip For Praying The Rosary With Kids…

Just pray it. In the end, if the kids just are not “there yet” in the praying of the rosary, just pray it anyway in their presence and enjoy their joyful noises they are making to the Lord.

Oct 21, 2020 1:00:00 PM | by Kate Towne

How to pray the rosary with a child

Kate Towne shares her family’s strategy for praying the Rosary with children.

October 7 is the feast of Our Lady of the Rosary, and the entire month of October is dedicated to the Rosary as well. As I told my boys just the other day, the Rosary is a weapon — that’s how powerful it is! In fact, during his Wednesday audience on the feast of Our Lady of the Rosary, Pope Francis called the Rosary “ a weapon that protects us from evil and temptation .”

Since becoming a mother, I’ve really tried to incorporatethe Rosary into our daily family life — it gives me a great deal of comfort to think of my boys being given this tool that will help them always, through any crisis and in any circumstance. However, I’m sure that anyone who has tried to pray a family Rosary with small children knows that it can be one of the worst things ever. Though of course we know the graces are abundant, it’s more like the graces you get from a pilgrimage where you miss the plane and your luggage doesn’t arrive and your shoes give you blisters and you spend the whole first day on your pilgrimage jet-lagged and throwing up, and the rest of it with a roommate you don’t get along with, and less like the graces you receive on a retreat where you have your own room and lots of lovely quiet prayer time and everything and everyone is serene and respectful and you can really feel the holiness of heaven washing over you.

I’ve tried many things over the years to make it easier to pray the Rosary together and easier to keep up with (the latter follows the former for us, for sure), and we’ve had a fair amount of success with these things:

Find the best location and circumstances

After trying many other ways, the very best way I’ve found of praying the family Rosary without losing my mind is to pray it while taking a ride in the van. This is the best advice I can give about making the family Rosary doable.

My children have assigned seats in the van, carefully considered so as to reduce the possibility of conflict. Their seat belts prevent a good amount of “getting in each other’s business and space.” The passing scenery provides a nice distraction (especially since we usually go after dinner—we’ve seen some amazing sunsets on our Rosary rides) and being out of the house helps everyone feel refreshed (especially if we’ve been mostly inside all day).

Give the children a role

Whether in the van or at home, we also have each child lead one decade of the Rosary, which helps keep them focused on the Rosary and is the best way for them to learn how to pray it. As each child gets to about kindergarten age, I offer them the opportunity to lead a decade. It has taken some of them longer than others to feel comfortable with it, but currently all my children but the baby are up to leading a decade — since there are six of them, each night we skip one of them (I go in age order); if there are any missing, then my husband or I fill in.

Pick a time that works and try to stick to it

Another thing that’s really helped me make sure the Rosary gets done is not waiting for a time when everyone can make it (within reason). In the past, one of the reasons we might not get the Rosary prayed is because I was waiting for everyone to get home from their various evening activities, which didn’t always work with dinner and bedtimes. Since school started last month, I’ve set 5:30 as Rosary time, no matter who’s home. My ideal is for us to say it together, but praying it in un-ideal circumstances (and less-than-perfectly) is absolutely better than not praying it at all.

In his October 7 audience, Pope Francis noted, “ In her apparitions, Our Lady often exhorted the recitation of the Rosary, especially in the face of looming threats to the world … Even today, in this time of the pandemic, it is necessary to hold the Rosary in our hands and pray for us, our loved ones and all people. ”

If you don’t already do so, consider trying to work the Rosary into your daily routine! ( Visit USCCB.org for more information on praying the Rosary .)

I’d love to hear any tips and tricks you have with how to say the Rosary with small children!

Download and print how to pray the rosary for kids. Children can use these printable pages to learn how to pray the rosary with simple illustrated instructions & directions.

Prayers of the Rosary.

MAKE THE SIGN OF THE CROSS: In the name of the Father, and of the Son, and of the Holy Spirit. Amen.

THE CREED: I believe in God, the Father almighty, Creator of Heaven and earth. And in Jesus Christ, His only Son, our Lord, Who was conceived by the Holy Spirit, born of the Virgin Mary, suffered under Pontius Pilate; was crucified, died, and was buried. He descended into Hell. The third day He rose again from the dead . He ascended into Heaven, and sits at the right hand of God, the Father almighty. He shall come again to judge the living and the dead. I believe in the Holy Spirit, the holy Catholic Church, the communion of saints, the forgiveness of sins, the resurrection of the body, and life everlasting. Amen.

THE OUR FATHER: Our Father, Who art in Heaven, hallowed be Thy Name. Thy kingdom come, Thy will be done on earth as it is in Heaven. Give us this day our daily bread, and forgive us our trespasses, as we forgive those who trespass against us. And lead us not into temptation, but deliver us from evil. Amen.

HAIL MARY: Hail Mary, full of grace, the Lord is with thee. Blessed art thou among women, and blessed is the fruit of thy womb, Jesus. Holy Mary, Mother of God, pray for us sinners, now and at the hour of our death. Amen.

GLORY BE: Glory be to the Father, and to the Son, and to the Holy Spirit. As it was in the beginning is now, and ever shall be, world without end. Amen.

FATIMA PRAYER: Oh my Jesus, forgive us our sins, save us from the fires of Hell; lead all souls to Heaven, especially those in most need of Thy mercy. Amen.

HAIL, HOLY QUEEN: Hail, Holy Queen, mother of mercy; our life, our sweetness, and our hope. To thee do we cry, poor banished children of Eve. To thee do we send up our sighs, mourning and weeping in this vale of tears. Turn, then, most gracious advocate, thine eyes of mercy toward us. And after this, our exile, show unto us the blessed fruit of thy womb, Jesus. O clement, O loving, O sweet Virgin Mary. Pray for us, O holy Mother of God, that we may be madenworthy of the promises of Christ. Amen.
O GOD, WHOSE only-begotten Son by His life, death and resurrection, has purchased for us the rewards of eternal life; grant, we beseech Thee, that by meditating upon these mysteries of the Most Holy Rosary of the Blessed Virgin Mary, we may imitate what they contain and obtain what they promise, through the same Christ our Lord. Amen.

  • News
  • Blogs
  • Commentaries
  • Features
  • Interviews
  • Audio
  • Video
  • Cartoons
  • Galleries
  • Most Popular
  • U.S. Elections 2020
  • Coronavirus
  • College Guide
  • Register Radio
  • Nation
  • World
  • Vatican
  • Education
  • Culture of Life
  • Movies
  • Arts & Entertainment
  • Travel
  • Saints
  • Liturgy
  • Books
  • Editorials
  • Publisher’s Note
  • Letters to the Editor
  • Contact Us
  • Support the Register
  • Print subscriptions
  • E-Newsletter Sign-up
  • About Us
  • Job Board
  • Advertise
  • EWTN Religious Catalogue

“The Rosary, a simple and easy prayer, helps me to be at times a child again, and of this I am not in the least ashamed.” —Pope John Paul I

How to pray the rosary with a child

A Guatemalan man prays the Rosary with his daughter at the Holy Cross Retreat Center in Las Cruces, New Mexico, on Dec. 27, 2018. (photo: Photo by Paul Ratje/AFP via Getty Images)

Teaching your children to pray the Rosary is a gift that returns innumerable blessings. The simplicity of the prayer affords quick memorization and repetition — perfect for children. Similarly, that same simplicity makes for a prayer that can be repeated while focusing on contemplative matters: great for spiritual maturity as we grow. This is why the Rosary is an effective prayer for every age. But the prayer must also be taught. Deciding how you will teach the Rosary to your children requires a sensible evaluation. I have some suggestions based on personal experience, and the experience of my friends.

Ages 0-2

Yes, your sweet baby and early toddler can begin to learn the Rosary from infancy! Sts. Philip Neri and Aloysius Gonzaga’s biographers tell how their mothers would repeat the Rosary while rocking their sweet babies to sleep. In the case of Philip Neri, Antonio Gallonio says that his mother’s repetition of the Holy Family’s names — “Jesus, Mary, Joseph” — caused the first words from his mouth to be those names of the Holy Family. I can say that, without comparing myself to the saint, my current youngest and fourth-born child did in fact make the words and names “God,” “Jesus,” “Mary,” and most recently “Joseph,” before she was 18 months old.

You don’t have to bank on that, but repeating holy words, including prayers, in your baby’s ears will certainly help make the Rosary a familiar and comforting prayer in future years.

Another important suggestion is the use of actual rosaries: as often as you can, let your child become comfortable handling the beads, looking at, and kissing the crucifix. Our children love the Chews Life rosaries. They’re irresistible and almost impossible to break. On that note, just be sure that you monitor your child if they are handling a real beaded rosary — choking hazards should be avoided.

Ages 3-5

They call them “terrible twos” but I will say that all of my kids started their frustrations at 3 years old. Despite their inability to focus, unwillingness to sit still, and lack of interest in much else other than their toys or TV shows, they are watching and they are learning quicker than we can realize. Having kids who have passed through this age group and having tried nearly every method of parenting to help them learn to pray, I will say that the biggest asset to their learning was my patience. I could almost count the amount of steps backward we would have paced if I lost my cool or bought into their false sobs. Ages 3-5 enjoy a huge amount of growth and development, but I think it’s safe to say that parents must set quality expectations that may be unseen for this whole period.

My biggest tip, aside from patience, is to use imagery. Put a small saint card in their hands, or again, an actual rosary. At this age, kids want to hold what their parents (or older siblings) are holding. So let them.

Ages 6-10

There’s a tough turn here for the parent and it’s because the kids are becoming more aware of their freedom, their time and their possessions. As your child matures, your level of patience and the way you handle him must mature too. Of course, keep the family prayer time and show your kids that you enjoy it and make it a priority — kids at this age are desperate for consistent leadership. But there are rules for the parent, too. Do not, under any circumstance, use prayer time as a negotiation tool. Do not quid pro quo prayer time and good behavior in prayer for movies, popcorn or video games. Prayer time is our obligation, not a poker chip. Kids will buy into this system.

At this age, it’s not just about the rules — your child also needs quality communication. So, take time to also talk about prayer and the Rosary — why we do it and how we do it. Over and over, talk with them about what to pray about. In this age range the kids will make their first confession and that means they must have the training to make a solid examination of conscience. The Rosary can be a good opportunity for this. Be sure they know that this aspect of their prayer life is very private, and you’re not there to poke around or make them feel bad.

Somewhere after age 10, perhaps even before, it’s a good idea to begin to arm your child with two things — the mysteries, and a basic defense of the Rosary. The mysteries of Christ are a perfect fit for a child climbing into pre-teen and teen years. They can easily understand their reflective use, and can never outgrow their importance in spiritual contemplations. But on the other side of their spiritual toolkit, they’ll benefit from good apologetics. Cover topics like Marian devotion, intercession of the saints, the effectiveness of prayer and the history of the devotion. They’re good for when there are moment of doubt or questions from others, but most of all they contribute to a wholesome appreciation for the Rosary. And that’s something most adults don’t even have.

Whatever you do, be sure to remain patient, authentic and informative when praying the Rosary with your child.

Links I use in posts may be affiliate links (link that I earn commission from through qualifying purchases). I will only link to products I love personally! If you would like to view my disclaimer policy, click HERE.

The Rosary is a beautiful prayer that helps us to learn and think about the life of Christ, but it can be difficult to pray the Rosary with children, especially little ones.

But it is not impossible!

Below are some tips on how to pray the rosary with young children (that you can build on and adapt for older children) and suggestions on kid-friendly Rosaries resources.

How to Pray the Rosary with Children

1. You don’t have to say the whole thing!

Praying the Rosary, the whole way through even on a quick day, takes at least 15 minutes.

I don’t know about you, but my young ones (Just 4, nearly 3, and 1) do not have a 15-minute attention span.

Heck, my high school students don’t!

That is a long time for them to focus on one thing and be expected to sit, listen, and learn. So, shorten it up and introduce the Rosary in pieces.

Start by making the Rosary a story. Read the mysteries to them like they are a story and start by saying ONE Hail Mary and the Our Father in between each mystery.

We use this book to read the mysteries with our children.

As your children’s attention gets better and they are more confident in what is going to happen, add in some more Hail Mary’s and the Fatima Prayer. Then consider introducing the Apostle’s Creed and the closing prayers.

I encourage you to always talk about all of the parts of the Rosary with your children, but maybe not practice all of them at once.

2. Establish a routine

Children love consistency in pretty much everything!

It helps them to understand what is going on around them, their role in that time, and what will happened next.

Consistency, particularly as it relates to routine and the language used to describe activities or expectation, is incredibly important.

Consistent in Actions

For adding saying the Rosary with your children into your routine begin by deciding on a time that would work best for your children to say the Rosary:

  • Is it before nap or bedtime as a way to slow down
  • After dinner as a transition to evening activities
  • First thing in the morning when they have the best focus

You decide on the best time that works for your children to say the rosary and stick to it!

Give the time you decided a try for a couple weeks and then make a change if you need to. But be sure to give it a minute before you change times, give your child time to adjust.

The time that works best in our house for Mae, is to pray it at bedtime before her stories, so that is what we do. I am still working on finding the right time for Little Dude, and Little Man is still too young so he just kind of sits and listens, but he is being exposed and is learning.

Which brings me to this, you may want to pray the Rosary with your children as a whole family. But to start you may have to split it up a bit. My older two, Little Dude and Mae, love to play and wined each other up so together isn’t always the best.

But the goal is to pray it as a family, so we are working on it and I think we are almost there. Yay!

If you have settled into a time, be sure to keep what you do to prepare for that time consistent.

How to pray the rosary with a child

This repetition and questioning help to get their brains ready for what they are about to do. This tactic also works really well with pretty much anything!

Don’t forget to be excited about what you are saying and what you are about to do! Children aren’t just sponges, they are mirrors that reflect the feelings and attitudes around them.

Also, children love to know what is going to happen and what their role is in that activity. They love jobs and feeling they are important. Take advantage of that willingness and foster a helping heart (not to mention sparing yourself a bit of work).

Consistent in Language

The English language gives us so many beautiful options for the same word – but when trying to help a child learn and practice a new skill, not the best time to expand their vocabulary.

Things can get confusing.

Decide and use the same simple and clear words.

I am a huge book and word nerd, so trust me, my kids get exposure to lots of different words and descriptions, but I scale it back and keep the words simple and clear when it comes to expectations.

As a Catholic parent, you have a duty to lead your children in the ways of the Lord. This is a consent you make during your child’s baptism. However, that aside, as a Catholic parent, you may just be looking for a way to incorporate your kids into praying the rosary. Well, if you’re that person, read along for some of the best perspectives and tips on how to go about this.

Older kids may be a little better when it comes to reciting, but there is no guarantee that the swinging beads will not end up becoming airborne missiles that whack you in the face amidst your Hail Mary prayer. So how to pray the rosary for kids?

What You’ll Learn Today

Can the Rosary Be Adapted to Kids

How to pray the rosary with a child

Before introducing kids to the rosary, you must know some foundational concepts, symbols, and truths about the rosary and kids.

First, you must understand that Our Lady is many things to the Catholic faith, but it is also true that she is a mother. Thus, she understands how to deal with kids and relate with minors at their level of understanding.

Therefore, it should never be a hassle trying to bring kids to understand the rosary. Our Lady is there, stretching out her hand to guide us. Instead of saying the entire rosary, you can also opt for the mini rosary so that everyone feels accommodated.

St. John Paul encourages us with the following words,

“It could be objected that the Rosary seems hardly suited to the taste of children and young people of today…But perhaps the objection is directed to an impoverished method of praying it. Furthermore, without prejudice to the Rosary’s basic structure, there is nothing to stop children and young people from praying it—either within the family or in groups— with appropriate symbolic and practical aids to understanding and appreciation.”

With this kind of encouragement, we can be bold and adopt any or all of the following approaches to praying the rosary with kids.

1. Put Aside the Rosary beads or Get A Kid-Friendly Version

When kids are too young, they may not understand what praying the rosary is all about. In this case, they may mistake the beads for playing items. It is not uncommon to see children whipping the rosary beads around. If this is the case with your children, don’t use the beads during the rosary, just recite the prayers.

When they get to an age where they can understand a few things including the ability to follow direction, you can get them a kid-friendly rosary that is durable enough to withstand abuse. Examples include the cord rosary some of which are handmade with colored knotted cords.

2. Begin with a Decade

A decade of rosary contains 12 prayers recited with 10 beads. It takes about 5 minutes to say the decade. Remember each decade is related to an event in the life of the Virgin Mary or Jesus Christ. The decades are also called mysteries and ensure you spend time to meditate on a different mystery each time.

For instance, if you devote a session to the Joyful Mysteries, you’ll be meditating on the Annunciation to Mary, the Visitation of Mary, the Birth of our Lord Jesus Christ, the Presentation of the Child Jesus in the Temple and the Finding of Our Lord in the Temple. The short spans will take care of the kid’s limited attention.

3. Make the Decade Shorter

Each decade comprises 10 Hail Mary prayers. Now, with kids, you may not make it through all the Hail Mary’s. the best way is to shorten the decade and recite only about three Hail Mary’s instead.

This will give your children an awesome introduction into the mysteries as well as the rhythm of the rosary.

4. Get Pictures to Help You Illustrate

Kids love pictures and hence be sure to tap into them to give the kids clarity into the mystery that you are meditating on. You can get pictures in a book or download them from online resources.

Looking at the pictures, one per bead, the children can understand and learn the prayers. You can also put together pictures all by yourself is that works for you.

5. Use Edible Rosaries

Anything from candy to marshmallows to raisins to cupcakes, the possibilities of edible rosaries are endless. Just ensure that your food choices are healthy for your children. Edible rosaries bring fun, good memories, cements the idea that praying the rosary is part of our daily lives much like food is.

After reciting each payer, the kids can eat the bead. This is more like a treat to them and fuels them along.

6. Introduce Music into the Rosary

One of the reasons why kids love cartoons though they may not be following the theme or storyline is the music. You can use that as well during the rosary. Aim for gentle meditative background music as a preface to each mystery. Ensure that it is not so much of a traditional song as this may turn off the kids. Choose music that blends in some contemporary vibes.

How to Hold A Rosary While Praying?

How to pray the rosary with a child

Holding the rosary right while praying is super important and the earlier you teach your kids, the better it will be for their devotion now and later in life. With your fingers bent and kept close together, make a sign of the crucifix, and proceed to say the Apostles Creed.

As you pray the Apostles Creed, hold the cross in your hands and reflect on the image of crucifixion to help you meditate. With the crucifix in an upright position, let the beads drape to the left of the cross with the rest falling off in a circle right below your fingers.

In readiness to say the first prayer of the rosary – the Lord’s Prayer, hold the first rosary bead against the index finger. Once done with reciting Our Father, use your thumb to push the bead upward right over your finger. Do the same for the next three beads as you recite Hail Mary.

When you come to the end, hold the pendant while reciting Hail Holy Queen. The pendant or chain links all the beads.

Leave a Comment Cancel reply

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

Historically the Rosary is a simple alternative to the Liturgy of the Hours. If you couldn’t read or afford the book, these prayers allowed for the lay or common man to enter into contemplative, daily prayer reflecting over the life of Christ. Right now, three-fifths of my house cannot read. Yes, they enjoy being read to and have a better grasp of Scripture at 4 years old than I had at 18, but there is something powerful in being able to pray at the same level as Mommy and Daddy, the same prayers in the same way.

Now let’s clarify we have a four-year-old, almost 2-year-old, and a 2-month old, so our house is anything but quiet, still, and contemplative. They are incredible and bring significant meaning to my life, but honestly, most moments are chaos! So how do we bring joy into the crazy, and incorporate prayer into our family life?

Raising Catholic Kids

When we got married, this was one of our biggest concerns. We both didn’t come from religious families or a strong foundation of Biblical or Church teachings. Family prayer wasn’t a thing, so how were we to do something we hadn’t experienced?

Although I have much to learn and am growing daily and being sanctified through these little ones, over the last nine years of marriage and five years of motherhood, I have learned that your example speaks volumes! It is through my prayer life, the way I talk, handle overwhelming situations, and live that matters. They do what you do, not what you say to do. They mimic and learn from your example and witness. Not every moment will be perfect, but they will see our effort to love them, our God, and each other.

You are not a failure if you have not been praying the Rosary as a family. Just choosing to open this article and read these ideas shows you have a heart for growing in holiness. And when you start if it doesn’t go well, again this is not an indication that you are an incompetent unfaithful family.

When these whispers come in and stop us before we even get started, they are lies from the devil. God loves our joyful chaos, our hot mess trying. He knows we are not perfect. We are merely spiritual children. But he adores our efforts, and each day we get better, stronger, and more faithful. He can make us and our family prayer life new.

Leading Your Family

The Catechism of the Catholic Church in paragraph 2685 states, “The Christian family is the first place of education in prayer. Based on the sacrament of marriage, the family is the “domestic church” where God’s children learn to pray “as the Church” and to persevere in prayer. For young children in particular, daily family prayer is the first witness of the Church’s living memory as awakened patiently by the Holy Spirit.” The Rosary is an incredible tool to create Saints and to take up our responsibility in our domestic mission.

God has given us an amazing responsibility as parents. Our job is to have the overarching vision for our family to get to heaven, and then develop a family culture that helps nurture and grow our children in light of this vision. We can’t force our kids to go to heaven. The best we can do is lead them to heaven. You know a true leader because at the end of the day they are standing right beside you in the journey of attaining that vision.

Why the Rosary Is the Perfect Family Prayer

Again it doesn’t require reading, and you can memorize all the prayers at a very young age. Yet, these prayers and especially the mysteries tell a story. It is familiar, repetitive, and always accessible no matter where you are. It’s a gateway to Scripture and a deep relationship with Christ. There is great power in the Rosary, especially in praying it as a family!

Resources

Check out our favorite Catholic kid resources here: https://kit.co/totheheightsministry/raise-your-kids-catholic and our favorite Rosary specific resources here: https://kit.co/totheheightsministry/rosaries

In this video, we break down our Top 7 tips for praying a Family Rosary! Make sure you listen until tip seven because it’s the most important one!

Top 7 Tips For Praying A Family Rosary

Birthstone Rosaries
make great gifts

How to pray the rosary with a childHow to pray the rosary with a child

Introduction To The Rosary For Children
(This lesson plan is free of charge. Please feel free to distribute and share.)
Rosaries.com has created an “Introduction To The Rosary” lesson plan for children that you may find beneficial for your Religious Education/RCIA programs, or parents who wish to teach their children how to pray the Rosary at home. The lesson plan includes videos, handouts, and a PowerPoint presentation. Please watch this brief four minute video introducing this lesson plan.

  • This lesson plan is designed to be completed in one Catechism/Religious Education class period.
  • This “Introduction To The Rosary Lesson Plan” has three components:
    1. Show to your class, this 5 minute “Introduction To The Rosary” video provided here.
      • Video Introduction to the Rosary for children’s classes
    2. Lead the students in a brief overview of the video and the handouts provided here.
      • Handouts for children’s classes
    3. Pray the Rosary together with your class while simultaneously showing this PowerPoint presentation which leads the class bead by bead with the correct Rosary prayers in the correct order, and matches the handouts they are given. The instructor slides are also available in PDF format. (PDF Instructor Slides)

(Optional) If You Are In Need Of Rosaries

The lesson plan is designed to be cost free for both students and instructors, however, if you, as the instructor, wish to provide rosaries to hand out to students, we have several inexpensive options.

When starting to teach children how to pray the rosary, especially young preschoolers, you may want to begin with a game plan in mind! I have a special set of rosaries that I use when teaching Catholic ABC’s to preschoolers, and they look something like this…

How to pray the rosary with a child


So to start with an introduction of the rosary with kids, I have a special classroom set of rosaries that I use. I actually did string this set of rosaries myself, and you can see my directions on how to make a rosary here, but you can also easily find and order a set that would work as well if you don’t want to make them, and I will show you how to alter them yourself.

How to pray the rosary with a child

What To Look For In A Starting Rosary For Kids:

  1. All The Hail Mary beads are 1 color
  2. All The Our Father beads are 1 color, but a different color than the Hail Mary beads
  3. Mark the Glory Be Knots (I will explain this further in a moment)

So the basic idea behind the “starter rosary” for Catholic preschoolers is that all 6 “Our Father” beads on the rosary are 1 color, and all 53 “Hail Mary” beads on the rosary are another color. I personally like white to represent the Our Father, and blue to represent Mary, but really any 2 colors could work.

How You Alter The Preschool Rosary

This is where a little bit of customization comes in. Wherever the “Glory Be” prayers are prayed on the knots, take just a little bit of fingernail polish and color the knots for the kids.

How to pray the rosary with a child

Now, each area of the rosary is marked clearly for the kids, almost like a “key” to the rosary prayers.

Purchasing A Classroom Set Of Rosaries

If you don’t want to string your own set of classroom rosaries (and I don’t blame you… it took me a little bit to make my set lol) then you can order a set of plain plastic rosaries like these (which actually are available in blue) and paint the “Our Father” beads also yourself with a different color of nail polish. There are only 6 Our Father beads per rosary, so this is reasonable and affordable to do. Just make sure you get rosaries that are all the same color and not a multi color pack or this method of teaching will not work. Paint the Our Father beads one color and the Glory Be knots a different color.

Monthly Liturgical Membership

How to pray the rosary with a child

How I Start Preschoolers On The Rosary Prayers

In Catholic ABC’s (my Catholic preschool curriculum book) I explain how to use these beginner rosaries during final prayers at the end of class. All the preschoolers gather around the prayer table, set it up themselves, and then each child receives a rosary.

My rule for preschoolers holding a rosary is… no swinging it around like a helicopter! This is because someone might get hurt. That’s it. If they swing the rosary, they lose it and can try again the following day or week when we pray together again. If they want to wear the rosary like a necklace, I let them. I explain to them that it is not a necklace, but as long as they’re not swinging it around I am ok with how they hold it.

After setting up the prayer table with the kids and having them all bless themselves with holy water, I light the candle on the prayer table and call the children up one at a time to get their rosary, then they return to their spot on the circle.

How to pray the rosary with a child

How to pray the rosary with a child

I tell all the children that we will begin by praying the “Our Father” prayer together, and that I want everyone to hold a white bead for that. I wait while they find and hold a white bead, and then we pray together. Then I explain to the children that next we will prayer a “Hail Mary” prayer, and that they need to find and hold a blue bead while we pray that prayer. When we are finished with that, I tell them to find a hold a pink knot, and while we hold that knot we are going to prayer a “Glory Be” prayer together, and then we do.

When we are all finished, I help them to make the sign of the cross, and return the rosaries to my rosary bag. That’s it! Blow out the prayer table candle and class dismissed!

October 19, 2015 By Dianna Kennedy · Disclosure: This Post May Contain Affiliate Links.

  • Share on Facebook
  • Share on Twitter
  • Save to Pinterest

The following post is from Dianna of The Kennedy Adventures.

Does the thought of praying the Rosary with your children seem a little daunting? Think that nailing Jello to the wall might be a bit easier?

Never fear. Praying the Rosary with your children isn’t as hard as it may seem at first glance. Let’s take a look at some tips and tricks for you to make these prayers a part of your family life.

How to pray the rosary with a child

This post contains affiliate links.

Tips for Saying the Rosary with Your Children

Start Out Slowly

Before you can begin praying the Rosary with your children, there are a few prayers they’ll need to learn. To begin, they’ll need to know the Our Father, the Hail Mary, and the Glory Be.

Take a look at these prayers every Catholic child should know to get you started.

Once you’ve taught your little ones the basic prayers of the Rosary, it’s time to put them all together. Set aside some time when your children are well rested and fed, then walk through a decade of the Rosary with them.

Patience and repetition are key. They’re not going to be perfect the first time through, but I guarantee after a few months, you’ll be pleasantly surprised at how much they know.

How to pray the rosary with a child
Listen to the Rosary

My children are a little rambunctious, so I have to capitalize on moments when I have a captive audience.

We listen to these Rosary CDs in the car – even my youngest children enjoy chiming in.

How to pray the rosary with a child
Provide Kid Friendly Rosaries

In our house, you’ll find quite a few Rosaries — glass beaded, wooden, plastic, twine, and even silicone ones safe for teething babies.

By having enough Rosaries on hand for everyone in the house, I’m preventing issues over little ones who can’t share. I’m also making this sacramental a familiar piece of our Catholic home.

Monthly Liturgical Membership

How to pray the rosary with a child

Looking for Rosaries for your family? Don’t miss our favorite Rosary selections for children.

Strength in Numbers

When it comes to praying the Rosary, the more the merrier. My children seem to be more attentive when we’re saying the Rosary as a group. Consider inviting another family over for a Rosary playgroup, or get to Mass early to participate in the Rosary with your parish.

Hands on Rosary Helps

For our little ones, having a hands on approach to saying the Rosary seems to be the best approach.

We love to work on Rosary crafts together as a family during our Morning Time.

How to pray the rosary with a child

It’s easy to keep little hands busy with these Rosary playdough mats, or with these free Rosary coloring books.

We also use these printable Rosary cards with our children. I printed and laminated a set for each of the kids. We’re able to see a picture of the Mystery, discuss the virtue associated with the Mystery, and even read the Scripture references together.

How to pray the rosary with a child

The little children love playing with these cards while we are at Mass. They’re the perfect size to slip into a diaper bag or purse. You can punch a hole in them and put them on a ring for an easy way to keep them together.

WHAT TIPS DO YOU HAVE FOR PRAYING THE ROSARY WITH CHILDREN?

Join 35,000+ Other Awesome People

Subscribe to the Real Life at Home weekly newsletter to get our latest content, exclusive free printables, learning activities, and ideas for celebrating with your kids all year

Posted by Mary Clare Peoples

Monday and Saturday – The Joyful Mysteries

  1. The Annunciation
  2. The Visitation
  3. The Nativity
  4. The Presentation in the Temple
  5. The Finding of the Child Jesus in the Temple

Thursday – The Luminous Mysteries

  1. The Baptism of Jesus
  2. The Wedding Feast at Cana
  3. The Proclamation of the Kingdom
  4. The Transfiguration
  5. The Institution of the Eucharist

Tuesday and Friday – The Sorrowful Mysteries

  1. The Agony in the Garden
  2. The Scourging at the Pillar
  3. The Crowning with Thorns
  4. The Carrying of the Cross
  5. The Crucifixion

Wednesday and Sunday – The Glorious Mysteries

  1. The Resurrection
  2. The Ascension
  3. The Descent of the Holy Spirit
  4. The Assumption
  5. The Coronation of Mary

How to Pray the Rosary

How to pray the rosary with a child

  1. Begin by making the Sign of the Cross. Then say the Apostles Creed.
    1. In the name of the Father, and the Son, and the Holy Spirit. Amen.
    2. I believe in God, the Father Almighty, Creator of Heaven and earth; and in Jesus Christ, His only Son, Our Lord, Who was conceived by the Holy Spirit, born of the Virgin Mary, suffered under Pontius Pilate, was crucified; died, and was buried. He descended into Hell; on the third day He arose again from the dead; He ascended into Heaven, and sits at the right hand of God, the Father Almighty; from thence He shall come to judge the living and the dead. I believe in the Holy Spirit, the holy catholic Church, the communion of saints, the forgiveness of sins, the resurrection of the body, and life everlasting. Amen.
  2. On the first bead, pray the Our Father.
    1. Our Father, Who art in heaven, hallowed be Thy name; Thy kingdom come; Thy will be done on earth as it is in heaven. Give us this day our daily bread; and forgive us our trespasses as we forgive those who trespass against us; and lead us not into temptation, but deliver us from evil. Amen.
  3. Next, pray one Hail Mary on each of the three smaller beads.
    1. Hail Mary, full of grace, The Lord is with thee. Blessed art thou among women, and blessed is the fruit of thy womb, Jesus. Holy Mary, Mother of God, pray for us sinners, now and at the hour of our death. Amen.
  4. Pray the Glory Be.
    1. Glory be to the Father, to the Son, and to the Holy Spirit, as it was in the beginning, is now, and ever shall be, world without end. Amen.
  5. On the next big bead, meditate for a moment on the Mystery of the Rosary for the first decade, and pray the Our Father.
  6. Pray one Hail Mary on each of the ten smaller beads.
  7. After the ten Hail Marys, pray the Glory Be and the Fatima Prayer.
    1. Fatima Prayer: O my Jesus, forgive us our sins, save us from the fires of hell. Lead all souls to heaven, especially those in most need of Thy mercy.
  8. Repeat steps five through seven for all five decades of the Rosary.
  9. After the fifth decade, recite the Hail Holy Queen.
    1. Hail, Holy Queen, Mother of mercy, our life, our sweetness, and our hope. To thee do we cry, poor banished children of Eve, to thee do we send up our sighs, mourning and weeping in this valley of tears. Turn then, most gracious advocate, thine eyes of mercy toward us; and after this our exile show unto us the blessed fruit of thy womb Jesus, O clement, O loving, O sweet Virgin Mary. V. Pray for us, O holy Mother of God. R. That we may be made worthy of the promises of Christ. Let us Pray: O God, whose only-begotten Son, by His life, death, and resurrection, has purchased for us the rewards of eternal salvation; grant we beseech Thee, that meditating upon these Mysteries of the most holy Rosary of the Blessed Virgin Mary, we may imitate what they contain and obtain what they promise. Through the same Christ our Lord. Amen.
  10. Conclude with the Sign of the Cross.

History of The Rosary

The father of the Holy Rosary is considered to be St. Dominic, to whom the Blessed Mother was to be revealed and ordered to spread this prayer all over the world. It was not, however, the Rosary as it is today.

The rosary became for St. Dominic is an effective weapon in the fight against the Albingens’ heresy. Legend has it that it was during one of his expeditions, during which he fought against this heresy, that the rosary prayer was born. Despite fasting and prayers, the ministry of St. Dominika was not bearing fruit. Then the Mother of God appeared and instructed Dominik not only to preach but to combine them with the recitation of the so-called Psalter of Mary, that is, 150 Hail Mary and 15 Our Father. From then on, St. Dominik interweaved his teachings with a rosary prayer, in which he pondered with the audience the content of the teachings.

The name of the Rosary comes from the Middle Ages. In the mentality of the time, the created world was treated as a book about God, and in nature, spiritual realities were perceived. Flowers played a special role, they symbolized various features. Often flowers were offered to God and loved ones. Prayers were treated as spiritual flowers. And that is why saying the rosary was compared to giving Our Lady of roses. Hence, this prayer was called a wreath of roses, or rosary.

The final shape of the rosary was established in the 15th century thanks to the Dominican Alamus a la Roche (1428-1475). He set the number 150 “Hail Mary” to the pattern of 150 psalms, which he divided into dozens interwoven with the prayer “Our Father”. To spread this prayer, he founded the first rosary fraternity. Thanks to the Dominican Order, the prayer of the rosary became known throughout the Church in the 15th century.

How to Pray The Rosary?

    Sign of Cross and “Apostles’ Creed”.

Three times “Hail Marys”.

“Glory Be”, “O My Jesus”.

First Mystery and “Our Father”.

“Glory Be”, “O My Jesus”.

Next Mystery and “Our Father”.

Repeat steps 5-7.

“Hail Holy Queen”.

How to pray the rosary with a child

Mysteries of The Rosary

Joyful Mysteries

  1. The Annunciation. Fruit of the Mystery: Humility
  2. The Visitation. Fruit of the Mystery: Love of Neighbour
  3. The Nativity. Fruit of the Mystery: Poverty, Detachment from the things of the world, Contempt of Riches, Love of the Poor
  4. The Presentation of Jesus at the Temple. Fruit of the Mystery: Gift of Wisdom and Purity of mind and body (Obedience)
  5. The Finding of Jesus in the Temple. Fruit of the Mystery: True Conversion (Piety, Joy of Finding Jesus)

Sorrowful Mysteries

  1. The Agony in the Garden. Fruit of the Mystery: Sorrow for Sin, Uniformity with the Will of God
  2. The Scourging at the Pillar. Fruit of the Mystery: Mortification (Purity)
  3. The Crowning with Thorns. Fruit of the Mystery: Contempt of the World (Moral Courage)
  4. The Carrying of the Cross. Fruit of the Mystery: Patience
  5. The Crucifixion and Death of our Lord. Fruit of the Mystery: Perseverance in Faith, Grace for a Holy Death (Forgiveness)

Glorious Mysteries

  1. The Resurrection. Fruit of the Mystery: Faith
  2. The Ascension. Fruit of the Mystery: Hope, Desire to Ascend to Heaven
  3. The Descent of the Holy Spirit. Fruit of the Mystery: Love of God, Holy Wisdom to know the truth and share it with everyone, Divine Charity, Worship of the Holy Spirit
  4. The Assumption of Mary. Fruit of the Mystery: Union with Mary and True Devotion to Mary
  5. The Coronation of the Virgin. Fruit of the Mystery: Perseverance and an Increase in Virtue (Trust in Mary’s Intercession)

Luminous Mysteries

Pope John Paul II, in his apostolic letter Rosarium Virginis Mariae (October 2002), recommended an additional set called the Luminous Mysteries (or the “Mysteries of Light”)

  1. The Baptism of Jesus in the Jordan. Fruit of the Mystery: Openness to the Holy Spirit, the Healer.
  2. The Wedding at Cana. Fruit of the Mystery: To Jesus through Mary, Understanding of the ability to manifest through faith.
  3. Jesus’ Proclamation of the Kingdom of God. Fruit of the Mystery: Trust in God (Call of Conversion to the Messiah)
  4. The Transfiguration. Fruit of the Mystery: Desire for Holiness.
  5. The Institution of the Eucharist. Fruit of the Mystery: Adoration.

When Are The Mysteries of Rosary Prayed?

The rosary can be prayed in its entirety, all four parts, but each of them is assigned to different days of the week:

  • Joyful Mysteries of the rosary – prayed on Monday and Saturday,
  • Sorrowful Mysteries of the rosary – prayed on Tuesday and Friday,
  • Glorious Mysteries of the rosary – are prayed on Wednesday and Sunday,
  • Luminous Mysteries of the rosary – recited on Thursday.

All Prayers

Apostles’ Creed:

I believe in God, the Father almighty, creator of heaven and earth. I believe in Jesus Christ, his only Son, our Lord, who was conceived by the Holy Spirit and born of the virgin Mary. He suffered under Pontius Pilate, was crucified, died, and was buried; he descended to hell. The third day he rose again from the dead. He ascended to heaven and is seated at the right hand of God the Father almighty. From there he will come to judge the living and the dead. I believe in the Holy Spirit, the holy catholic* church, the communion of saints, the forgiveness of sins, the resurrection of the body, and the life everlasting. Amen.

Our Father:

Our Father, Who art in heaven, Hallowed be Thy Name. Thy Kingdom come. Thy Will be done, on earth as it is in Heaven. Give us this day our daily bread. And forgive us our trespasses, as we forgive those who trespass against us. And lead us not into temptation, but deliver us from evil. Amen.

Hail Mary:

Hail, Mary, full of grace, the Lord is with thee. Blessed art thou amongst women and blessed is the fruit of thy womb, Jesus. Holy Mary, Mother of God, pray for us sinners, now and at the hour of our death.

Glory be:

Glory be to the Father, and to the Son, and to the Holy Spirit. As it was in the beginning, is now, and ever shall be, world without end.

O my Jesus:

O my Jesus, forgive us our sins, save us from the fire of hell, lead all souls to heaven, especially those who are in most need of Thy mercy.

Hail Holy Queen:

Hail, holy Queen, mother of mercy, our life, our sweetness, and our hope. To thee do we cry, poor banished children of Eve. To thee do we send up our sighs mourning and weeping in this valley of tears. Turn then, most gracious advocate, thine eyes of mercy toward us, and after this our exile show us the blessed fruit of thy womb, Jesus. O clement, O loving, O sweet Virgin Mary.
Pray for us, O Holy Mother of God.
That we may be made worthy of the promises of Christ.

As the Month of the Rosary, October is a great month to introduce and encourage children to pray the Rosary. Children may feel that the rosary can be a complex and overwhelming prayer. Through the eyes of a child they have to remember several prayers, learn what order to pray them in, how many times to pray them and sit through 15-20 minutes of repetitive prayer. For an elementary aged child this is a challenge. Here are some ten tips to help motivate and encourage a love of the rosary in your child or students life.

How to pray the rosary with a child

1. Purchase online or at your local Catholic bookstore a booklet with the words of the prayers used in the Rosary. If you are the creative type you can make your own.

2. Review the mechanics of praying the rosary; which prayers, when and how many times. You may also find an illustration of the rosary that points out the prayers to be helpful.

3. Explain why we pray the rosary. We have been asked by our Heavenly Mother herself to pray this prayer. Let them know that the purpose of the rosary is to meditate on the mysteries of Jesus’ Life, Death and Resurrection so that we may draw closer to Him.

4. Before beginning the rosary explain to them that the rosary is a sacramental and deserves respect and reverence throughout the prayer.

5. When praying with multiple children plan a way for them to take turns reciting the prayers. This could be having each child pray a decade or in larger group settings turns can be taken saying a Hail Mary.

6. Use the beginning of each mystery as an opportunity to give an overview of that event. Remember, the rosary is the Gospel in the form of a prayer.

7. Do not rush. If a child has a question on a particular mystery, take the opportunity to use that as a teaching moment. Use this as a faith building experience.

8. Don’t set your bar too high. When dealing with younger children and those just learning the rosary you may only be able to get through one decade. That’s ok! Remember with younger children the goal is introduce them to a lifelong commitment of praying the rosary. Baby-steps will lead them to walking and eventually running.

9. Do not get overwhelmed. If things don’t seem to go the way they should find an ending point. Pick the rosary back up the next day on that days mysteries and start anew.

10. Praying with children can be difficult. Pray for patience and guidance and invite the Holy Spirit to guide your through each prayer session.

Always remember, teaching kids to pray the rosary is about instilling in them a greater love of Jesus and a better understanding of his life. They will also grow in their devotion to Mary his mother and ours. It can be difficult at times when working with young children, but the rewards are eternal!

How to pray the rosary with a child

Sign of the Cross

In the name of the Father, and of the Son, and of the Holy Spirit. Amen. (As you say this, with your right hand touch your forehead when you say “Father,” touch your breastbone when you say “Son,” touch your left shoulder when you say “Holy,” and touch your right shoulder when you say “Spirit.”)

The Apostles’ Creed

I believe in God, the Father Almighty, Creator of Heaven and earth; and in Jesus Christ, His only Son Our Lord, Who was conceived by the Holy Spirit, born of the Virgin Mary, suffered under Pontius Pilate, was crucified, died, and was buried. He descended into Hell; the third day He rose again from the dead; He ascended into Heaven, and sitteth at the right hand of God, the Father almighty; from thence He shall come to judge the living and the dead. I believe in the Holy Spirit, the holy Catholic Church, the communion of saints, the forgiveness of sins, the resurrection of the body, and life everlasting. Amen.

Our Father, Who art in Heaven, hallowed be Thy Name. Thy Kingdom come. Thy Will be done, on earth as it is in Heaven. Give us this day our daily bread. And forgive us our trespasses, as we forgive those who trespass against us. And lead us not into temptation, but deliver us from evil. Amen.

Hail Mary, full of grace, the Lord is with thee; blessed art thou among women, and blessed is the fruit of thy womb, Jesus. Holy Mary, Mother of God, pray for us sinners, now and at the hour of our death. Amen.

Glory Be to the Father

Glory Be to the Father, and to the Son, and to the Holy Spirit. As it was in the beginning, is now, and will be forever. Amen.

Hail, Holy Queen

Hail, Holy Queen, Mother of mercy; our life, our sweetness, and our hope. To thee do we cry, poor banished children of Eve. To thee do we send up our sighs, mourning and weeping in this vale of tears. Turn, then, most gracious advocate, thine eyes of mercy toward us. And after this, our exile, show unto us the blessed fruit of thy womb, Jesus. O clement, O loving, O sweet Virgin Mary.

Pray for us, O holy Mother of God, that we may be made worthy of the promises of Christ.

Download How To Pray The Rosary For Children PDF/ePub or read online books in Mobi eBooks. Click Download or Read Online button to get How To Pray The Rosary For Children book now. This site is like a library, Use search box in the widget to get ebook that you want.

If the content How To Pray The Rosary For Children not Found or Blank , you must refresh this page manually.

How To Pray The Rosary For Children

How to pray the rosary with a child
DOWNLOAD
READ ONLINE

Download How To Pray The Rosary For Children PDF/ePub, Mobi eBooks by Click Download or Read Online button. Instant access to millions of titles from Our Library and it’s FREE to try! All books are in clear copy here, and all files are secure so don’t worry about it.

How To Pray The Rosary For Children

Author : Kathryn Marcellino
language : en
Publisher:
Release Date : 2020-11-26

How To Pray The Rosary For Children written by Kathryn Marcellino and has been published by this book supported file pdf, txt, epub, kindle and other format this book has been release on 2020-11-26 with Juvenile Fiction categories.

“How to Pray the Rosary for Children with Color Art for the 20 Mysteries” has large full-color art masterpieces mostly by famous artists. There is art and a brief reflection for each mystery and a Bible reference to look up if desired. The mysteries are important events from the lives of Jesus and his mother Mary. While designed as a simple rosary book for kids, it can be used by those of any age while praying as a help in visualizing the mysteries. It includes instructions on how to say the rosary and the prayers of the rosary. Also included are sections on how the rosary is a Bible-based prayer and ideas for praying the rosary with children. The back cover has the art masterpieces for all twenty mysteries for a quick reference.

Praying The Rosary With Your Child

Author : Mary Donze
language : en
Publisher:
Release Date : 2001-11

Praying The Rosary With Your Child written by Mary Donze and has been published by this book supported file pdf, txt, epub, kindle and other format this book has been release on 2001-11 with Religion categories.

Praying the Rosary with Your Child helps parents and other adults introduce children to the joy and comfort of a time-honored Catholic prayer. Each mystery of the rosary is presented along with a brief meditation and a reflection on how to apply the lesson of the mystery in daily life. Complete with the text of each rosary prayer and instructions on how to pray the rosary, this pamphlet will be a source of spiritual joy to both children and adults. Pamphlet This item is not returnable.

Child S Guide To The Rosary

Author : Elizabeth Ficocelli
language : en
Publisher: Paulist Press
Release Date : 2009

Child S Guide To The Rosary written by Elizabeth Ficocelli and has been published by Paulist Press this book supported file pdf, txt, epub, kindle and other format this book has been release on 2009 with Juvenile Nonfiction categories.

Discusses the function of the rosary, including the rosary prayers, and details the stories of Jesus Christ’s life and that of his mother, Mary.

I Pray The Rosary

Author : Margaret Rose Scarfi
language : en
Publisher:
Release Date : 2005-01-01

I Pray The Rosary written by Margaret Rose Scarfi and has been published by this book supported file pdf, txt, epub, kindle and other format this book has been release on 2005-01-01 with Mysteries of the Rosary categories.

Bright illustrations and child-friendly language introduce the rosary to young hearts and hands. I pray the rosary! Offers children a simple, loving way to meditate on the lives of jesus and mary.

How To Pray The Traditional Rosary For Children

Author : Elizabeth Clare Rozycki
language : en
Publisher: Independently Published
Release Date : 2021-06-30

How To Pray The Traditional Rosary For Children written by Elizabeth Clare Rozycki and has been published by Independently Published this book supported file pdf, txt, epub, kindle and other format this book has been release on 2021-06-30 with categories.

The perfect prayer companion and coloring book for traditional Catholic kids. (Does NOT include the Luminous Mysteries added by St. JPII.) Your child can color, pray, and count the “Hail Marys” by following the roses as you recite the Rosary together. Filled with classic images of the Rosary mysteries that can be colored to create a personal Rosary devotional your child will treasure. Perfect for keeping little ones busy during family rosary time. (Ideal for those whose attend the Traditional Latin Mass).

Mysteries Of The Rosary For Children And The Young At Heart

Author : Cheryl Rybarczyk
language : en
Publisher:
Release Date : 2019-06-25

Mysteries Of The Rosary For Children And The Young At Heart written by Cheryl Rybarczyk and has been published by this book supported file pdf, txt, epub, kindle and other format this book has been release on 2019-06-25 with categories.

Mysteries of the Rosary for Children and the Young at Heart is a devotional to read as you pray on the Rosary. Readers should read each mystery before reciting each decade of the Rosary. Read of the mysteries of the life of Jesus Christ, the Son of God, birthed to Mary. Experience the joyful mysteries, the luminous mysteries, the sorrowful mysteries, and the glorious mysteries of Jesus’s life: from the conception to the nativity to the baptism to the death. This devotional is intended for anyone who prays on the Rosary–children, families, and adults alike. Grow in the faith as you read this poetic telling of the life of Jesus Christ.

A Children S Rosary

Author : Kathy O’Neil
language : en
Publisher: Brown Books Kids
Release Date : 2014-08-15

A Children S Rosary written by Kathy O’Neil and has been published by Brown Books Kids this book supported file pdf, txt, epub, kindle and other format this book has been release on 2014-08-15 with Juvenile Nonfiction categories.

There are so many different forms of prayer that we can use to talk and to listen to God. Can you imagine how happy he is when he hears our voices, and he listens to our hearts? Praying the rosary is a special way of talking to God, Jesus, Mary, and the Saints – all at the same time! A Children’s Rosary will help you and those you love learn how to pray the rosary. This beautifully illustrated book includes all four sets of rosary mysteries — Joyful, Luminous, Sorrowful, and Glorious — short reflections for each mystery and a daily rosary prayer schedule. All you need to do is follow the bead colors on the illustrations as you turn each page. Match the colors on the rosary illustrations to the colorful prayers in your book. Following the colors is like following a map¿a prayer map! With the help of A Children’s Rosary, you will soon be able to pray the rosary on your own.

How to pray the rosary with a child

HOW TO PRAY THE ROSARY

The rosary is divided into five groups of ten beads called decades. As we pray the rosary we meditate on the events of Our Lord’s life and Passion, which are called Mysteries. The repetition of the prayers assists in this prayerful meditation. The rosary, in essence, is a compendium of the Gospel and leads us, through the intercession of Our Lady, to contemplate Jesus Christ.

Begin by praying the Sign of the Cross.
In the name of the Father, and of the Son, and of the Holy Spirit. Amen

1. On the crucifix pray the Apostles Creed.
I BELIEVE IN GOD, the Father almighty, Creator of Heaven and earth. And in Jesus Christ, His only Son, our Lord, Who was conceived by the Holy Spirit, born of the Virgin Mary, suffered under Pontius Pilate; was crucified, died, and was buried. He descended into Hell. The third day He rose again from the dead. He ascended into Heaven, and sits at the right hand of God, the Father almighty. He shall come again to judge the living and the dead. I believe in the Holy Spirit, the holy Catholic Church, the communion of saints, the forgiveness of sins, the resurrection of the body, and life everlasting. Amen.

2. Begin the rosary with 1 Our Father.
OUR FATHER, Who art in Heaven, hallowed be Thy Name. Thy kingdom come, Thy will be done on earth as it is in Heaven. Give us this day our daily bread, and forgive us our trespasses, as we forgive those who trespass against us. And lead us not into temptation, but deliver us from evil. Amen.

3. Pray three (3) Hail Marys for an increase in the virtues of faith, hope, and love, and follow with a Glory Be.
HAIL MARY, full of grace, the Lord is with thee. Blessed art thou among women, and blessed is the fruit of thy womb, Jesus. Holy Mary, Mother of God, pray for us sinners, now and at the hour of our death. Amen.

GLORY BE to the Father, and to the Son, and to the Holy Spirit. As it was in the beginning is now, and ever shall be, world without end. Amen.

4. Next, you will begin to pray the Mysteries, or decades, of the Rosary.
It is suggested you focus on the mysteries according to the day of the week you are praying.

Joyful – Monday and Saturday
Glorious – Wednesday and Sunday
Sorrowful – Tuesday and Friday
Luminous – Thursday
[Read details on the mysteries of the rosary]

4a. Announce the first mystery (Ex: “The first Joyful Mystery is the Annunciation.”)
4b. Pray one Our Father

5. Follow with ten (10) Hail Mary’s for each of the 10 beads in the decade
5a. After, pray one (1) Glory Be
5b. Conclude the decade with the Fatima Prayer

O MY JESUS, forgive us our sins, save us from the fires of Hell; lead all souls to Heaven, especially those in most need of Thy mercy. Amen. [Read about the prayers of Fatima here.]

6. Repeat all of step 4 to begin the second decade.

7. Repeat all of step 5 to finish the second decade.

8-13. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the remaining three decades.

14. Lastly, pray the Hail Holy Queen and the concluding prayer.
HAIL HOLY QUEEN, mother of mercy; our life, our sweetness, and our hope. To thee do we cry, poor banished children of Eve. To thee do we send up our sighs, mourning and weeping in this vale of tears. Turn, then, most gracious advocate, thine eyes of mercy toward us. And after this, our exile, show unto us the blessed fruit of thy womb, Jesus. O clement, O loving, O sweet Virgin Mary. Pray for us, O holy Mother of God, that we may be made worthy of the promises of Christ. Amen. V. Pray for us, O holy Mother of God.?R. That we may be made worthy of the promises of Christ.
&
O GOD, WHOSE only-begotten Son by His life, death and resurrection, has purchased for us the rewards of eternal life; grant, we beseech Thee, that by meditating upon these mysteries of the Most Holy Rosary of the Blessed Virgin Mary, we may imitate what they contain and obtain what they promise, through the same Christ our Lord. Amen.

How to pray the rosary with a child

As a Catholic parent or guardian, it is your responsibility to nurture the spiritual growth of your child. You have to inspire and teach your little one, introduce Jesus into their life, and become a model Christian to them. One effective way to plant the seeds of faith in your child’s heart is by teaching them how to pray the rosary, which is an important and powerful prayer.

At our Catholic school, we want to aid you in the overall growth and development of your child with a focus on the spiritual aspect. Here are some ways you can teach your kid how to pray the rosary:

  1. Be understanding and patient

At their age, your child has a short attention span. This is normal, so don’t get frustrated when you feel they have trouble paying attention when praying the rosary. What you can do is to start praying with a shortened version of the rosary and lengthen it eventually until your child learns to stay attentive during prayer.

  1. Dedicate an area in your home to display your rosaries

An effective way to stimulate the curiosity of your little one and get them familiar with rosaries is by dedicating an area in your home to display your rosaries. Remember that your rosaries are more prone to snapping when handled by your child, so it’s best to prepare a variety of rosaries that come in different sizes and eye-catching, child-friendly designs that they can choose from, such as sparkly and colorful.

You can hook your rosaries on the walls or place them near your home altar. Don’t hide them away and leave them to collect dust in the corner of your house.

  1. Pray the rosary around your children

Children tend to follow the actions and habits of adults. If you are serious about teaching your child to pray the rosary, then set a good example of being a prayerful Catholic to your kid. Pray the rosary around them even when you are not expecting them to join you or they are not willing or interested to participate. Eventually, they will start to learn and appreciate the importance of prayer.

  1. Teach your children the prayers in the rosary

Praying the rosary takes more than just memorizing and reciting all the words perfectly. The key to this, especially at a young age, is understanding the words in the prayer. You may provide them with a written copy of the prayer and explain the meaning to them.

  1. Set the atmosphere

As mentioned, children have a small attention span. Help them focus better by getting rid of all distractions and setting a prayerful atmosphere. You may turn off the lights, put on some calming music, or light some candles to create a serene mood.

Conclusion

Teaching your child to pray the rosary is important as it allows your child to communicate with God better. Getting your kid familiar and comfortable with the rosary can be overwhelming at first, but it’s important that you stay patient and committed. This way, you can guide them to establish a strong bond with the Lord and lead a good Christian life. Also, you may enroll them in a reputable Catholic Montessori school to let them learn Catholic faith and teachings.

Let us help you strengthen your child’s relationship with God by enrolling them at St. Aloysius School in New York. Contact us today to learn more about our school!

How to pray the rosary with a child How to pray the rosary with a child How to pray the rosary with a child How to pray the rosary with a child How to pray the rosary with a child

How to pray the rosary with a child

Pray the Holy Rosary

Click here for a text version of the Mysteries of the Rosary

Click here for a picture version of the Mysteries of the Rosary

The Rosary is not only a mental prayer, but also a vocal prayer in which we meditate on the virtues of the Life, Death, Passion and Glory of Jesus Christ and His Blessed Mother, the Virgin Mary.

The rosary owes its origin to St. Dominic.

It is a humble prayer that many sinners owe their conversion to.

1. Hold the cross of the Rosary in your right hand and bless yourself with the Cross, saying, “In the Name of the Father and of the Son and of the Holy Ghost. Amen.”

2. Still holding the Cross, say, The “Apostles’ Creed.”

3. On the first large bead after the Cross, say the Our Father;
On the next three small beads, say the Hail Mary, for the virtues of Faith, Hope and Charity; after the third Hail Mary, say “Glory be to the Father, and to the Son and to the Holy Ghost. As it was in the beginning, is now, and ever shall be, world without end. Amen.”

4. Then announce the first mysteries.
Recite the “Our Father” on the large bead, followed by 10 “Hail Mary’s” on the smaller beads, then say, the “Glory Be” for each decade of the Rosary. There are five decades for each Mystery.

After each Mystery, recite the “Fatima Ejaculation”
” O my Jesus, forgive us our sins, save us from the fires of Hell; lead all souls to Heaven especially those who are most in need of Thy Mercy.”

Click here for a picture version of the Mysteries of the Rosary

The Joyful Mysteries:
(Said on Mondays and Saturdays, the Sundays of Advent,
and Sundays from Epiphany until Lent)

1. The Annunciation (Humility)
2. The Visitation (Fraternal Charity)
3. The Nativity (Love of God)
4. The Presentation (Spirit of sacrifice)
5. Finding in the Temple (Zeal)

The Luminous Mysteries (Mysteries of Light):
(Said on Thursdays)

1. The Baptism of the Lord (Sacrament of Baptism)
2. The Wedding of Cana (Fidelity)
3. The Proclamation of the Kingdom (Desire for Holiness)
4. The Transfiguration (Spiritual Courage)
5. The Institution of the Eucharist (Love of Our Eucharistic Lord)

The Sorrowful Mysteries:
(Said on Tuesdays, Fridays throughout the year;
and daily from Ash Wednesday until Easter Sunday)

1. Agony in the Garden (True Repentance)
2. Scourging at the Pillar (Mortification)
3. Crowning with Thorns (Moral Courage)
4. Carrying the Cross (Patience)
5. The Crucifixion (Final Perseverance)

The Glorious Mysteries:
(Said on Wednesdays and the Sundays from Easter until Advent)

1. The Resurrection (Faith)
2. The Ascension (Hope)
3. The Descent of the Holy Spirit (Zeal)
4. The Assumption (Happy Death)
5. The Coronation of B.V.M. (Love for Mary)

The Hail Holy Queen (said after the completion of the five mysteries)

Hail! Holy Queen, Mother of Mercy, our life, our sweetness and our Hope. To thee do we cry, poor banished children of Eve. To thee do we send up our sighs, mourning and weeping in this valley of tears. Turn then, O most gracious advocate, thine eyes of mercy toward us; and after this our exile, show unto us the blessed fruit of thy womb, Jesus. O clement! O loving! O sweet Virgin Mary!

Pray for us, O Holy Mother of God. That we may be made worthy of the promises of Christ.

O God, whose only begotten Son,
By His life, death and resurrection has purchased for us
The rewards of eternal life, grant, we beseech Thee, that
Meditating upon these mysteries in the most Holy Rosary of
The Blessed Virgin Mary, we may imitate what they contain and
Obtain what they promise: through the same Christ, our Lord.
Amen.

For the intentions of the Holy Father, recite one “Our Father,” one “Hail Mary,” and a “Glory Be.”

In the name of The Father, and of The Son and of The Holy Ghost. Amen.

How to pray the rosary with a child

How to pray the rosary with a child

Webmaster: Schletty Graphics. Contact Richard if you are having a problem viewing this site.

Our Lady and Saint Joseph Invoked Together in This Year’s Prayer Campaign

How to pray the rosary with a child

How to pray the rosary with a child

A million children praying the Rosary can change the world.

On October 18 this year the international Catholic pastoral charity and pontifical foundation Aid to the Church in Need (ACN International) is once again inviting parishes, kindergartens, schools, and families to join in the annual prayer initiative “A million children praying the Rosary”. It is a prayer campaign for peace and unity throughout the world, which, at the same time, encourages children and young people to seek help and support in God during difficult times, as the international president of ACN, Cardinal Mauro Piacenza explains.

This year the initiative centers around the person of Saint Joseph, with quotations from the Apostolic Letter “Patris Corde” – (“With a Father’s Heart”) written by Pope Francis to mark the Year of Saint Joseph on the 150th anniversary of his proclamation as Patron of the Universal Church, a Jubilee Year which will conclude on December 8 this year. This year’s campaign will encourage children to pray “hand in hand with Our Lady and under the protection of Saint Joseph”. Cardinal Piacenza recalls that Saint Joseph, as Patron of the Universal Church, “is a great example for us of how God can turn all things to good through our prayer, our fidelity and our obedience to His Word”.

Although it was hoped that 2021 would see the end of the coronavirus restrictions, the consequences of the disease are still very severe in many places. Besides, this crisis is not the only threat facing the world. “Hunger, poverty, corruption, terrorism, the profanation of human life and the destruction of creation are affecting millions of people”, Cardinal Piacenza explains. In response, he emphasizes the importance of prayer, and especially the prayer of children, in interceding for “God’s salvation for the world”.

How to pray the rosary with a childOver 509,000 children registered on its ACN webpage alone.

Last year, the campaign “A million children praying the Rosary” beat all records, uniting together children from 136 different countries, including Syria, Iraq, Mexico, Armenia, Papua New Guinea, Nigeria, and the Democratic Republic of the Congo, for example. Over 509,000 children registered on its ACN webpage alone.

How to pray the rosary with a child

The ACN webpage offers free materials for those praying in parishes, schools, children’s groups and families. As it does each year, the free information pack contains instructions on how to pray the Rosary, short meditations for children on the Mysteries of the Rosary, and an Act of Consecration to Our Lady for children.

This year the posters include Saint Joseph alongside Our Blessed Lady and an additional printed prayer to Saint Joseph which Pope Francis prays each day. The downloadable online information packs are available, together with pictures to color, in 26 different languages. You can find them at: https://acninternational.org/millionchildrenpraying/material/

The origins of the prayer initiative “A million children praying the Rosary” date back to the year 2005 when a group of children was seen praying the Rosary at a local shrine in the Venezuelan capital Caracas, and some of the adults who witnessed the scene were reminded of the words of Padre Pio, who once said: “When a million children pray the Rosary, the world will change.” Since then, the campaign has spread rapidly and become a worldwide phenomenon.

Learning how to pray the Rosary can appear overwhelming at first. Especially for those that aren’t familiar with the rosary prayers. Perhaps you’re familiar with how to say the rosary, but you just want a Rosary guide to readily have on hand so you can look up a Rosary prayer or the specific mysteries for the day. Whichever is the case, we have lots of different printouts that will help guide you along the way, so you can learn, practice, and teach others how to pray the rosary.

How to pray the rosary with a child How to Pray the Rosary – One page color with coded prayers.

Prayers of the Rosary.

BLESS YOURSELF: In the name of the Father, and of the Son, and of the Holy Spirit. Amen. (As you say this, touch your forehead with your right hand when you say Father, touch your breastbone when you say Son, touch your left shoulder when you say Holy, and touch your right shoulder when you say Spirit.)

THE CREED: I believe in God, the Father almighty, Creator of Heaven and earth. And in Jesus Christ, His only Son, our Lord, Who was conceived by the Holy Spirit, born of the Virgin Mary, suffered under Pontius Pilate; was crucified, died, and was buried. He descended into Hell. The third day He rose again from the dead . He ascended into Heaven, and sits at the right hand of God, the Father almighty. He shall come again to judge the living and the dead. I believe in the Holy Spirit, the holy Catholic Church, the communion of saints, the forgiveness of sins, the resurrection of the body, and life everlasting. Amen.

THE OUR FATHER: Our Father, Who art in Heaven, hallowed be Thy Name. Thy kingdom come, Thy will be done on earth as it is in Heaven. Give us this day our daily bread, and forgive us our trespasses, as we forgive those who trespass against us. And lead us not into temptation, but deliver us from evil. Amen.

HAIL MARY: Hail Mary, full of grace, the Lord is with thee. Blessed art thou among women, and blessed is the fruit of thy womb, Jesus. Holy Mary, Mother of God, pray for us sinners, now and at the hour of our death. Amen.

GLORY BE: Glory be to the Father, and to the Son, and to the Holy Spirit. As it was in the beginning is now, and ever shall be, world without end. Amen.

FATIMA PRAYER: Oh my Jesus, forgive us our sins, save us from the fires of Hell; lead all souls to Heaven, especially those in most need of Thy mercy. Amen.

THE SALVE REGINA: Hail, Holy Queen, mother of mercy; our life, our sweetness, and our hope. To thee do we cry, poor banished children of Eve. To thee do we send up our sighs, mourning and weeping in this vale of tears. Turn, then, most gracious advocate, thine eyes of mercy toward us. And after this, our exile, show unto us the blessed fruit of thy womb, Jesus. O clement, O loving, O sweet Virgin Mary. Pray for us, O holy Mother of God, that we may be madenworthy of the promises of Christ. Amen.
O GOD, WHOSE only-begotten Son by His life, death and resurrection, has purchased for us the rewards of eternal life; grant, we beseech Thee, that by meditating upon these mysteries of the Most Holy Rosary of the Blessed Virgin Mary, we may imitate what they contain and obtain what they promise, through the same Christ our Lord. Amen.

MEMORARE: Remember oh most Blessed Virgin Mary that never was it known, that anyone who fled to your protection, implored your help, or sought your intercession, was left unaided. Inspired by this confidence, we fly untothee, oh virgin of virgins, our Mother. To you do we come, before you we stand, sinful and sorrowful. Oh mother of the Word Incarnate, despise not our petitions, but in your mercy, hear and answer them. Amen.

Want to do a family Rosary, but are nervous about letting your toddler or preschooler around an heirloom rosary? We have these printable rosary cards that work perfectly!

How to pray the rosary with a child

With the family Rosary prayer time, we follow some pretty simple rules. I’m ok with little ones who wiggle and move around, or play with LEGOs and play dough to keep their hands busy. As long as they’re reasonably quiet, they get to stay and help lead prayers.

To help them follow along and learn the virtues of the Rosary, I started brainstorming. I wanted something visual to go along with the prayers, to help form a picture in our minds.

I created these printable Rosary cards – perfect for using during family Rosary time or packing into a bag to keep babies and toddlers occupied during Mass.

You’ll find cards for all 20 Mysteries here, in one easy download. They’re designed to print front to back, with a Mystery on one side, along with a child friendly reflection and Bible verses on the back. Artwork provided by our friends at Drawn 2B Creative.

Mysteries Included

The Joyful Mysteries
The Annunciation
The Visitation
The Nativity
The Presentation of Our Lord
The Finding of Lord Jesus in the Temple

The Luminous Mysteries
The Baptism in the Jordan
The Wedding at Cana
Proclaiming the Kingdom
The Transfiguration
Institution of the Eucharist

The Sorrowful Mysteries
The Agony in the Garden
The Scourging at the Pillar
The Crowning of Thorns
The Carrying of the Cross
The Crucifixion

The Glorious Mysteries
The Resurrection
The Ascension into Heaven
The Descent of the Holy Spirit (Pentecost)
The Assumption of Our Blessed Virgin Mary
The Coronation of Our Blessed Virgin Mary

How to pray the rosary with a child

I recommend printing these on cardstock and laminating them for durability. We punch a hole in the upper corner and keep them on a ring, but you could also leave them loose. (you’ll find instructions for printing with your cards.)

I’ve written about our relationship with the rosary before, and will admit that it’s sometimes a struggle. But thankfully, being Catholic, we have the liturgical year, which is beautifully designed, and when lived into, can guide our hearts back to where they belong. October is the month of year dedicated to the rosary. Monday is the feast of Our Lady of the Rosary. So as I’ve been planning what we’re going to focus on with the kids this year, God has been poking and prodding my heart to get back to the habit of praying a rosary each night with my husband. It really does bear fruit in our marriage, more fruit than if we pray it separately.

(Side bar: I loved Kendra Tierney’s recent blog post about the discipline of praying the rosary being important.)

So as we re-focus in our prayers, we naturally pull our kiddos along with us. This month, I’m making an effort to use the fact that the whole month is dedicated to the rosary to weave it more and more into their daily lives as well as my own. In keeping with that, I thought I’d do a little rosary round-up of the activities and the lessons we’ll be using.

Coloring Pages

Coloring Pages are always a favorite in our house, so we are taking advantage of St. John the Baptist’s AMAZING collection of free coloring pages, and Will and G are each going to make a rosary book. My aim is to cover one mystery a day Monday-Friday for four weeks (so we’ll be starting tomorrow). I’ll read the passage from the children’s Bible and they’ll color the page. Simple, easy, and an effective way to help them learn the mysteries.

Making Our Own Rosaries

Last year G loved this simple pipe cleaner decade rosary activity from Catholic Icing, so we will definitely repeat it. I think William will love it too. G and I will also be venturing into making a full rosary together, using simple pony beads and plastic cord. It’s great counting practice for her, as we’ve been working more and more with big numbers and are starting to learn about multiples (i.e. counting by 10s). I have a feeling that she will also be much more willing to pray on a rosary that she herself created.

Rosaries For Kids

If you’re looking to purchase a rosary for your kids this month, there are several fabulous options out there. All of these are made by Catholic moms, so you can feel good about supporting their families with each purchase.

Chews Life makes the cutest silicone rosaries. I like these much better than the wooden ones as they don’t make such a loud noise when banged on the pew.

Allison over at Smallthingsg8tlove makes absolutely swoonable wall rosaries out of felt balls. How cute would these be on a nursery wall?

We have a wonderful interactive rosary that the kids and I use to start our school day.

For even more liturgical living, you can find me on Pinterest!

Share this:

  • Facebook
  • More
  • Print
  • Twitter
  • LinkedIn
  • Reddit
  • Tumblr
  • Pinterest

Share this:

  • Facebook
  • More
  • Print
  • Twitter
  • LinkedIn
  • Reddit
  • Tumblr
  • Pinterest

Share this:

  • Facebook
  • More
  • Print
  • Twitter
  • LinkedIn
  • Reddit
  • Tumblr
  • Pinterest

The Rosary is a Scripture-based prayer. It begins with the Apostles’ Creed, which summarizes the great mysteries of the Catholic faith. The Our Father, which introduces each mystery, is from the Gospels. The first part of the Hail Mary is the angel’s words announcing Christ’s birth and Elizabeth’s greeting to Mary. St. Pius V officially added the second part of the Hail Mary. The Mysteries of the Rosary center on the events of Christ’s life. There are four sets of Mysteries: Joyful, Sorrowful, Glorious and––added by Saint John Paul II in 2002––the Luminous.

The prayers of the Rosary

The repetition in the Rosary is meant to lead one into restful and contemplative prayer related to each Mystery. The gentle repetition of the words helps us to enter into the silence of our hearts, where Christ’s spirit dwells. The Rosary can be said privately or with a group.

The Five Joyful Mysteries are traditionally prayed on Mondays, Saturdays, and, during the season of Advent, on Sundays:

  1. The Annunciation
  2. The Visitation
  3. The Nativity
  4. The Presentation in the Temple
  5. The Finding in the Temple

The Five Sorrowful Mysteries are traditionally prayed on Tuesdays, Fridays, and, during the season of Lent, on Sundays:

  1. The Agony in the Garden
  2. The Scourging at the Pillar
  3. The Crowning with Thorns
  4. The Carrying of the Cross
  5. The Crucifixion and Death

The Five Glorious Mysteries are traditionally prayed on Wednesdays and, outside the seasons of Advent and Lent, on Sundays:

  1. The Resurrection
  2. The Ascension
  3. The Descent of the Holy Spirit
  4. The Assumption
  5. The Coronation of Mary

The Five Luminous Mysteries are traditionally prayed on Thursdays:

  1. The Baptism of Christ in the Jordan
  2. The Wedding Feast at Cana
  3. Jesus’ Proclamation of the Coming of the Kingdom of God
  4. The Transfiguration
  5. The Institution of the Eucharist

How to pray the rosary with a child

Praying the Rosary

Familiarize yourself and/or your group with the prayers of the rosary. See the Importance of the Meeting for the form used in the meetings.

  1. Make the Sign of the Cross.
  2. Holding the Crucifix, say the Apostles’ Creed.
  3. On the first bead, say an Our Father.
  4. Say one Hail Mary on each of the next three beads.
  5. Say the Glory Be
  6. For each of the five decades, announce the Mystery (perhaps followed by a brief reading from Scripture) then say the Our Father.
  7. While fingering each of the ten beads of the decade, next say ten Hail Marys while meditating on the Mystery. Then say a Glory Be.
    (After finishing each decade, some say the following prayer requested by the Blessed Virgin Mary at Fatima: O my Jesus, forgive us our sins, save us from the fires of hell; lead all souls to Heaven, especially those who have most need of your mercy.)
  8. After saying the five decades, say the Hail, Holy Queen, followed by this dialogue and prayer:

V. Pray for us, O holy Mother of God.

R. That we may be made worthy of the promises of Christ.

Let us pray: O God, whose Only Begotten Son,
by his life, Death, and Resurrection,
has purchased for us the rewards of eternal life,
grant, we beseech thee,
that while meditating on these mysteries
of the most holy Rosary of the Blessed Virgin Mary,
we may imitate what they contain
and obtain what they promise,
through the same Christ our Lord. Amen.

(A prayer to St. Joseph may also follow.) Conclude the Rosary with the Sign of the Cross.

How to pray the rosary with a child

How to pray the rosary with a child

How to pray the rosary with a child

Joyful Mysteries -Mondays and Thursdays (also Sundays from beginning of Advent until Lent)

O MOST MERCIFUL JESUS, Lover of souls I pray Thee, by the agony of Thy most Sacred Heart, and by the sorrows of Thine Immaculate Mother, cleanse in Thine Own Blood the sinners of the whole world who are now in their agony and who are to die this day. Amen.

HEART OF JESUS, once in agony, have pity on the dying.

O God, I pray for the intentions of the Pope. I ask You to grant him the ability to write well and to speak well so that he might lead Your people well. Grant him the gifts of faith, hope, love, charity, chastity, kindness, wisdom, patience, generosity, courage but most of all that he may be lead away from all heresy so that he might unite Your church and be with You one day in Heaven. Amen

By the Sign of the Holy Cross, from our enemies free us, O Lord, My God.

In the name of the Father, and of the Son, and of the Holy Ghost. Amen.

The Apostles Creed

V. I believe in God, the Father Almighty, Creator of Heaven and earth; and in Jesus Christ, his only Son, our Lord; who was conceived by the Holy Ghost, born of the Virgin Mary, He suffered under Pontius Pilate, was crucified, died and was buried. He descended into hell; the third day He rose again from the dead; He ascended into Heaven sits at the right hand of God, the Father Almighty; from thence He will come to judge the living and the dead.

R. I believe in the Holy Ghost, the Holy Catholic Church, the Communion of Saints, the forgiveness of sins, the resurrection of the body, and life everlasting, Amen.


Three Hail Marys for an increase in the Virtues of Faith, Hope, and Charity.

First Joyful Mystery: The Annunciation

Meditation: And when the angel had come to her, he said, “Hail, full of grace, the Lord is with Thee, blessed art Thou among women.” Luke 1, 28

One Our Father Ten Hail Mary’s.

V. Glory Be to the Father, and to the Son, and to the Holy Ghost, as it was in the beginning is now, and ever shall be, World without end. Amen. “O my Jesus, forgive us our sins, save us from the fires of Hell, relieve the souls in Purgatory, especially those most abandoned” Amen.

Second Joyful Mystery:

Meditation: And Elizabeth was filled with the Holy Ghost, and cried out with a loud voice, saying, “Blessed art Thou among women and blessed is the fruit of Thy womb!” Luke 1, 41-42

Say one Our Father and ten Hail Mary’s.

V. Glory Be to the Father, and to the Son, and to the Holy Ghost, as it was in the beginning is now, and ever shall be, World without end. Amen. “O my Jesus, forgive us our sins, save us from the fires of Hell, relieve the souls in Purgatory, especially those most abandoned” Amen.

Third Joyful Mystery

The Birth of Jesus

Meditation: And she brought forth her firstborn Son, and wrapped Him in swaddling clothes, and laid Him in a manger, because there was no room for them in the inn. Luke 2, 7

Say one Our Father and ten Hail Mary’s.

V. Glory Be to the Father, and to the Son, and to the Holy Ghost, as it was in the beginning is now, and ever shall be, World without end. Amen. “O my Jesus, forgive us our sins, save us from the fires of Hell, relieve the souls in Purgatory, especially those most abandoned” Amen.

Fourth Joyful Mystery

Meditation: And when the days of Her purification were fulfilled according to the Law of Moses, they took Him up to Jerusalem to present Him to the Lord. Luke 2, 22
Say one Our Father and ten Hail Mary’s.

V. Glory Be to the Father, and to the Son, and to the Holy Ghost, as it was in the beginning is now, and ever shall be, World without end. Amen. “O my Jesus, forgive us our sins, save us from the fires of Hell, relieve the souls in Purgatory, especially those most abandoned” Amen.

Fifth Joyful Mystery

The Finding of Jesus in the Temple

Meditation: And it came to pass after three days, that they found Him in the temple, sitting in the midst of the teachers, both listening to them and asking them questions. Luke 2, 46

Say one Our Father and ten Hail Mary’s.

V. Glory Be to the Father, and to the Son, and to the Holy Ghost, as it was in the beginning is now, and ever shall be, World without end. Amen. “O my Jesus, forgive us our sins, save us from the fires of Hell, relieve the souls in Purgatory, especially those most abandoned” Amen.

HAIL, HOLY QUEEN, Mother of Mercy, our life, our sweetness and our hope! To thee do we cry, poor banished children of Eve; to thee do we send up our sighs, mourning and weeping in this valley of tears. Turn then, most gracious advocate, thine eyes of mercy toward us, and after this our exile, show unto us the blessed fruit of thy womb, Jesus. O clement, O loving, O sweet Virgin Mary! V. Pray for us, O Holy Mother of God. R. That we may be made worthy of the promises of Christ.

Prayer to Saint Michael the Archangel

Saint Michael the Archangel, defend us in battle. Be our protection against the wickedness and snares of the Devil; may God rebuke him, we humbly pray, and do thou O Prince of the Heavenly Host, by the power of God, cast into Hell Satan, and all the evil spirits who prowl about the World seeking the ruin of souls.

Prayer to Saint Joseph

To thee, O blessed Joseph, do we have recourse in our tribulation, and, having implored the help of thy thrice-holy Spouse, we confidently invoke thy patronage also. By that charity wherewith thou wast united to the Immaculate Virgin Mother of God, and by that fatherly affection with which thou didst embrace the Child Jesus, we beseech thee and we humbly pray, that thou wouldst look graciously upon the inheritance which Jesus Christ hath purchased by His Blood, and assist us in our needs by thy power and strength. Most watchful guardian of the Holy Family, protect the chosen people of Jesus Christ; keep far from us, most loving father, all blight of error and corruption: mercifully assist us from Heaven, most mighty defender, in this our conflict with the powers of darkness; and, even as of old thou didst rescue the Child Jesus from the supreme peril of His life, so now defend God’s Holy Church from the snares of the enemy and from all adversity; keep us one and all under thy continual protection, that we may be supported by thine example and thine assistance, may be enabled to lead a holy life, die a happy death and come at last to the possession of everlasting blessedness in Heaven. Amen.

O GOD, who’s only begotten Son, by His life, death, and resurrection, has purchased for us the rewards of eternal life, grant, we beseech Thee, that meditating upon these mysteries of the Most Holy Rosary of the Blessed Virgin Mary, we may imitate what they contain and obtain what they promise, through the same Christ Our Lord. Amen.

V. Lord grant us Priests.

R. Lord grant us Priests.

V. Lord grant us many Holy Priests.

R. Lord grant us many Holy Priests.

V. Lord grant us many Holy Priests and Religious Vocations.

R. Lord grant us many Holy Priests and Religious Vocations.

Saint Pius X pray for us.

Saint Joseph pray for us.

Saint Juan Diego pray for us.

Saint Therese the Little Flower, pray for us.

Saint Anthony of Padua, pray for us.

Saint Rita, pray for us.

May the Divine Assistance remain always with us; and may the souls of the Faithful departed, through the Mercy of God, rest in peace. Amen.

If you ever find the rosary hard to pray, or hard to commit to regularly, read on to find out our seven most surprising things that happen in your life when you start to pray the rosary more often!

When you’re finished with this article, don’t forget to check out our ultimate guide to the rosary, with how-to guides, info on it’s history, and rosary meditations with art!

7 Things That Happen When You Pray The Rosary

1. You Become Less Selfish

How to pray the rosary with a child

You know how it is when you love someone or something with all your heart, and you feel so passionate about it or them, but it is sometimes just so hard to act on that love? That is how I feel about the rosary. I love it and I love that we were given it as a gift. I truly believe in its power. But laying time aside to pray it? That requires me to sacrifice and give up some time and energy for myself, and ponder on the Mysteries instead. Praying the rosary helps re-orientate ourselves to Christ, who can lift us out of ourselves and our sin, and teaches us again and again the discipline of refraining from indulging our selfishness.

2.You Become More Disciplined

How to pray the rosary with a child

The more you pray the rosary, the more you want to pray the rosary. The grace of discipline is forged in those times when you quieten your mind to concentrate, pray even when you are tired, or switch your phone for your rosary before bed. These acts of discipline affect all areas of your life. Discipline is like exercise, you can’t just become a marathon runner on your first run. But you can build up to it bit by bit over time. The rosary helps you make those baby-steps towards making God a greater priority in your life. Even those days (or seasons) when you’re not feeling the emotional or spiritual consolations, sticking to the Rosary is a wonderful way to remain faithful, fulfill a duty to God and Our Lady, and follow a “little rule” in your day.

3. Our Lady Reveals Insights

How to pray the rosary with a child

I know that if you have suffered from a bleak introduction to the rosary as a child, perhaps being forced to pray it by well meaning teachers or parents, and associate it with sheer boredom, it can be hard to understand how the rosary can offer anything beautiful or transcendent while actually praying it, even if you do believe in its powerful after-effects. But I really believe that in praying the rosary often, hidden depths are revealed. In mediating on each of the Mysteries regularly, Our Lady, with Christ, has something to give you. Perhaps it is an insight into an area of your life that you are struggling with. Perhaps it is an epiphany over a particular moment in Christ’s life that will really help you. Maybe it is the experience that can happen deep in prayer that you feel you are actually there in the moment of the Mystery itself. There is always something new to be explored, and always something good to be revealed.

4. You Have More Courage

How to pray the rosary with a child

When you start to place your trust and your life and even your heart into the hands of Mary through the rosary, you begin to understand how eminently practical, simple and full of solutions she is. She only wants to get us to Christ, and she loves us so much, with the true tenderness of a perfect mother, that we do her a great honour when we give her our problems. Courage begins to burst forth in a life that is always turning again and again to Mary to ask her help and to trust that she will provide. You can have huge amounts of courage when you know that Mary is by your side! St Maximilian Kolbe said: “I see Mary everywhere. I see problems nowhere.”

5. Your Day Proceeds Calmly

How to pray the rosary with a child

This is what one of our authors said about praying the rosary daily: “It makes my whole day more peaceful, like Mary just is hanging around battling back the bad stuff. Things fall into place easier. I’m more aware of God’s presence.” Praying the rosary doesn’t wipe out suffering in your life, but it does give you a much stronger weapon to battle it with.

6. You Get An Extra Awareness Before the Moment of Temptation

How to pray the rosary with a child

One of the 15 Promises of the Rosary is that: “it will destroy vice, decrease sin, and defeat heresies.” In my experience, when I have prayed the rosary often, I find that the moment before I sin slows down. By that I mean, if I want to procrastinate or gossip for example, I don’t do it automatically. I recognize that those actions begin with a conversation in my head. I have more of an awareness of the temptation before the action, and there is more time for me to consider whether I want to actually do it or not. And in praying the rosary, I start to see my life through a shared perspective with God, and I begin to see what He wants for me is good, and I want it too.

7. You Start to Live Out the Incarnation

How to pray the rosary with a child

The power of the rosary lies in its simplicity. It is so deceptively simple that it can seem stupid to the intelligent mind. So often we think that we need to find complex, clever, rocket-science-type solutions to solve our complex, clever, rocket-science-sized problems. We stare into the abyss of our issues and wonder how we will find the fix to such a gaping wound. We don’t need to. God came to earth as a tiny, weak and helpless baby born into poverty. The rosary, so deceptively simple that it can be prayed in any circumstances, is the most power weapon of prayer that we have.

“There is no problem, no matter how difficult it is, whether temporal or above all spiritual, in the personal life of each one of us, of our families…that cannot be solved by the Rosary.” Sr. Lúcia of Fatima.

That’s our seven gifts that come from praying the rosary regularly, but there are infinitely more! What is your eighth? Share in the comments below!

If you need any more inspiration to pray the rosary more often, check out these resources.

Power In My Hands: Rosary Film

Do You Know The 15 Promises Of The Rosary?

How to pray the rosary with a child

How to Pray the Rosary? A Step-by-Step Visual Guide

How to pray the rosary with a child

We talk a lot about the Holy Rosary at Catholic-Link, but today we get down to basics. Presenting a simple visual guide on how to pray the Rosary.

How to pray the rosary with a child

*These Amazon Affliate links help the ministry of Catholic-Link at no additional cost to you! Thank you!

Sitting in traffic or waiting in line? Wasted time or prayer time? Your call. With Family Rosary’s Mobile Rosary it’s prayer time with Mary. A traditional Rosary with the text of each prayer.

How to pray the rosary with a child

How to pray the rosary with a child

How to pray the rosary with a child

How to pray the rosary with a child

How to pray the rosary with a child

How to pray the rosary with a child

The Rosary

The rosary itself is composed of 60 beads laced together with a crucifix and a pendant of Mary where the 3 strands meet. We divide the Rosary into 6 segments. The 1st segment is composed of the introductory prayers and that is followed by 5 decades.

How to pray the rosary with a child

The Sign of the Cross and The Apostles’ Creed

The Sign of the Cross

In the name of the Father and of the Son and of the Holy Spirit. Amen.

The Apostles’ Creed:

I believe in God, the Father Almighty, creator of heaven and earth, and in Jesus Christ, his only Son, our Lord, who was conceived by the Holy Spirit, born of the Virgin Mary, suffered under Pontius Pilate, was crucified, died and was buried; he descended into hell; on the third day he rose again from the dead; he ascended into heaven, and is seated at the right hand of the God the Father Almighty; from there he will come again to judge the living and the dead. I believe in the Holy Spirit, the holy catholic Church, the communion of saints, the forgiveness of sins, the resurrection of the body, and life everlasting. Amen.

How to pray the rosary with a child

Our Father, Hail Mary, and Glory Be

Our Father

Our Father, who art in heaven, hallowed be thy name; thy kingdom come; thy will be done on earth as it is in heaven. Give us this day our daily bread; and forgive us our trespasses, as we forgive those who trespass against us; and lead us not into temptation, but deliver us from evil. Amen.

Hail Mary

Hail Mary, full of grace, the Lord is with thee. Blessed art thou among women, and blessed is the fruit of thy womb, Jesus. Holy Mary, Mother of God, pray for us sinners, now and at the hour of our death. Amen.

Glory Be

Glory be to the Father, and to the Son, and to the Holy Spirit. As it was in the beginning, is now, and ever shall be, world without end. Amen.

How to pray the rosary with a child

Intentions

After the introductory prayers and before the mystery is announced the leader of the group may announce an intention for this particular decade. The intention may be a person by name, a group of persons, a prayer for peace and justice, or some other worthy cause, or a prayer for the deceased.

Next, the leader will announce the mystery, for example, “The first sorrowful mystery is the agony in the garden.” All twenty mysteries of the Rosary will follow the same three-step pattern, scripture, reflection and personal experience.

How to pray the rosary with a child

Hail Holy Queen

Hail, Holy Queen, Mother of Mercy, our life, our sweetness, and our hope. To thee do we cry, poor banished children of Eve: to thee do we send up our sighs, mourning and weeping in this valley of tears. Turn then, O most gracious Advocate, thine eyes of mercy toward us, and after this, our exile, show unto us the blessed fruit of thy womb, Jesus. O clement, O loving, O sweet Virgin Mary! Pray for us, O Holy Mother of God, that we may be made worthy of the promises of Christ. Amen.

How to separate your professional and private life

You’ve probably heard the famous tagline, “What happens in Vegas, stays in Vegas.” And while that’s winking at a possibly rowdy weekend, it also hits on an important idea: The ability to separate two worlds. Now, think about that same concept when it comes to your personal and professional lives.

When you find a healthy way to separate business from personal life, it’s exactly that: healthy. You’ll be happier in your free time if you set a few boundaries with the office. You’ll also set yourself up for success at work by removing all the distractions. This article teaches you a process for doing exactly that. And from there, as Marcus Lemonis would say, all you have to do is “Trust the process.”

Separating Your Personal and Professional Lives

When you separate business from personal life, you avoid a lot of self-imposed challenges. Marcus ran into a great example of this when he visited a trailer company in the southeast.

How to separate your professional and private life

The two founders started a company together while they were married. In other words, they mixed their work and personal lives. But eventually they broke up, which had a toxic effect on their business. Their communication grew volatile and unprofessional. Although they were business partners, sometimes they wouldn’t share important information regarding the company just to avoid dealing with each other. They even talked about turning away business if it meant dealing with the other one’s new love interest. The turbulence ended up costing them a deal with Marcus, but also teaches you an important lesson. If you don’t separate business from personal life, you could be introducing unnecessary hurdles that could have easily been avoided.

The great thing about creating a little separation is that it’s equally valuable in both directions. Has your job somehow taken over your life at home? If you’re enthusiastically nodding your head, you have plenty of company. Deloitte conducted a survey on workplace burnout, and out of 1,000 respondents, 83% said that burnout from work negatively impacts their personal relationships. Maybe you’re answering emails while you’re supposed to be on your honeymoon. Maybe your work is renting too much space in your head and you’re never fully recharging. Or maybe you’re waking up to the buzzing of work emails at 2 AM. Whatever the cause, when work contaminates your personal life, that can hurt productivity, damage morale, and increase turnover.

How to separate your professional and private life

How to separate your professional and private life

You Can Still Be You

In a smartphone era when everyone’s always connected, it might seem a little daunting to separate business from personal life. But Marcus has some encouraging words: “It’s okay in business, no matter what anyone tells you, to be yourself.” Creating a healthy separation doesn’t mean leading a double life. You just have to know which part of you to engage when. Take the example of a car. Whether it’s in first gear, reverse, or neutral, it’s still the same car. Think of your personal and professional life the same way. You’re still you. You’re just shifting gears and knowing which gear each situation calls for. Because using the wrong gear at the wrong time can take a serious toll.

Let’s say your neighbor runs a small landscaping business and it just went under. That’s obviously devastating and you’re a supportive friend who wants to help him get back on his feet. So, you hire him to run the operations department of your $50 million fashion company. That’s coming from a good place, but you’re also failing to separate business from personal life. Your team might question your leadership. Your investors might think it’s nepotism. You yourself might even be in for a pretty rocky year because he’ll be learning on the job. You set out to do a good thing, but since you mixed your personal and professional lives, you ended up complicating things.

How to separate your professional and private life

You’re better off solving personal problems with personal solutions. Think about slipping his resume to one of your old college buddies instead.

There’s always going to be some fluidity between your personal and professional lives. So, when you try to separate business from personal matters, just use some discretion. If a bunch of you are by the coffee maker and start to make fun of Gary’s shirt behind his back, that’s an example of something personal that can toxify a workplace. Now, imagine you’re talking about Gary with that same group of people, but this time, you’re excited that he’s buying a new house. That’s still personal, but in this case, it’s positive and great.

A Gallup report called The State of The American Workplace stated that “when employees possess a deep sense of affiliation with their team members, they’re driven to take positive actions that benefit the business — actions they may not otherwise even consider.” So, as you work towards a world where you separate business from personal affairs, ask yourself this: “Am I creating a bond? Or am I introducing complexity?

No matter how involved you are in your business, you need to make time for yourself and your family and friends.

Question: What is one tip you have for keeping your personal and professional life separate?

Don’t Use Your Facebook Profile for Work

“Use a Facebook page to promote your business, and keep your Facebook profile for actual friends and family only. Many people make the mistake of blurring the line and they’re left with the worst of both worlds: They can’t promote on Facebook because they’ll annoy their friends, and they can’t be too personal for fear of coming across as unprofessional with prospects. Separate the two. “

Schedule Your Life, Too

“Reserve personal time in your schedule for activities that allow you to recharge and that add value, such as daily exercise, a weekly date or social night, family activities and vacation. You will not only have something to look forward to, but by reserving personal time you will have extra motivation to manage your time well so you do not have to cancel on others — or yourself!”

Start and Stop on Time

“I used to let my business drive all over my personal life because I didn’t have any set boundaries. Plans with my girlfriend, family and friends would often get delayed or cancelled because I was busy at the office. After a while, I noticed that it took a significant toll on my most important relationships, and I made the decision to always start and end things on time. It’s helped tremendously. “

Meditate

“Meditation has allowed me to mentally disconnect from work when I get home at night. There is a great app, Headspace, that is a perfect ‘starter course’ for first-time users. The app eases you in by making you clear your mind for 10 minutes a day, for 10 days. Having the ability to disconnect when getting home has allowed me to be more creative and frees my mind for new ideas. “

Leave the Office

“I used to get stuck at the office until all hours of the night. That’s not good for your personal life and loved ones who are waiting at home for you. So I made one simple change. I booked a family function to attend every night of the week. It could be as simple as dinner or a family walk at a local park. Just thinking about standing your family up forces you to be there with them.”

Disconnect From Technology

“I truly believe that this separation no longer exists. The better question is how to disconnect. For me, turning my phone off and going for a hike, a bike ride or another activity in nature is immensely relaxing. “

Turn Off Push Notifications

“Everyone carries a mobile smartphone these days. It’s almost impossible to keep things separate. However, you should disconnect from your email after a certain time during the day. If you’re on the golf course or out to dinner with family, turn off push email notifications. You can always get up early the next day to respond. “

How to separate your professional and private life

In today’s connected world, many employees have faced professional consequences because of postings on social media or because other online content has gone “viral” and come to the attention of employers. You don’t want to jeopardize career opportunities because of your Internet activity, so you should take steps to keep your personal and professional life separate.

Keep your social media profiles private

If your social media posts are public, anyone and everyone can access them. Even if you’re not posting anything especially controversial, you may not want to give potential employers an inside glimpse into all of your family activities you post on social media. By setting your profiles to private, you don’t make yourself so much of an open book.

Don’t “friend” all of your colleagues online

When you invite colleagues into your personal online spaces, those spaces become de facto professional spaces. You don’t want to have to be careful about what you post lest you become the target of office gossip that eventually gets back to your boss.

Don’t let others post pictures of you on their social media

No matter how careful you are about posting photos that paint you in a compromising life, it will all be for naught if your friends or family post pictures with you in them that you don’t want potential employers to see. Make clear you care about your online reputation and don’t want to be tagged or have your pictures posted on anyone else’s accounts.

Use a nickname or abbreviated name on personal accounts

If you can use a nickname that’s not the same as your professional name, it is less likely your employers will be able to access all of your social media sites and learn things about you that you’d rather keep private.

Avoid posting things you definitely don’t want employers to see

No matter how careful you are, something could get back to an employer. Don’t post anything that you think would be especially damaging to your career.

By maintaining separation between your personal and professional online lives, you won’t have to worry about what comes up on a search engine when employers inevitably Google your name. The Reserves Network can help you to find those employers who your online profile can impress, and can make it easier for you to land a great job opportunity in your chosen field. Give us a call today to find out more.

Facebook is a powerful engine for both personal and professional connections, but that engine can do untold amounts of professional damage if you don’t direct it knowledgeably. Checking your Facebook profile is a routine part of employment vetting, and your boss may even request basic access to your account.

Fortunately, Facebook’s improved functionality in creating friend lists, combined with its various privacy settings, allows you to do enough filtering that you can generally separate your personal and professional content. Maintaining this separation merely requires that you be alert to the necessity of maintaining lists for your various audiences. Here are some tips on how to Separate Your Personal and Professional Facebook lives:

Use Facebook’s Lists Function

By making careful use of Facebook’s “close friends”, “acquaintances” and “restricted” lists, you can choose the audience for each part of your profile. You can always individually decide which people are included and excluded from seeing anything you post, but the different lists streamline that choice for you. The Audience Selector tool allows you to govern which posts each list of friends is able to see. When you write a post or upload a photo, you’ll be able to use the “audience selector” to pick which list you want to share with. You can even create custom lists with your own titles, and the people on that custom list will not see the title.

Create a “restricted” list

This is a special kind of list that’s especially good for current and potential employers or people with whom you have formal business relationships. The people on this list will only be able to see your public content, even if they are friends of your friends. It’s important to remember that anyone whom you tag in a photo will have access to that photo.

Make a Facebook Page

Facebook does offer you the ability to create a Page, which can be used to focus on your professional activities. While your Page is connected to your profile, it does have some independent existence and it will convey a sense of professional legitimacy to your colleagues, clients or employers. If you maintain a professional page, it won’t look inappropriate to post cute pictures of your baby on your personal profile.

Beyond the technicalities

If you’re earning your living by doing freelance writing jobs online, you are in a different position than someone who’s simply an employee. Marketing your services means that you have to maintain a professional online identity, and there are some very definite reasons to allow a certain overlap between personal and professional networks.

For one thing, in this age of social media, our personal and professional lives are not entirely independent of one another. Friends may well generate leads and connect you with new clients, so it’s reasonable to allow them access to your professional self.

Secondly, creating entirely separate identities for public and private use is not only against the terms of service on Facebook, but it also would give rise to an unreasonable amount of social networking time. Managing two separate Facebook identities would be both confusing and exhausting.

Think in terms of curated content

While the use of Facebook lists allows you to hide the foolish photos of you at the Halloween Party from your boss, and also allows you to keep your political interests private, it’s a good idea to avoid posting anything on social media that you’d find acutely embarrassing in the professional realm. Even with the most attentive monitoring, slip-ups in filtering can happen, so it’s good to keep in mind that Facebook is essentially a public place — and behave accordingly.

Contact us today to learn more. about how to Separate Your Personal and Professional Facebook lives.

Betsy S is a freelance writer available on WriterAccess, a marketplace where clients and expert writers connect for assignments.

Starting a new job can be fun and exciting. If you’re lucky, you can keep everything you do within the confines of the office. But let’s be realistic: You’re probably going to be working from home a little bit, either playing catch-up or sipping delicious drinks while you take advantage of your company’s “you don’t have to physically show up” policies.

As your personal and work lives start to intertwine, it can be tricky to manage the balance across your various devices. Here’s how I did it.

Build a wall between work and not-work on your laptop

If you’re lucky, you have full administrator rights on your company-issued laptop, and they don’t care what you do with your system—within reason. (As in, try not to break it.)

If that’s the case, there’s no reason why you can’t (or shouldn’t) separate your primary hard drive into two partitions : one for work and one for personal use. If you can, set up file encryption on the latter at minimum—odds are good work likely forces you to encrypt the former, or has pre-installed a program that does so on your behalf.

How to separate your professional and private life

Microsoft Office Professional 2021 for Windows: Lifetime License

Get smart
Enjoy Microsoft’s suite of essentials with a one-time purchase and installation, as opposed to that fee you’re paying every month.

The standard rules apply: If it’s a company-issued laptop, you still want to be smart about what you’re doing. Even on your personal partition, this is probably not the time to be firing up BitTorrent, browsing for porn, or doing anything else that would get you into hot water at work. You can never be too careful.

The advantages of having a personal partition are numerous. First, you can get around any annoying software work has installed on your behalf—for example, perhaps it has some kind of third-party software installation and updating tool that keeps forcing you out of your web browser to apply an update right when you’re in the middle of working on something. Or perhaps something is so screwy with your system’s customized software, that you’re prevented from installing recent updates to your operating system because they conflict with your work’s custom (and unnecessary) apps.

As well, it’s a lot easier to maintain that work-life balance if you know that WORK partition is for work, and [YOUR NAME] partition is for fun—reasonable fun. You won’t be so easily confused or as tempted to install Steam on your work partition (which your company’s IT department could potentially track). You won’t accidentally save all of your personal passwords to a partition on a device that others could access at any point especially if you leave the company and forget to wipe the laptop before turning it in). You won’t look at websites you shouldn’t when you’re automatically logged into your company VPN. Things like that.

Another option: Separate your work and personal life in your apps

If the thought of splitting your system’s hard drive into two partitions is too scary, you don’t feel comfortable doing it, or you’re prohibited from doing it, you can at least take a few steps to get more organized on your work desktop or laptop.

For example, consider setting up separate work and personal profiles in your web browser . You still shouldn’t use the latter to do anything you’d be embarrassed for your boss to know about, but this will at least help you free yourself from distractions by keeping your cute animal pictures out of your online spreadsheets. Each browser profile can have its own set of bookmarks, extensions, and even synchronize different things among your other work and personal devices—so organized.

How Can I Look for a New Job When My Company Is Checking on Employees?

Dear Lifehacker, I’m looking for a new job, but my company regularly scans job sites and LinkedIn…

We wouldn’t recommend trying to merge your work and personal lives into individual apps. For example, don’t start pulling in all of your personal email into Outlook, if that’s what your company uses for all of its email. Keep your Gmail (or service of your choosing) where it is.

An exception is your personal calendar. I’ve found that it’s a lot easier to manage your life when you can see all of your calendars in one single application. It’s easy to subscribe to one calendar’s .ICS feed from another , giving you an easy way to see all of your at-work and out-of-work appointments at once. This can help ensure that those post-work drinks you’re planning don’t conflict with your emergency finance meeting.

If you really want to get crazy on your company computer, you could also consider running any third-party apps you download in a sandboxed environment , just so they don’t mess with anything on your work system. It’s a slightly more extreme approach, but your IT department will love you for it, we bet.

What about your smartphone?

Here’s where it gets interesting. If work gives you a smartphone to use, you’re going to have to decide just how comfortable you are having your personal data on the device as well.

Generally, I’d recommend that you not synchronize your at-home web browsing with your smartphone. Keep the two separate. In fact, you might even want to use a separate browser for work and personal tasks; synchronize one with an account you use for work (say, Firefox), and use the other for personal browsing—just so anything you do doesn’t sync back to your work desktop or laptop. (You never know.)

I do the same thing with my email. Even though my work and personal email is handled by Google, I still prefer to use Mail on my iPhone for work email and the Gmail app for personal email. While I could just as easily use Gmail for everything, I like having that artificial wall—and a mental wall, as well. I know that everything I send in Mail is always work, and everything I send in Gmail is always personal. The two never meet.

Your Employer Can Read Your Work Emails, Even to Your Lawyer

There are many, many reasons not to use your work email address for anything remotely personal.…

How to separate your professional and private life

Most people enjoy using social media accounts. Therefore, it’s tempting to use your existing social media profiles for business use. Brand accounts are different from personal ones, though, and this article will review some of the principal reasons to keep them separate.

1. It’s More Professional

How to separate your professional and private lifeA significant reason to keep them separate is a matter of professionalism. It’s doesn’t look right to be promoting your latest blog post one minute and complaining about the poor service you received the next. Of course, it all depends on the type of content you post on your social media pages.

However, by keeping them separate, you have more freedom to post the things you want to on your personal pages and keep your brand pages focused on things strictly related to your business. There is always the risk of losing business due to your personal views or attitudes. You probably won’t know that is the reason so merging your personal and professional life together like this always carries an element of risk.

2. Reduces Name Confusion

Another reason to keep your personal and professional social media profiles separate is to limit name confusion. If someone looks at your profile online and sees a lot of personal content, they may wonder if they have stumbled on the right profile or whether or not there is a separate account for your brand.

You also have the problem of whether you use your name or the name of your brand. In most cases, there will be some differences between the two. As always, simple things in marketing is nearly always best, and name confusion could cause more problems than it’s worth.

3. Makes it Easier to Manage

When it comes to managing social media, it’s a lot easier when you have a clear plan for each profile. The advantage of having a separate personal and professional profile is it gives you that clear plan for content, so you have a general idea on what to post.

As ever, this all makes your life easier when looking for the best content and using a scheduling tool such as Buffer. You can also take things further by creating a social media calendar to help you plan things out ahead of time. Sources may be different for personal and professional profiles so you can add those separately to your accounts as needed.

4. Followers Know What to Expect

How to separate your professional and private lifeOne critical key to success on social media is letting your followers know what to expect from you. So, you see this a lot from YouTube creators that make videos on specific subjects and upload new content on particular days each week. The problem with merging your personal and professional social media accounts is followers won’t know what to expect from you next.

Also, keep in mind that your audience will be different so some users will be following you for your personal content and others for your professional material. Without knowing what is coming next from you, this could lead to users unfollowing you for one reason or another. So, keeping these things consistent helps to simplify matters.

5. Ensures You’re Marketing to the Right Audience

As the previous point suggested, your followers need to know what to expect from you. However, this point should be extended into a marketing consideration. Remember that you may wish to use various forms of social media advertising on different platforms.

That means you will wish to boost certain content for increased levels of engagement. The problem with a combined personal and professional social media platform is you won’t always know the users that are engaging with you are relevant for that promotion. However, by separating the accounts, you can be more confident you will reach the right users.

There are different arguments about which is the best way to manage social media. Keeping your personal and professional social media separate is usually the right decision, but there are exceptions to this as well. If you do decide to keep things separate, remember it’s more professional, reduces name confusion, makes it easier to manage, followers know what to expect and ensures you’re marketing to the right audience.

The Atlanta Small Business Network, from start-up to success, we are your go-to resource for small business news, information, resources.

Follow us on Facebook here and stay up to date or catch-up on all our podcasts on demand.

While you’re here, don’t forget to subscribe to our email newsletter for all the latest business news know-how from Atlanta Small Business Network.

A lot of us are working from home at the moment, so it’s time to split your digital life in two

Unless you’re fortunate enough to have a dedicated work computer, you’re probably using the same machine for your work and personal lives right now.

That may sound fine for the occasional Friday afternoon of work on the sofa. But as millions of us face the prospect of working from home for the foreseeable future, it will be increasingly important to build a virtual barrier between your digital work and social lives.

Read More:

Doing so helps to limit distractions when you’re supposed to be working, but also means you won’t accidentally email the wrong person — and, best of all, you can turn either side of your computer into a safe haven away from news about the ongoing coronavirus pandemic.

There are many ways you can go about doing this, and generally speaking you can employ any or all of these measures on the Windows and Mac operating systems.

Let’s get started…

How to create multiple desktops on Windows and Mac

How to separate your professional and private lifeSpaces and Mission Control helps keep your desktops separate Apple

The first and easiest way to split your work and personal lives on one computer is to create multiple desktops — or Spaces, as they are called on the Mac.

On a Mac, you can open the Mission Control to view of all your open apps and Spaces by clicking the app, pressing the icon on your keyboard (its location varies by country), swiping upwards with three fingers on the trackpad, or by pressing Ctrl+Up.

You can then navigate left or right between open Spaces, and add new ones by clicking the + icon at the top of the screen. From there, you can drag and drop any open app into a Space, so your work to-do list app can sit next to a web browser for work in one Space, while another is home to your shopping lists and personal calendar.

This system for organizing open apps is also available on Windows, where it is called Multiple Desktops and is accessed by clicking the Task View button to the right of the universal search box.

Create separate accounts on your computer

Another simple way to cordon off your work and private lives on your computer is to set up two accounts. That way, you can use work-specific apps in the work account, then switch to your personal account when you want to look at your photo albums, play games, and organize your personal calendar.

You’ll need to set up a new Microsoft or Apple account to fully use your new work profile, but if you want to truly separate the two halves of your life, this can be made to work in your favor. Once everything is set up, you’ll have a different account for work, with its own email, online accounts, files and applications.

Run two operating systems at once

How to separate your professional and private lifeYou can run Windows and Mac on your Apple computer at the same time Parallels

Unlike Windows, Mac computers are capable of running two operating systems at once. The most popular way to do this is via the Parallels program. This lets you run Windows 10 in a window of your Mac operating system. You could then put this window in a desktop Space of its own, making it easy to quickly switch from full-screen Mac to full-screen Windows.

If you use Windows at work, this can be a hugely convenient way to run both systems at once, while giving you a clearly defined virtual barrier between the Windows working environment and the personal Mac environment. That way, your Mac can remain your only machine, but with space to serve as a replacement to your Windows office computer while you’re stuck working at home.

Going a step further, you can make use of Boot Camp, a utility that comes preinstalled on all new Macs that lets you boot up into Windows or Mac. That way, instead of running Windows 10 on top of Mac, as with Parallels, you restart your computer to switch from one to the other.

This has performance benefits, as the machine isn’t trying to run both operating systems at once, and means you can further separate your work and personal lives.

As above, if you normally use Windows at work, you can install Windows 10 on a partition of your Mac hard drive (Boot Camp walks you through how to do this), then when work is done for the day, reboot, pick Mac, and get back to your personal computer with work a distant memory.

Create separate partitions for work and personal

If you have a Windows computer, you can take a similar approach to Boot Camp by partitioning the hard drive, which basically means splitting it in two. That way, you can have Windows running on both, but decide which partition gets your work programs, accounts and documents, and which is for your personal life.

Boot into your work partition in the morning to enjoy a day with zero distractions from your personal apps, then reboot and switch to the personal partition when you want to read your personal emails, check Twitter, play games, and do everything you’d normally do in your evenings.

We ask that readers please fully understand what they are doing before attempting to partition their hard drive. The best approach is to use Microsoft’s own Windows Disk Management tool, which is pre-installed on Windows 10.

You can read more on the Disk Management tool on Microsoft’s website here. We recommend that readers fully understand what partitioning a disk means before taking this route, so not to lose any files.

As social workers, we often find ourselves entrenched in other people’s lives and emotions, whether they want us to be there or not. This type of role is emotionally labour-intensive and it is important that this does not get ignored in practice, especially with newly qualified social workers (NQSWs), who are developing coping techniques and strategies that may last for their entire career. Otherwise they will be at much higher risk of burning out.

There are two facets to social work self-care. The first is the ability to switch off and enjoy some downtime and the second is to be kind to yourself when the going gets a bit rough. However, these are easy to identify, but not always easily achieved. No-one is perfect. There will always be cases that nag away at us, whether we are on-duty or off. The important thing is to care for ourselves as much as possible, on an everyday basis, so when the harder times arrive we are stronger and more resilient.

Separate your work and home lives as much as possible. If you work from home, try and find a space that is a little distanced from the hustle and bustle (i.e. not the kitchen). It is also good to find a task to help distract from your working day and ease yourself back into home life. I like a slightly longer drive home to give myself some headspace or a quick session at the gym to disperse any frustrations. The key is allowing yourself time for reflection. NQSWs can find this more difficult. Many come to their first social work jobs fresh from a life immersed in a social work degree. As a student, you live, breathe and think social work; but this is not sustainable for long periods in frontline practice.

As a previous user of mental health services, I am perhaps more aware of how to take care of myself than others. I have learned how to identify when I am close to my emotional or stress limits. However, there are still times, especially in this first year of practice, where I feel overwhelmed. One particular case comes to mind: I spent a lot of time with one female service user and was very emotionally labour-intensive. On days like those, I make sure that I am extra nice to myself. If I come home and want to eat a plate of chips or hide under the duvet at 9pm, then that’s what I do.

NQSWs are often experiencing a number of firsts while still developing self-care strategies, such as the first removal of a child, the first death of a service user or the first child/adult abuse case. The feelings involved in these are not easy to shrug off when the clock ticks over to 5:30pm. One NQSW I know plays basketball to get rid of any frustrations he may be experiencing; however, it has still taken him some time to come to terms with the more stark elements of his role as a child protection social worker.

More reflective supervision would allow NQSWs to spend more time exploring their feelings and thoughts regarding specific cases, as well as helping them to identify key reflective techniques. Action learning sets may also be a useful tool to support NQSWs in discovering self-care strategies with support from their peers – and realise that they are not alone in their experiences. Supervisors and social work peers should share their own methods of winding down. Crucially, reflective supervision should not just be provided to NQSWs, but to all social workers regardless of where they are on their career path.

I think universities and colleges should provide more support with this development at the training stage, rather than leaving NQSWs to battle with developing self-care strategies along with everything else involved in starting a new job. By no means does this have to be a lengthy module laden with theory and research; it could be, for example, one session before the start of each placement. Effective self-care techniques can take some time to develop. The earlier this process starts the better.

How to separate your professional and private life

Featured posts in

Security Tips

How to separate your professional and private life

This is protection. Samsung Knox

How to separate your professional and private life

Using your personal phone for work? Here’s how to separate your apps and data

How to separate your professional and private life

Protecting your personal information and privacy on a company phone

Published Oct 26, 2021 By: Mark Stone

These days, our smartphones are essential to both our personal lives, and our work lives. In the Bring Your Own Device (BYOD) era, using one phone for dual purposes can be risky for companies. But organizations with successful BYOD programs are able to protect confidential data, and separate work from play.

The question then becomes: Can you successfully use one phone for both business and personal needs? The answer is you can, and you have a few options to do so.

Tips for separating work and personal on your phone

Separating work and personal functions on your phone has never been easier. Realizing the challenges of work/life balance, mobile device makers have added a number of smart features that help you to keep personal and professional apps and data separate. Here’s some tips tailored for users of Samsung smartphones and tablets.

The first — and simplest — strategy is to organize your apps on different screens. By moving personal app icons onto a separate screen from your business apps, you’ll know to stay on one screen for work and one for play.

Shop special offers

Find out about offers on the latest Samsung technology.

Speak to a solutions expert

Get expert advice from a solutions consultant.

Who are you buying for?

I’m buying for myself

I’m buying for a small business

I’m buying for a large enterprise

Another good tactic is to use the Do Not Disturb function so that work doesn’t interfere with your personal time — and vice versa. When you have Do Not Disturb on, notifications won’t interrupt your workflow, whether you’re on the clock, or on the couch. A more advanced version of this can be found in Samsung Bixby Routines, which allows you to set different work and personal settings. You can set your routines to kick in based on time — for instance, your work routine can automatically start at 8 a.m. and stop at 5 p.m. — or based on place (via geolocation when you get to work and when you leave).

When it comes to messaging, you can take advantage of Samsung’s Dual Messenger feature, which allows you to easily switch between two separate accounts for the same app. If you have social media or messenger accounts for both work and personal use, you can use them both on the same device. When Dual Messenger is enabled, a second app icon appears on your home screen: one app, two accounts.

A security balancing act

While these measures may support separating work and personal use, they don’t address the security concerns. Some businesses use a mobile device management (MDM) solution with a secure workspace to protect work data from your personal apps and browsing activity.

An MDM solution allows your smartphone to store data in a separate “container” or “profile” so that personal and professional data are kept separate. With an effective MDM solution, companies can gain more reliable control of the devices they need to manage.

These secure containers help you balance productivity with security — as well as your life at work and off work. Your personal phone can stay at home and not even enter the equation; your work phone is all you need.

How to separate your professional and private life

Security, in your hands

With Samsung’s Secure Folder, separating your work and personal information is easier than ever. Available on all of the latest Samsung Galaxy smartphones, including the foldable Galaxy Z Fold3 and Galaxy Z Flip3, Secure Folder offers a simple — and free — containerization solution that gives you the same reliable security offered by Samsung Knox.

Secure Folder offers a safe storage space that not only builds a barrier between your work and personal data but also allows you to customize how you access that data — whether it’s via a password, pattern or biometric authentication.

The mobile security top 10

How to separate your professional and private life

Get your free guide to better securing the personal and work data on your mobile phone. Download Now

The folder is easy to set up and intuitive to use. You can add apps to your Secure Folder by clicking “Add Apps” and selecting from what’s already installed on your phone or downloaded from the app store. You can transfer other content — like documents, photos and files — to Secure Folder by choosing “Add Files.”

Apps and data installed in these secure containers get an additional layer of protection against cyberattacks and can be securely backed up to the cloud for easy restoration.

With these simple solutions, you have easy access to both work and personal files throughout the day — no matter where you are.

Buy Galaxy Z Fold3 now for your business and take advantage of exclusive volume pricing with a Samsung Business Account. And for more security advice, get your free guide to better securing the personal and work data on your mobile phone.

How to separate your professional and private life

How to separate your professional and private life

Stop the insanity of trying to juggle everything with these ideas.

Figuring out how to achieve work-life balance as a teacher is a huge challenge. Teachers enter the profession because they hope to change lives, but they often find that there are obstacles in their path, and the expectations teachers face can seem impossible to live up to. Finding the sweet spot between achievement and work-life balance can help teachers build a long, happy, and healthy career. Here are some tips on how to achieve work-life balance as a teacher.

Respect Your Time

Teachers tend to be hard workers. It’s not unusual for teachers to stay at school until 7 p.m. helping students, to stay up until midnight correcting papers, and to spend weekends planning lessons, chaperoning field trips, or attending conferences. And make no mistake about it: I understand that teachers’ duties are almost impossible to accomplish without putting in extra hours. However, recognizing that you cannot plan countless field trips, attend every school event, and serve on all committees can help you focus on what will have the most impact on your students’ success.

How to separate your professional and private life

Recognize That You’re Having an Impact (Even When It Doesn’t Feel Like It)

If you’ve been a teacher for as long as I have (23 years and counting!), you recognize that you don’t always know the effect you’ve had on your students until many years later. Eddie, for example, was a bright but oppositional student in my senior English class. He was so defiant that I initially wanted him moved from my class.

He had a great sense of humor, though. He responded when I matched wits with him, and his grade climbed. He still drove me a bit crazy, but he graduated, and I didn’t hear from him for almost 10 years. Then, one day, he stopped by my classroom. He told me that my class was transformative for him, and he was now studying to be an English teacher.

I was shocked, but perhaps I shouldn’t have been; every teacher I know has a story like this. So remember, you might not see the immediate results of your hard work, but teachers do change students’ lives each and every day just by being themselves and building connections. Keeping that in mind can help when you feel overwhelmed by the responsibilities of teaching.

Shut Off the Electronics

With email and online education platforms like Schoology, students and parents can now connect with teachers at any time. While this can be very helpful in some cases, I found myself replying to student posts at 11 p.m. and answering emails in the wee hours of the morning. Sometimes, those posts and emails would get me excited or upset about something, and keep me awake. Now, I let my students know I will not get to anything posted after 7 p.m., when I shut off my phone. Forcing myself to switch off electronics at a certain hour was difficult at first, but it has had a profound impact on my mental and emotional health, as well as my energy level.

Know When to Say No

The other day, my principal sent me an email asking me to present at an event. I was already teaching a credit recovery course and Saturday school, running two clubs, serving on two committees, speaking at another conference, and mentoring three new teachers. I knew this new assignment might break me.

I went to speak with him, explaining what I had on my plate so he understood that I wasn’t just being lazy. I then recommended another teacher who had expressed interest in presenting at that event. Too often, teachers are reluctant to say no, but it is absolutely essential if we want to stave off burnout. This is a key part of learning how to achieve work-life balance as a teacher.

Prioritize Your Health

This year, I vowed to practice what I preach in terms of taking care of my physical health. So far, I’ve lost 22 pounds, and I cannot begin to tell you the effect that it has had on my mood, my energy level, and my endurance. Staying away from sugar and caffeine has made me much calmer, so I’m less likely to lose my temper or fall asleep at 4 p.m. Exercise has helped me deal with the daily frustrations of being a teacher and cope with issues outside of my control.

Don’t Forget Your Friends Outside of School

Because teachers spend so much time with one another, they often socialize together, too—and that can be an important stress reliever. But don’t forget your nonteacher friends. Schedule outings and dinner dates with people outside of the education field.

This weekend I spent time with a friend who is a real estate agent and another who is a filmmaker. I found talking about their careers to be fascinating, and it took me outside my classroom. It was a breath of fresh air.

Let It Go

As teachers, it’s easy to fixate on small things: the lesson plan that didn’t go quite as well as we had hoped, the assessment that needs tweaking, the email that should go out today. But sometimes you just have to let it go. The earth won’t fall off its axis if you don’t write that email or add that extra lesson on commas to the curriculum tonight. We do our best, but we must recognize that some things are out of our control. Take a deep breath and let it go.

Learning how to achieve work-life balance as a teacher—especially in those early years—can be tough. It is, however, absolutely essential for survival. These strategies can ensure that your teaching career is not only impactful, but also healthy and long-lasting.

  • Facebook
  • Twitter
  • Instagram
  • Pinterest
  • TikTok
  • Copy By: Kat Boogaard
  • Feature Image By: Molly Winters For Domino

Boundaries—we know they’re important. But, they’re something far too many of us—despite our best intentions—struggle to set.

How to separate your professional and private life

We find ourselves scrolling through work emails during time we reserved for chipping our way through the Netflix queue, or we spend hours of a Saturday working on a project for our boss—even though it’s supposed to be our day off.

This crossing of the line between work and play doesn’t just happen when your career trickles into your personal life—it can go the other way too. You might take a personal call during work hours or kill some time online shopping before your next meeting.

Of course, our lives aren’t packaged into neat little compartments, and it’s only natural that there’s bound to be some blending between work and personal identities. In an ideal world, we could integrate the two, rather than being obsessed with balancing them.

But, for those of us who require a black and white approach to time management? Well, some firm guidelines are necessary to ensure that one element of our lives doesn’t overwhelm the others. So, here are six steps to help you set some much needed boundaries between your work and personal life.

1. Accept that you won’t be perfect.

This first step isn’t meant to be discouraging, and it’s an important one for you to accept before you move ahead with trying to separate your professional identity from personal matters.

Here’s the brutal truth: You’re not going to be perfect at this 100% of the time. There will still be times when you answer an urgent work call on your vacation and there will still be moments when you scroll through Instagram when you should be answering work emails.

Setting boundaries for yourself involves some serious changes in your routines and habits—which, ultimately, take a little bit of getting used to. So, be a little forgiving with yourself in those moments when you don’t keep a clear dividing line between work and play, and you’ll be able to tackle the next steps with a positive attitude. Remember, progress over perfection.

2. Recognize your limitations.

Like you, I’ve read my fair share of advice on work/life balance, and practically none of it has accounted for each person’s unique situation. After all, it’d be pretty much impossible to wrap all individual circumstances into one piece of advice.

Perhaps you’ve read an article that says you should work at your peak productivity hours—but, that’s not doable for you because your office doesn’t offer a flexible schedule. Or, maybe another piece suggests reserving evenings for pure relaxation. But, that’s not practical when you’re always working the night shift.

As with any advice, there isn’t really a “one size fits all” solution. Instead, it’s important for you to take a good, hard look at your own situation and recognize your restrictions and limitations within your own schedule. Doing so right from the get go will help you set an agenda and boundaries that work best for you—and not everybody else.

3. Create a schedule.

Now it’s time to put your boundaries in writing. It might seem like an unnecessary step, but putting pen to paper will help you take your guidelines that much more seriously—making you all the more likely to actually respect them. In fact, studies show that people who wrote down their goals were over 80% more likely to actually achieve them.

So, if you’ve decided you’re going to unplug from work each evening by 6 p.m.? Put a note on each day of your calendar as a friendly nudge to disconnect when it’s time.

Do whatever you need to to create a structure and schedule. Then, make your best effort to stick to it.

4. Communicate clearly.

Of course, it’s not wise to change your entire structure and approach to work and assume that everybody else will just catch on and adjust. Instead, clear communication will be crucial for not only ensuring that you respect your newly set boundaries, but that other people do too.

Will you no longer be handling work emails on the weekends? Give your colleagues a heads up, or even set an out-of-office response. Are you putting an end to those two-hour lunches with a friend during the workweek? Let her know that you’ll now need to squeeze your get-togethers into the hour you’re given, or meet up after work.

Make sure you communicate with the other people who will be impacted by your newly set boundaries, and you’ll have a much easier, guilt-free time actually holding yourself to them.

5. Instill accountability.

All too often, things come up that test our willpower and our commitment to the boundaries we’ve set. And, if you don’t think you have the inner wherewithal to hold yourself accountable, it might be helpful to call in some reinforcements.

This doesn’t need to be anything formal or complex. If you’re meeting a few friends for happy hour, tell them you want to enjoy your time without glancing at your phone—so they can remind you when you mindlessly reach for it. Or, loop your deskmate in on the fact that you need to pack up and leave the office by 6 p.m. in order to make it to that workout class you’ve been meaning to attend for ages.

We could all use a little help, encouragement, and some friendly nudges every now and then. Don’t be afraid to loop other people in on your boundaries so they can help keep you accountable!

6. Check in with yourself.

Here’s the tricky part: Our circumstances are always changing. This week won’t be exactly like last week, and next month won’t look exactly like this month. And, needless to say, this can make it difficult to set rigid boundaries for yourself.

Fortunately, creating boundaries between your work and personal life isn’t a “set it and forget it” sort of thing. Instead, you should reserve some time to have some regular reflection periods—preferably every month—where you can check in on how you’re feeling about your balance.

Have you felt like you’ve overextended yourself at work (meaning there’s almost no time for your personal passions)? Is there something you’ve been meaning to make time for, yet keep pushing to the backburner? Do you have an upcoming vacation that’s going to require you to work extra hours in the next two weeks in order to prepare?

Don’t be afraid to adjust your boundaries when necessary.

Make time for these brief periods of thought and reflection, and you’ll be able to adjust your boundaries when necessary. Remember, nothing is set in stone.

When the ability to be constantly connected makes it that much more difficult to draw lines between work and your personal life, setting boundaries for yourself is more important than ever. But, that doesn’t mean it’s easy. Implement these six steps, and you’ll be able to move forward with all aspects of your life working together—rather than against each other.

Do you set boundaries for yourself? What works for you?

This article was originally published in May of 2016.

How to separate your professional and private life

How to separate your professional and private life

How to separate your professional and private life

How to Deal With Bad Work Ethics in Coworkers

Ethics come up on a daily basis in life and in business. Our ethics guide us through both our personal and business interactions and help define who we are as people. Ethics are not always straightforward, and things you consider unethical in your personal life may be completely appropriate in a business setting. Keeping personal and professional ethics separate requires you to examine them on a case-by-case basis to do right by your business while not selling out your personal beliefs.

Review the law. If a certain course of action is illegal, it doesn’t matter if your professional and personal ethics are conflicting. You should not perform that action.

Consult with a superior at your job if you have an ethical dilemma. Give your superior the details of the moral quandary and be honest about both what is best for business and what your ethical issue is. Your superior can assist you in making the appropriate business decision while keeping your personal ethics separate.

Speak honestly about the issue both with coworkers and with customers. Complete honesty may hinder your business at times, but will help build customer trust and loyalty in the long term. Maintaining honesty will help prevent you from having ethical dilemmas about lying for a personal or business gain.

Determine the likely outcome of your actions from both a business and a personal perspective. If a decision is beneficial to your business and doesn’t violate any laws, take that action under most circumstances. If the personal cost is not worth the business gain, leave the situation if possible and get someone else assigned to the project so you are not involved in the end result. This keeps your business and personal feelings separate as much as possible.

Exit a job if your personal ethics are in danger of being violated while there. Find a new professional environment where you can do your job without the risk of breaking any personal code.

All of us lead double lives these days since we both work and play online. During the day you may be working on a company document in Google Drive, while at night you’re kicking back and chatting with friends on Skype.

Many of us also end up using our personal PCs to work on company projects from home. And that brings up the issue: How can you separate your work and life identities on the same PC?

If you work in a major enterprise, your IT department probably has rules in place to deal with this issue already. But if you work for a smaller company, you may be left to fend for yourself.

If that’s the case, here are three suggestions of how you can keep from mixing business with pleasure on the same Windows device.

Different browsers

One of the easiest ways to separate work and play is to just use separate browsers for each task. The best candidates for this kind of activity would be Chrome and Firefox, because both browsers have sync capabilities letting you share browser histories, favorites, bookmarks and open tabs across devices.

The biggest downside to this approach is that you can only have one default browser at a time. Let’s say you choose Chrome for your work browser and Firefox for play, with Chrome set as the default.

Later that evening, a friend sends you a link to a great movie on Netflix via Skype. You click the link as you normally do and your work browser opens because it’s set as the default. To get around this, right-click links in other apps and then copy and paste them into Firefox.

If juggling two different browser for different purposes doesn’t appeal to you another alternative is to create multiple profiles in your default browser. We already took a look at how to create and manage multiple profiles in Chrome. Firefox also supports multiple profiles, but the process is a little more involved. You can find instructions on Mozilla’s site.

Multiple Windows user accounts

This option is perhaps the biggest hassle to set-up, but is ultimately easy to use. Take the time to create different user accounts on your Windows PC for your work and personal life.

When it’s time to work you can login to the work account with all the defaults and necessary files ready to go. Then, when it’s time to kick back, log in to your play account for an all-night Titanfall session.

In Windows 7, you can add a new user account through the Control Panel. For Windows 8.1, open the modern UI Settings app by tapping Windows Logo Key + C to open the Charms bar. Then navigate to Settings>Change PC settings>Accounts>Other Accounts.

How to separate your professional and private life

Unless you want to sync both account settings across devices just create a secondary user account locally.

Now click Add an account and at the bottom of the next screen select Sign in without a Microsoft account (not recommended).

How to separate your professional and private life

Don’t worry about the warnings just create a local account.

Finally, at the bottom of the next screen choose Local account and follow the instructions.

If you’re just creating an account for play a local account should be enough for most people. If you want to go through the hassle of setting up another Microsoft account to sync settings on two separate accounts just follow the initial onscreen wizard that asks for an email address.

Multiple Google accounts

How to separate your professional and private life

Google sites support switching between multiple accounts on the fly.

If you’re a hard core Google user, another way to manage your double life is to have two separate Google accounts and switch between them. Google sites have a built-in feature that lets you switch between accounts as long as you understand the rules.

Rule number 1

Whichever Google account you signed in with first is the default account whenever you navigate directly to a Google site.

If you signed in with [email protected], for example, and then later signed in with [email protected], what happens when you type plus.google.com into your browser? You’d see the joeWork account’s Google+ profile, because that’s your default account.

To sign in with multiple accounts, first decide which account (work or personal) you want to be the default. Next, sign in to your chosen default account as you normally would. Let’s say we chose the work account and we signed in with Gmail.

How to separate your professional and private life

Click Add account to sign-in to multiple Google accounts at once.

At the top right of the Gmail inbox, click on your profile photo to reveal a drop down menu then click Add account and sign-in with your secondary account, which in our case is the personal account.

As I said earlier, whenever you navigate to a Google site such as Google Drive or Gmail, you will automatically drop in to your default account (in our case the work account).

What if you want to see your personal account’s Google+ page?

Rule number 2

To view the personal account’s Google+ page you can either follow a link from another joePersonal account page such as the Gmail inbox. Or you can use the account switching function at the top right of the page.

Following links should be fairly self-explanatory, so let’s deal with the account switcher. On Google+, click your profile photo at the top right side of the page. Now, you’ll see that your personal account is listed right under your default work account. To switch accounts, just select the personal account and your non-professional Google+ page opens up in a new tab.

Those are the basics for switching between Google accounts, but there are two other key things you need to know about using this method. First, Google Drive does not support multiple accounts. That means that if you sign-in with your work account, you will have to sign out and sign back in to access your personal account’s Google Drive files.

The second problem is that while YouTube does support multiple accounts, it does not integrate with the rest of the Google universe. So if you want to switch between your work and personal accounts on YouTube, you’ll have to go through the process of adding your personal account separately on YouTube.

On top of that, YouTube doesn’t play favorites with your accounts meaning there is no default account on YouTube. Whichever account you used last on YouTube that’s the one you’ll see the next time you visit the site.

Managing multiple Google accounts is admittedly a little messy, but for Googleaholics out there, it may be the best choice.

How to separate your professional and private life

Do you use your mobile device for business and personal reasons? If so, you’re not alone. The majority of professionals are working in busy, fast-paced environments and multitasking between personal and business is inevitable. Whether you’re snapping pictures at a work-related event, shopping for your home or capturing notes during a meeting, using mobile devices for double duty can not only put you at risk for company monitoring but also leave you open to security and privacy threats.

And, if your company encourages, “Bring Your Own Device” or BYOD where you can use your own mobile phone or tablet for work, the company may have the right to remotely wipe your device when you leave the company. So, if you’re using your phone to take personal pictures you may be at risk of losing precious moments. According to the Wall Street Journal, an unexpected consequence has arisen for workers who have seen their devices wiped clean–remotely and with little or no advance warning–during or after employment, by firms looking to secure their data. A 2013 survey by data protection firm Acronis Inc., reported twenty-one percent of companies perform remote wipes when an employee quits or is terminated.

Here are some tips to keep in mind:

  1. Back up your data – Make sure your personal data, such as contacts, pictures, music and videos are backed up at a separate site such as Dropbox or Crashplan.
  2. Download an app to separate work and personal life – Use an app, such as Divide to turn your regular mobile device into two devices and separate business and personal data. With Divide, IT gets the security and controls it needs, including government-grade encryption to protect all business apps and data. Employees enjoy privacy on their personal device as well as a suite of professional-grade business apps to get work done on the go.
  3. Purchase a second phone — Considering companies have the ability to access nearly all information on a company-issued device in the U.S, many people are using a second mobile device to keep their data private. Although a second mobile device may seem cumbersome for some people, for others it helps them keep focused (because they’re not receiving work emails during time-off), and it alleviates the concern about “Big Brother” watching.

Regardless if you decided to use one or two mobile devices, make sure you take precautions to protect your data. PC World reports, one of the easiest things you can do to protect an Android or iOS device is to take advantage of built-in hardware encryption. This feature will turn the data on your phone into nearly unreadable junk–unless it’s properly unlocked with your password.

How to separate your professional and private life

Slide: 1 / of 1 . Caption: Caption: Handsome mature man wearing black clothes, black sunglasses and black umbrella, walking beside the red wall and and watching photographs on Getty images mobile application on his smartphone. Full length, copy space. Getty Images

Creating a clean and clear separation between your work and personal life isn’t just a great way to stay sane—it can be a smart business strategy as well.

In industries ranging from long-distance trucking to residential home-building, mobile phones are often doing double duty, one professional and the other personal. The result: Portables like Knox-enabled devices increasingly offer two distinct data containers, separating sensitive corporate info from the owner’s personal data and apps. The hybridized strategy adheres to the tight security needs and regulatory mandates that protect critical company data from prying eyes. But when it’s quitting time, workers can flick their phones over to personal mode to check email, send family photos, or even stream video.

It’s a smart and increasingly necessary way to do business. In just a few short years, the mobile phone has become an essential tool for both our business and personal lives. But as the BYOD (bring your own device) trend has grown, so have data security risks. One of the biggest challenges for IT is to protect sensitive corporate data and separate work from play.

One way to do that is with a secure, authenticated, and encrypted area of a mobile device or cloud service that insulates sensitive corporate information from personal information. Such a container allows a business to isolate applications, disable certain app functions, and remotely wipe sections of the phone in case of loss or theft. This containerization can be done natively on the phone, through third-party applications, or even in the cloud.

There’s an additional advantage. Some researchers suggest that many people have become so dependent on mobile devices that they view them in the same way a carpenter views a hammer: as an extension of their bodies. This sense of dependence even has a name: nomophobia, which refers to the discomfort or anxiety caused when someone is away from their phone or doesn’t have cell coverage. It’s particularly acute among younger workers, so-called digital natives.

You Gotta Keep ’Em Separated

The best technology is invisible. You don’t need to know how your car’s pistons work when you’re running out for a quart of milk. And who cares about packets and routing tables when you just want to post a photo of your dog wearing a baseball hat? “Security must be simple enough to be usable but robust enough to be reliable,” says Samsung product marketing director Jonathan Wong.

Similarly, with dual-use mobile devices, the separation between corporate and personal info must be distinct, and the user experience must be the same with both.

These data containers are essential to keep a firm firewall between professional and personal information. If done right, they balance enterprise security with a personal smartphone experience. They can also simplify employees’ lives by enabling them to leave their own phones at home and rely on their work phones as their primary mobile.

But first they’ll need to see the same interface across key productivity applications. Tight integration of contacts and calendars is essential. Although users won’t be able to sync company contacts to their personal email accounts, switching back and forth should not be confusing or frustrating.

Users must have the option to see contacts and calendar events from both personal and work spaces in a unified view. They can also toggle between work and personal views while still enjoying security and privacy.

Data containerization is not limited to mobiles. Wearables too can be used to support advanced corporate logistics in such things as inventory management, and with the flick of a button be turned into smart watches to monitor a personal wellness program.

The advantages of containerization have spread beyond the corporate world. Knox-enabled mobile devices, such as tablets, will be used in prison educational programs. Inmates can access educational and heath-related materials without email or the web, supporting their preparation for transition back into the community following their release.

Or consider the use in hospitality: a guest room tablet that serves as a digital concierge. The device, a customized Samsung Galaxy Tablet, would replace the loose-leaf binders of options and room service menus that most guests find waiting in hotel rooms. No cabling or backend servers are required, and the app is locked down through Samsung’s Knox technology, providing a secure and contained experience.

Not for Everyone

Despite the advantages, containerized mobile is not for every industry. Some organizations—especially those in highly regulated industries such as health care, financial services, and government, where data security is imperative—need their employees to boot up in a secure corporate environment, with no provision for a personal zone. Anything else is too risky and could have huge legal consequences.

Other organizations may only allow a subset of their employees to receive hybridized cell phones. Some users can store both work and personal data on their devices, while others receive locked-down smartphones that boot only to a secure corporate work space.

In a world where work and play increasingly blur through our mobile devices, the old saying still rings true: Good fences make good neighbors.

This content is produced by WIRED Brand Lab in collaboration with Samsung.

How to separate your professional and private life

PTE essay private and professional life-sample essay

Some people state that Employees should keep their private lives and personal activities as separate as possible from the workplace. Others say that private and professional lives must go hand in hand to foster the growth of an individual as well as the company. The issue is a controversial one as both the methods has its own pro and cons. To maintain productivity at work, I would say that private lives can be mingled with professional lives up to a limit that will not harm the productivity at work.

Arguments

Firstly, the employees that work in a company will have better relations if they share their personal lives with each other. It fosters a positive feeling and understanding amongst colleagues at work. This will help to work in groups and thus the work can be solved in a quicker and effective way. But, if there is too much interaction regarding private lives in the office, it would lead to no work and only gossips that would hamper the work as the employees will be busy discussing their private lives and personal activities at the workplace. Thus the efficiency of employees will decrease. In private and professional life, a mixture of both lives must be balanced.

Secondly, If a person keeps himself aloof from colleagues he may not find his workplace a better place to work. This may have a negative effect on him and thus his productivity may decrease. He/She may have some personal problems due to which he lacks concentration in his work. But as he has no one discusses, he keeps to himself the problem that may hamper his work. In this case, he cannot share his workload amongst other people. This, in turn, may have a negative effect on his performance. However, if the colleagues have better relationships with people around he can discuss the problems. They can get better help and suggestions which may be helpful to him without affecting his work.

To conclude, Private and Professional life must be in proportion at the workplace so that people do work and in addition, have fun. This will have a positive effect on employees.

More essay links:

Please leave your comments & share

How to separate your professional and private lifePremium

Samsung’s Knox platform allows users to create a secure folder to keep work apps, files locked with a password

New Delhi: Keeping two separate phones for work and personal use can be a hassle as it requires employees to keep two devices on them all the time. But storing both work and personal information on one device can also put you and your company at risk, cautions Sukesh Jain, senior vice president, IT and mobile enterprise business at Samsung India.

Letting the company handle it: Many companies use mobile device management (MDM) services such as Samsung Knox for Enterprises, Google Apps Mobile Management, Citrix XenMobile, AirWatch by VMware and Microsoft Intune. Compatible with both Android and iOS devices. These tools segregate work apps into encrypted compartments, allowing IT administrators more control over passwords and the option to wipe all the data if the employee loses the device or leaves the company. However, many companies do not use these paid services since they add up to their IT expenses. Besides, users too are wary of IT-backed MDM solutions, which can be misused by companies since they can read messages, check browsing history, and track device’s location.

For such users, Samsung’s Knox provides a mutli-layered solution, which is built into the device hardware of most high and mid-range Samsung smartphones. It allow users to create a “secure folder”, which uses encryption to create a secure area on the device where the user can keep their work apps, documents, photos and files locked away with a password or biometric data, such as iris or fingerprints. Apps in the secure folder are kept separately on the device and will not be visible to apps outside of it. It allows users to access their work apps without rebooting the smartphone. “The Knox platform can verify each piece of software that loads. If verification fails, Knox either records the tampering by flipping a one-time fuse called the Knox Warranty Bit, or prevents further booting,” adds Jain.

Other app options: Many users have their work email configured on the same Gmail app, while many use their personal account to join their work groups on WhatsApp. The risk of accidentally sharing a very personal joke or image meant for a friend’s eyes only, with a colleague or work group is quite possible. The fact that many of these apps such as WhatsApp auto image downloads sent to them by college buddies, enhances the risk of ending up with unsavoury content on one’s device.

Some phone makers such as Xiaomi and Vivo allows users to have two versions—one for work and the other to chat with friends and family. Xiaomi even allow users to create two separate profiles on the same phone. Apps kept on one profile won’t show up on the other and one can access them by unlocking the phone with a separate password or biometric data.

Extra layer of security: Subscribing to a reliable antivirus and virtual private network (VPN) solution for a phone can add an extra layer of security to all work-related communications and minimize the risk of malware/ransomware attacks or snooping by hackers. For instance, an app called Safe, which is free for Android users, assigns a security score (between 0 and 5) of the phone and tells you what you need to do on your phone to take your score up. “With apps such as Safe, users can carry out real-time security assessment of their device,” says Saket Modi, CEO and co-founder of Lucideus, a Delhi-based security company.

Updated on April 8th, 2021

Online and home-based businesses are a huge success nowadays; needing an office to launch a business or make it big is no longer the case! With online leaders like Amazon, eBay, and Shopify, it’s clear that working on your online presence is what’s important.

With consumers being on their phones and online almost 4 hours a day, businesses have found ways to meet the recent consumer needs with a website or mobile application.

But unfortunately, since many governmental requirements aren’t optimized to be done online or virtually, yet, things like delivering paper documents and a physical street address still matter.

What is a permanent address?

A permanent address is a physical street address that is yours. You can use this address for personal or business needs. Your permanent address can be a home address or an office address (or one of our alternatives mentioned below!)

You can change your address (temporarily or permanently) through the USPS Change of Address online. The temporary period can be from one month and up to a year. You can get the process done in a few minutes, for only $1.

Do you need a permanent address for business?

If your business is an LLC (Limited Liability Company) or a Limited Liability Partnership then you will need a permanent address or a registered agent address.

A registered agent address can be a home address or the address of a partner; it is the designated address that will receive important mail like government documents.

However, this address is public record so using your home address isn’t preferred. This address needs to be a physical street address so you can’t use a PO Box address as well. However, you can use a virtual business address or a virtual office address.

Please check with your virtual business address/ office provider if the address can be used as a registered business address beforehand.

Why not use your home address?

You can register your business using your home address, many home-based businesses are a huge success, but you will meet obstacles on your way up and will eventually need to seek an alternative. Here are a few reasons why using your home address isn’t a good idea:

  • Once you start using your home address as your business address it’ll be public information to your customers, partners, and anyone else looking for it. It’ll be inconvenient for your family when business mail comes to your home, or worse, an angry customer! To maintain your home’s privacy and safety, you’ll need to separate your personal life from your professional life.
  • Even though home-based businesses can do better than businesses with an office, using your home address on your website, business card, or marketing platforms doesn’t portray a professional image and can lessen your credibility.
  • A home address can also limit your business growth, not only will it do so in a physical sense because your home will be cluttered with business mail and packages but also because if you live in a remote area or suburban city/ town, you’ll be tied to a local business level, as appose to having a prestigious address in New York or California!

What are Better Alternatives?

Using a PO Box Address

By renting a PO Box in a nearby Post Office, you’ll be able to use the Post Office’s address to receive business mail and packages. Unfortunately, you can’t use this address for business registration, but you can use it on your website or with customers.

However, by using a “PO Box” in the address, customers will automatically assume you don’t have an office or business address which would lessen your business’s credibility.

And so, you can change the address format by using the Post Office’s address and a hashtag to reference your PO Box like you would with a suite or apt number. It’ll look similar to this:

123 Maple Street #401

But you can only use USPS for mail delivery, without other mail carriers like UPS, FedEx, or DHL which can get problematic. You’ll also be restricted to the Post Office’s regulations and working hours to receive your mail.

Using a Private Mailbox Address

Another solution would be to use a private mailbox like renting a mailbox at the UPS Store or Postal Annex. You can use the store’s address as your mailing address with your customers; it’ll be a real physical street address that would look better than a PO Box address.

Unlike the Post Office, you can receive mail and packages from all mail carriers which is a huge advantage.

These stores usually have more flexible hours than a Post Office to pick up your mail but they don’t have a delivery option so you’ll need to physically go pick up your mail.

And so, the store location should be somewhere you can easily drive to, near work or your home. You’ll need to regularly check on your mailbox so it doesn’t pile up and then you’ll be asked to upgrade your mailbox.

Using a Virtual Business Address

A virtual business address is a real US mailing address that can be used for personal or business mail. This is a great option for travelers, startups, businesses abroad, or anyone looking for a stable US mailing address. You get a virtual mailbox that you can access at any time to handle your mail and a real street address to use for business.

With over 150 locations to choose from, you can live in Texas and have a business address in New York! Pick a location and package according to your business needs, with no limitations.

  • You’ll be able to log into your mailbox through a computer or smartphone, with an internet connection.
  • You’ll also get instant notifications with any new mail and packages received.
  • Log into your mailbox and choose what you’d like to do next with your mail.
  • You can open & scan, forward, archive, or shred & recycle any mail piece.

    Using a Virtual Office

    A virtual office is a business center that offers virtual solutions to startups, small businesses, or home-based businesses that need office space and services.

    It helps give your business a professional image and offers services like a professional business address, postal mailing service, fax service, virtual receptionist, etc.

    Some virtual offices also offer office space or conference room in case of conducting business meetings with partners or clients. However, a virtual office is more expensive than a virtual business address so this option is good if you need the whole package, not just an address.

    Conclusion:

    A permanent address is not needed to run a successful business, but it is a much-needed advantage and in the case of an LLC, a must.

    However you don’t need to waste money on expensive office space or use your home address with these virtual alternatives; you can easily have a professional address for your business, wherever you like.

    In this climate of deeply divided political and cultural issues, it’s very easy to offend someone just by replying, retweeting even posting on the wrong social media account.

    Now, if you happen to work in politics or a religious organization, this article isn’t for you. It’s expected to see those types of posts on your social media.

    Your Professional Social Media Image is at Stake

    However, if you are trying to sell a product or service to the average consumer (B2C) or to business people (B2B), you need to make sure you don’t alienate a potential customer by liking or commenting on political or religious posts. Remember, too, it’s not just your company’s brand image that’s at stake, it’s your personal, professional image, also.

    Keep in mind that just about everything you do online is public.

    So if someone Googles your name, more than likely they’ll find your personal accounts as well as professional/business accounts. If you post political or religious views on your personal accounts – that’s OK – it’s expected.

    Here’s how the individual social media networks breakdown when it comes to personal vs. business:

    Facebook

    You need a personal account to create a business page. However, because of Facebook’s new transparency rules, you have to be connected to your business page. If you’re a Realtor or consultant and use your name as a business, have a business page that’s obvious it’s for business only. Don’t use the same picture for your personal account and your business page! You need to be able to easily tell them apart. Put a professional-looking picture rather than a casual one on the business page.

    LinkedIn

    This is the professional network so, unless you work in politics or a religious organization, keep politics and religion out of your posts. There may be an occasion when politics affect businesses. In that case, if it’s relevant for your business, then it’s OK to share a news item. Keep in mind, LinkedIn has two profile aspects — Individual People (the White Pages) and Company Page (Yellow Pages). If you want to learn more on how to use LinkedIn properly and effectively, click here for a free resource.

    Twitter

    Here you should have 2 separate accounts. The personal one should be in your name and the professional/business one with your company name and logo. Use TweetDeck to mange both accounts on one tool. But be careful! Watch which account you’re posting to. (I have, more times than I’d care to admit, sent a personal post to the business account by accident. You can go and quickly delete it, but be aware that in the few seconds that it was out there, someone probably saw it.)

    Pinterest

    Similar to Twitter, you can have 2 separate accounts. If you set up an account on Pinterest.com, you’re setting up a personal account. To set up a business account, go to business.pinterest.com. They’ve made it easy to convert a personal account into a business one. However, make sure you delete any personal boards before converting to the business account. If you want, you can “share” boards between your business and personal accounts, but the boards appear on both accounts. It’s better to have business-related boards on your personal account than personal boards on your business account.

    Instagram

    Owned by Meta formerly Facebook, it’s easy to accidentally mix business with personal. Instagram is 95% mobile and all visuals – photos, graphics & short videos. Connect and share to FB at the same time. However, make sure that your personal Instagram account connects to your personal FB page and your business Instagram connects to your FB business page. AND watch which account you’re posting to!

    You can have more than one account registered in the mobile app, so make sure you have your picture on the personal one and your business logo on your business one so you can tell the difference. (If you don’t think your business needs a logo, then you need to check out this article.)

    Furthermore, if your business is B2B and not very visual, then you really shouldn’t even be on Instagram. For instance, I only have a personal account. One of my B2B clients has an Instagram account that we setup just to get more reach when we advertise on Facebook, but we get better results from Facebook, than Instagram.

    YouTube

    Here, too, you should keep personal and business separate. Don’t use your business account to like and save videos that you personally want to watch later. Use a personal account for that. You can have a personal account just for viewing and entertainment without posting any videos. I do. People can see which videos you’ve liked — by giving a thumbs up — and which you’ve saved to playlists. A potential client can easily click on “videos liked” on your channel and see them. You don’t want to offend anybody and people these days are easily offended. Also, you don’t want to mix family videos with business promotions.

    Public vs Private Social Media Accounts

    On the business accounts, you want everything public. That’s the idea. You’ll get found that way. On the other hand, on your personal social media accounts, you can choose to keep different areas private or only visible to friends and connections. Each network has privacy settings.

    CommentingWatch what you comment on! Be nice. Don’t insult people. Yes, there are stupid trolls out there, and you may not agree with everything posted, but putting a vile comment on someone’s post may come back to haunt you. You don’t know if a potential client is seeing it.

    When people say they leave their personal lives out of their work, I imagine them as tourists. They travel to their office with suitcases full of musical tastes, food preferences and hobbies, but only unpack them in the privacy of their home.

    Social media is blurring this line between personal and professional — it’s becoming harder to keep all your personal baggage packed in tight suitcases.

    How to separate your professional and private lifeThe challenge of personal and professional online identities surfaced this week in a forum thread on InboundMarketing.com . “I’m trying to work through whether it’s best to try to keep your private and professional personas separate when using social media,” wrote Thad Peterson , manager for global sales at Monster .

    Four pieces of advice emerged from the thread Thad kicked off:

    First Priority: Level of Comfort

    Don’t mix your business and personal accounts unless you feel comfotable doing so.

    For example, Rena Bernstein describes revealing her personal life to professional connections like being at “a meeting in pajamas.” “While I do agree that my business persona should include personal aspects of who I am, I do have significant reservations about having photos of my kids, or conversations between myself and old college buddies about the ‘glory days’ being mixed in with my professional advice to clients,” she wrote in the forum thread.

    Rena’s opinion is shared by many marketers who prefer to keep their professional and personal accounts separate. More than anything else, this is a question of different comfort levels and what feels natural to you. If maintaining a mixed page is forced, then separate pages might be the better option for you. As connections from different accounts start overlapping, you can get more comfortable and join the pajama party.

    Don’t Hide Information

    As nothing is truly private on the Web, make sure you are not hiding information. It is perfectly fine to keep your personal and professional accounts separate as long as you are being transparent about it. Being upfront and honest instills trust in your networks and opens the doors to a two-way communication.

    At the end of the day, criticisms are as important as compliments. While flattering content brings you reassurance, unflattering content demonstrates openness, encourages dialogue and enables constant improvement.

    Show Your Quirkiness

    Make sure to show the quirky aspects of your life and business in the social mediasphere. Social networks nurture curiosity for idiosyncrasies. When people explore the quirky personalities of their connections, they feel more attached to them and reassured in their approachability. This is an especially powerful tool for small businesses to compete with bigger companies.

    Tony Hsieh , CEO of Zappos, provides an excellent example of that. For one thing, Tony has created a Twitter account for his cat @el_gato that not only tweets, but also meows. El Gato has 2, 318 followers. As Aditi Sawhney commented , Tony maintains “a perfect blend of his personal and professional life at Zappos.” He is open about both his business affiliation and quirky personality. As a result, his followers see him as a genuine person, truly connected to them.

    Reconcile Your Identities

    Reconcile your different identities as every one of them offers an opportunity for a conversation starter. Having to pick a professional or a personal identity is a black-and-white scenario. But social media is like a color kaleidoscope providing opportunities that weren’t available before. It allows you to listen to conversations and participate in them as a business professional, a parent, a book lover and a baseball fan all at the same time.

    That seems to be the conclusion Thad had reached: “Social media is all about people connecting with people, and so your true personality is bound to come out — no real point in trying to hide who you are as a person.”

    Webinar: Twitter for Marketing and PR

    How to separate your professional and private life


    Want to learn more about using Twitter for Marketing and PR?

    Download the free webinar for tips and tricks to drive inbound marketing using Twitter.

    How to separate your professional and private life

    Originally published Jun 19, 2009 7:42:00 AM, updated March 21 2013

    Kara is passionate about sharing her self-improvement insights to help more people. Read full profile

    How to separate your professional and private life

    • Share
    • Pin it
    • Tweet
    • Share
    • Email

    Balancing work and family life is one of the most common sources of stress for working adults. In this productivity-driven society that we are living in, more and more people are finding it hard to adequately fulfill their roles both at home and at the workplace.

    More often than not, people are unable to find a point of balance between their careers and their families and one is given more priority than the other. This behavior has been associated with a number of dysfunctional outcomes—strained familial relationships, inefficiency at work, and poor physical and mental health.

    Hence, it is very important that we are able to work on balancing work and family life [1] . This may seem like a daunting task, but it is possible if you take the time and care to make it a priority. Here are some steps to help you get started.

    1. Make Balance a Priority

    Achieving work life balance, whether you work full time or part time, is a long and often difficult process. If you do not make the conscious decision to achieve balance, it is likely that you will fail along the way. I have learned through my experience that it is very important to make an effort to provide yourself the opportunity for balance.

    For instance, you need to find a job that is challenging but not overwhelming; also, carefully think about how big of a family you can responsibly raise at the moment. By making wise decisions on the most important matters in your life, attaining balance won’t be a difficult thing.

    If you are already settled into a career and have a growing family, you can still make small changes that will help you achieve balance. This could include requesting more flexible work hours, reorganizing the responsibilities you share at home, or bringing in trusted friends and family to help pick up the slack.

    2. Talk to Your Family

    I used to think that I was the only one who could solve my work versus family life conundrum. However, over time I realized that there is no way for me to get things right if I only rely on my perspective. Since then, I’ve made it a point to have discussions with my family [2] regarding their perceptions, opinions, and even objections to my work and how much I’m focusing on it.

    These discussions opened my eyes to a lot of things and made me more aware of the issues that I needed to improve. I also made sure that the entire family understood my obligations and responsibilities at work. Thus, there was also more understanding on their part.

    Once you spend time conversing and allow your family to have a say in how you’re tackling the balance between work and family in your life, you’ll find they have a lot of helpful feedback. Also, when they feel heard, they will react better when you have to stay late at work one evening or have to leave the dinner table early to finish a big project. Make sure the communication flows constantly.

    3. Allow Others to Help You

    There are times when balance is more difficult to achieve. Maybe you’re vying for a promotion at work, or you have a huge project for a client due before the weekend. Once you’ve communicated those problems to your family, it may be time to bring in some help.

    Most people have friends or family that are willing to help out. Make sure these are people you trust to handle tasks like brining your children to sports practices or picking them up from school. In most instances, they’ll be happy to pick up the slack for a week or two.

    If you’re not sure how to start asking for help, check out this article.

    4. Establish Boundaries Between Work and Family

    It is important that we create boundaries between work and family. This means determining which actions are acceptable and unacceptable. Boundaries hold the line to protect your work from the distraction of family, as well as to protect your family from the obligations at work. With clear boundaries, it is easier for you to tell when your action is not in favor of one aspect of your life.

    For example, you and your family may set a rule that no one is allowed to use a cell phone at the table. This will help your older children, but it will also help you avoid taking work calls during dinner [3] . You may also decide not to check emails while on vacation.

    This can be difficult, but it may be a necessary step to help your family feel like a priority and draw a firm line between work and home. The TED talk below may help you find inspiration to achieve the work-life balance you’re seeking.

    5. Accept That Imbalance Is Sometimes Unavoidable

    During my struggle to attain balance between work and family, I realized that there will always be times that I will have to let work or family take priority. It would be impossible to perfectly balance everything in your life at all times.

    For example, when a family member is sick, you may need to skip a work event. Or when an important deadline must be met, you might need to miss dinner at home and stay working late at the office.

    The most important thing is that you don’t allow imbalance to become the norm. The scale may tip for a few days or weeks, so the key is to bring it as close to the center as possible once you have the space to do so.

    Final Thoughts

    Learning how to balance work and family life isn’t easy. There is no one-size-fits-all approach. Every person and family must find specific solutions to their issues depending on their own preferences and needs.

    Essentially, a balance between work and family occurs when a person is able to sufficiently meet family commitments and adequately perform responsibilities at work. There is nothing wrong with working hard to get ahead, but don’t forget the worth of the things and people that really matter most.

    By Indeed Editorial Team

    Updated December 3, 2020 | Published December 12, 2019

    Updated December 3, 2020

    Published December 12, 2019

    Copy to Clipboard

    Your ability to maintain professional integrity in the workplace has a powerful impact on your productivity, performance and reputation. Behaving with professional integrity takes practice, strength of character and self-awareness. In this article, we will evaluate why professional integrity is so important in the workplace and share some tips to help you maintain your own integrity and even create a culture of integrity throughout an entire organization.

    What is professional integrity?

    Professional integrity is the practice of maintaining appropriate ethical behavior. It is the practice of showing strong adherence to moral and ethical principles and values such as honesty, honor, dependability and trustworthiness. People who behave with professional integrity generally uphold a moral standard of conduct, both in professional as well as personal endeavors.

    These standards govern how professionals conduct themselves, their work ethic and their communication practices. Professional integrity is what gives employees a reason to trust that leaders will place professional standards over their own self-interests.

    Honesty is the basis for maintaining integrity. Being loyal to a company, producing the results expected of you and being trustworthy and reliable are all qualities that characterize someone who has professional integrity.

    Why professional integrity in the workplace is important

    Integrity is one of the most important attributes in a leader. Here are a few reasons why:

    Employee satisfaction

    Employees are typically happier working for someone who they believe is trustworthy and dependable, someone who would never ask them to compromise their own principles. Integrity in a supervisor has been linked to job satisfaction and engagement, employee health and even life satisfaction.

    Reputation

    For people to trust you⁠—both in- and outside of your organization⁠—you need to behave with integrity. Investors need to trust you to consider investing in your business. Vendors need to trust that you will pay for goods and services. Maintaining professional integrity will allow you to build a strong reputation that will increase the trust and comfort others have in doing business with you.

    Clearer focus

    Consistently behaving with professional integrity means you have the energy to focus on what is important rather than wasting energy covering up bad practice.

    Stronger sales

    Customers today are motivated to buy from companies that are socially and environmentally responsible. The most effective way to create a culture of integrity and ethical behavior is to behave with professional integrity.

    Tips for maintaining integrity

    Here are some tips you can use to maintain your own professional integrity and encourage an entire culture of ethical behavior in the workplace.

    Treat everyone the same.

    Admit your mistakes.

    Encourage teams to speak freely.

    Keep your commitments.

    Put in maximum effort.

    Treat everyone the same

    Integrity is about honesty, wholeness and being the same person in all situations and with all people. Treat supervisors, coworkers and even the intern with the same level of professionalism and respect, regardless of their level of seniority. The same applies to customers. Every customer should be given the best treatment, regardless of the level of service they pay for.

    Reward honesty

    Create a culture of integrity by encouraging others to be honest with you, even when they make costly mistakes. Reward honesty publicly and repeatedly until everyone on your team understands that it’s always safe⁠—and always the best idea⁠—to be honest with you.

    Admit your mistakes

    Everyone makes mistakes and no one, from customers to employees, expects everyone to be perfect all the time. The key to behaving with professional integrity is admitting mistakes and apologizing when you’re wrong. You must also demonstrate your regret through your actions and demeanor. You’ll generally find that not only do people not think less of you, they actually think more highly of you by your ability to admit error.

    Encourage teams to speak freely

    Encourage your team to come up with fresh and creative approaches to everyday business challenges you encounter. Team discussions regarding new ideas should be honest and critical, yet respectful and open-minded of other perspectives. Encourage your team to speak freely as well as give and receive constructive criticism to improve ideas.

    Conduct self-assessments

    Periodically evaluate whether you are behaving with professional integrity. Evaluate whether you are heavily influenced by stronger personalities, pressured by your boss or tempted by easy money. You could even ask a trusted coworker their objective viewpoint. Make a non-judgemental inventory of your own integrity and determine whether you need to take action based on potential areas of self-improvement.

    Keep your commitments

    If you want to develop a reputation as being someone who delivers on their promises, make a habit of always keeping your word. This means that yes needs to mean yes and no means no, without excuses or a change of conditions. This also means being on time⁠—or even early⁠—when you say you will be. It means demonstrating respect for others’ time and notifying them right away if you’ll be late.

    Put in maximum effort

    Putting all of your focus and effort into something to reach a goal is a character trait that others admire. It demonstrates a strong work ethic and a commitment to results for the betterment of the organization. Giving your work your maximum effort every day and being unwilling to give in to distractions speaks volumes about your integrity.

    Social media culture pushes you to share everything — every emotion, every thoughts, every event, every photo… you get the point. What if you didn’t post daily pics and tweet daily thoughts? Would you cease to exist to the outside world, or would you be a hell of a lot happier? Here’s why you need to keep your private life private:

    You’re promoting your own gossip. If you’re complaining about always having people in your business, then stop putting your private life in people’s faces. You don’t need Entertainment Tonight following you around — you’re your own paparazzi and you only have yourself to blame.

    It’s amplifies the drama. What once was little is now a pretty big thing, and that’s all on you. What did you expect shouting the inner details of your life from the rooftops would do? The more people you involve in your problems, the bigger they’ll become, and they won’t stop until you do.

    You’ll care what people think. And yes, they will be judging you. It’s human nature. As much as you assure yourself (and maybe others) that you don’t care what anyone else thinks of you, when your personal life is on display, you’ll get defensive.

    You’ll never move on. If you spread the intimate details of your breakup all over town, you won’t be moving on until everyone else does. Your fights will always come back to you in ‘he said, she said’ form as all your friends let you in on their own version of the latest gossip.

    You’re betraying your partner (or anyone else involved in what you’re posting). What happens in any relationship is between the two people involved, no one else. You don’t need anyone else’s opinion, just your own. So respect your partner and keep it to yourself.

    Your safety is important. Going on vacation? Don’t blast it over social media, unless you want to help your friendly neighborhood burglars. Every piece of information you put out there can be used against you in a number of different ways, so stay private and stay safe.

    You should value opinions that are actually important. Your relationship is between you and your partner. That means if you have a fight, it stays between you. I once knew a guy who blasted his ex on social media for cheating. They eventually got back together and now they’re getting married, but if I never forgot their scandal, do you think anyone else did?

    Bosses care what you put online. If you think potential employers won’t Google you and look for any public social media accounts, you’re dead wrong. It’s common practice for hiring managers to look you up online, and needless to say, making your private life public isn’t very professional.

    You can’t trust everyone. Loose lips sink ships. Trust your family and your closest friends, but don’t spread your dirty laundry all over town. You never know whom it might get around to and the trouble it might cause.

    The best dating/relationships advice on the web – Sponsored If you’re reading this, check out Relationship Hero, a site where highly trained relationship coaches get you, get your situation, and help you accomplish what you want. They help you through complicated and difficult love situations like deciphering mixed signals, getting over a breakup, or anything else you’re worried about. You immediately connect with an awesome coach on text or over the phone in minutes. Just click here…

    A quiz that tells you what’s holding you back in love Check out Sweetn, the first self-care company focused on your love life. Take their fun and scientific quiz to get personalized insights, recommendations, and proven tools to help you make sense of your love life, find the right partner, and create the relationship you deserve. Just click here!

    Account Information

    Share with Your Friends

    How to use Microsoft To-Do to keep track of your professional and personal tasks

    How to use Microsoft To-Do to keep track of your professional and personal tasks

    Microsoft offers its own free and effective to-do app. Follow this step-by-step guide on how to set up, customize, and use Microsoft To-Do.

    How to separate your professional and private life

    An effective to-do app can help you keep track of your tasks for work and for your personal life. Some to-do apps include Google Tasks, Todoist, Wunderlist, Any.DO, and Toodledo. One program worth trying is Microsoft To-Do.

    Accessible from the web, Windows, iOS, and Android, the free Microsoft To-Do app lets you set up each task with a due date, reminder, note, and other attributes. You can add multiple steps to a single task, organize your tasks into different lists, and share your lists with other people. And by signing in with your Microsoft Account, you’re able to sync your tasks among your computers and mobile devices.

    SEE: Software usage policy (TechRepublic Premium)

    How to set up and use Microsoft To-Do

    You can get started with Microsoft To-Do on the web, as a Windows 10 app, on an iPhone or iPad, or on an Android device; the program works the same and has the same core features across all these platforms. For this tutorial, I use the Windows 10 app as the example.

    Download and open Microsoft To-Do. Sign in with your Microsoft Account. The app starts with default lists for My Day and Tasks. If you don’t plan to organize your tasks into different lists, you can simply add items to these default sections. Or, create your own custom lists right off the bat. To do this, click the link for New List. Type a name for your new list. Repeat those steps to create as many lists as you need (Figure A).

    Figure A

    How to separate your professional and private life

    To create a task, select the list to which you want to add it. Click the field to Add A Task, type a name for the task, and then click Add (Figure B).

    Figure B

    How to separate your professional and private life

    Click a task to open its detail view sidebar. Click the entry to Add Due Date and select a specific date. Click the entry for Remind Me and select a specific date and time to receive a reminder about the task. If necessary, type a note for the task and click Save. If you want to see the task each time you open To-Do, click the entry to Add To My Day–that option is helpful if you want to see specific tasks all in the My Day section. When you’re done, click the arrow to Dismiss Detail View (Figure C).

    Figure C

    How to separate your professional and private life

    Continue to add tasks across your different lists. If you add a task that you need to handle on a regular basis, click the task to display the detail view. Select Repeat and choose the recurring interval for the task: Daily, Weekdays, Weekly, Monthly, Yearly, or Custom. You can also break down a task into individual steps. To do this, click the link to Add Step. Type the step. Do the same for any additional steps (Figure D).

    Figure D

    How to separate your professional and private life

    After you complete a task, click its circle to mark it as completed. You can easily modify key details for a task. Right-click on it. From the popup menu, you can add it to or remove it from My Day. You can mark it as important or as completed. You can also change the due date, move it to a different list, or delete it (Figure E).

    Figure E

    How to separate your professional and private life

    Next, select a specific list. Click the ellipsis icon in the upper right. From the popup menu, you can rename the list. You can sort it by importance, due date, or other criteria. You can apply a different color theme to that list. You can opt to hide completed tasks or delete the list entirely (Figure F).

    Figure F

    How to separate your professional and private life

    To see all your tasks on one single screen, click the section for Planned. Click the search icon to search for a specific task. You can also share a list with another person; to do so, select the list you want to share. Click the Share list icon. Then, select the button to Create Invitation Link and click the button to Copy Link. You can now create an email, text, or other type of communication and paste the link in your message. Your recipient clicks the link to the list to add it to Microsoft To-Do. The two of you can now collaborate on tasks in that list (Figure G).

    Figure G

    How to separate your professional and private life

    Finally, you can tweak certain settings for the To-Do app. Click your name in the upper left and select Settings. At the Settings screen, you can change the options to Confirm Before Deleting and Turn On Completion Sound. You can alter the theme among light, dark, and the Windows theme. You can enable or disable the smart lists for Important and Planned. And you can import lists and tasks from Wunderlist, which Microsoft purchased a few years ago and plans to phase out in favor of To-Do (Figure H).

    Figure H

    How to separate your professional and private life

    How to separate your professional and private life

    Microsoft Weekly Newsletter

    Be your company’s Microsoft insider by reading these Windows and Office tips, tricks, and cheat sheets.

How to read several books at once

Trending

The Official List of Harper’s Winter 2023 YA Cover Reveals

36 Must-Read LGBTQ+ Books by BIPOC Authors

Which Selection Series Character Are You?

Archives

How to read several books at once

At any given time, you can probably find the members of Team Epic Reads reading at least four books at once. We can’t help it—there’s usually that epic fantasy we’ve been looking forward to, something more realistic when we need a break, maybe an old favorite just for fun, and, oh, we can’t forget those books that won’t be on shelves for at least six more months. And that’s during a light reading period. So you could say we’ve become expert at balancing reading multiple books. And now we want to share all that we’ve learned with you!

Whether you find yourself juggling two or something more in the area of seven or eight, we think all of these tips could come in handy for those book nerds who just aren’t able to commit. Scroll down and check them out!

7 Ways to Balance Reading Multiple Books

1. Try to diversify their genres

As we said above, we like to balance what we’re reading against each other. If we’re diving into a fantasy that we know is going to be super emotional and all-encompassing, we might also try to have something light and fluffy on the side. Then there’s also the grounded, realistic fiction for when we want something serious but contemporary, and then the magical realism for when we’re just sort of feeling in-between. See what we mean? A book for every mood! And you’ll hopefully make decent progress through them all.

2. Read in different formats

Hardcovers, paperbacks, ebooks, audiobooks—there’s no shortage of ways for you to consume all the books on your TBR. It might help you balance your current reads better if you’re reading some in physical formats and some in other formats—digital or audio—so that your progress is tied to convenience as much as it is mood. And this way you won’t need to wrestle out that brick of a book on a crowded train!

3. Seriously, write down your TBR

We know the concept of a real TBR pile is daunting—just looking around our rooms at all the shelves and piles is intimidating as heck. But writing down the books you want to read in the order you want to read them will help you an unbelievable amount. Plus, it could stop you from starting too many books! If you’re holding yourself to that top bunch, you’ll always be able to check in, know what you’re keeping available to yourself, and what you need to get through in order to get to the next batch. Is there a better light at the end of the list than more books?!

4. Read with friends

YOUR BOOK BFFS WILL HOLD YOU ACCOUNTABLE. And if you’re chatting with different friends about different books, it’s the perfect way to make sure you’re making progress on all of them, and not just letting a handful sit there, half-read, while you binge your way through sixteen others. These book BFFs can be real friends, internet friends (hi, we love you Bookstagram and YA Twitter and BookTube and everyone else), or even us! Seriously, let’s talk books at any time.

5. Use apps like Goodreads and Libby

Not only do they keep track of what you’re reading, but they’re the perfect way to keep track of your progress within them. As long as you hold yourself to updating them promptly (though Libby will keep track of your digital progress for you!), they’re the perfect organizational tools.

6. Limit yourself to a book budget

THIS MIGHT BE CRAZY, BUT MAYBE STOP BUYING BOOKS UNTIL YOU READ MORE. Okay, it’s definitely crazy, because we can’t even hold ourselves to that. But if you’re already reading a bunch of books, it’ll just overwhelm you if you keep adding to that shelf and diving into a brand new story! You’ll never finish anything you’ve already started. But if you start using new books as a sort-of reward system, we can promise that you’ll be motivated to get through all those books you’re in the middle of.

7. Set time aside every day

The most important, enjoyable, and easiest way to balance all those books you’re reading? READ THEM. Carve time out every day, whether it’s on your lunch break, after school, before work, or as you’re going to bed. Just do it. Try to hit fifty pages a day—see if you can! Then, once you get into a rhythm, make a pattern out of it. Dive into one book on Mondays and Wednesdays, then another on Tuesdays and Thursdays. Maybe give each genre a day, or a week, and rotate between everything you want to get through. Just start reading, and we promise you can do it!

It’s also not as hard as you think

How to read several books at once

I made a commitment to read more, and ended up going to my old habit of reading multiple books at once. Looking back, the times I’ve stuck to a single book at a time were also the times I read less frequently. If I wasn’t in the mood to read that specific book on that specific day, I wouldn’t. Sometimes that feeling would last for days, in which case I did little reading.

Now, looking back at the last few months when I’ve had multiple books going at once, I’ve spent at least an hour reading every night. Both because I’ve made a conscious effort to open and read a book, but also because I have so many to choose from.

The books I currently have a bookmark in:

  • The Greatest Adventures of Sherlock Holmes, by Sir Arthur Conan Doyle
  • Ketotarian, by Dr. Will Cole
  • The Price of Peace, by Zachary D. Carter
  • Norse Mythology, by Matt Clayton
  • Bag of Bones, by Stephen King

Most are ones that I’ve started within the past couple weeks, but Sherlock Holmes is a collection of short stories that are easy 15-minute reads that I’ve been going through for a few months.

The informal rules I follow, when I feel like it, that is. So, really the loose guidelines of reading multiple books at once, are:

  • Once I finish a book, I can then choose to either focus and finish another, or open one that I’ve been wanting to start.
  • Pick up at least one book every day. I mean, I have multiple open so I need to be making progress on one of them.
  • Use the amazing “Try a Sample” feature on Amazon Kindle. This saves me from buying/renting books I don’t like.
  • Have a designated book for nighttime reading. Something that doesn’t make my mind race when I put it down. And nothing scary.

Having multiple books open at once, and trying to follow the rules listed above, has ultimately led to me reading more, the first major benefit I’ve noticed.

The bottom line is when I read multiple books at once, I read more. And there are many reasons for this. Having more options of what to read makes it easier to read. I can pick-up something to read for 15 minutes, or grab something different and read for an hour. I can open something that’s fantasy, or a mystery, or a biography, depending on what mood I’m in. Essentially, there’s always a book I want to be reading, because I have so many choices.

Then, there’s the pressure of feeling the need to always be reading. To always be making progress so I can finish a book, thus allowing me to start a new one. I’ve found that when I’m reading just one book at a time, it’s much easier to ignore it for days at a time. When I have five books going at once, taking a few days off means I’ve ignored five books, not just one. Although the end result is really the same, the psychology is the difference. I’m not comfortable procrastinating when the “workload” is higher.

Now, this is far different pressure or workload than that of my job. This is free time pressure of something I enjoy. If reading led to the same stress as other things, it simply wouldn’t be enjoyable. This is a positive sense of urgency to always be making progress on one book, where I can choose what that one book is.

This may seem backwards since I’m always reading multiple books at once, which means the likelihood of reading bad books is higher. Yet, I find it’s much easier to put down or put away a book I’m not enjoying when I have three or four others I can open. Whereas when I’m working on a single book at a time, I feel the pressure to finish it so I can move on to one I actually enjoy. This is the bad kind of pressure.

If I haven’t touched a book for a few weeks it probably means I wasn’t really enjoying it. Normally, it would have been one I felt the need to finish just so I could move on. But, when I already have others open I can just put it aside and either get back to it when I’m ready to just put it on the shelf.

Then there’s the point I already touched on. If I fall in love with a book, like I did with Breaking the Two Party Doom Loop, I just do a sprint finish and focus almost all my attention on it. Plus, it was a rented book from the library with a return-by date.

When I put a book down for a few days, and then pick it back up in Chapter 6, I have to do a memory jog to remember where I left off. Sometimes this means sitting and thinking for a few minutes, other times it’s reading the last few paragraphs in the previous chapter. This helps me remember what just happened, as well as some key points that led to it.

When switching between three, four, or five books at a time I’m always looking back and trying to remember what I previously read. Now, this isn’t scientifically proven. Well, they do say reading in general can improve your memory, or at least slow down the decline of losing your memory. So… reading multiple books… maybe even better at improving my memory?

What I do know is that personally I’m spending more time using my memory to think back on what I’ve read, sometimes multiple times in one day. Although I am still a physical book lover, looking back at highlights in an ebook has really helped me follow along with a book and really hone in on some of the key things I’ve recently read. Mostly, I’m highlighting in nonfiction books like How to Be an Antiracist or Tools of Titans.

Which is a curious thing to realize from just reading multiple books at once. I grew up reading fiction, since that’s what most children and young adult books seem to be, but for most of the past decade my book of choice has been nonfiction or biographical. And when I’m only reading one book at a time, of course I’m going to stick to what I love.

What helped get me to this realization started with a book that was a gift, and also technically nonfiction. The Killers of the Flower Moon, by David Gramm is historical, but given the murder-mystery in it, it reads like fiction at points. Now, as I make my way through Bag of Bones, I’m remembering how easy it is to get sucked in by a good fiction story.

If it wasn’t for taking on a few books at once I probably would have continued my ways of playing it safe with books I could learn something from, instead of something to simply enjoy. It turns out there are good and bad fiction books, I just need to find the good ones.

Now that I’m reflecting on what I learned from reading more than one book at a time, there’s no way I’m ever going back. I’ve learned things about myself and become more creative and energized about my own writing. Then there’s the thing I value and judge most of my days by, productivity. Reading is something I can relax and enjoy while still feeling like I did something productive and worthwhile with my time.

I don’t mean simultaneously reading several books, maybe two at a time, one with each eye. That would be awesome in some ways, as I’d get to read a lot more, but I can also imagine it would just melt my brain. But, quite obviously, I mean having several different books on the go at once. I’ve always done it, but a conversation I had with someone the other day surprised me. They were astounded that I could do such a thing, their reasoning being that they couldn’t imagine remembering two or more different stories at once.

How to read several books at onceI don’t get that. I’m currently reading George R R Martin’s A Game Of Thrones in paperback. I mentioned before how I’d been putting off reading the series even though I had it because I was waiting for it to be finished. However, I’m reading it now before the HBO TV series starts, as I want to read before I watch. I’m also reading Peter Watts’ Blindsight on my iPhone. Peter makes all his books available as free ebooks on his website, so I converted Blindsight to epub and I’m reading that. I’m also reading a non-fiction book, Mysterious Cornwall, by Rupert Matthews. I picked that up in hardcover on my recent trip to the UK and it’s all about the various magical myths and legends of the West Country. Which, incidentally, are uniformly awesome. Great fodder for the imagination that I’ll be co-opting into my own writing here and there, I’m sure.

I don’t have any trouble following these different books. Game Of Thrones is my current main read. When I sit down to read, that’s the book I pick up. But I don’t usually carry books around any more. When I’m out and about I’ll read Blindsight, because it’s right there on my phone and very handy to read anywhere. Sometimes I’ll be at home and the urge to read one or the other will hit me, so I’ll read whichever one I find myself in the mood for.

If I’m in the mood to read, but not either of those two, I’ll pick up Mysterious Cornwall. Or if I have ten minutes to kill, I’ll read a quick chapter from it as it’s easier to read in bite-sized time gaps, being a book about stuff rather than a long story. It’s always better, for me anyway, to read novels in bigger chunks.

Then again, I’ll read three pages of a novel if I have five minutes spare and the story has me gripped. I used to walk to school reading a book, which is probably something that helped me develop the incredible peripheral vision skills I’ve since used successfully in martial arts. Books rule in so many ways.

How to read several books at onceAs well as these three books I’m reading, I’m also reading the latest couple of issues of Aurealis magazine and a couple of anthologies I picked up at Worldcon. I get the urge to read a short story and pick one of those up and enjoy a quick short yarn. None of these things overlap each other or strike me as difficult and this is where the conversation I mentioned at the start of this post surprised me.

We watch TV shows mixed up all the time. You might watch Battlestar Galactica on a Monday night, Deadwood on a Tuesday and Fringe on a Wednesday. You don’t get to the following Monday and complain that you can’t remember what was happening in BSG because you watched Deadwood and it messed up your memory. For me, books are the same. Game Of Thrones and Blindsight are two very different stories. One does nothing to interrupt the other. Nor do the short stories or non-fiction I read interfere with either novel I currently have on the go.

Sometimes, when a book really gets under my skin, as many good books do, I’ll forsake all other reading and just voraciously consume that one novel. That’s always an indicator to me of a really good book. But even then, with one book making me put aside all other stuff and read it single-mindedly, if I’m out without that book and have time to read, I’ll pull out my iPhone and read some of an ebook I’m currently into.

Truth is, I’m just addicted to reading. Which is a pretty healthy vice, really.

So what about you? Do you read lots of stuff at once or are you novel-monogamous? I’d love to hear your thoughts.

Для этого и создано приложение.

How to read several books at once

A good step forward to generating profits is to own your own e-book website. Better still is having your own e-book website with your own written books available to buy. Writing and selling your own e-books is paramount to a successful e-book business. If you can think of a good idea for an e-book then do it! Sell it on after all you may be on for a winner and sell thousands.

If you look on e-bay now you will find e-books everywhere and because most of these have resale rights these books are being sold by more than one person. Most e-books are being sold by quite a few people you may notice that sellers are selling some e-books with the same titles. Someone wrote these books and every e-book sold is a link to the author whoever sells the e-book. These e-books are not just on eBay I have also seen them all over the internet. The beauty of it all is that this e-book links back to one place and one place only the authors links, so everyone that reads this e-book will be taken to a website/sales page where ultimately more sales are generated.

Reading several books at once

I read a lot everyday. Sometimes I am reading all day long. I always have several books on the go so, at any given time, I am reading between 2 and 5 books. I read each for a few hours and then change to another one. I told one of my friends and he was slightly offended. Like if I was bragging or trying to outdo him as a reader. I just feel like I need a change of scenery now and then. Do you experience this or do you always read just one book at a time?

Еще кое-что любопытное

The Wise Man’s Fear was good?

I know I’m late on this thread but I’d like to hear from some readers. I recently finished the book and I just hated it. Nothing interesting actually happens in the story and apparently, the author’s only focus was to stall for hundreds of pages pointing out that Kvothe has the sex, and is very good at having the sex, with a female, all the time, all women want to have the sex with him….. OK Patrick, I get the idea.

This book totally discouraged me to continue the series.

Then I found out that the author is lazy and we will never have the third book anyway.

Killing Eve Book Author Slams Series Finale for ‘Punishing’ Eve and Villanelle

How to read several books at once submitted by /u/a_Ninja_b0y
[link] [comments]

from So many books, so little time https://ift.tt/J9dLzbo

Terry Crews Looks Back on Career, Life and Finding a “Place of Peace” in ‘Tough’ Memoir

How to read several books at once submitted by /u/a_Ninja_b0y
[link] [comments]

from So many books, so little time https://ift.tt/FJl9NoO

Stephen King’s ‘Scariest Work Yet’ Might Be This Ridiculous Microwave Recipe

How to read several books at once submitted by /u/a_Ninja_b0y
[link] [comments]

from So many books, so little time https://ift.tt/sc3oluG

[Book Club] “The Atlas Six” by Olivie Blake: Week 3, VII – Intent (Tristain)

Welcome to the third discussion thread for the April selection, The Atlas Six by Olivie Blake! Hopefully you have all managed to find the book but if you haven’t, you can still catch up and join in on a later discussion; however, this thread will be openly discussing up though (and including) VII – Intent (Tristian).

Below are some questions to help start conversation; feel free to answer some or all of them, or post about whatever your thoughts on the material.

  1. What are some of your favorite characters, parts or quotes? Which parts did you find confusing?
  2. What are your takeaways of the experience Tristian had with Ezra? How, if at all, did that space change your understanding of his abilities or what is to come?
  3. Had you been approached by The Forum as the Six had, how would you navigate their offer? Where would your allegiance or inclinations lie in terms of the missions or ethics of The Society vs The Forum?
  4. What do the last lines in this section suggest about the world and talismans? What dangers or opportunities present themselves with this capacity to operate in “noncorporeal” spaces?
  5. What other questions or predictions do you have moving forward? Who will it be??

Reminder that fourth and final discussion will be posted on Friday, April 29th, and cover everything in the book. Then the AMA with author Olivie Blake will happen on Saturday, April 30th, at 2pm ET.

The announcement for May’s selection(s!) has been posted so make sure to get a hold of the books before week one!

Posted on 04/23/2019 at 10:00 AM by Guest Author

Are you nervous about picking up another book? Don’t be!

Discover the many great benefits of reading multiple books at once.

Table of Contents

Why It’s Worth Reading Multiple Books at Once

“So many books, so little time.”

Back in 2010, Google Books attempted to calculate the total number of published books.

After cross-referencing records from hundreds of providers, removing duplicates, and discarding non-book entries, the number they came up with was roughly 130,000,000.

Of course, this was nearly 10 years ago. And Google Books didn’t take into account self-published e-books, as these works aren’t required to have ISBNs.

Therefore, it’s safe to assume that number is significantly higher today.

For the avid reader, this presents something of a dilemma. On one hand, having so many books available to you means there’s no shortage of reading material.

On the other hand, there’s no way you could get through that many titles in your lifetime, especially since new books are being published every day…

However, this does introduce an opportunity you may not be taking advantage of now: reading multiple books at once.

If you’re currently taking it one book at a time, you’ll likely miss out on a number of great works.

Sure, even someone with a wide-open schedule and the ability to speed-read couldn’t tackle every single book out there, but by increasing the number of books you consume at one time, you can actually get more out of your favorite pastime than you ever thought possible.

Here are a few benefits of reading multiple books at once you may not be aware of…

Exposure to a Variety of Genres

When you read one book at a time, you’re limited to one particular genre and story.

However, when you switch to reading multiple books at once, you get to experience a wider variety, which can actually make reading easier and more enjoyable!

Let’s be honest—at one time or another, we’ve all struggled to get through a book.

A technical book that confused you with unfamiliar jargon…

A dark piece of fiction that left you feeling troubled…

A “must-read” recommended by a friend that you just couldn’t connect with…

In such cases, you tend to feel as though you have to “power through,” even when you’re filled with a sense of dread as soon as you pick up the book.

However, by reading multiple books at once, you give yourself a break from the more difficult or less exciting works you’ve chosen.

As a result, you’re more likely to actually finish what you’re reading instead of allowing it to collect dust on your nightstand…

Opportunity to Experience Different Mediums

Another advantage to reading multiple books at once is that you’re not restricted to a single medium.

You can tackle an audiobook on your way to work, devour an e-book on your lunch break, and curl up with a paperback before you go to bed.

Variety doesn’t just apply to genres — it applies to formats too.

By reading several books that vary in medium, you can change up the way you experience the written word. And, in the case of audiobooks, you can give your eyes a rest without hitting pause on reading altogether.

Plus, adding some variety with regard to reading format means you’ll probably wind up finishing your books much faster!

Chance to Deepen Knowledge

When reading multiple books at once, some people opt for works that relate to one another; others prefer to bounce between books that couldn’t be more different.

Regardless of which approach you like best, you’ll find that consuming several works at one time offers the chance to deepen your knowledge in a wide range of subjects.

If you stick to books that revolve around the same theme or setting, you can often glean context from one that helps you understand another better.

For example, reading a nonfiction book about the Victorian era can provide a historical framework to use while also reading Jane Eyre, which may prove helpful in figuring out why characters act a certain way.

If you select two or more completely different books, you may be surprised at the connections you can make.

For instance, if you happen to be reading a science fiction novel that features an intergalactic opera singer, perusing a biography of Giuseppe Verdi at the same time will allow you experience that “Aha!” moment when the former work introduces a term such as cabaletta.

Oftentimes it’s just fun to form links between seemingly unrelated books.

Reading about a person, concept, or location in one book and then spotting a reference to it in another can be exciting!

And as a result, your experience will be richer and more fulfilling.

Ability to Enjoy All Benefits of Reading

Reading is a fantastic activity that allows you to learn and grow. And by reading multiple books at once, you can reap all the benefits this pastime provides.

If you want to further your education, you can pick up a scientific journal, historical text, or virtually any other nonfiction work.

If you want to feel inspired, you can grab a self-help book or autobiography from someone you admire.

If you want to explore the world without leaving the comfort of home, you can open up a travel book or a novel set in some faraway place.

The possibilities are truly endless, and when you have several books on hand, you never have to settle. Instead, you can go on whatever journey and experience whatever feeling you want!

Quicker Reduction of TBR List

Like most bibliophiles, you undoubtedly have a large stack (or an entire virtual shelf) of books to be read. And with each trip to the bookstore, library, or e-book marketplace, that pile grows larger…

Fortunately, reading multiple books at once allows you to cut down your TBR list much faster than by reading one at a time.

As previously mentioned, when you’re struggling to make your way through a difficult text, it may take months before you finally finish.

But when you expand your reading list and give yourself a break, you’re more likely to come back to it with fresh eyes and a new appreciation.

And you know that satisfaction you get when you finish a book? Imagine it multiplied!

Takeaway

There are millions of books out there right now (and plenty more to come). Doesn’t it make sense to open yourself up to new ways of reading so you can experience as many as possible?

Reading multiple books at once allows you to do just that. Plus, this approach offers a number of benefits you may not have even realized.

So, what are you waiting for? Grab that second (or third, or fourth, or fifth) book and get to reading!

Categories: Today in Books

Joe Queenan writes in One for the Books that during his adult life he has always been reading at least fifteen books simultaneously and as he wrote that chapter he was reading 32!

Naturally I had to think about what I was reading at the moment and at first assumed that I was reading two books, An Angel at my Table by Janet Frame (her autobiography) and The Little Drummer Girl by John le Carré, plus Tom Nissey’s A Reader’s Book of Days which I keep on my living room table and read a few pages in now and again. But when I started to look around, it didn’t take long for me to find The Library: A World History by James W.P. Campbell which I received for Christmas and even though it is extremely large, it has been buried under a variety of other books, magazines and a newspaper clipping about the new police museum in Hamburg. It’s not the type of book one reads in one sitting, but rather piece by piece and I get easily distracted by the wonderful photos, so it’s rather slow going. Should I count the gardening book I started reading in October, but then put aside? I may as well keep it out now, since it’s already March. What about Spanisch für Büffelmuffel by Christof Kehr which is also in the living room table and which I peek into once a month or so, does that count? Or Cay Rademacher’s Der Trümmermörder which I started reading out loud to Ralf while we were driving to a dog training one weekend but has not been opened since, so we’ve only gotten to page 73? That makes a total of seven. When my kids were very young I kept a book in almost every room, so whenever I had a few quiet minutes, I could read a couple of pages without ever having to waste time looking for my book, which turned out to be an excellent strategy.

Just for fun, I googled “reading several books at the same time” and got completely sidetracked reading a few of the literally millions of entries. There is even a wikiHow article on the subject, which I thought was some kind of satire at first, but it appears to be meant seriously.

Ack, I am so behind on reviews. I am working on a project that requires a lot of attention (fortunately I can work on it while still watching classic Doctor Who), which is the excuse I’m using for my negligence. Feel free to be distracted from this by a picture of my beautiful hat:

How to read several books at once

Essentially, Gerald Morris writes very sweet retellings of King Arthur legends from various sources, making fun of impractical chivalry rules and having Gawain be the coolest knight of all the knights. Instead of Lancelot, who starts out really lame and gets much less lame as time goes on. Every time he writes a new one, I’m afraid he’s going to have Mordred show up, which finally did happen in The Quest for the Fair Unknown (or maybe it happened before? I haven’t been reading his new books faithfully because they have insufficient Gawain & Terence in them), and now I am far too worried to read any future books in case Arthur dies. DO NOT WANT. (The ostrich approach to literature.) Oh, and Gerald Morris’s books are for children, and rereading them as an adult I find they are a smidge simplistic. Still charming though and if I have children I will assuredly procure these books for them.

Gerald Morris’s early books (including The Squire’s Tale) are better than his later ones. This is because he started with all the best stories. The Squire, His Knight, and His Lady is best of all, because it is Sir Gawain & the Green Knight. And who doesn’t love that story? So The Quest of the Fair Unknown, you know, it had moments that were really fun, but none as good as those early stories that were all about Gawain and Terence. However, the covers I am linking to are all pretty and matchy, and they make me want to buy all of Gerald Morris’s books at once.

P.S. It is possible that part of the reason I am writing these half-assed reviews is that I am addicted to TVTropes.org. Don’t go to that website. I am not even going to provide a link to it. I am telling you that if you enter you won’t be able to get out again. Hey, did you see my hat (above)?

Did you ever read these books? Essentially these two people Griffin and Sabine, are mentally connected. Sabine can see the pictures that Griffin draws, and one day she writes to him. They write each other angsty letters about the power of love and how much they miss each other; they overcome a bunch of obstacles and eventually find each other and have major reunion snuggles.

Which I realize doesn’t sound all that great. If you were to accuse these books of being short on plot, you would be correct.

But. But but but! Here is why it is that great! Because the letters are there, in the book! Griffin and Sabine are both artists, so they create beautiful postcards and envelopes, which are eye candy for me, and sometimes you get to take the letters out of the envelopes.

And yes, okay, mostly the letters themselves are not thrilling (it gets more interesting when they introduce a villain character), but you get to TAKE THEM OUT OF THE ENVELOPES. It is like The Jolly Postman for adults. With darker, edgier art. And did I mention that there are actual letters that you can physically take out of the envelopes? Envelopes containing removable letters? GLORIOUS.

Speaking of glorious, did you see my hat? Wasn’t it good?

Talk Book talk

Join LibraryThing to post.

This topic is currently marked as “dormant”—the last message is more than 90 days old. You can revive it by posting a reply.

1cestovatela

2rufustfirefly66

3bookishbunny

How do you read two books at once?

4AngelaB86

5kingkama

6rebeccanyc

I mix genres, so that I usually have at least one fiction and one nonfiction going at a time. Then, for carrying around/reading on the subway, etc., I usually have a book that’s easy to dip into and out of (and not too heavy — weight-wise, that is). Sometimes, I have more; for example, now I have a book that I’ve been trying to read for a month or more, but I haven’t decided not to finish it yet.

Having said that, sometimes I’ll get so absorbed in one book, I’ll neglect the others until I finish it.

7bazling

8lefty33

I have no rules. I read up to 8-ish books at a time and pick up each as I am in the mood for that one. I don’t try to mix up what I’m reading. Might be 5 fiction, all classics, exclusively fantasy, whatever. (Though if my current reading list is a mixture, that’s just as well.)

I’ve been reading Great Expectations for quite some time because other books keep sounding better at the moment. But then I read Elantris in two days.

9MerryMary

It never occurred to me that I was a promiscuous reader!! I generally have one going in the car (when I’m not driving), one in the living room, and an old favorite beside the bed. (Can’t have an exciting new book then – I’d never sleep!!)

Mixing genres helps. Or maybe I can just compartmentalize my mind. I don’t know how I do it. I just need to be reading. I’ve been known to read labels on bathroom products if there’s nothing else available.

10vpfluke

11Kerian

When I read multiple books, it’s usually for one of two reasons. I may be reading a book for a class and one for me. By doing this, I find that I’m able to keep with the stories better than if I read ahead for my class and jumped into something else. I can participate in class better. Other times, I read books of different genres. Right now, I’m reading a nonfiction and a fictional book. Both are tied together because they share a theme (the Harry Potter series). At the same time, they differ enough that I can recognize them as separate books and won’t confuse them with each other.

#3 bookishbunny:
Good one. 🙂

12thorold

Creditable reasons for starting one book before finishing another:

– I read in different settings (at home, at work, while travelling, in bed, at mealtimes, on holiday. ) and it isn’t always practical to carry on reading a particular book in all those settings, especially if it’s very heavy, or it’s a nice copy I don’t want to damage.
– Sometimes I want to read a particular book with other reference books handy.
– A book might “jump the queue” because someone else is waiting for me to finish it.

Discreditable reasons:
– Because I get bored with the book I’m reading, or I’m just not in the mood for that subject.
– Just bought a new book, couldn’t wait, and started reading it in the train home despite the fact that I already have several started books.
– Didn’t want to be seen reading that in public.

13Cecilturtle

14blackcat348

I’m usually reading atleast 2 books at once, 1 for school, 1 for myself, and I read fanfic and original stories online almost every day.

To remind myself whats happening in what ever I’m reading at the time I reread part of the last chapter to remind me whats happening and continue from there. Its an aquired skill to be able to tell what you’re reading apart, so practice is how I read multiple things at once.

15AsYouKnow_Bob

How do you read two books at once?

One in front of each eye.
After about an hour, it usually gives me a headache, though.

More seriously, I’m usually reading several books at once – but typically in different genres. I leave a book by every chair in the house, and pick up and resume whatever is ready to hand.

16tiffin

Constantly. or three. or four.

Different rooms (even different chairs in same room), different genres, different moods. Lunch bag.

17Bookmarque

Up until about a year ago, I always had 2-4 books going at once, not counting an audio book for the commute. It was never a problem for me and was my standard way of reading. Usually they varied in style, genre and type so as to provide the variety my many moods demanded. Maybe in my old age I don’t need that kind of mental shell game anymore and can settle down with one book until I’m done.

I do still have a book at work for reading at lunch though, and an audio book for the commute, but the # of backbone/focus books I read has sadly dwindled down to 1 at a time.

18Windy

19aluvalibri

20carmen29

Message #9:
I’ve been known to read labels on bathroom products if there’s nothing else available.

lol. I can relate!

21im_a_bookwyrm

How do you read two books at once?

Are we only limiting it to two? 😉
I think I’m in the middle of reading 18 books at the moment, possibly more. I’m not even counting ones for school.

I find it very easy to read many books at once. I get so into each book I’m reading that I can’t concentrate on anything else. That way, I keep all the plotlines straight in my head and can enjoy each book separately.

Part of the reason I read so many is that I buy so many. I get home and want to start my new books right away, even if I have already started others. So I read the beginning, sometimes even half, then jockey back and forth between new and old books.

On the matter of switching books, i varies with my mood. If I’m in the mood to read three different books in an afternoon, I will. Usually though, I stick with one book for a day.

As for finishing. well, let’s just say I have a very large “to read” pile. It’s always a satisfying victory when I can clear a book off that pile. But I do finish at least two a month, and as many as fifteen.

22avaland

23vatia First Message

24kperfetto

25southernbooklady

26inkdrinker

I only skimmed all of the posts so pardon me if I’m repeating something already said.

If a book isn’t doing it for you after 50 – 100 pages, you may want to consider giving up on it for the time being. Life’s way too short and there are far too many books to torture yourself over one. Keep it and come backe to it in a year or so. You may find your taste/mood/mental powers have changed. It’s happened to me more than once.

That said, like many others here I read up to 8 books at a time. Sometimes a book will get shoved aside for months before I get back to it, but I generally do come back to it. When I do return many times the book will have a freshness to it which reinvigorates me. Unfortunately sometimes I completely lose my mood for a book by the time I get back to it.

27FeralCats

I usually have about three going at once

One that I carry with me when I’m away from home to read while I’m waiting, bored, etc. This is usually one that can take me up to a month to read as I don’t get a lot of opportunities to read while I’m out.

One that I’m steadily reading when I’m home. These usually take me three to four days to read, if I can find enough time in one sitting.

And, currently, I’m reading the Harry Potter series again in preparation for The Deathly Hallows. With the series, I read a chapter or two (possibly three if I’m feeling. uh, froggy) each day.

The great balancing act: being polynarritivus. Yes, that is a made up word, but if Dr. Seuss and Shakespeare have taught me anything, it’s that you can make words. They might catch on. It means reading more than one book at a time, and the antonym is another made up word: mononarritivus. While many start by cherishing one book at a time, there are several advantages of switching to multiple stories at a time. Making the change from mononarritivus to polynarritivus can be scary. You may worry you’ll forget which story is which, or that you won’t finish them. Image courtesy of …

How to read several books at once

The great balancing act: being polynarritivus. Yes, that is a made up word, but if Dr. Seuss and Shakespeare have taught me anything, it’s that you can make words. They might catch on. It means reading more than one book at a time, and the antonym is another made up word: mononarritivus.

While many start by cherishing one book at a time, there are several advantages of switching to multiple stories at a time. Making the change from mononarritivus to polynarritivus can be scary. You may worry you’ll forget which story is which, or that you won’t finish them.

How to read several books at once

Image courtesy of

The benefits outweigh the negatives, though! You’d be surprised how easy it is to keep track of separate books. Plus, reading multiple books at once can actually help you finish faster. If you don’t like a book, you have a backup. If you can’t remember a story, re-read it.

On her blog, Rachel Ann Hanley says the amount of reading she does has tripled since switching from reading one book to reading many. If you get bored of the narrative in a book, it can be a chore to start to read it for the goal of finishing it. When you read multiple books, you can choose which book to read and avoid more of the slumps of uninspiring narratives.

How to read several books at once

Image courtesy of

But what if I never finish that book because I can read other books that are more interesting? Well, if you are having a hard time finishing it, do you really want to read that book? You can push yourself to read through it, but that problem is still there and even more present if you choose to read only one book at a time.

When reading multiple books at once, you never have to sacrifice. You can read multiple genres, different authors, and different styles of prose. This way you can also balance reading for work and reading for pleasure. Students who have to write an essay on “The Great Gatsby” can also read “Infinite Jest” if they want. They can probably even finish several novels throughout reading “Infinite Jest” if they commit to it.

On the opposite side of that, if you have a HUGE craving for a story, but no narrative seems to satisfy it, you can read multiple books of the same type to subside that hunger. You can read ALL Harry Potters at once, you crazy kid.

How to read several books at once

Besides speeding through TBR piles and having a variety of life, you also get to make connections across books that you might not have otherwise. How does “2001: A Space Odyssey” relate to “Looking for Alaska?”

If this isn’t for you, that’s okay. Stick to what works, and read one book at a time. However, if you haven’t tried multiple stories at once, maybe it can fix some of your struggles as a reader. Many people who have made the switch love its benefits like Laura Sackton who was scared of the change at first.

We all have different reasons to read a lot of books. From avoiding reading slumps, to wanting to enter several fantasy worlds at once. What’s your reason? Comment below! 🙂

I read a lot of books at once because I love reading about different characters and different worlds. I also get a bit bored if I’m just sticking to one story at once and often fall into a reading slump. So reading several books at once helps me out!

I don’t intentionally TRY to read a lot of books at once. I sort of just sometimes find myself getting bored of one book, so I start another to prevent myself from falling into a reading slump. I still manage to read several books at once and I would consider that a skill ahaha!

Mishall wrote: “I don’t intentionally TRY to read a lot of books at once. I sort of just sometimes find myself getting bored of one book, so I start another to prevent myself from falling into a reading slump. I s. “

Yes it’s definitely a skill! Not everyone can do it. 🙂

How to read several books at once When I’m bored with a book I’m reading I just add a new one to read😂

Charlotte wrote: “When I’m bored with a book I’m reading I just add a new one to read😂”

I kind of do the same. 🙂

How to read several books at once It’s a bad habit but oh well 🤷‍♀️😂

Charlotte wrote: “It’s a bad habit but oh well 🤷‍♀️😂”

It’s not that bad! It’s also fun. 🙂

Charlotte wrote: “It’s a bad habit but oh well 🤷‍♀️😂”

I wouldn’t say it’s a bad habit haha

How to read several books at once It can sometimes be though because then you never really finish a book

How to read several books at once Or you just take really long to

Charlotte wrote: “Or you just take really long to”

Yes that does happen, but that’s why we made this group. To motivate people!

How to read several books at once I have this huge procrastination issue where I even procrastinate on things that I actually want to do. So I might be dying to continue reading a book but at the same time I’ll probably just sit and stare at the cover for 10 hours instead of opening and continuing it.

@Naomi, I feel you on this. This happens with me too.

How to read several books at once Bhavya wrote: “@Naomi, I feel you on this. This happens with me too.”

That’s why I love buddy reads so much! It kind of forces you to continue and catch up with the other person

Yes! I love buddy reads too. 🙂

How to read several books at once This is a really good question. I never thought of this before. I like to switch between 2 to 3 books once a while when I get bored with the same book, basically if it becomes slow or gets stuck. Also, I read 2 to 3 books at a time because I like to read books according to my mood (lol).
Whatever suits the mood, I must have a book!

Rushali wrote: “This is a really good question. I never thought of this before. I like to switch between 2 to 3 books once a while when I get bored with the same book, basically if it becomes slow or gets stuck. A. “

I’m a mood reader too, I literally have so many books I haven’t read since ages because I’m not in the mood for them. 🙂
We should make that into a slogan, ‘Whatever suits the mood, I must have a book’!

How to read several books at once I never really used to read more than 3 books at once. But then since the virus, I’ve been reading all these books online and when I put holds on books they all come at once. And then I have to read them all at the same time or i’ll have to wait for 12 weeks to read them.
That’s probably the main reason I’m reading so many books right now, but also because I have books I’m reading for myself, books for school, book for writing class, and books for book club too.

How to read several books at once In highschool I used to finish the books I start in one day (sometimes I finish the book and.. wow 3 hours passed already! lol) But recently I started listening to audiobook and decided to clear my TBR list since I had books from 2015 that I didn’t read and I found myself buying new ones. First I started reading a book in English and another in Arabic + audiobook. But with time, I started reading more than 3 books. I think it works better for me instead of reading one book (especially that I’m a senior student at uni now and I don’t have 3 hours a day to read one book lol)

✧・゚⁽⁽ଘ Shreya ଓ⁾⁾✧・゚ wrote: “I never really used to read more than 3 books at once. But then since the virus, I’ve been reading all these books online and when I put holds on books they all come at once. And then I have to rea. “

Good luck on finishing! Happy reading Shreya. 🙂

Maitha wrote: “In highschool I used to finish the books I start in one day (sometimes I finish the book and.. wow 3 hours passed already! lol) But recently I started listening to audiobook and decided to clear my. “

I read a lot of audiobooks too. Most of my reading is through audiobooks. Reading several books is defiantly convenient! 🙂

How to read several books at once

For those you enjoying have multiple books open on a Kindle device, using the standard settings on your Kindle won’t allow you to do this. There are several different ways to be able to have more than one book open at a time on your Kindle. The following will explain how you can open more than one book at a time on your Kindle tablet to make it better to use.
There are several apps that allow you to do this, one example is the Kindle Cloud Reader and the other is the Calibre App. You can also manually switch between books on your Kindle to view several books at the same time.

Kindle Cloud Reader

Kindle Cloud Reader will allow you to quickly open several different books on your Kindle device. You can use the Kindle Cloud reader on your Internet browser by going to read.amazon.com and create a new account. This method will easily allow you to open multiple books on your Kindle at the same time.

How to read several books at once

Fast User Switching
Another method that will allow you to open more than one book at a time on a Kindle is to view different books on several devices. You can set up a new user on your Mac or PC, have that account registered to your Kindle for Mac app. This solution works if the Internet is unavailable or you are not comfortable with removing DRM on your Kindle purchases. The downside is that it’s slow and can be awkward to keep simultaneous notes

Calibre App

Instead of using the Kindle Cloud Reader, you can download and use the Calibre app. Calibre is an open-source e-reader and is free to use. You can use this app to copy all your Kindle content into a format that Calibre can read, allowing you to have Kindle open on one desktop and Calibre on another. If any of your Kindle books are DRM’d, use this free resource to un-DRM them.

Science fiction. Fantasy. The universe. And related subjects.

Reading all of it at once, or reading all of them at once

I think I’ve mentioned that my husband and I have different philosophies on reading series—I tend to prefer internal chronological order, and he tends to prefer publication order. There’s another difference in our approach to series. I want to read all of a series at once, plunging right in to that world. My posts about the Aubrey-Maturin books appeared here every Monday for months, but I actually read all twenty books in about three weeks of non-stop O’Brian immersion. You can probably tell that I do this if you read my posts regularly, because there’ll be a burst of posts about a series from time to time—all the Miles books, or all the Vlad books.

What Emmet likes to do though is to read, or re-read, a series slowly, interspersed with other things. He’ll sometimes be in the middle of slow re-reads of several series, where he’ll pick up the next book as much as a month afterwards. When he reads book 2 directly after book 1, it’s something to take notice of. You’d think I’d be used to this, but while I do now know about it I still find it really strange that he doesn’t want to keep breathing the same air.

And then I discovered that there are people who stop reading a book in the middle and read something else. I don’t mean because it’s a great big hardback and they don’t want to carry it with all the shopping they’ll be carrying so they take F&SF out with them to read on the metro—I sometimes do that. It’s generally a magazine with short stories I take in that situation, but I do understand the usefulness of it even if I can’t always bring myself to do it if the heavy hardback is particularly compelling. I also don’t mean that they start reading something else if they leave the book they are reading at home, or locked into somebody else’s car. That’s perfectly normal.

I also don’t mean the thing where somebody is bored with a book and they read something else while deciding whether to make the effort to finish it. I occasionally do this—not very often, but it has happened. Or there is the related thing where you’re reading book A which is something merely okay and book B which is something wonderful and awaited arrives at the library (or in the post) and you have to read book B now now now now now! I have done this two or three times over the last thirty years, but it takes a particular combination of A and B. If book A is actually a pretty good book, I’ll usually finish it first.

Nor do I mean the thing where you’re reading one book slowly for research while reading fiction fast at the same time—like a while ago I was reading Vienna 1814 at breakfast, a couple of chapters a day for a month or so. It’s a great book—gossip about the Congress of Vienna—but there was only so much of it I could take at once.

No, I’m talking about fiction reading done entirely for pleasure, and I’m talking about what Emmet does with series, except with individual books. In a situation where nothing prevents someone from carrying on with the book they’re reading except their own whimsy, but they put it down on a whim and pick up something else and read that instead—or read part of that. I heard of a case recently where somebody had half a dozen books unfinished on their nightstand—and they had enjoyed as much as they had read of all of them.

Now I know—it’s Ugol’s law—that you can never say “Does anyone else do this?” There might be nobody who reads with a pineapple on their head, but if even one person does it, then there are always lots of people who do it. So my question is addressed to those of you who do this strange thing: if you do this, why do you?

I’d really like to understand.

My feeling is that once I’m immersed in a world and characters and plot and the author’s style, I don’t want to get used to a whole new set of those things and then switch back to the first lot. It gives me whiplash. Even at end-of-book natural breakpoints, if I’m enjoying the series I’d rather read the next one than anything else.

So what is it that makes you enjoy this reckless chopping and changing? Why doesn’t the desire to find out what happens, or (in the case of re-reading) follow the road along to its ending, keep you reading the first book until it’s done, and then pick up the second book in an orderly fashion? And having immersed yourself in the airs and style of one writer and accustomed yourself to their mode and pacing, why do you want to keep switching atmosphere? (I keep thinking of this in terms of going from breathing oxygen to chlorine…) There must be some benefit to it, but I don’t understand what it is.

Enlighten me, please?

And those of you who do it with series, I’m interested in your thoughts on this too.

Photo of woman reading books by Rachel Sian used under Creative Commons license

Jo Walton is a science fiction and fantasy writer. She’s published two poetry collections and nine novels, most recently Among Others, and if you liked this post you will like it. She reads a lot, and blogs about it here regularly. She comes from Wales but lives in Montreal where the food and books are more varied.

Whether you are faithful to a single book, serially monogamous or prefer to play the field – now’s your chance to share your reading habits

How to read several books at once

“This week I am reading two completely different books. I am about to finish On the Road, a very powerful book with a big shot of frenzy. As for Consciousness Explained, I have just started, and it seems promising.” – algernon_19001 Photograph: algernon_19001/GuardianWitness Photograph: algernon_19001 /GuardianWitness

“This week I am reading two completely different books. I am about to finish On the Road, a very powerful book with a big shot of frenzy. As for Consciousness Explained, I have just started, and it seems promising.” – algernon_19001 Photograph: algernon_19001/GuardianWitness Photograph: algernon_19001 /GuardianWitness

In this week’s Tips, Links and Suggestions column, edinflo sparked a lively conversation by asking:

Does anyone else have a problem sticking to one book? For me there are so many that I want to read that I end up picking at lots and have trouble focusing on one book completely.

veritypontiki replied: “I tend to have one for the morning commute, one for the evening commute and one to read in bed. But I can’t do more than 1 of the same type. So 3 fiction books is a ‘no no’ for me. But I can happily balance fiction, history, philosophy, theology and science.”

Aliquidcow said: “I have some ebook-only books on my phone (I don’t read ebooks enough for it to be worth getting a kindle), but I don’t like reading that way at home, only on the train, so in that case I’ll be reading something else at home,” while SnowyJohn mused on the value of “snacking books” for those inbetween moments when deciding on the next big read. “I ended up reading through the whole of Brewer’s Phrase and Fable and then Brewer’s Rogues, Villains and Eccentrics that way a few years back – great for when you want to read for a bit but don’t want to commit to anything.”

Finally, Jantar touched on the emotional value of reading in stereo:

I love reading a handful of books ‘at the same time’ but most of the time they will be very different types of books. So those books will be, for instance, a biography and a poetry anthology, a book with essays, a short story collection and one or two novels. I also reread a lot, so at any one time I will wander through both new and familiar worlds. (My comfort rereading I do mostly in bed – and that’s mostly novels I have read at least a couple of times.)

Do you have more than one book on the go at any one time? What are your tips for a satisfying reading life?

How to read several books at once

A strategy for nonfiction.

Reading gives us access to great ideas, allows us peek into the minds of the smartest people, and gives us fuel to be valuable contributors in conversations. But who really has time to read every book that would help us as business leaders? Everyone, according to the author, because the key to reading is not taking in every word, but understanding the concepts that the author presents. Following his advice, you have the potential to read at least one nonfiction book a week. The formula comes down to being engaged with the material, keeping your mind alert, and actively trying to figure out what the book really means.

A strategy for nonfiction.

It was the late 1980s and I was sitting in a university lecture hall listening to Abbie Hoffman, an author and an activist, ranting about my generation’s indifference. Next to me was Gloria Emerson, a brilliant and eccentric journalist and author. We were discussing Hoffman’s talk when I told her how much I loved being in the thick of all these ideas.

“It’s such a unique opportunity to be here,” I said to her, “to be part of these conversations with smart, thoughtful people.”

“Oh, don’t be silly,” she responded. “Anybody can be part of these conversations. Just read some books!”

Ironically, as a history major, I was reading three to four books a week. And Gloria was right: through these books, I had a seat at the table. I was part of a cutting-edge conversation that was going on between great minds.

Flash forward too many years, and I am now back in that conversation. Since I started my podcast, I read as many nonfiction books as I can — at least one a week. It’s a requirement, first, to decide if I want to speak with an author and share their ideas, and, second, to make the conversation valuable if I do decide to have them on as a guest. (This may seem obvious, but you might be surprised at how many times I have been interviewed by people who have not read any of my books.)

I am richer for all this reading. I know more and take more risks as I apply what I’m learning. I also feel more confident in my own views and actions, as well as empathize and understand others better, since I have more context.

But reading is time-consuming. I was already over-busy before I started reading several books a week. And I am a slow reader.

I tried the traditional shortcuts, but none of them worked. Reading the PR materials is insufficient for understanding a book, and executive summaries are awful. I have never read an executive summary that came close to conveying what’s interesting and useful about an author’s work.

So how can we read a book or more a week? It turns out that what works best for me is following some advice I got while I was still in college. Michael Jimenez, a professor of Latin American history, was one of the best professors I ever had. One day I told him that I was struggling with the reading load.

“I hope you’re not reading these books word-for-word like they’re fiction books,” he told me.

I told him I was.

He looked around the room and the other students sheepishly nodded alongside me. So he pulled a number of us together and taught us how to read nonfiction.

“Listen,” he said, “you don’t need to read these books. You need to understand them.”

He explained more: Fiction demands that we enter a world of the author’s making, inspiring a more immersive experience. Nonfiction — at least the type we tend to read to support our work as business leaders — makes a point and asks us to learn from it.

As readers, we gain momentum with each book we read. The more we read, the more quickly we can understand their perspectives and where they fit into a conversation they’re having with other authors, and the more informed we are when we use their advice or incorporate their perspectives into our work.

In other words, the more books we read, the faster it goes.

Here’s Professor Jimenez’s advice on reading nonfiction, with a few additions of my own:

  1. Start with the author. Who wrote the book? Read his or her bio. If you can find a brief interview or article online about the author, read that quickly. It will give you a sense of the person’s bias and perspective.
  2. Read the title, the subtitle, the front flap, and the table of contents. What’s the big-picture argument of the book? How is that argument laid out? By now, you could probably describe the main idea of the book to someone who hasn’t read it.
  3. Read the introduction and the conclusion. The author makes their case in the opening and closing argument of the book. Read these two sections word for word but quickly. You already have a general sense of where the author is going, and these sections will tell you how they plan to get there (introduction) and what they hope you got out of it (conclusion).
  4. Read/skim each chapter. Read the title and anywhere from the first few paragraphs to the first few pages of the chapter to figure out how the author is using this chapter and where it fits into the argument of the book. Then skim through the headings and subheadings (if there are any) to get a feel for the flow. Read the first sentence of each paragraph and the last. If you get the meaning, move on. Otherwise, you may want to read the whole paragraph. Once you’ve gotten an understanding of the chapter, you may be able to skim over whole pages, as the argument may be clear to you and also may repeat itself.
  5. End with the table of contents again. Once you’ve finished the book, return to the table of contents and summarize it in your head. Take a few moments to relive the flow of the book, the arguments you considered, the stories you remember, the journey you went on with the author.

Throughout my reading, I take notes in preparation for my conversation with the author. Where do I agree? Where do I disagree? What questions are still simmering? What might I want to discuss with others or think more about in the coming days? These notes are a good idea for every reader to take.

Here’s the interesting thing about reading a book like this: while it’s much faster than a traditional reading (it takes me 1–2 hours to read a book, instead of the usual 6–8), you will retain far more.

That’s because you’re not simply reading the material; you’re actively engaging with it. Your mind is alert the whole time and you’re able to see the book more holistically. You’re not just taking it in; you’re figuring it out.

When I started my podcast, it was with the intention of giving people spectator seats to conversations I was having with smart, thoughtful people about their passions, learnings, and perspectives. What took me a little by surprise is how much we all already have access to those people simply by reading them. Yes, I am enriched by these conversations. But 90% of that is because I have read what the author has written.

We can all read books and listen to podcast conversations with smart, thoughtful people. We can all have access to great ideas and apply them to our lives.

In other words, with a little effort, we can all go to back to college.

How to read several books at once
Photo credit: Dvortygirl on Flickr

I used to be the kind of reader who could only read one book at a time. I’d often binge read and get through a book quickly—especially if I was enjoying it, especially especially if I was enjoying it and eager to read another book—but one book at a time was a firm rule for me.

Then I started doing literature programs in college and I didn’t have the luxury of sticking to my one book at a time rule.

Granted, I suppose I could have added all the pages I needed to read in a week (adding together the page counts of the books I needed to read) and then gone through one book at a time that way, but for some reason I’ve found it’s less daunting to read 50 pages of one book and 30 pages of another book and 35 pages of yet another book than it is to read 115 pages of a single book. Which is silly, I know, because I’m reading 115 pages a day either way, but it doesn’t feel like it as much as it would if I was reading that amount from a single book.

After I broke that rule initially years ago now, I started occasionally pleasure-reading multiple books at once, oftentimes because I’d get a book I was really excited about and couldn’t wait to read so I’d dive into that one while still reading another one. It’s not something I did often but. #noregrets.

The other thing book hopping allows me to do is get through books I’m not enjoying as much (a necessity, in literature programs because invariably there will be books I have to read I’m not really into) in bite-sized pieces. I’ll tell myself, okay, I’ll read 50 pages of this book I don’t love first, then I’ll get to read 65 pages of those other books I do like.

Granted, reading several books at once means it takes me longer to finish all of them—but it evens out because I end up finishing a bunch of them within a couple days as I near the end of every book around the same time.

Moving to reading a bunch of books at once has actually been easier than I anticipated, although it’s quickly becoming clear to me that pleasure reading is a thing that’s probably going to be rare as long as I have three (or more) books in a week to read for school. But that’s okay—I’m reading lots of books I probably wouldn’t have otherwise—or at least wouldn’t have so soon. And that’s certainly not a bad thing.

Do you read multiple books at once?

Twitter-sized bites:

Do you read multiple books at once? Join the discussion on @Ava_Jae’s blog. (Click to tweet)

Warren Buffett, the man commonly referred to as the greatest investor of the 20th century, was standing in front of 165 wide-eyed students from Columbia University.

One of the students raised his hand and asked Buffett for his thoughts on the best way to prepare for an investing career. After thinking for a moment, Buffett pulled out a stack of papers and trade reports he had brought with him and said, “Read 500 pages like this every day. That’s how knowledge works. It builds up, like compound interest. All of you can do it, but I guarantee not many of you will do it.” 1

Buffett estimates that 80 percent of his working hours are spent reading or thinking. It’s enough to make you ask, “Am I reading enough books?”

When I asked myself that question recently, I realized that there were some simple reasons I wasn’t reading as much as I would like to, and I developed a reasonable system that is helping me read more than 30 books per year.

How to Read More Books

If you know how to read, then reading books is relatively easy. You simply have to make time to read. Easier said than done, of course.

When I looked at my own reading habits, I realized that my reading habits were mostly reactive, not proactive. If an interesting link flashed across my screen on Facebook or Twitter, then I would read it as a reaction. I wasn’t proactively making time to read books each day. I was simply reading interesting ideas that were pushed in front of me.

As a result, most of my reading was done online. Now, there are plenty of excellent articles on the web, but generally speaking, the quality of good books is better. Books typically have better writing (more tightly edited) and higher quality information (better fact-checking and more extensive research). From a learning perspective, it’s probably a better use of my time to read books than to read online content.

So, I had to figure out a strategy that would allow me to read more books without letting typical distractions get in the way.

How do you do that?

20 Pages Per Day

Here’s the only pattern I’ve been able to stick with consistently:

Read 20 pages to start the day.

I usually wake up, drink a glass of water, write down 3 things I’m grateful for, and read 20 pages of a book. For the last 10 weeks, I have followed this new habit. As of today, I’m 100 pages into my 7th book. At that pace (7 books per 10 weeks) I’ll read about 36 books in the next year. Not bad.

Here’s why I think this pattern works: 20 pages is small enough that it’s not intimidating. Most people can finish reading 20 pages within 30 minutes. And if you do it first thing in the morning, then the urgencies of the day don’t get in the way.

Finally, 20 pages seems small but adds up fast. It’s a great average speed.

If time allows, I’ll read more at other times as well. After the research I did for my article on how to get better sleep, I have added reading to my “prepare for bed” routine as well. But regardless of what happens during the rest of the day, I still get my 20 pages in each morning.

The First Hour

Most people spend it getting dressed, getting ready, and rushing out the door. What if that time was spent making yourself a better person? What if you woke up an hour before you needed to each day and worked on yourself? How much better would you be at work, in your relationships, and as a person?

That’s essentially what this reading strategy is asking you to do. Before you move on to the normal bustle of the day, invest in yourself. Before your life turns into a whirlwind of activity, read a book that will make you better. As with most habits that can greatly impact your life, this will never feel urgent, but it is important.
20 pages per day. That’s all you need.

Read Next

Looking for good books to read? I created a public reading list where you can see all of my book recommendations across a wide range of categories. Here are a few of the best books to start with…

If you want practical ideas for creating more good habits (like reading!), check out my book Atomic Habits, which will show you how small changes in habits can lead to remarkable results.

Thanks for reading. You can get more actionable ideas in my popular email newsletter. Each week, I share 3 short ideas from me, 2 quotes from others, and 1 question to think about. Over 1,000,000 people subscribe. Enter your email now and join us.

James Clear writes about habits, decision making, and continuous improvement. He is the author of the #1 New York Times bestseller, Atomic Habits. The book has sold over 7 million copies worldwide and has been translated into more than 50 languages.

By shadowplay,
July 26, 2012 in Topics

Recommended Posts

Archived

This topic is now archived and is closed to further replies.

Top Discussions this Week

How to read several books at once

By bbogdanov
Started June 23

By Angel_325
Started Monday at 10:39 PM

By Lp86
Started Monday at 05:54 AM

By Guyonajourney
Started Tuesday at 02:14 PM

By Helpmesavethis
Started Saturday at 10:34 PM

Our picks

  • How to read several books at once

How To Make A Woman Want You Sexually (Guide To Building Her Interest And Sexual Attraction)

Joyanima posted a blog entry in Youtube, March 28

Learn how to make a woman want you sexually! In today’s video we’re talking about sexual attraction and how you make a woman want you! We’re going to be discussing some useful tips you can put to work to get a woman interested in you and building that sexual desire. Often men think they know exactly what women want, men in sports cars with big houses a big wallet and a bad boy attitude. This might be what the ladies want in movies but not in real life it’s very different. To know what a lady wants you need to understand what you need to do to make her want you sexually. Imagine if you knew the secret formula to do this, the one that tells you exactly what women want sexually. The formula would let you know exactly what you need to do to get a woman to fall into your arms, sounds too good to be true right? Well it’s not! It’s as easy as being mindful of your own behaviour and adopting steel-proof boundaries. Want to know some more? Well don’t move an inch.

How to read several books at once

Picked By

How to read several books at once

How to know when he’s really fallen in LOVE

Mark Rosenfeld posted a blog entry in Youtube, March 28

You’re falling in love with your man deeper every day, but you don’t know if he feels the same way for you. It’s natural to want to know his feelings for you. What happens when he doesn’t say it or he’s not the type to say that? His actions tell you he loves you, but you could be wrong, right? So how do you know when he’s really in love with you? It’s not always so easy, but it’s not impossible either!

How to read several books at once

Picked By

How to read several books at once

6 Psychological Secrets of Attraction

Psych2Go posted a blog entry in Youtube, March 28

Knowing whether or not someone is “into you” can be incredibly difficult if they don’t explicitly say it. In this video, we will be looking at some psychological secrets of attraction.

How to read several books at once

Picked By

How to read several books at once

This Healing Mindset That Helps Overcome Trauma Symptoms

Crappy Childhood Fairy posted a blog entry in Youtube, February 22

If you grew up with neglect and abuse, you’ve needed time to talk about what happened, and how parents and others treated you. But THEN what? Once you’ve acknowledged the past and gained an understanding of how you developed symptoms of trauma, how can you overcome those symptoms, and move forward with building a happy and fulfilled life? In this video I teach about the two general categories of comments I see on my channel, and what that suggestions about the commenter’s readiness to heal.

How to read several books at once

Picked By

How to read several books at once

“I Want A Girlfriend” Do THIS First

Joyanima posted a blog entry in Youtube, February 22

I want a girlfriend. Have you ever found yourself thinking “I want a girlfriend” but you’re not quite sure if you’re actually ready for one? Before you go about doing anything else it’s important to make sure that you actually need a girlfriend right now.

It’s no mystery why it’s a good idea to read some books more than once.

It’s no mystery why it’s a good idea to read some books more than once.

First of all, you don’t need a reason to read a book more than once. When I was a kid, reading a book was the only form of entertainment you could do twice. You could go to see a movie once in the theater, and the next weekend it would be gone forever, replaced by another movie. If you missed a television show, you waited six months for a rerun, and then that show was most likely gone forever. There was no cable, no internet, no tablets. But books? If you liked a book, you could read it as many times as you wanted. Sometimes we read a book more than once simply because we could.

But in these modern times, there are other reasons to read a book more than once. Even with so many other forms of entertainment, even when there are so many books out there that it’s impossible to read them all, sometimes it’s still better to reread a book that you’ve already read before.

SIX REASONS TO READ A BOOK MORE THAN ONCE

1. Every other book you try reading sucks

The Godfather by Mario Puzo

Sometimes you need a sure thing when you’re reading a book. Whether you’re waiting for good/bad news in a hospital or sitting at an airport, you want something that you know will get your mind off of whatever you don’t want your mind on. That is NOT the time to experiment with an unfamiliar book or author. There are times you need a sure thing, and The Godfather is my sure thing.

Yeah, the movies (the first two) are okay, but the book has so many sub-plots that you can randomly pick a page and find something interesting. It’s not a perfect book (a couple sub-plots are out of place and stupid), but it’s very readable. And I turn to it when I need to know that I’ll enjoy what I’m reading.

2. Just because you like it

The Three Musketeers by Alexandre Dumas

I read The Three Musketeers a couple times when I was in middle school. It might have been the first novel that I ever read twice, but I’m not sure. I liked it. That was the only reason I reread it. Just because… I liked it. It might be the best reason. But it’s not an interesting reason. The Three Musketeers is the only classic literature on my list. I have fond memories of the 1970s movies with Michael York as D’Artagnan and Raquel Welch as Constance, and those movies spurred me on to read the book. Even without the movies (and the Classics Illustrated comic), I would have loved this book.

3. To relive the experience

The Thin Man by Dashiell Hammett

I accidentally found this novel during a low point in my teen years (I won’t go into what was going on). This book was lying around the house (I don’t know who bought it), and I liked the title because people often commented that I was thin, and it wasn’t meant as a compliment. I realized as I read that the thin man was the murder victim, but I liked the mystery novel anyway. The Thin Man got me through a really bad weekend. I don’t want to relive that bad weekend by reading The Thin Man, but I like remembering the joy of an unexpected great book. That doesn’t happen very often.

4. To win a contest

The Lord of the Rings by J.R.R. Tolkien

When I was in ninth grade, I got into a reading contest with another kid to see who could read The Lord of the Rings the most times. I had read it three times, and he had read it four times, and every time I read it again, he’d read it again just to stay ahead of me. The fourth time I read it, I skipped The Fellowship of the Ring (I claimed to have read it over a weekend). And the fifth time, I just lied and carried The Two Towers with me while I read something else. It may have been the first time I had ever lied about reading a book that I hadn’t really read. But it wouldn’t be the last time.

I always vowed that if I ever got into another reading contest, it would involve a short book and not a trilogy.

To be honest, I might never read this again. I read it several times in junior high/high school. Back in the 1970s, the rip-offs hadn’t been written yet, so there was nothing else quite like it (as far as we knew). TLOTR was a trilogy to be savored. It was a trilogy before trilogies were common. It was a trilogy that made sense as a trilogy. It even had a prequel. Any youngster reading The Lord of the Rings might not see anything unique in it because it’s been copied so many times in so many exciting ways (from a youngster’s point of view).

Referring to people younger than me as “youngster” probably makes me sound older than I really am.

5. To avoid reading anything by James Patterson

James Patterson writes too many books, so any time you reread a book, it keeps you from buying a James Patterson book (or a book with written by somebody else with James Patterson’s name on it).

6. To find details you didn’t notice the first time

Some people read books a second time to catch details that they missed the first time. That’s a great reason to read a book more than once, but I’ve never done it. I usually don’t care if I missed details the first time I read a book. I might notice details the second time I read a book, but that’s never the reason I reread a book. I hope I’m not being disrespectful to people who reread books for this reason. It’s not a bad reason. It’s probably a better reason than trying to win a contest.

BONUS BOOK to read more than once

The Bible– by God

When God writes a book, it’s probably a good idea to read it. Maybe it’s a good idea to read it more than once. Any of the above reasons would be ideal for reading The Bible more than once. I would have included The Bible as the example for all six reasons, but it wouldn’t be fair to the other books. No human author can compete with God, not even James Patterson (I hope James Patterson isn’t thinking of writing his own version of The Bible, but I wouldn’t be surprised if he did.). So I hope God understands why I didn’t include The Bible as an example for any book that’s worth reading more than once.

But enough about me! What books do you turn to when you need a sure thing? What books have you read more than once and why?

Here’s the romantic comedy you can read and listen to…

I have hundreds of medium sized Excel files (between 5000 and 50.0000 rows with about 100 columns) to load into R. They have a well-defined naming pattern, like x_1.xlsx , x_2.xlsx , etc.

How can I load these files into R in the fastest, most straightforward way?

How to read several books at once

1 Answer 1

With list.files you can create a list of all the filenames in your workingdirectory. Next you can use lapply to loop over that list and read each file with the read_excel function from the readxl package:

This method can off course also be used with other file reading functions like read.csv or read.table . Just replace read_excel with the appropriate file reading function and make sure you use the correct pattern in list.files .

If you also want to include the files in subdirectories, use:

Other possible packages for reading Excel-files: openxlsx & xlsx

Supposing the columns are the same for each file, you can bind them together in one dataframe with bind_rows from dplyr:

or with rbindlist from data.table:

Both have the option to add a id column for identifying the separate datasets.

Update: If you don’t want a numeric identifier, just use sapply with simplify = FALSE to read the files in file.list :

When using bind_rows from dplyr or rbindlist from data.table, the id column now contains the filenames.

Even another approach is using the purrr -package:

Other approaches to getting a named list: If you don’t want just a numeric identifier, than you can assign the filenames to the dataframes in the list before you bind them together. There are several ways to do this:

Effective textbook reading is a key study skill for student success. Nearly every class makes you read them.

“Makes” is the right word here. “Requires,” “forces,” or “insists” will also work. Few people read textbooks unless they have to. If you read textbooks for fun, shoot me an email. I need to interview you, because I don’t think you exist.

Reading textbooks is weird. That’s right – weird. Granted, we all have to read them. But even you bookworms – the kinds of people who devour the Twilight books in one week, or Harry Potter, or the Hunger Games books – know that textbooks are a bit weird.

Think about it. Textbooks are the only books you read today that have pictures on nearly every page (Dr. Seuss fans excluded). In fact, should you be forced to read a textbook without pictures, you are in real trouble. Those books get seriously tough. Nevertheless, understanding how to read a textbook is vital.

The goal of a textbook is simple: inform and educate.

The goal of the Harry Potter books is very different. Novels tell stories. Textbooks communicate ideas through explanations of information. Because of this, you need a different strategy for reading textbooks. Follow these four easy steps to get on your way.

1. Don’t read front to back (aka, READ BACKWARDS)

Reading a textbook chapter front to back ensures that you will waste time.

I know it’s counter-intuitive to not read a book front to back, but don’t do it. Mystery novels stink when you read the back first, as do good thriller movies. If you read the last page of a Sherlock Holmes novel before you read the story, it’ll be lame. If you know Bruce Willis is dead, don’t watch the 6th Sense.

But textbooks are rarely building to a suspenseful twist at the end. I promise. I’ve read a lot. They don’t come with surprise endings. “And then, Abraham Lincoln dodged the bullet!” Yep, that’s never going to be in a textbook.

Want to try this strategy? Try reading your textbook chapter in this order:

Go to the questions at the end first . Read them, answer them to the best of your ability, and then begin your actual reading strategies. This will sort of “prime the engine” of retention.

Next, read the final summary of the chapter. This will give you a general background as to the Big Ideas in the chapter.

Third, look at the headings and subdivision of the chapter.

Fourth, read the chapter introduction.

From that point you can then work through the chapter from front to back. By taking this out-of-order strategy, you are focusing not on the chronological order, but rather connecting the ideas found in the chapter together. This is infinitely more important than reading things in the order they were written.

2. Read for Big Ideas

Textbooks are extremely thorough. You, while needing thoroughness, are not going to be able to absorb every tiny detail found in a chapter. You have to focus on what’s most important. See our posts on filtering for more info on this.

Textbooks are great because they explain those Big Ideas in context, but make sure you don’t get lost in the minutiae. Read for the Big Ideas first and foremost and you’ll be able to sift through the mountain of information available.

In textbooks, Big Ideas are easy to spot because they are often in bold print or section headings. Look for the complete sentence thought that summarizes and drives each subdivision and you’ll have identified the Big Ideas.

3. Read for Key Details

Big Ideas need support. Otherwise they’re just opinions. After you identify each Big Idea, make note of the supporting details that fill out and help the Big Idea make sense.

While this looks different in each subject, they should be relatively easy to pick out. Key people, places, and events often make up the key details in history books. Grammar rules are the important details frequently in grammar books. For languages, vocab are some of the most important key details of the chapter. Check your notes against the questions at the end of the chapter. If they reflect the same key details, you know you are barking up the right tree.

4. Read the book once but your notes multiple times

You should never have to read a chapter more than once (in theory). If you’ve done your reading well and taken notes as you read, you have a record of the thoughts being communicated.

Granted, it takes a while to adapt to this approach. Don’t be upset if you have a time of adjustment before being able to read a chapter only once.

But if you put in the work now to get used to reading a textbook more effectively, consider the time you’ll save in the long-run. We promise you’ll see the benefits quickly. For those of you who are already using this type of active textbook reading strategy, congratulations on making the honor without losing your social life. Well done.

How to Read Kindle Books on Multiple Devices

How to read several books at once

How to read several books at once

Can I read Kindle books on multiple devices? For instance, I bought an book on Amazon, can my family read my kindle books with another android or iOS device too? Can I share my Kindle books with friends?

If you also wonder to know if we can read kindle books on other devices, this post may be just what you are looking for.

With your own amazon account, reading kindle books on one kindle device is very easy. so here I will introduce you 2 ways to read kindle books on multiple devices.

Method 1: Install free kindle reading app

This way is suitable for you if you want to read kindle books on other tablets or smart phones. Such as, read kindle books on iPad, iPod, iPhone, Nexus 7, Nook tablet, Kobo Arc, etc.

And this is also a feasible solution to read kindle books on pc / mac, make sure you can read kindle books on computer.

Step1: Go to Amazon’s official site, and select the free kindle reading apps for your device.

How to read several books at once

Step 2: Register your Kindle app with amazon account.

Step 3: Buy and download books you like. After books downloaded, you can read them on your devices.

Method 2: Make your Kindle books convertible

If you want to read kindle books on other eReaders, such as Kobo glo, Sony eReader, Nook Simple Touch, etc, for you can’t install apps on e-ink readers, so we must make our books convertible and transferable to Kindle.

Here are steps for you about how to make kindle books convertible. At first let me tell you the reason why we have to convert kindle books.

  • Kindle books are with DRM protection
  • Kindle books are with Kindle format, not common epub or pdf

The DRM problem is one of the obstacles that prevent us reading kindle books on any other devices. And , as you know, non-Kindle devices, such as Kobo, Nook, iPad, and so on, their common ebook formats are EPUB and PDF. So we need a tool to help us strip drm from kindle and convert kindle to pdf or epub. You can search the Internet to find a good tool, here I write my suggestion Epubor Ultimate.

1 Install Epubor Ultimate Converter on your PC

2 Download Kindle books to computer via version 1.24 Kindle for PC/Mac .

3 Remove DRM from Kindle books

Launch Epubor Ultimate, your downloaded Kindle books are listed under Kindle tab in the left side-bar of Epubor Ultimate. Select the books you want to read on other devices, then drag them to the right area to remove DRM.

How to read several books at once

4 Convert Kindle books to other formats

Set the common epub or pdf as your output format please. So choose the right format and then click on the Convert button to start the conversion. When the conversion has been finished, you will see Succeeded to the right of the book title.

How to read several books at once

5 Transfer converted Kindle books to other devices for reading

Click on the Folder icon at the bottom right corner of the software, you will get all the converted books from the pop-up window. All you need to do is to transfer them to your devices with USB cable.

As your books are DRM free, you can transfer them to any tablet, eReaders, computers, share them with anybody.

Nothing is more exciting than this, right?

Further reading

More detailed guide about reading kindle books on more devices. Prefer to this list below.

Suppose we have a folder containing multiple data.csv files, each containing the same number of variables but each from different times. Is there a way in R to import them all simultaneously rather than having to import them all individually?

My problem is that I have around 2000 data files to import and having to import them individually just by using the code:

is not very efficient.

15 Answers 15

You can now choose to sort by Trending, which boosts votes that have happened recently, helping to surface more up-to-date answers.

Trending is based off of the highest score sort and falls back to it if no posts are trending.

Something like the following should result in each data frame as a separate element in a single list:

This assumes that you have those CSVs in a single directory–your current working directory–and that all of them have the lower-case extension .csv .

If you then want to combine those data frames into a single data frame, see the solutions in other answers using things like do.call(rbind. ) , dplyr::bind_rows() or data.table::rbindlist() .

If you really want each data frame in a separate object, even though that’s often inadvisable, you could do the following with assign :

Or, without assign , and to demonstrate (1) how the file name can be cleaned up and (2) show how to use list2env , you can try the following:

But again, it’s often better to leave them in a single list.

How to read several books at once

How to read several books at once

A speedy and succinct tidyverse solution: (more than twice as fast as Base R’s read.csv )

and data.table‘s fread() can even cut those load times by half again. (for 1/4 the Base R times)

The stringsAsFactors = FALSE argument keeps the dataframe factor free, (and as marbel points out, is the default setting for fread )

If the typecasting is being cheeky, you can force all the columns to be as characters with the col_types argument.

If you are wanting to dip into subdirectories to construct your list of files to eventually bind, then be sure to include the path name, as well as register the files with their full names in your list. This will allow the binding work to go on outside of the current directory. (Thinking of the full pathnames as operating like passports to allow movement back across directory ‘borders’.)

As Hadley describes here (about halfway down):

map_df(x, f) is effectively the same as do.call(“rbind”, lapply(x, f)) .

Bonus Featureadding filenames to the records per Niks feature request in comments below:
* Add original filename to each record.

Code explained: make a function to append the filename to each record during the initial reading of the tables. Then use that function instead of the simple read_csv() function.

(The typecasting and subdirectory handling approaches can also be handled inside the read_plus() function in the same manner as illustrated in the second and third variants suggested above.)

Middling Use Case

How to read several books at once

Larger Use Case

How to read several books at once

Variety of Use Cases

Rows: file counts (1000, 100, 10)
Columns: final dataframe size (5MB, 50MB, 500MB)
(click on image to view original size) How to read several books at once

The base R results are better for the smallest use cases where the overhead of bringing the C libraries of purrr and dplyr to bear outweigh the performance gains that are observed when performing larger scale processing tasks.

if you want to run your own tests you may find this bash script helpful.

bash what_you_name_this_script.sh “fileName_you_want_copied” 100 will create 100 copies of your file sequentially numbered (after the initial 8 characters of the filename and an underscore).

Attributions and Appreciations

With special thanks to:

  • Tyler Rinker and Akrun for demonstrating microbenchmark.
  • Jake Kaupp for introducing me to map_df() here.
  • David McLaughlin for helpful feedback on improving the visualizations and discussing/confirming the performance inversions observed in the small file, small dataframe analysis results.
  • marbel for pointing out the default behavior for fread() . (I need to study up on data.table .)

How to read several books at once

Here are some options to convert the .csv files into one data.frame using R base and some of the available packages for reading files in R.

This is slower than the options below.

Edit: – A few more extra choices using data.table and readr

A fread() version, which is a function of the data.table package. This is by far the fastest option in R.

Using readr, which is another package for reading csv files. It’s slower than fread , faster than base R but has different functionalities.

With many files and many cores, fread xargs cat (described below) is about 50x faster than the fastest solution in the top 3 answers.

Time to read 121401 csvs into a single data.table. Each time is an average of three runs then rounded. Each csv has 3 columns, one header row, and, on average, 4.510 rows. Machine is a GCP VM with 96 cores.

The top three answers by @A5C1D2H2I1M1N2O1R2T1, @leerssej, and @marbel and are all essentially the same: apply fread (or read.delim) to each file, then rbind/rbindlist the resulting data.tables. For small datasets, I usually use the rbindlist(lapply(list.files(“*.csv”),fread)) form. For medium-sized datasets, I use parallel’s mclapply instead of lapply, which is much faster if you have many cores.

This is better than other R-internal alternatives, but not the best for a large number of small csvs when speed matters. In that case, it can be much faster to first use cat to first concatenate all the csvs into one csv, as in @Spacedman’s answer. I’ll add some detail on how to do this from within R:

However, what if each csv has a header?

And what if you have so many files that the *.csv shell glob fails?

And what if all files have a header AND there are too many files?

And what if the resulting concatenated csv is too big for system memory? (e.g., /dev/shm out of space error)

Finally, what if you don’t want all .csv in a directory, but rather a specific set of files? (Also, they all have headers.) (This is my use case.)

and this is about the same speed as plain fread xargs cat 🙂

Note: for data.table pre-v1.11.6 (19 Sep 2018), omit the cmd= from fread(cmd= .

To sum up, if you’re interested in speed, and have many files and many cores, fread xargs cat is about 50x faster than the fastest solution in the top 3 answers.

Update: here is a function I wrote to easily apply the fastest solution. I use it in production in several situations, but you should test it thoroughly with your own data before trusting it.

Update 2: here is a more complicated version of the fread_many function for cases where you want the resulting data.table to include a column for the inpath of each csv. In this case, one must also explicitly specify the csv separator with the sep argument.

Caveat: all of my solutions that concatenate the csvs before reading them assumes they all have the same separator. If not all of your csvs use the same delimiter, instead use rbindlist lapply fread, rbindlist mclapply fread, or fread xargs cat in batches, where all csvs in a batch use the same separator.

How to read several books at once

Several years ago I was enrolled in a neurolinguistic programming course. The creator of the course said something that has had a profound impact on how I consume information.

Most people think they’re going to listen to something one time and change. But the problem is that the subconscious mind doesn’t work that way. There are so many things competing for the attention of your subconscious mind. It’s only when you listen to something over and over that it manages to cut through the noise and your subconscious realizes “this is important.”

In my mind, this applies to books, courses, seminars and just about anything else you consume in an effort to change your behavior.

  • Many of the books on my shelf I’ve read more than once.
  • There are some that I crack open on a regular basis to serve as inspiration for my daily writing session.
  • And of course, there are those very special books that as Darius Foroux says you should read once a year.

So let’s look at some of the hidden benefits.

While the best possible way to remember what you read is to write about it, revisiting it is another powerful way to remember it. The goal, of course, isn’t to mindlessly read something over and over. Use a system like Ryan Holiday’s notecard system or the index system that Cal Newport talks about in this blog post.

Anytime I return to a book or program of some sort, I catch things that I didn’t the first time. I find new pages to dog ear, new quotes that catch my attention, and as a result, I have new thoughts and ideas of my own. You’ll be amazed at how much you didn’t catch the first time you read a book or listened to something. You might have missed the one sentence or one moment that would have caused the change in behavior that you’re seeking.

“If you read it and hear it, you’re much more likely to take action on it.” — Zig Ziglar

For many of my books, I end up listening to the audiobook and also buying the physical book.

For example, I originally listened to the audiobook of Broadcasting Happiness. I found the ideas so valuable, that I bought the physical book. I’m also planning on doing the same with Peak by Anders Ericsson. It also doesn’t hurt that I’ve been fortunate enough to interview both authors.

Seth Godin said the following about audiobooks in a post on his blog

There’s no doubt that a well-read recording of a novel can make a long car ride pass much more quickly. We’re eager to find out what happens next, and sometimes, it’s even worth sitting in the driveway just to find out……I’m more interested, though, in non-fiction audio, particularly the kind you listen to ten or fifteen or a hundred times in a row……One listen isn’t going to do you any good, but if you make it a habit, you might be surprised.

If a message is drilled into your head over and over again, you’re much more likely to take action on it.

If you’ve ever been to a conference, a weekend seminar or some sort of motivational event, you’ve experienced the “high” that comes from such a thing. You sit there on the last day convinced that you’re going to completely change your life, write that book you’ve been thinking about, start that company, etc, etc. A day or two after you return home, the buzz wears off, and it’s back to the grind.

One of the reasons for this is your environment. The environment at these events is designed to elicit such a response. Fortunately, it’s possible to design your environment for optimal performance and creativity once you’re aware of the 9 environments that make up your life.

When you revisit something over and over again, the impact of that information actually lasts. It’s not the temporary buzz you get from motivation and inspiration.

In his program How to Stay Motivated, Zig Ziglar tells the story of people who say to him “you know Zig whenever I get down I put in one of your tapes and it gives me a little boost.” Zig says “why on earth would you wait until you get down? That’s like constantly waiting to fill your tank until it’s almost empty.”

The point that I believe Zig was trying to make is that when we revisit something, a book or program, the impact of that program lasts.

There are a number of different ways to go about this:

  • You can return to a book and just read a passage from it. Some of my favorite books to do this with are The War of Art, The Obstacle is the Way, Bird by Bird, and Unthink. I actually have one shelf dedicated to books that I refer to for daily inspiration.
  • Read a book all the way through a second time. I recently read Jhumpa Lahiri’s The Namesake after almost 8 years. As somebody who is now and author, and somebody who has grown up as an Indian American male (the major theme of the story) I had a much deeper appreciation for it.
  • Play an audiobook on repeat until you’re sick of it. While that might sound torturous, when you realize just how much more powerful the ideas have become, you won’t dread it so much.

Don’t underestimate the value of reading any book more than once. A second read contains so many hidden benefits, far beyond what I mentioned above. You may not know what those benefits will be, but that doesn’t mean it’s not worth giving any book a second read.

If doing the best work of your life is important to you, you’ll love my free guide: “ Optimizing Productivity & Creativity. ”

The tactics I’ve packed into this guide allowed me to write over 1 million words in the last 2 years. What could it do for your life’s work? Don’t miss it.

Like the article? Click the 💚 below to share with others on Medium.

Lori Kaufman is a technology expert with 25 years of experience. She’s been a senior technical writer, worked as a programmer, and has even run her own multi-location business. Read more.

How to read several books at once

When laying out your document in Word, it’s sometimes helpful to view multiple pages on the screen at one time, especially if you have a large monitor. Seeing multiple pages at a time allows you to get a sense of how your overall layout looks.

NOTE: We used Word 2013 to illustrate this feature.

You must be in “Print Layout” view to view multiple pages at one time. If you are not in “Print Layout” view, or if you’re not sure which layout is currently active, click the “View” tab.

How to read several books at once

In the “Views” section of the “View” tab, click “Print Layout.”

How to read several books at once

To view multiple pages at one time, keep the “View” tab active. Place your cursor in the text of the first page you want to view in the multiple-page view. In the “Zoom” section, click “Multiple Pages.”

How to read several books at once

By default, two pages are shown side-by-side. The pages are shrunk so the full pages can be viewed. This is why viewing multiple pages at once is good for reviewing your layout, but not necessarily for reading your document.

How to read several books at once

To return to viewing one page at a time, click “One Page” in the “Zoom” section of the “View” tab.

How to read several books at once

The page in which you had placed the cursor displays, but smaller than 100 percent. To zoom back to regular size, click “100%” in the “Zoom” section.

How to read several books at once

You can view more than two pages at a time. To do so, click the “Zoom” button in the “Zoom” section of the “View” tab.

How to read several books at once

The “Zoom” dialog box displays. You can zoom to various percentages (including a custom percent), widths, or the whole page. To view multiple pages, select the “Many pages” radio button. Then, click the monitor button below the radio button and select the number of pages you want to view at a time from the drop-down menu.

How to read several books at once

The “Preview” shows how the pages will be displayed. Click “OK” to accept the change and close the “Zoom” dialog box.

How to read several books at once

The view changes to show the number of pages at once that you specified.

How to read several books at once

Remember to go back to viewing one page at a time, click the “One Page” button. To go back to viewing your text at 100 percent, click the “100%” button.

Account Information

Share with Your Friends

How to work with multiple documents in Microsoft Word

How to work with multiple documents in Microsoft Word

Learn tricks for opening, viewing, and managing multiple documents in Microsoft Word.

How to read several books at once
Image: iStockphoto/rvolkan

If you ever need to view and work with multiple Microsoft Word documents at the same time, Word has several features to help you with that maneuver. You can easily switch back and forth between each document. You can view two or more open documents horizontally or side by side. You can work with each document separately. You can also enable synchronous scrolling to scroll through two documents together. Let’s check out some of these helpful Word features.

I’m using Word from an Office 365 subscription, but the following information will apply to the past few versions of Word as well.

To start, launch Word and open two documents–maximize both of them. You can switch from one document to another a couple of ways. In either document, click the View tab, click the Select Document icon, and then select the document you wish to see (Figure A).

Figure A

How to read several books at once

Alternatively, you can press Alt-Tab to view and cycle through all your open windows and then choose the document you want to view (Figure B).

Figure B

How to read several books at once

Maybe you want to see both documents on the screen at the same time. In either document, make sure you’re at the View Ribbon and click the icon for Arrange All. The two documents open horizontally with one window on top of the other. You can work with each document independently. Your toolbars and Ribbons remain the same size, so all the necessary commands and features are accessible (Figure C).

Figure C

How to read several books at once

If you’d rather work with the two documents vertically, click the icon on the View Ribbon for View Side By Side. You can do this in either window. The two windows are rearranged vertically (Figure D).

Figure D

How to read several books at once

Perhaps you want to work with one document full-screen but then return to the two-window layout. Maximize the document you want to see full-screen. When you’re done, click the Restore icon to bring back the previous two-window layout.

By default, each document window works independently, so you can scroll in one document without affecting the other. You can also scroll through both documents at the same time. To do this, make sure both documents are in side-by-side mode. In the View Ribbon, click the icon for Synchronous Scrolling (it’s the second small icon to the right of Arrange All)–you’ll need to activate this icon in both windows. Now try scrolling in one document–the other document should scroll in tandem. To turn off synchronous scrolling, click the same icon in one or both windows.

Maybe you want to throw another document or two into the mix. On a practical level, you don’t want to juggle too many documents at the same time because then the process becomes unwieldy. But perhaps you just want to open a third and even a fourth document to find information or copy and paste content from one document to another.

First, return to the original horizontal layout by clicking off the View Side By Side icon (it’s the first small icon above the icon for Synchronous Scrolling). Then, go to File and Open. Click Browse to get to a File Manager window. If you want to open more than one additional document, simply hold down the Ctrl key and then select the documents you need.

After the new documents appear, go back to the View Ribbon. You can use the Switch Window icon or the Alt-Tab keystroke to jump from one document to another. If you want to see them all on the screen, click Arrange All. The layout you get will depend on how many documents you’re viewing. But viewing four or more documents at the same time may be awkward, as you can’t see much of each document. You can try Side By Side View and choosing which documents you want to view side-by-side. You can also zoom in and out and change the view in each document in other ways. Here’s one tip that can help: Collapse the ribbon in each window–click the Collapse The Ribbon icon all the way at the right of the Ribbon. That will free up more space for you to see more of each document (Figure E).

Figure E

How to read several books at once

How to read several books at once

Microsoft Weekly Newsletter

Be your company’s Microsoft insider by reading these Windows and Office tips, tricks, and cheat sheets.

How to save spaghetti squash seeds

By: Teo Spengler

09 November, 2018

How to save spaghetti squash seeds

Spaghetti squash is an extremely popular winter squash variety. Many gardeners and their families love this unique veggie that, when cooked, can be scraped into pasta-like filaments, perfect with any type of sauce. Like all winter squash, these must be allowed to ripen on the vine, and this is doubly important if you are planning to harvest the seeds for future planting. But saving spaghetti squash seeds for planting isn’t always a good idea, depending on the type of squash you are growing.

How to Plant Spaghetti Squash

Spaghetti squash is called a winter squash, but if you sow the seeds in winter, you won’t see much action. Winter squash are given the name because it stores well, lasting into the winter, not because it likes a snowy garden plot. Start the seeds for spaghetti squash in spring after the last frost. You can start growing spaghetti squash indoors even earlier if you like, then transplant the seedlings to the garden when the soil is warmed to 60 degrees Fahrenheit.

  • Spaghetti squash is an extremely popular winter squash variety.
  • Many gardeners and their families love this unique veggie that, when cooked, can be scraped into pasta-like filaments, perfect with any type of sauce.

These are big, spreading vine plants, so it isn’t practical to consider growing spaghetti squash in containers unless they are large. Usually, spaghetti squash is planted in hills some 3 feet apart, or every 4 feet in rows 7 feet apart. Plant three seeds for every one plant you want, then thin to the strongest seedling. The squash will require a consistently damp soil to germinate. Once the plants have settled in, give them an inch of water a week to keep those vines growing and producing the pretty squash blossoms.

When Is Spaghetti Squash Ripe?

You can eat spaghetti squash only if it ripens on the vine. Unlike many vegetables, winter squash won’t mature after it’s been harvested. Allowing the squash to ripen fully is also important if you want to use the seeds to sow the following spring. You aren’t likely to have success planting spaghetti squash seeds if the veggies are immature when harvested. So, that makes it important to know when to harvest spaghetti squash.

  • These are big, spreading vine plants, so it isn’t practical to consider growing spaghetti squash in containers unless they are large.
  • You aren’t likely to have success planting spaghetti squash seeds if the veggies are immature when harvested.

Generally, spaghetti squash requires 100 days from planting through harvest. The variety you select may take longer or shorter, so consult the packaging. This figure will give you a rough approximation of when your squash will be ripe. Other ways to determine ripeness are color and firmness. Ripe spaghetti squash is a dull gold, so don’t pick squash that is gray or green. Another good test is to try to get a fingernail into the skin. If you can, it’s not ripe yet.

  • Generally, spaghetti squash requires 100 days from planting through harvest.
  • Ripe spaghetti squash is a dull gold, so don’t pick squash that is gray or green.

Saving Squash Seeds for Next Year

Saving seeds from your own garden makes sense, since they are free. But note that the seeds of a plant are the result of pollination and not the exact replica of the parent plant. So as long as you plant classic or heirloom spaghetti squash, and the blossoms are pollinated by another spaghetti squash blossom in the same patch, you are set. However, if you grew your squash from hybrid seeds, you cannot count on the seeds producing squash similar to the parent.

Harvesting the Seeds

Since spaghetti squash seeds grow inside the squash, they are covered with pulp and must be cleaned before you store them. Scoop out seeds from a fully ripe squash into a bucket. Add about the same amount of warm water as seeds and pulp and mix it around. Then let the mixture sit in a cool spot for up to a week, swirling it daily, until the viable seeds settle at the bottom of the bucket. Pour out the floating seeds and pulp.

  • Saving seeds from your own garden makes sense, since they are free.
  • However, if you grew your squash from hybrid seeds, you cannot count on the seeds producing squash similar to the parent.

The seeds at the bottom are viable, so rinse them well, then allow them to dry thoroughly on paper towels or a screen. Once they are dry, move them into a glass jar, then keep them in a dark, cool spot until you are ready to plant in spring.

When it comes to squash you will find them in two major types, the s paghetti squash seed, and summer squash. Spaghetti squash is also known as winter squash. Although they are more or less the same in structure and taste, saving them for the next harvest seems slightly different. Winter squash comes with hard skin, whereas summer squash has thin skin. The flesh or gel-type substance on winter squash requires longer cooking time, and they are fully developed within the season, but summer squash needs extra time for development.

Here in this guide, we will be dealing with spaghetti squash seeds and how to save them for next season planting . Let’s dive into it!

How to Save Spaghetti Squash Seeds

Saving spaghetti squash seeds is easy even if you are a beginner and haven’t done it before. Due to its size, you don’t need to waste extra calories while cleaning and removing them from the fruit. But before jumping into the process, you need to follow these instructions.

Choose a Mature Squash

It would be best to make sure that the fruit you have picked should be mature enough for saving purposes. This is because a mature seed will let the plant grow at its full capacity. If you are not satisfied with the available fruits, you can let them in the garden for a couple of weeks until they are fully grown.

If you are a beginner and don’t know which fruit is right for saving, you can follow a few tips to identify. The first step is to knock on it, and if you get a good solid sound, you are pretty much good to go. Secondly, you can scratch its surface if it seems hard or kind of woody, and then it’s good for saving. Thirdly if it comes off with a gentle touch, then it means you have got that particular squash for saving.

Make Sure to Get an Open Pollinate

Open-pollinated or heirloom is a type that ensures you the same characteristics such as colour, size, and taste. Whereas cross-pollinated or hybrid seeds pick the best characteristics of plants involved in the process. To ensure a high-quality harvest, you should always choose the open-pollinated. It is not just recommended, but it allows you to have the dream harvest just like the parent seed. Winter squash is generally cross-pollinated . They contain the properties of both male and female flowers. If you want to grow an open-pollination, you should try saving the flower using a plastic cover to prevent them from cross-pollination.

Choose the Accessories

When it comes to the cutting process, you need a few accessories ready for the process. A sharp knife that makes it easier to cut the squash. The other thing you want to have is envelopes made with brown paper to store the seeds. But you can use anything to save the seeds that keeps them dry and saves them from the sunlight.

Step by Step Process to Save Squash Seeds

Get into our step-by-step guide that will help you store winter squash seeds without any expert help.

Ø Step #1: Cut Squash Carefully

Winter squash comes with hard skin, so be careful while cutting! Always begin with poles and cut them off from both ends. Once you are done with the ends, now move to the middle part. Cut the middle part from both sides and make sure to not damage the seeds with a knife.

Ø Step #2 Remove Seeds from Open Cavity

After dividing them into parts, you can see the open cavity area where seeds are joined inside. You can use a spoon to remove seeds from their fruit part. Scrape all of them on any tray or cutting board.

Ø Step #3 Separate Seeds from the Pulp

How to save spaghetti squash seeds

The third step that is also very important to uphold is separating seeds from their pulp. If the seeds have so much pulp, you can put them inside the water bowl for a quick separation process, and if the pulp is pretty much dry, you can also separate them using your hands. Squash seeds are quite easy to work with due to their bigger size.

Ø Step #4 Spread Seeds on Paper

Once you have done removing all the pulp attached to the seeds, the next step is spreading seeds on paper. Hence, you can also use a paper towel and tray, but paper can be economic if you don’t have any suitable option. Using paper will soak the remaining moisture in the seeds. Scatter seeds all over the paper and let them dry out for 7 to 10 days. Keep them where there is no direct sunlight.

Ø Step #5 Store Them in Envelopes

Keep observing seeds once they are soaked. Now you can store those using envelopes. You can store them in small envelopes. When it comes to storing, always choose a dry but cool place. When it comes to winter squash, you can store it for up to six years.

Frequently Asked Questions

How to preserve squash seed for planting?

After squeezing seeds from squash soak them on paper. Once they are dry enough to store in a jar or envelope store them precisely. Label your container or jar with a variety and date. You can keep the container in a freezer for up to two days as it will kill all the residual pets. Now you can store them in any cool and dry space.

How do we get seeds out of spaghetti squash?

However, it demands precise work in order to get seeds perfectly. We have broken down the process into the following steps.

  • Cut squash carefully into two pieces.
  • Remove seeds from the open cavity with the help of a spoon.
  • Separate seeds from the pulp.
  • Spread seeds on paper and store them once they are dry enough.

How to save squash seed for replanting?

First of all, you need to eliminate tissue and strings from seeds. Fix the seeds by spreading them out in solitary on a paper towel to dry. Store them this way in a spot that is dry and out of direct daylight. When completely dried, in 3 to 7 days, store them in an envelope in a cool dry spot with the remainder of your seed supply.

Can I plant store squash?

Yes, there are two types of seeds and one can be easily bought from any store near your house. But preparing seeds at home will allow you to uphold the healthy fruits of your choice.

Wrap Up

Spaghetti squash is plentiful in Vitamin A, iron, niacin, potassium and is an incredible wellspring of fiber. It tends to be heated or bubbled, making it an extraordinary side dish or even primary entrée for dinner. What makes it perfect is that you can develop it yourself to acquire a chemical-free food supply, liberated from destructive synthetic substances and more flavorful. We hope that our quick and easy spaghetti squash seed storing guide will help you grow winter squash independently.

How to save spaghetti squash seeds

Have you ever grown a blue-ribbon Hubbard squash or another variety, but the next year the crop was less than stellar? Perhaps you have wondered if by collecting seeds from the prized squash, you might get another crop just as amazing. What is the best method then for squash seed collection and saving those premium squash seeds?

Squash Seed Harvesting

More and more often of late, plants and seeds available at the local home and garden center are comprised of hybrid varieties that have been engineered to retain selected characteristics. This hybridization, unfortunately, breeds out the plants’ innate ability to adapt to inhospitable or challenging conditions. Luckily, there is a resurgence to save some of our heirloom fruit and vegetable varietals.

Saving squash seeds for future propagation can be a bit of a challenge since some squash will cross pollinate, resulting in something less than appetizing. There are four families of squash, and the families don’t cross pollinate, but members within the family will. Hence, it is necessary to recognize what family the squash belongs to and then only plant members of one of the remaining three nearby. Otherwise, you will have to hand pollinate squash to maintain a “true” squash for squash seed collection.

The first of the four major families of squash is Cucurbit maxima which include:

  • Buttercup
  • Banana
  • Golden Delicious
  • Atlantic Giant
  • Hubbard
  • Turban

Cucurbita mixta counts amongst its members:

  • Crooknecks
  • Cushaws
  • Tennessee Sweet Potato squash

Butternut and Butterbush fall into the Cucurbita moshata family. Lastly, are all members of Cucurbita pepo and include:

Again, back to hybrid varieties, often the seed is sterile or doesn’t reproduce true to the parent plant, so don’t try squash seed harvesting from these plants. Don’t attempt to save any seeds from plants that are afflicted with disease, as this will likely pass to the next year’s generation. Select the healthiest, most bountiful, flavorful fruit to harvest seeds from. Harvest seeds for saving from mature fruit towards the end of the growing season.

Storing Squash Seeds

When seeds are ripe, they generally change color from white to cream or light brown, darkening to a dark brown. Since squash is a fleshy fruit, the seeds need to be separated from the pulp. Scoop the seed mass out of the fruit and place it in a bucket with a bit of water. Allow this mix to ferment for two to four days, which will kill off any viruses and separate the good seeds from the bad.

Good seeds will sink to the bottom of the mix, while bad seeds and pulp float. After the fermentation period has completed, simply pour off the bad seeds and pulp. Spread the good seeds on a screen or paper towel to dry. Allow them to dry completely or they will mildew.

Once the seeds are absolutely dry, store them in a glass jar or envelope. Clearly label the container with the variety of squash and the date. Place the container in the freezer for two days to kill off any residual pests and then store in a cool, dry area; the refrigerator is ideal. Be aware that seed viability decreases as time passes, so use the seed within three years.

Winter squash has harder skin than summer squash does; its flesh is firmer too and so needs to cook longer. The seeds are fully developed when the squash is ready to eat, whereas summer squash needs to be left on the vine well past the eating stage to complete the development of its seed.

Understanding Pollination

Before you try to save seeds from your winter squash, it’s important to understand the way they become pollinated.

Winter squashes, along with all cucurbits, are cross-pollinated. This means that they have both distinct male and distinct female flowers. They rely on insects to pollinate them. Because of this, it is easy for two varieties of winter squash to cross-pollinate and produce seeds that will not grow out true to their parent. Winter squash may cross-pollinate with summer squash, zucchini, and pumpkins as they are all the same species. However, don’t worry about this if you are just interested in getting winter squash for eating. Any crossing will not affect that year’s fruit, only the seeds.

If you want to save your own winter squash seeds, only grow one type of squash in the garden. Another possibility is to hand-pollinate your flowers to prevent cross-pollination but this can be quite complicated. In order to do this, growers put small bags over the flowers and manually do the work of pollinating to keep the seeds pure. We recommend that only advanced seed savers take on this complex project.

Saving The Seeds

Harvest the winter squash as you would normally for winter storage. Allow the squash to sit for after-ripening for at least 3-6 weeks up to several months.

Wash the seeds to remove any flesh and strings. Cure the seeds by laying them out in a single layer on a paper towel to dry. Store them this way in a place that is dry and out of direct sunlight. Once thoroughly dried, in 3 to 7 days, store them in an envelope in a cool dry place with the rest of your seed supply. Dried winter squash seeds will store up to 6 years if kept in cool, dry conditions.

Pumpkin seeds in particular are delicious as a snack. Check out this recipe for Spiced Pumpkin Seeds.

Related Articles

Few garden projects are simpler than saving squash seeds. Squash (Cucurbita spp.) includes winter varieties that store well and have firm flesh and summer varieties that are very tender and must be eaten soon after harvest. All are grown as annuals and need to be started from seed each year. The seeds are simple to extract from both winter and summer squash varieties, and they will stay viable for at least three to four years, according to South Dakota State University Extension. However, they must be stored under the right conditions to preserve their viability long term.

Gathering Squash Seeds

Both winter and summer squash varieties form and ripen during the summer months, although they are harvested at different times. Summer squash is typically picked throughout the summer months as it reaches a mature size but before the rinds harden. Winter squash is harvested at the end of the season when it is fully ripened and no hint of green remains on the skin. Avoid squash with obvious defects or signs of disease or rot because the seeds may not sprout.

To save seeds from a summer squash, leave one or two fruits on the vine until the rind hardens and then pick them. A winter squash should be picked when ripe and stored until it softens. Remove the seeds by cutting open the squash with a sharp knife and using a spoon to scoop out the pulp, which will contain the oblong seeds. Squash seeds all look the same, so be sure to work with only one type of squash at a time so the seeds aren’t accidentally mixed together.

Cleaning and Saving Squash Seeds

Squash seeds need a brief period of fermentation to remove the slippery, slimy coating on the outside of the seeds. Place the seeds in a bowl and cover them with water. Soak the seeds in water for two to four days, stirring them occasionally. All the dead or nonviable seeds will float to the top of the water. Scoop them out and discard them. Repeat the fermentation process until the seeds are clean and they don’t feel slippery when handled.

Spread the seeds on newspaper, paper towels or coffee filters to dry. Leave them in a cool, dry and airy place until they dry out completely. According to South Dakota State University Extension, the seeds will snap cleanly in half when they are fully dried. Store the seeds in paper envelopes or plastic bags inside the refrigerator. Be sure to label the seeds with the cultivated varieties, types of squash and the year they were harvested.

Starting Squash Seeds

Start winter and summer squash seeds outdoors directly in the garden once all frost danger has passed, and the soil has warmed to at least 70 degrees Fahrenheit. Sow the seeds in a well-tilled bed at a depth of 1/2 to 1 inch. Space summer squash seeds 4 inches apart in rows 4 to 5 feet apart and winter squash seeds 6 to 12 inches apart in rows spaced 4 to 8 feet apart, per Cornell University. Keep the soil moist while the seeds germinate. Squash seedlings will emerge in five to 10 days but usually take less than a week at 70 degrees Fahrenheit.

Once the seedlings produce a mature set of leaves, thin winter squash seeds to one every 18 to 36 inches. Cornell University recommends thinning summer squash seedlings to one every 12 to 24 inches since they are considerably smaller plants than winter squash. Keep the seedlings well watered during the growing season and watch for the first fruits in midsummer.

How to save spaghetti squash seeds

How to save spaghetti squash seeds

How to save spaghetti squash seeds

Spaghetti squash (Cucurbita pepo) produces large seeds that store for up to six years, provided they’re properly collected and prepared. Named for its cooked flesh, which resembles spaghetti, spaghetti squash is also called spaghetti gourd, vegetable spaghetti, Manchurian squash and squaghetti. The fruits are smooth-skinned, about 10 inches long, 5 inches in diameter and weigh about 2 pounds.
How to save spaghetti squash seeds
Harvesting Fruit
Spaghetti squash fruits are ready for harvest about 70 to 80 days after sowing. Only seeds from ripe fruit are likely to sprout when sown later. Harvest spaghetti squash when the vine stem withers and the fruit skin is tough.

If you aren’t sure whether a spaghetti squash fruit is ripe, push a thumbnail into the skin. If the fruit is ready for harvesting, your nail won’t pierce the skin.

Separating Seed
Seed from spaghetti squash fruits must be separated from the pulp and soaked in water. Healthy seeds sink to the bottom in a few days.

Cut a spaghetti squash in half lengthways with a sharp knife.

Scoop the seeds from the center with a spoon.

Put the seeds in a jar or bucket with an equal amount of water.

Stir the seed and water mixture once a day for two to four days. A mold may form, but this is harmless.

When some seeds sink to the bottom and some float, pour off the water, pulp, floating seeds and mold.

Spread the remaining seeds on a paper towel or screen to dry.
How to save spaghetti squash seeds
Storing Seed
Drying and freezing spaghetti squash seeds helps keep them fresh and free of pests and diseases. When the seeds are completely dry, place them in paper envelopes or glass jars. Write the name of the seed type and the date on the envelopes or jar labels, and put them in a freezer. After two days, transfer the seeds in their storage containers to a refrigerator. Plant the seeds within three years.

When purchasing organic vegetables from the grocery store, try saving seeds from your favorite winter squash varieties for next year’s harvest.

How to save spaghetti squash seeds

Fall is the time of year when the winter squash varieties come into their own. Delicata, Butternut, Hubbard, Acorn, and Spaghetti squash all make a terrific addition to your nightly soup and winter storage pantry.

Fewer people grow winter squash than summer squash, which is a shame because they are rich in vitamins and have a fuller taste than summer squash. For those that like to produce their own food, they also keep a long time in storage. Once you open them up for cooking, take the time to save seeds for the next planting. You’ll have fresh squash return every year.

Note: While any squash seed can be saved, you have the best luck using organic fruit. This will ensure that the seeds are not hybrid and will come back true to the parent plant.

What is an open-pollinated variety? An open-pollinated variety is produced using the traditional method of crossing and then selection of offspring in several generations. After a few years (usually after 5 – 6 generations) of systematic selection the variety becomes stable and the characteristics hardly ever segregate out again. This means that all the offspring are virtually the same, which is why the term ‘open-pollinated’ is used.

So plants that come from the seeds of open-pollinated varieties with virtually the same characteristics as the variety purchased. [source]

How to save winter squash seed

1. Halve the fruit and remove the seed pulp. Choose a fully ripe specimen that has thick skin and is in good shape.

How to save spaghetti squash seeds

2. Squeeze the pulp, including the seeds, into a glass jar or plastic container. I used a canning jar for my seeds.

3. Add enough water to cover the seeds and pulp and cap the jar tightly. Shake well, allowing the pulp to break up.

How to save spaghetti squash seeds

4. Set the jar on the counter and let the mixture ferment several days at room temperature, shaking occasionally. Don’t forget to loosen the cap to allow air to escape during the fermenting process and tighten it again before shaking (experience speaking!). Just to warn you, this mixture will smell very bad.

After a few days, you’ll see that some of the seeds float and some of them sink. This is good. The seeds that are viable for planting will settle out to the bottom of the jar and the seeds that did not mature properly will float at the top of the water.

How to save spaghetti squash seeds

5. After 4 days, spoon out the pulp and seeds that are floating on the top (these are the non-viable seeds)

6. Pour the remaining seeds into a small strainer and rinse them well with cool water. Spread these good, viable seeds in a single layer on a paper towel to dry.

Save Winter Squash Seed

Store your dry winter squash seed in a paper envelope in a cool, dry place until you are ready to plant in late spring. This technique works well for saving any seed that is surrounded by a fleshy pulp – melons, pumpkins, cucumber, tomato, and squash.

If are not able to plant the seeds in the next year or two, you may be unsure that the seeds are going to take. It’s frustrating to put effort into planting seeds that don’t sprout. Use one of these 3 reliable seed germination tests to make sure they will sprout.

How to save spaghetti squash seeds

Filed Under: garden Tagged With: seed saving

How to save spaghetti squash seeds

Related Articles

  • How to Dry Giant Pumpkin Seeds for Germination
  • At What Temperature Will Jalapeno Plants Die?
  • Germinating Quince Seeds
  • Can You Use Seeds From a Bell Pepper to Plant?
  • How to Harvest Strawberry Seeds

Saving the seeds from the fruits of your yellow summer squash (Cucurbita pepo) enables you to plant them and enjoy the taste of the fruits year after year. It also removes one excuse to spend money at a garden supply store. Not every vegetable lends itself to simple seed-saving, but saving squash seeds doesn’t take much effort. You might be surprised occasionally, however, because squash can cross-pollinate with its closely related plants and create seeds for plants you didn’t expect.

Planting Location

Plan ahead by planting your yellow squash far from all other members of the Cucurbita pepo species, including zucchini and certain pumpkins. Doing so will prevent your yellow squashes from cross-pollinating with non-yellow squashes and producing seeds that result in plants that have fruits exhibiting traits of both parent plants’ fruits. In open areas, Cucurbita pepo species’ plants pollinate other such plants up to 1/2 mile away. Trees, fences and buildings reduce the problem. So plant your yellow squash in a protected location separate from similar vegetables. Also, plant only one non-hybrid variety; varieties don’t always cross-pollinate well, and seeds from hybrids don’t produce plants true to the parent plants.

Harvest Time

Saving seeds from yellow squash fruits requires letting a few of the fruits ripen and remain on the plants. They should stay on the plants until their outer skins, or rinds, become so hard that you can’t make a dent in it with a fingernail. The fruits won’t be edible anymore. They are only good for seed harvesting when their rinds become that hard.

Collection and Preparation

Slicing open the hardened fruits reveals the seeds inside. Scoop out the seeds with as little of the fruits’ flesh as possible. Wash the seeds thoroughly with clean water, separating them from all attached flesh. Laying them in a single layer on paper towels or newspaper helps them dry, although drying completely may take a few days. When you squeeze a dry seed, it should feel hard and brittle. If it feels slightly spongy, it needs to dry a bit longer.

Lifespan and Storage

Squash seeds remain viable for up to six years when stored properly. They need a cool, dry storage place. Pour the seeds into airtight containers, such as jars to which you then secure their lids, and place the containers in a refrigerator or basement storage room. Using small containers is best; when you open a container of seeds, plant all the seeds that year because they might not remain viable until the following year.

Last updated: 03/23/21

A variety of squash types are available all year in most places, including the grocery store and weekend farmer’s markets. Since almost all the squash parts are edible, you can prepare various delicious recipes for your family and friends.

Winter squashes like acorn, butternut squash, and delicata squash have brightly colored flesh that is great as a salad or soup. Summer squash varieties such as crookneck and zucchini have white flesh and yellow or green skin.

They taste fantastic when roasted, grilled, or sauteed with olive oil and garlic, and other stir fry recipes.

Even the bright orange flowers from summer squashes are often served fried, oven-baked, added into a squash blossom soup, or other recipe inspirations. There is really a lot you can do with the different types of squash varieties.

The squash’s usefulness makes it more important to save squash seeds for storage for the next planting season.

Green thumb Gardener occasionally links to product and/or services offered by vendors to assist you with all your gardening needs. Some of these may be affiliate links, meaning we earn a small commission if items are purchased.

Want to Download a ​Garden Hack Guide​ for FREE

How to save spaghetti squash seeds

Enter your email below and we will send you a guide to help you SAVE money in your garden.

Squash Plant Growth Period

Growing squash plant in your garden is easier than you think. Summer and winter squashes usually grow during the summer months when the temperature reaches around 70 degrees Fahrenheit.

How Much Time Does it Take to Grow Squash?

Summer squash grows about 60 days after its seeds are planted. The most common variety is Zucchini which has thin and tender skin and is very productive.

Winter squash, on the other hand, grows longer from 60 to 110 days. They have thicker and more protective skin, making them more ideal for long-term storage than summer squash.

A pumpkin is an example of winter squash.

How to save spaghetti squash seeds

How to Plant Squash

The soil needs to be at least 60-70 degrees Fahrenheit before you can sow the squash seeds or set out seedlings. Squash seeds need a well-drained location, so they need to plant on elevated 12 inches mounds.

You must plant the summer or winter squash seeds at least 1/2 to 1 inch deep, 12 to inches apart, and in rows spaced 36 inches apart. Water the seeds regularly to keep the soil moist.

After a few weeks, male blossoms will appear and open, followed by female flowers.

Only female flowers can bear fruit but only after it’s properly pollinated. You can do hand pollination to pollinate squash flowers, especially if there are no pollinating insects in the garden.

You can do this by using a brush or cotton swab to get pollen from the male squash flower to the female flowers.

It would be best if you also watched for any signs of disease such as puckering of leaves, yellowing, and rotting of fruits. Remove the bad seeds and infected plants away from your garden. Do not place them in your compost pile.

Harvesting Squash Seeds

Since there are several species of Squash, harvesting time may vary from different summer and winter varieties.

Common varieties from Zucchini to Pumpkins will differ in development from when you pollinate the squash flowers until harvest time when they reach mature size.

Harvesting Summer Squash Varieties

Like the Zucchini and Yellow Squash, summer varieties should be harvested using a sharp knife or pruner, leaving at least one inch of stalk. It would be best if you harvested 2-3 times a week.

Tender summer squash has immature seeds and is suitable for eating. However, for seed harvesting, you can wait until you have a mature fruit with fully developed summer squash seeds before picking.

Harvesting Winter Squash Varieties

Winter varieties like pumpkins, acorn, butternut, and other winter squash species should be allowed to fully mature until their skin becomes extremely hard. But it is important to harvest them before the first frost even if the seed maturity is not complete.

You should expose the Squash to the sun for 5 to 7 days or in a cool, dry place for 5 to 6 months to dry and toughen their skins.

Its fleshy fruit pulp should be good for cooking, while its viable seeds can be kept for planting.

Steps to Save Squash Seeds

Common heirloom varieties are the best source of seeds since most plants and seeds available in stores are hybrid varieties that are not adapted to challenging situations and do not grow.

The fruits are usually left for at least 20 days past their maturity before their seeds are harvested. The waiting time will ensure seed viability.

Squash also cross-pollinate, so you have to grow only one type of Squash in your garden. Cross-pollination will affect the quality of your seeds, making them nonviable seeds to plant.

To keep the seed of Squash pure, you can place a bag over the flowers and do hand pollination.

Harvesting Squash Seeds

Make sure you choose mature heirloom variety fruits. Using a sharp knife, cut both ends of the Squash and cut the remaining part in half. Be careful not to cut the squash seeds.

Using your spoon or hand, scoop the seeds from the seed cavity and placed them on a paper towel or coffee filter.

You should be able to collect lots of seeds from the Squash. Select seeds and gently remove the extra flesh or pulp attached to the seeds. Remove underdeveloped seeds and retain the good ones that have a hard rind.

You can wash the seeds and just let them sit out on the paper towels for 7 to 10 days in a dry area and away from moisture.

How to save spaghetti squash seeds

Cleaning Squash Seeds

You can also directly put your harvested seed in a glass jar with a bit of water and leave them to ferment. The fermentation process will breakdown and remove the thick lining of the seed.

Drain and wash the seeds in water. Then remove the seeds for drying using a paper towel. Drying times may vary from 7 to 10 days.

Storing Squash Seeds

Ensure that the seeds are completely dry before storing them in a dry, cool, and dark location. You can place batches of seeds in small envelopes or a small mason jar container.

Make sure you label each container with the type of seeds and the date it was first stored.

How to save spaghetti squash seeds

Use these tips on how to grow spaghetti squash in your vegetable garden this summer. Gardening tips include everything from starting seeds to harvesting squash.

How to save spaghetti squash seeds

How to Grow Spaghetti Squash

Spaghetti Squash is a vegetable that even those that say they don’t like squash can usually get behind. It has a different texture than the others in the winter squash category. It can lend itself to everything from bakes to pasta dishes. Growing spaghetti squash is easy and fun to do in a home garden. Here are some tips for growing spaghetti squash.

How to Grow Spaghetti Squash from Seeds

Since the growing season of spaghetti squash is about 100 days, you may opt to grow them indoors. You can start seeds by doing so in 3-inch pots. This is best because it makes transplanting later, easier. Start by placing seeds about 1 inch deep and watering. Keep them in a sunny spot for best results in germination. You will want to keep the soil warm, too, so a heating pad may be a great tool to use.

If you want to start them outdoors, you will need to make sure your soil is prepared and you have a good sunny spot to do so. Plant seeds about 24 inches apart from each other and about 1 inch deep.

For more information on starting spaghetti squash seeds, check out this post.

How to Transplant Spaghetti Squash

Spaghetti Squash should be transplanted when it is warm enough outside that the soil is at least 75 degrees.

A good way to grow spaghetti squash is with mound planting. This can be done when you prepare your soil.

Add some compost to your soil and make sure to take your seedlings through a hardening off process before transplanting.

For detailed information on transplanting spaghetti squash, including hardening off and mound planting, see this post.

Spaghetti Squash Pests and Care

One of the biggest pests you may deal with on your spaghetti squash is the squash beetle. They are large enough to see. They are flat and lay their eggs on the leaves of your plants. You can save yourself some trouble later if you look for these eggs and scrape them off gently with a butter knife.

Aphids are also a concern. You can rid your plants of these with a quick spritz from the hose. Additionally, one can intentionally cultivate a ladybug population in order to keep the aphids under control.

Additional pests can include cucumber beetles, which will leave behind wilted leaves, spider mites, which will pale the leaves, whiteflies, which will leave behind mold or yellow leaves, and melon aphids, which can leave behind twisted, curly leaves. These are best dealt with by means of spraying or hand-picking.

How to Harvest Spaghetti Squash

Harvesting spaghetti squash is all about timing. You want to pick them off when they are bright yellow in color. If they are still pale, they are not ready.

To harvest, and not hurt the plant,(should you have more on it waiting to ripen) you should use very sharp pruning shears to cut it off the vine. Do not twist or try to pull off.

If it is getting late in the season and you worry about frost, you can pick less than ripe squash and ripen it in a nice warm sunny spot off the vine.

How to save spaghetti squash seeds

Seed saving is back in vogue and with good reason. Saving seeds saves money and also allows the grower to replicate the previous year’s successes. What about saving seeds from say, grocery store squash? Planting seeds from store bought squash sounds like a good, cost effective way to obtain seeds, but can you really grow squash from the store? Read on to find out if you can plant store squash and if so, whether grocery store squash seeds will produce.

Can You Plant Store Squash?

The answer to “can you plant store squash?” is all in the semantics. You can plant any type of seed your little heart desires, but the real question is, “can you grow squash from the store?” Planting seeds from grocery bought squash is one thing, growing them is quite another.

Can You Grow Squash from the Store?

Seeds from grocery store squash can indeed be planted but will they germinate and produce? It depends on the type of squash you want to plant.

The first major problem would be cross pollinating. This is less of a problem with winter squash, such as butternuts, than with summer squash and gourds. Seeds from butternut, Hubbard, Turks Turban and the like are all members of C. maxima family and, although they may interbreed, the resulting squash would still be a good winter squash.

Another problem with growing grocery store squash seeds is that they are likely to be hybrids. Hybrids are created out of two different varieties of the same species, in this case, squash. They are bred to get the best qualities from the two separate varieties, then they’re married together to create a super squash with superior characteristics.

If you try planting seeds from grocery store squash, the end result may be a crop that doesn’t in the last resemble the original squash. Combine that with some rampant cross polluting and who knows what you will get.

Should you Grow Grocery Store Squash Seeds?

Perhaps the better question is phrased above: should you grow squash from store bought squash? It all really comes down to how adventurous you are and how much space you have for potential failure.

If you have plenty of space for an experiment and don’t mind if the resulting plant produces fruit that is subpar, then go for it! Gardening is often as much about experimenting as anything else and each garden test whether success or failure teaches us something.

Before planting, allow the squash to ripen until it’s almost but not quite rotting. Then be sure to separate the flesh from the seeds and then allow them to dry before planting. Select the largest, most mature seeds to plant.

Last year I challenged myself to try a new vegetable every week. It was a fun way to motivate myself to eat more vegetables and to add variety to my diet.

Peas and carrots can get boring very quickly, especially when I try to practice what I preach as a naturopath and eat 5 handfuls of vegetables every day.

One of the new vegetables I tried during this challenge was spaghetti squash and it’s now a favourite in our home.

It’s easy to cook, adds an element of fun, brightens up any meal and tastes delicious!

What is Spaghetti Squash?

How to save spaghetti squash seeds

Spaghetti squash is a winter vegetable related to pumpkin, squash and zucchini. There are a few different varieties but what we see most commonly here at the famers markets in Adelaide is a bright yellow pumpkin looking fruit.

After a spaghetti squash is cooked and fluffed with a fork, the flesh becomes spaghetti like, hence the name.


Is Spaghetti Squash Good For You?

Spaghetti squash is packed with vitamins and minerals, high in fibre and low calories.

The nutrients include vitamin C, manganese, vitamin B6 and antioxidants. These are important for immune health, preventing cell damage, energy production and hormone health.

Fibre is vital for our gut health, as it feeds the cells of our colon as well as the beneficial gut bacteria that make up our microbiome. It also helps to bulk up our stools and keep our guts moving which is beneficial for constipation, diarrhoea and IBS. You can read more about why fibre is so important for health here.

Low calories means spaghetti squash can be beneficial in weight loss and used as an alternative to heavier carbohydrates like grains and pastas. It’s also gluten free which makes it a great option for those with food intolerances, allergies or sensitivities.

How Do You Cook Spaghetti Squash?

How to save spaghetti squash seeds

Pre heat oven to 200C. Line a baking tray with baking paper. Cut spaghetti squash in half. Scoop out seeds (keep aside so you can grow in your garden). Drizzle flesh of the squash with olive oil and sprinkle with salt and pepper.

Place the squash flesh side down onto prepare baking sheet. Poke holes in skin of spaghetti squash with a fork. Roast for 30 to 40 minutes or until lightly browned.

How to save spaghetti squash seeds

Flip the squash flesh side up and allow to cool.

Scrap out the flesh with a fork. As you scrap the fresh will turn into spaghetti like strands.

How Do You Save Spaghetti Squash Seeds?

How to save spaghetti squash seeds

Scoop out spaghetti squash seeds.

Add seeds to a jar of water, mix around and allow to sit for 2-3 days.
Scoop off the seeds and pulp floating on top – these won’t germinate

Collect the seeds sitting on the bottom of the jar, place on paper towel and allow to completely dry. This might take a few days on a windowsill.

Store in a envelope or glass jar and plant out in full sun in spring.

I’ve had success growing spaghetti squash in my small raised garden bed. I got my seeds from The Diggers Club and have saved seeds to try next spring.

Meatless Monday Spaghetti Squash Lentil Bolognese – Vegan & Gluten free.

How to save spaghetti squash seeds

Ingredients:
1 Spaghetti squash
1 Onion diced
1 Garlic clover diced
1 celery stalks diced
1 Cup lentils soaked over night and rinsed (or a tin of lentils for faster cooking)
1 Carrot grated
1 Tin tomatoes
1 Cup vegetable stock or water
1 Handful of baby spinach
Salt
Pepper
Olive oil

Method:
Pre heat oven to 200 C. Line a baking tray with baking paper.

Cut spaghetti squash in half. Scoop out seeds (keep aside so you can grow in your garden). Drizzle flesh of the squash with olive oil and sprinkle with salt and pepper. Place the squash flesh side down onto prepare baking sheet. Poke holes in skin of spaghetti squash with a fork. Roast for 30 to 40 minutes or until lightly browned.

Meanwhile make the lentil bolognese.

Heat olive oil in a fry pan over medium heat. Add onions and cook until start to go translucent. Add garlics and celery and cook until fragrant. About 2 mins. Add carrots and cook for 1 minute. Mix in lentils and cook for 1 minute. Add tomatoes and vegetable stock or water. Make sure lentils are covered. Bring to a boil and then reduce to simmer and allow lentils to cook until soft. about 20 minutes. Add baby spinach right at the end and allow to wilt down.

Once the spaghetti squash is done flip the squash flesh side up and allow to cool. Scrap out the flesh with a fork. As you scrap the fresh will turn into spaghetti like strands.

To serve you can either leave the spaghetti squash in the skin and add lentils to the top or use squash as an alternative to pasta by adding it to a bowl and top with lentil mix.

On This Page

  • Planting
  • Soil
  • Watering
  • Harvesting
  • Maintenance

If you love growing vegetables in your home garden, then you might want to consider planting spaghetti squash this year. “Not only is spaghetti squash low in starch, its flesh peels apart in strings like spaghetti, making it a healthy alternative to traditional pasta when cooked,” says Matt Mattus, author of Mastering the Art of Vegetable Gardening ($25.99, amazon.com).

Unlike summer squashes, such as zucchini, which are harvested when the seeds are still immature and the skin is tender, horticulturist Amy Enfield of Bonnie Plants says spaghetti squash is a winter squash that should be harvested when the seeds are fully mature (and the skin has hardened). “Spaghetti squash has a long grow time, often needing 90 to 100 days after planting to mature,” she says. “The fruit should be pale, golden yellow when harvested.”

To ensure your crop has the best chance at growing to maturity, we asked a few gardening experts to share their top tips on when to plant spaghetti squash, grow the fruit, and harvest it.

When and Where to Plant Spaghetti Squash Plants

According to Enfield, spaghetti squash should be planted in the spring and grown in a spot that receives full sun, or at least six hours of sunlight a day. “Make sure you give it plenty of room to grow, or alternatively, add a sturdy trellis and encourage the vines to grow up rather than out,” she says.

Venelin Dimitrov, a product manager at Burpee, suggests planting your spaghetti squash at the edge of your garden. “Because the vines are aggressive, this will allow the vines to grow outwards,” he says.

The Best Soil for Growing Spaghetti Squash

Spaghetti squash requires well-drained, nutrient-rich soil, which is why Enfield recommends working at least 3 inches of organic matter, like compost, into the soil before planting. “If you have heavy or poorly draining soil, it’s a good idea to grow spaghetti squash in a raised bed,” she says.

When it comes time to plant the seeds, Christopher Landercasper, the director of farming operations for Sonoma’s Best Hospitality Group, suggests making small mounds of dirt and planting the seeds about 1 inch deep into the top of each mound. “Having the mound makes it easier to find the plant for watering later in the season when the vines become a jungle,” he says.

How to Water Spaghetti Squash Plants

Since moisture is key when growing spaghetti squash, Enfield recommends providing them with an inch or two of water every week. “Whether from rain or watering, the soil should be kept consistently moist throughout the growing season,” she says. “To help reduce evaporation from the soil while the plants are young, lightly mulch around the plant.” To avoid any mildew problems, Mattus suggests watering your spaghetti squash in the morning, or with an automated drip system, so the foliage can dry off before the sun sets.

When and How to Harvest Spaghetti Squash

If you’re harvesting your spaghetti squash before the seeds are mature and before the skin is hard, Enfield says you’re doing it wrong. “Spaghetti squash fruit will change from white to pale yellow, to golden yellow when it is ready to harvest, and are normally 8 to 9 inches long and 4 to 5 inches in diameter,” she explains. “They should be allowed to ripen as fully as possible on the vine, but must be harvested before the first fall frost, because ‘frost-kissed’ winter squash does not store well.”

How to Maintain and Prune Your Spaghetti Squash Plant

As long as your spaghetti squash is given plenty of room to vine, Enfield says pruning shouldn’t be necessary. “However, after the peak of summer, once fruit is present, you can remove any remaining blossoms from the vines,” she says. “This will encourage the plant to direct all of its energy into the growing fruit.”

We all have a favorite squash recipe, but spaghetti squash is unique with its stringy pasta-like texture. This versatile squash makes the perfect low carb, gluten-free spaghetti dish. It has a fairly long shelf life, and canning spaghetti squash keeps your pantry well-stocked for years.

This winter squash is like vegetable spaghetti in a bowl, and it is packed full of nutrients, including beta-carotene, fiber, and folate.

Its fun texture and mild, neutral flavor make it the perfect side dish for just about any entree. Top it with your favorite marinara sauce, and you have a healthier version of pasta.

Safe food preservation is vital to storing fruits and veggies long term, especially if you are homesteading. While there are countless canning recipes, not all foods are safe for the process.

Can you can spaghetti squash? While the answer is yes, it’s not common practice, and there is a right and wrong way to do it.

How to save spaghetti squash seeds(belchonock/123rf.com)

  1. Preparing and Canning Spaghetti Squash
    • Things to Know about Canned Spaghetti Squash
    • Preparing Spaghetti Squash for Canning
    • How to Can Spaghetti Squash in a Pressure Canner
    • Making Puree after Canning Spaghetti Squash
    • Can You Pickle Spaghetti Squash?
    • Using Canned Spaghetti Squash to Make Cheesy Bread
    • Making Spaghetti with Leftover Spaghetti Squash

Preparing and Canning Spaghetti Squash

Home canning is a rewarding experience, but it’s vital to know which foods are safe for preserving in a water bath canner or pressure cooker to prevent food spoilage and botulism.

Here is how to prepare your spaghetti squash for canning and ways to make canned squash, whether you grow spaghetti squash plants yourself or find a great deal at the supermarket.

Things to Know about Canned Spaghetti Squash

While you can keep spaghetti squash fresh in the fridge for a few days, you may want to consider longer preservation options for a lot of squash.

Most winter and summer squash types are suitable for canning as a form of food storage. How long does cooked butternut squash last after canning? Canned food often lasts several years.

However, there are a few things to understand about canned spaghetti squash before going through the canning process.

Canned Squash

While you may store fresh spaghetti squash in the fridge for a couple of days, the best way to preserve squash by canning is to use a pressure canner or pressure cooker. Water bath canning spaghetti squash is not advisable since this is a low-acid food.

While it’s common to can yellow squash and butternut squash, spaghetti squash is usually not canned, but it is possible.

The USDA has a guide for canning food, and they describe how certain foods are not acidic enough to prevent bacterial growth during a hot water bath process. Pressure canning using the right processing times is necessary for safe food storage.

Preparing Spaghetti Squash for Canning

Before learning how to can spaghetti squash or canning yellow squash, it’s a good idea to know how to prepare this veggie for canning. It’s common to cut veggies into pieces and pack them into jars, but spaghetti squash requires a bit more preparation.

Growing spaghetti squash in containers is a great way to get your daily dose of this nutrient-rich vegetable.

Not only does growing spaghetti squash in containers save space, but it also makes the growing process easy and fun.

Follow these ten tips to make sure your spaghetti squash plants thrive in their new home.

What is Spaghetti Squash?

If you’re looking for an easy way to get your daily dose of nutrients, growing spaghetti squash in containers is a great option.

Spaghetti squash is a vine plant that grows long and needs plenty of space, so it’s a good choice for container gardening.

In this article, we will give you ten tips to make sure your plants thrive in their new home.

Growing spaghetti squash in containers has a number of benefits.

For one, growing spaghetti squash in containers is a great way to save space. Spaghetti squash is a prolific plant, and in most cases, you will only need one or two plants to get a good yield.

Another benefit of growing spaghetti squash in containers is that it’s easy and fun. Spaghetti squash is a very forgiving plant, and they are tolerant of a variety of growing conditions.

The best benefit of growing spaghetti squash in containers is that you can control the growing environment, which leads to better tasting squash.

10 Tips for Growing Spaghetti Squash in Containers

If you’re interested in growing spaghetti squash in containers, read on for 10 tips to help your plants thrive:

1. Choose a large container like a 10-gallon bucket (or larger) to grow your spaghetti squash plants in.

2. Make sure the container has plenty of drainage holes so the soil can dry out between waterings.

3. Plant the seeds in well-drained potting soil and make sure to cover them lightly with soil. I like to space my seeds at least 12 inches apart.

4. Water the plants regularly, making sure to keep the soil moist but not wet. You will have to water more frequently when it is grown in a pot. So check your soil moisture every other day.

5. Fertilize the plants with a balanced fertilizer once a week.

6. Make sure the plants have plenty of space to grow; they will need at least 4 feet of space to grow properly. It is best to have them grow vertically. Check out my article, Secrets to Growing Spaghetti Squash Vertically: Find Out Now! This also shows you trellis options for your spaghetti squash.

7. If you live in a warm climate, keep the plants in a sunny spot; if you live in a cooler climate, find a spot that gets some sun but is also protected from the wind.

8. Mulch around your plants. I like to use black plastic along with organic mulches like leaves, straw, grass clippings, etc.

9. Provide a trellis or place the pot where your spaghetti squash can grow on and spread.

10. Protect seedlings with an upside-down paper cup that has the hole cut out or use tulle. I use cups and tulle to cover my young seedlings to protect them from birds and other critters.

Now that you know how to grow spaghetti squash in containers, it’s time to get planting and take care of your squash plants.

Container Spaghetti Squash Maintenance

Spaghetti squash plants are easy to take care of and will thrive in a variety of growing conditions.

Here are a few tips on how to take care of your spaghetti squash plants:

-Make sure the plants have plenty of space to grow; they will need at least 4 feet of space to grow properly.

-Water the plants regularly, making sure to keep the soil moist but not wet.

-Fertilize the plants with a balanced fertilizer once a week.

-If you live in a warm climate, keep the plants in a sunny spot; if you live in a cooler climate, find a spot that gets some sun but is also protected from the wind.

-Harvest the squash when they are about 8-10 inches long.

-Store the squash in a cool, dry place.

With these tips in mind, growing spaghetti squash in containers is easy and fun.

If you are enjoying this article, you must check out

Gardening Made Easy: Growing Squash in Containers! How to save spaghetti squash seeds

Best Spaghetti Squash Varieties for Containers

Growing your own nutrient-rich spaghetti squash

Spaghetti squash is a nutrient-rich vegetable that’s a great source of fiber, potassium, vitamin A and C.

It also contains antioxidants that can help protect your body against disease.

If you’re looking for a healthy and delicious way to add more vegetables to your diet, spaghetti squash is a perfect choice.

Try roasting it with some olive oil and herbs for a quick and easy meal, or serve it as part of a larger dish like lasagna or ratatouille.

With so many ways to enjoy this versatile vegetable, there’s no reason not to add spaghetti squash to your menu today!

FAQ Frequently Asked Questions about Growing Spaghetti Squash in Containers

What container size is needed to grow spaghetti squash?

Spaghetti squash grows best in a deep pot. They need a depth of 18 inches and 1 foot in diameter for 1 plant. I like to use a 10-gallon bucket to grow spaghetti squash in a container. You can use plastic totes as well. Just make sure that your containers have good drainage holes and nutrient-rich soil.

What month to plant spaghetti squash?

Spaghetti squash seeds must be planted after your last frost date. For most gardeners, that is in April. Plant seeds when the weather is warm and no chance of frost. I like to plant my seeds a week after my last frost date to make sure that the weather is nice and warm.

Products that you may need to grow Spaghetti Squash in Containers

Conclusion

Now that you know how to grow spaghetti squash in containers, it’s time to get planting and take care of your squash plants.

With these tips in mind, growing spaghetti squash in containers is easy and fun.

There are a number of benefits to growing spaghetti squash in containers, including the fact that you can control the growing environment, which leads to better tasting squash.

How to save spaghetti squash seeds

The Spruce / Leah Maroney

Nutrition Facts (per serving)
46 Calories
0g Fat
11g Carbs
1g Protein

×

Nutrition Facts
Servings: 16
Amount per serving
Calories 46
% Daily Value*
Total Fat 0g 1%
Saturated Fat 0g 1%
Cholesterol 0mg 0%
Sodium 31mg 1%
Total Carbohydrate 11g 4%
Dietary Fiber 2g 9%
Total Sugars 4g
Protein 1g
Vitamin C 6mg 30%
Calcium 36mg 3%
Iron 1mg 3%
Potassium 199mg 4%
*The % Daily Value (DV) tells you how much a nutrient in a food serving contributes to a daily diet. 2,000 calories a day is used for general nutrition advice.

Spaghetti squash is a great low-carb, high-fiber vegetable. It’s a popular replacement for carb-heavy ingredients like pasta or rice and can be eaten as a side or added to a variety of recipes. Although it doesn’t take much time to cook spaghetti squash, it’s nice to have some ready in the freezer because you simply have to reheat it. Take advantage of squash season with this simple method, and you can enjoy its sweet flavor any time of the year.

If you want foods to taste good when they come out of the freezer, it’s essential to start with good-quality food. For spaghetti squash, that means selecting vegetables that feel firm and heavy for the size. Skip any that have soft spots, cracks, or damaged parts. If you have both blemished and unblemished squash, cook the blemished veggie right away and freeze the latter.

Cucurbita pepo

  • How to save spaghetti squash seeds

  • How to save spaghetti squash seeds
  • How to save spaghetti squash seeds
  • How to save spaghetti squash seeds
  • HOW TO GROW
  • FAST FACTS
  • REVIEWS

HOW TO GROW

Sowing: Gardeners with short growing seasons may want to start their vegetable spaghetti squash seeds for sale indoors a month before the last expected frost. Since squashes do not take well to transplanting, peat pots are the best option. Plant two seeds per pot, later clipping off the weaker seedling. Harden the seedlings by exposing them to the weather for several hours at a time during the week before transplanting. About a week after the last frost or when the soil temperature reaches an average of 60 degrees F, plant the seedlings in very rich soil 8-10′ apart in rows 10-12′ apart. Another option is to plant the seedlings in hills of two, 8-10′ apart. To direct sow, plant the seeds a week after frost 1/2″ deep, 3-4′ apart and thin to 8-10′ apart. For companion planting benefits, plant squashes along with corn but avoid planting them with potatoes.

Growing: Since squash seedlings do not tolerate frost, provide protective coverings if cold weather threatens. Keep the soil moist at all times, but avoid getting the leaves wet as this can cause diseases such as rot or mildew. When the vines begin to develop, a layer of mulch will help conserve moisture and control weeds; mulch also will keep the squashes clean and protect them from too much soil contact. By midsummer, pinch off all the blooms to concentrate the plant’s energy on the developing squashes.

Harvesting: Squashes can be harvested as soon as the stem begins to dry and the skin becomes too hard to pierce with a fingernail. Because cold weather can damage squashes, they should be harvested before the first frost. Cut the stem with a sharp knife, leaving a 2-3″ length.” Do not carry the squash by the stem; if the stem breaks off, use it as soon as possible, since this causes the squash to deteriorate quickly. Cure the squashes in the sun or a dry location until the stem shrivels; do not wash the ones you intend to store.

Seed Saving: By the time the squash has been cured, the seeds are mature. Cut the squash open, remove the pulp and seeds, and rinse off the pulp. Put the mixture in a bowl of water to remove the remaining pulp; the good seeds will sink. Remove the good seeds and spread them out to dry for 2-3 weeks, stirring them at times to make sure they dry completely. Store the seeds in a cool, dry place for up to 4 years.

FAST FACTS

Latin Name: Cucurbita pepo

Type: Open Pollinated, Heirloom, Warm Season

USDA Zones: 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12

Seeds per Ounce: 300

Planting Method: Direct Sow

Sunlight: Full Sun

Height: 24 Inches

Color: Green

Squash

The Mylar resealable packaging is a real plus. Seems seem to be large and dry but I don’t think they germinated yet. I hope they do

Grew true

Like all of Everwilde’s products, this squash germinated and fruited as listed. Love the long, beautiful vines with yellow flowers.

Love packaging. High hopes for seeds.

Squash

Love your seeds. Good growth from them.

Spaghetti Winter Squash

The seeds I sowed all came up beautifully. I was impressed by the seed packet, the Gold Vault re-sealable package will keep my seeds fresh longer. I don’t intend on planting all seeds in this package this year. The instructions are well designed on the back of the package. This is my first seed purchase from Everwilde, but will not be my last. Much impressed.

Squash seeds

I received the seeds with out any problems.

spaghetti squash seeds

The seeds were fairly priced shipped fast and great packaging. looking forward to great things with these

DESCRIPTION

IN-STOCK ORDERS SHIP THE NEXT BUSINESS DAY VIA THE US POST OFFICE.

Spaghetti with fewer calories! This unique variety, Vegetable Spaghetti, produces a 12″ long squash that yields delicious spaghetti-like strands of creamy light-yellow flesh when cooked. Bake for 40 to 50 minutes, then cut open and scrape out strands. This variety matures in about 100 days, and can store up to 6 months!

Originally from China, vegetable spaghetti squash seeds were introduced to Japan in 1921 by a Chinese agricultural research company. The Burpee Seed Company introduced this variety of spaghetti squash seeds for sale to the United States in 1936; most World War II Victory Gardens contained this squash, more commonly known as spaghetti squash.

HOW TO GROW

Sowing: Gardeners with short growing seasons may want to start their vegetable spaghetti squash seeds for sale indoors a month before the last expected frost. Since squashes do not take well to transplanting, peat pots are the best option. Plant two seeds per pot, later clipping off the weaker seedling. Harden the seedlings by exposing them to the weather for several hours at a time during the week before transplanting. About a week after the last frost or when the soil temperature reaches an average of 60 degrees F, plant the seedlings in very rich soil 8-10′ apart in rows 10-12′ apart. Another option is to plant the seedlings in hills of two, 8-10′ apart. To direct sow, plant the seeds a week after frost 1/2″ deep, 3-4′ apart and thin to 8-10′ apart. For companion planting benefits, plant squashes along with corn but avoid planting them with potatoes.

Growing: Since squash seedlings do not tolerate frost, provide protective coverings if cold weather threatens. Keep the soil moist at all times, but avoid getting the leaves wet as this can cause diseases such as rot or mildew. When the vines begin to develop, a layer of mulch will help conserve moisture and control weeds; mulch also will keep the squashes clean and protect them from too much soil contact. By midsummer, pinch off all the blooms to concentrate the plant’s energy on the developing squashes.

Harvesting: Squashes can be harvested as soon as the stem begins to dry and the skin becomes too hard to pierce with a fingernail. Because cold weather can damage squashes, they should be harvested before the first frost. Cut the stem with a sharp knife, leaving a 2-3″ length.” Do not carry the squash by the stem; if the stem breaks off, use it as soon as possible, since this causes the squash to deteriorate quickly. Cure the squashes in the sun or a dry location until the stem shrivels; do not wash the ones you intend to store.

Seed Saving: By the time the squash has been cured, the seeds are mature. Cut the squash open, remove the pulp and seeds, and rinse off the pulp. Put the mixture in a bowl of water to remove the remaining pulp; the good seeds will sink. Remove the good seeds and spread them out to dry for 2-3 weeks, stirring them at times to make sure they dry completely. Store the seeds in a cool, dry place for up to 4 years.

FAST FACTS

Latin Name: Cucurbita pepo

Type: Open Pollinated, Heirloom, Warm Season

USDA Zones: 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12

Seeds per Ounce: 300

Planting Method: Direct Sow

How To Grow, Store, and Cook Spaghetti Squash

Spaghetti squash (Cucurbita pepo) is also known as vegetable spaghetti. This a nice alternative to pasta for people who can’t eat wheat or want to reduce their reliance on the grocery store. This squash has fibrous flesh that resembles spaghetti noodles when cooked. It is easy to grow, store, and cook, so why not add this healthy vegetable to your garden and kitchen?

This post contains affiliate links or advertisements. You won’t pay extra but I may earn a small commission if you purchase products through those links. Thank you for supporting The Self Sufficient HomeAcre!

How to Grow Spaghetti Squash

Planting and growing vegetable spaghetti is pretty easy. Just pay a bit of attention to these details and you’ll have 2 or 3 squash per vine in the autumn.

Planting Instructions

Sow seeds directly in the garden after all danger of frost, or start 2 or 3 weeks early under lights indoors.

Thin seedlings to 1 or 2 plants per hill.

Mulch squash with clean hay or straw to keep weeds from sprouting and hold moisture in the soil.

Growing Conditions

Full Sun – 8 hours of sun a day, or more.

Compost – Plant in well-drained soil rich in organic matter and mulch with well-rotted manure or compost.

Water – Provide 1 – 2″ of water a week unless there is adequate rain.

Pests – Squash vine borer, red mites, squash bugs.

Time to Harvest – Approximately 90 days to maturity.

As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases.

How to Harvest and Store Spaghetti Squash

Harvest – Pick squash when the skin turns golden yellow (some varieties are orange when ripe) and hardens so that your fingernail does not penetrate. Harvest before heavy frost, as it may shorten storage life. Cut the stem about 1″ or 2″ from the fruit.

Carry – Don’t pick up squash by the stem. This may break the stem off and allow bacteria and mold in to rot the interior.

Clean & Cure – Wash squash with a light bleach solution, dry, and store in a well-ventilated spot to cure. Ideal conditions for curing squash are warm (80 degrees Fahrenheit), dry, and out of direct sunlight. Cure for 1.5 to 2 weeks to harden the skin and increase storage life.

Store – Place in a cool (50 – 60 degrees Fahrenheit), dry (60 – 70% humidity), dark area. Do not store squash on a cement floor. Instead, place them on wooden slats or shelves and do not pile on top of each other.

Check – Watch for mold or rotten squash in your storage area. Use damaged squash up quickly so they don’t go bad. Clean the neighboring squash with a mild bleach solution to prevent the spread of mold and bacteria.

Storage Life – When properly stored, spaghetti squash may last up to three or four months.

How to Cook Spaghetti Squash

Prepare – Cut in half lengthwise and scoop out seeds. Add 1/2″ of water to the pan to prevent sticking or grease pan with vegetable oil. Lay squash cut side down.

Bake – 350 degrees Fahrenheit until tender.

Serve – The fibrous flesh of spaghetti squash can be teased into strands with a fork. Dish some onto your plate and top with marinara or Alfredo sauce, butter, and garlic, or other sauce as desired.

Baked Spaghetti Squash with Sauce & Cheese

  • 1/2 baked spaghetti squash (medium size)
  • 3 cups spaghetti sauce
  • 1 cup shredded mozzarella cheese
  • 2 or 3 tablespoons parmesan cheese
  • 1 tablespoon Italian seasoning

Use a fork to pull spaghetti ‘noodles’ from squash skin, leave flesh in the skin for serving ‘dish’. Place squash in baking dish.

Top squash with spaghetti sauce, cheese, and seasoning.

Bake at 350 degrees Fahrenheit until hot in center and cheese is melted. Serve hot in the squash skin.

Spaghetti Squash with Garlic

Makes 1 serving.

  • 1 cup baked spaghetti squash ‘noodles’
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil or butter
  • 1 small clove garlic, minced
  • Salt, pepper, and Italian seasoning to taste
  • Grated parmesan or asiago cheese

Saute garlic in olive oil over medium-high heat. Add ‘noodles’ and stir fry until heated through. Place cooked spaghetti squash on a plate, top with salt, pepper, Italian seasoning, and grated cheese. Serve hot.

Note: This recipe may be increased to serve as many people as you like. Just multiply all ingredients by the number of people you wish to serve.

Vegetable ‘Spaghetti’

Spaghetti squash is a versatile vegetable that requires little care. You may grow a few vines each year for a wheat and gluten-free alternative to pasta. Each vine produces 2 or 3 oval squash that will keep up to 4 months in proper storage conditions.

Try your hand at growing and cooking these tasty squash on your own homestead!

As an Amazon affiliate, I earn a commission on qualifying purchases.

How to save spaghetti squash seeds

Grow a Garden for Your Chickens!

Sign up for Honest-to-Goodness Homesteading Information and get my free eBook ‘”Grow a Garden for Your Chickens!”

Unsubscribe any time if you aren’t 100% satisfied.

Thank you!

You have successfully joined our subscriber list.

About The Author

Lisa Lombardo

Lisa Lombardo is the author of The Beginner’s Guide to Backyard Homesteading and Organic Gardening for Beginners, and she writes about gardening and homesteading for this website and The New Homesteader’s Almanac. Lisa grew up on a farm and has continued learning about horticulture, animal husbandry, and home food preservation ever since. She has earned an Associate of Applied Science in Horticulture and a Bachelor of Fine Arts. The author lives outside of Chicago with her husband, son, 2 dogs, 1 cat, and a variety of poultry.

7 Comments

This is on my list to add to the garden next year – thanks for sharing on Homestead Blog Hop!

Thanks for sharing this with us on the Homestead Blog Hop!

I have a new love for spaghetti squash, and I want to try and grow some in 2020! Thanks for the helpful information 🙂

Hi Cherelle!
Thanks for hosting the party! There are always so many great posts shared. 🙂
Happy to share this info…hope it helps with your future squash

Mine are piled in the fridge right now.
Thanks for this corrective information!

Lol…happy to share, Michele!

I never would have tried spaghetti squash on my own (don’t like spaghetti, and don’t like squash), but I love tortellini and ravioli with a yummy marinara sauce with bruschetta on top. So my old roommate made me spaghetti squash with my favorite toppings and I loved it! I’m going to go put it on my shopping list now. Great article!

Hi Janine!
I’m so glad you tried spaghetti squash and like it! It is very easy to cook and I’m sure you’ll enjoy trying some new recipes with it. 🙂

Thanks for stopping by…I’m so glad you found this helpful!

BY: Courtney PUBLISHED: Nov 15, 2018 2 Comments UPDATED ON: Nov 26, 2018

  • Facebook
  • Twitter
  • Pinterest

Make Roasted Spaghetti Squash Seeds, just like you would make pumpkin seeds or other squash seeds! Squash seeds are edible and delicious!

How to save spaghetti squash seeds

When you make your own roasted squash seeds at home you can control the flavors and we just love making our mixes. You can make them sweet, salty, or even spicy. Go ahead, get creative in the kitchen and have fun!

can you eat spaghetti squash seeds?

How to save spaghetti squash seeds

All squash seeds are edible and filled with nutrients. Instead of throwing them away, eat them! The first thing you think when you cut spaghetti squash open is, can you roast spaghetti squash seeds? Yes, you can roast them! Just like you would roast pumpkin seeds and snack on those, spaghetti squash seeds are edible and make a great snack. You can roast spaghetti squash seeds, butternut squash seeds, even acorn squash seeds.

how do I get the seeds from the spaghetti squash?

Cut the spaghetti squash open and then with a spoon scoop out the guts and seeds and place into a bowl.

Separate the seeds from the guts by hand. Thoroughly rinse the seeds and make sure there is no squash left on them before roasting.

how to roast spaghetti squash seeds

How to save spaghetti squash seeds

  • Preheat your oven
  • Separate the seeds from the guts of the squash.
  • Thoroughly rinse the seeds with a strainer or sieve and remove any bits of squash.
  • Transfer the cleaned seeds to a towel and pat them until fully dry.
  • In a small bowl, toss the seeds with olive oil and salt.
  • Place the seeds on a baking sheet and roast the seeds for 15 to 20 minutes.
  • Store roasted spaghetti squash seeds in an airtight container or freeze.

How to save spaghetti squash seedsHow to save spaghetti squash seeds

how to use roasted spaghetti squash seeds:

We love using them in salads, soups, yogurts, and even with a fall flavored vegan banana ice cream.

How to save spaghetti squash seeds

Now, whenever you cook winter squash we hope that you’ll bake those seeds! You can bake most seeds in just 15-20 minutes and they’re a great nutritious snack.

Learn How to Cook Spaghetti Squash using your oven, Instant Pot and microwave. Spaghetti squash is the perfect gluten-free alternative for pasta.

How to save spaghetti squash seeds Spaghetti Squash Tutorial

I’ve heard of replacing spaghetti with spaghetti squash since I started eating gluten free. As someone who never enjoyed pasta, I never tried making spaghetti squash. A while ago, I was walking around the grocery store and saw spaghetti squash. It’s a small yellow squash. I never noticed it before but then again I never notice a lot of things. The spaghetti squash was relatively cheap so I made an impulse purchase.

When I cut the spaghetti squash open I panicked. Where is the “spaghetti” in this squash? I thought I bought the wrong squash and then I thought if this is the correct squash this is not going to be enough to feed me. I thought the little bit of stringy strands holding the seeds must be the “spaghetti” in the squash. I went ahead and baked it. I was still not convinced until I stabbed the squash with a fork. This is the neat part. The whole inside of the spaghetti squash once baked, turns stringy. It’s like a magic trick! When a fork or spoon is inserted you can easily pull out the spaghetti. I found it rather fun to scoop it all out.

This is what a spaghetti squash looks like. It is oval in shape and is quite small. I stored my squash in the fridge until I needed it. You can find it in the squash/potatoes/and other root vegetable area of your grocery store.

Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F.

Grease a baking sheet.

Cut the squash in half. This is tricky so take your time.

How to save spaghetti squash seeds Spaghetti Squash Tutorial

Place the cut squash face side down.

Bake for 30 minutes. The squash is done when a knife can be inserted through the skin.

How to save spaghetti squash seeds Spaghetti Squash Tutorial

Let the squash cool.

How to save spaghetti squash seeds Spaghetti Squash Tutorial

Use a fork or spoon to scoop out the stringy inside. Discard the seeds but keep the stringy squash.

I found 1 squash made 4 bowls of pasta for me.

I did find the spaghetti squash can make a pasta dish a little watery. Try to pat dry the spaghetti strands before mixing with the sauce.

I did find the spaghetti squash can make a pasta dish a little watery. Try to pat dry the spaghetti strands before mixing with the sauce. You would use the spaghetti squash the same way you use “regular” spaghetti. Make a delicious sauce and mix it with the spaghetti and serve immediately. Leftover spaghetti squash was great the next day. I reheated the spaghetti squash and added the sauce. It wasn’t mushy but instead tasted like it was fresh.

HOW TO COOK SPAGHETTI SQUASH IN THE OVEN

Yield: 4 bowls of spaghetti

Ingredients

  • 1 spaghetti squash
  1. Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F.
  2. Grease a baking sheet.
  3. Cut the squash in half. This is tricky so take your time.
  4. Scoop out the seeds. Save the seeds for roasting. You can roast them just like pumpkin seeds. *I know my pictures show the spaghetti squash roasted with the seeds but after doing this many times, it’s easier to remove the seeds first and then roast.
  5. Place the cut squash face side down.
  6. Bake for 30 minutes. The squash is done when a knife can be inserted through the skin.
  7. Let the squash cool.
  8. Use a spoon to scoop out the stringy inside. Discard the seeds but keep the stringy squash.

Notes

I did find the spaghetti squash can make a pasta dish a little watery. Try to pat dry the spaghetti strands before mixing with the sauce.

When using the Instant Pot to cook your spaghetti squash there is no need to cut it! Keep in mind that the Instant Pot needs to come up to temp and then pressurize so you’re not really saving anytime cooking it this way compared to roasting.

  1. Add one cup of water to the Instant Pot.
  2. Place the steamer basket or a metal trivet inside the Instant Pot.
  3. Pierce the spaghetti squash all over with a sharp knife.
  4. Add the spaghetti squash to the Instant Pot. Using the manual function, set for 15 minutes on high pressure. Add the lid and follow the directions for your Instant Pot.
  5. After 15 minutes, allow the Instant Pot to release the pressure.
  6. When it is safe, use oven mitts (because it WILL be extremely HOT), remove the spaghetti squash from the Instant Pot.
  7. Allow the spaghetti squash at least 10 minutes to cool before cutting into.
  8. Use a fork to scrape out the “pasta”.

Using a microwave is the fastest way to cook spaghetti squash. Just make sure you DO NOT try to cook it whole in the microwave. Steam would build up and create a dangerous situation. Always cut it in half.

Yes, you can roast spaghetti squash seeds! They are similar to and just as tasty as roasted pumpkin or butternut squash seeds. After dropping $5 for a spaghetti squash (and they’re supposed to be in season right now!) to make spaghetti noodles for my gluten-free husband, I wanted to get the most bang for my buck.

So paleo dieters, next time you eat spaghetti squash and meatballs be sure to save those winter squash seeds for roasting. They make a great snack and might just turn out to be your favorite part of the whole squash!

How to save spaghetti squash seeds

Spaghetti squashes are high in vitamin C and other nutrients. If you eat the seeds too you’re adding another great source of fiber, folate, and iron. Let’s learn the best way to roast them!

Roasting Spaghetti Squash Seeds

Ingredients:
Seeds from 1 spaghetti squash
A little olive oil or coconut oil (anywhere from 1/2 tsp to 1 tsp depending on the size of your squash and how many seeds you have)
Sea salt and black pepper to taste

Preheat oven to 300 degrees.

The first thing you want to do is remove seeds from squash halves and do a simple rinse to remove any long strands or goo. Getting clean squash seeds is honestly the hardest part of the whole recipe.

Pat dry using paper towels or a clean kitchen towel. I like to use a tea towel when making roasted squash seeds so there’s no fuzz to worry about.

In a small bowl, combine seeds, olive oil, and sea salt. If you’re feeling fancy and aren’t on a dairy-free diet you can add a little grated parmesan cheese for extra flavor. Adding a little garlic powder or curry powder are tasty ideas too. If this is your first time making spaghetti squash seed you might want to keep it simple with salt and pepper so you can see how great they taste without much enhancement.

Spread seeds in a single layer on an ungreased baking sheet making sure none of the seeds are touching. You can line the baking sheet with parchment paper if you like, but I find that this recipe isn’t that messy to being with so I usually skip it.

Turn seeds using a spatula and bake another 10-15 minutes.

Seeds are done when golden, slightly brown on ends and edges, and have a nice crunch when eaten.

I got about a half cup of squash seeds out of my little spaghetti squash. Store them in an airtight container for a great way to enjoy a crunchy snack on the go.

I plan on preparing two dishes this week that will each involve 1/2 of a spaghetti squash. In order for the second dish to be ‘as fresh as possible’ should I prepare the whole squash and save the second half, or save the second half (unprepared) and bake it when I prepare the second dish? (Time to prepare is not a concern). How should the second half be saved? (refrigerate, wrapped, . )

1 Answer 1

I haven’t specifically tried to save that variety of squash, but I’ve had good luck in general holding other varieties of winter squash for a few days by halving, sealing the cut side, and then refrigerating for. A few notes:

  1. If you have a large enough knife, just make a single cut through it.
  2. Either place it cut-side down on an appropriately sized dish with a flat bottom (eg, a casserole dish), or cover the cut side with plastic wrap . (of plastic wrap, then set in the dish, so you don’t accidentally knock off the plastic wrap in the next couple of days).

When it comes time to use the remaining half, if the cut surface is dry, shave a little off. Clean out the seed cavity when you’re finally going to use it. (this allows you to scrape back down to moist flesh, and reduce evaporative loss)

How long you can hold it will likely be affected by things like how often you open your frdge. I’ve never tried putting in the crisper after wrapping (as I tend to have too much stuff in there already).

If you’re looking to get the longest possible strands out of the squash, I think to need to cut it from stem to blossom end . but that would increase the cut surface area. If that isn’t a goal, it’s probably better to cut it across the stem-blossom axis.

Last Updated on June 24, 2021

Are you already a fan of spaghetti squash? Whether you’re new to this yummy fall veggie or know it well, you are going to love these delicious, healthy spaghetti squash recipes!

Learn how to make spaghetti squash in so many delicious ways, from simple baked spaghetti squash to lasagna to a veggie-ful take on pad thai! (swoon)

How to save spaghetti squash seeds

In honor of this lesser-known squash’s all-too-short season, here are some great healthy spaghetti squash recipes for this easy-to-grow, versatile and healthy yellow veggie.

What is Spaghetti Squash, Anyway?

If you haven’t encountered spaghetti squash before, you’re in for a treat.

Be forewarned that spaghetti squash tastes different from the more familiar acorn and butternut. Spaghetti squashes don’t have that rich, sweet flavor, but this quality actually makes them adaptable to some pretty diverse uses.

When cooked, spaghetti squash transforms into long noodle-like strings that can be used in place of pasta without the trouble of spiralizing, that new fad of making “noodles” out of veggies like zucchini and carrots. But be aware that spaghetti squash retains a little of its squash-y flavor and probably won’t fool anyone if you try to pass it off as actual pasta.

However, kids might enjoy helping to scrape out the noodle-like strings and then will be more willing to eat what you make with them (a good thing if you have kids like mine who generally prefer bread products to vegetables).

Spaghetti squash allows you to squeeze in some extra servings of veggies if it replaces a pasta main course, a great thing for gut health. I love a bowl of spaghetti squash with nothing but tomato sauce and parmesan as a filling and healthy lunch.

A one-cup serving of spaghetti squash has only about 40 calories, but 2 grams of fiber and a decent dose of potassium (180mg), an important nutrient most Americans fall short on. (Source)

Spaghetti squash is easy to grow, so consider poking a few seeds into your veggie patch this season! (Here’s info on growing spaghetti squash.)

How to save spaghetti squash seeds

Healthy Spaghetti Squash Recipes!

How to Cook Spaghetti Squash

You have several choices for making spaghetti squash. I prefer to cook spaghetti squash in the oven, but some people microwave theirs, and others like to cook spaghetti squash in an instant pot. Read my post on how to cook spaghetti squash in the oven for tips on making the most of your spaghetti squash.

Whatever method you choose, I highly recommend removing the seeds before baking, as you can make roasted spaghetti squash seeds the way you would pumpkin seeds and make a tasty and healthy snack while your squash bakes. (Instructions for roasted spaghetti squash seeds at the end of the post.)

Here are more amazing ways to eat root-to-stem to help you make the most of your produce purchases.

How to save spaghetti squash seeds

How to Use Your Baked Spaghetti Squash

I’m all about simplicity, so my favorite thing to do with the few spaghetti squashes I get each fall is just to serve them with marinara sauce and grated parmesan. The little bit of crunch of the squash “noodles” is a nice change from traditional pasta, and it’s such an easy way to get in a big serving of veggies.

Some people enjoy spaghetti squash with nothing but butter and serve it as a side dish, but others have gotten really creative in their uses of this humble squash. Check out some of these more ambitious healthy spaghetti squash recipes!

Healthy Spaghetti Squash Recipes

♦ I’m a huge fan of Asian flavors. This spaghetti squash yakisoba from The Pickled Plum was really good!

♦ Here’s a recipe for a pad thai made with spaghetti squash that I will definitely be trying with my next spaghetti squash.

♦ This clever recipe from The Tasty Kitchen uses spaghetti squash in place of pastry crust in a spaghetti squash quiche.

♦ Or bake up some cheesy goodness with this spaghetti squash lasagna from The Minimalist Baker.

♦ Here’s a meatball pie if that’s more your thing.

How to save spaghetti squash seeds

Rhoda Burrows

Professor & SDSU Extension Horticulture Specialist

New gardeners often ask whether it’s alright to plant cucumbers, squash, or gourds next to each other. Their concern is whether cross-pollination will result in inedible fruit. Fortunately, the pollen source does not affect the current season’s fruit. However, if the seed from that cross-pollinated fruit is saved and planted the following year, the resulting plants can be very different, and may be inedible. (Gourds produce a toxin that is bitter, so if you have a squash that is bitter, discard it and remove the plant from the garden.)

Seed Saving Precautions

Saving seed from garden vegetables can be rewarding, but it also comes with challenges, especially with plants that are cross-pollinated.

If gardeners wish to save seed from cucurbits (squash, pumpkins, gourds, cucumbers, and melons), special precautions need to be observed, as these plants are insect-pollinated. Additionally, they have separate male and female flowers, which increases the chances that the female flower may be fertilized with pollen from a different variety of the same type or species. Unless you (and nearby neighbors) have grown only one of the types or varieties, you could end up with some very strange vegetables from seed saved from those plants.

Plants from within the following groups will cross with each other:

  • Zucchini, Yellow Crookneck, Acorn, Spaghetti, Patty Pan, Delicata, Pumpkins and Gourds (except edible snake gourds) all may cross with each other.
  • Butternut, Buttercup, Banana, Hubbard and Turban squashes may cross with each other.
  • Muskmelon, Cantaloupe, Charentais; Honeydew; Casaba; Armenian Cucumber; Snake melon (gourd) can all cross with each other, but not with squashes, pumpkins, or cucumbers.
  • The Buffalo gourd, a weed, is too distantly related to cultivated species to be a problem.

Cucumbers, watermelon, and Loofah gourds only cross only with themselves, so you don’t have to worry about isolating them unless you are growing several varieties of the same type.

Preventing Cross-Pollination

How to save spaghetti squash seeds

To prevent cross-pollination between compatible types or varieties, they need to be separated by a distance of one-half to one mile. The presence of barriers such as large buildings, a thick stand of trees, or a hill can inhibit pollinator movement and allow for shorter isolation distances. However, since most gardeners don’t have adequate distance from other gardens or squash varieties within their own garden, the alternative is to (1) net or cage the entire plant to exclude insects or (2) bag or tape shut new male and female flowers as they are forming (before they open, but just beginning to show a bit of yellow or orange color) to prevent insect transfer of pollen. These methods require hand-pollination of the flowers. Early in the morning, a small paintbrush can be used to collect pollen from a male flower, and transfer it to a female flower. For best results, this should be done as soon as the female flower (identified by the miniature fruit just below the petals) first opens, within 4 hours of opening. Rebag or retape the female flower shut after you have pollinated it. Once you have fruit set, you can remove all the bags – just be sure to mark the fruit that you hand-pollinated.

Because pollen from the same plant can pollinate a flower, you only need to plant a single cucurbit plant in order to harvest viable seeds. However, to maintain a variety over time, save seeds from between 5-10 plants. If you’re saving seeds for genetic preservation of a rare variety, save seeds from 25 plants.

Seed Processing for Cucurbits

Cucumbers

Pick fruit several weeks after it has matured to the point of changing color to yellow or orange. Scoop out the seeds and surrounding pulp, and place into a container, add water and let ferment 2-4 days at room temperature, stirring occasionally. Add more water, stir, and allow the nonviable seeds and pulp to float to the top, where they can be removed. Repeat if necessary to thoroughly clean the seed. When clean, spread seeds out to dry on coffee filters, paper towels, or screens. When sufficiently dry, they can be cleanly snapped in half.

Squashes

For best results, store the fruit until it begins to lose eating quality; then ferment as above. Summer squash should be left on the plant until the rind hardens, then processed as above.

Melons

Allow fruit to remain on the plant for 1 to 2 weeks after maturity; alternatively, harvest reipened fruit and allow it to set for a few days prior to harvesting the seed. The seed can be simply washed by hand and then dried.

Storing Seed

Once completely dry, seed should be stored in a cool dry location. If you have room, storing in your refrigerator is ideal. Make sure the storage containers are completely dry. Envelopes or ziplock bags work fine, as well as baby-food jars, etc. Most seed will stay good for at least 3-4 years. Don’t forget to label everything with both the plant name and date!

An Additional Caution

Some diseases can be spread through seed from infected plants. Following is a list of some of the diseases that can be spread through seed:

  • All Cucurbits
    • Angular Leaf spot (especially cucumber)
    • Gummy stem blight
    • Scab
    • Squash mosaic virus
  • Muskmelon, Cucumber, Watermelon
    • Anthracnose

If you know that your plants have any of these diseases, you should not save the seed. However, most people will have no idea whether their plants are infected with particular fungi, bacteria, or viruses. A good rule of thumb is to simply save seed only from plants that have healthy, normal-looking leaves and fruit.

For further reference:

  • Seed Saver’s Exchange. 3076 North Winn Road; Decorah, IA 52101; Phone: 319-382-5872
  • “The Organic Seed Grower” by John Navazio. 2012. Chelsea Green Publishing, White River Junction, VT.
  • “The Manual of Seed Saving: Harvesting, Storing, and Sowing Techniques for Vegetables, Herbs, and Fruits” by Andrea Heistinger 2013. Timber Press, Portland, OR.

Posted on April 24, 2019

How to save spaghetti squash seeds

Spaghetti squash may not be as well-known as other members of the winter squash family, like butternut and acorn squashes, but it should be. It’s easy to grow, attractive in the garden, and a delicious and unusual treat for the table. Here’s how you can incorporate spaghetti squash into your garden and menu planning this year.

Location and Soil Needs

  • Plant in a sunny bed with good drainage and high-quality organic compost incorporated in the soil.
  • Wait to plant until well after the last frost date, when the soil is warm. Winter squash seeds will not germinate if the air or soil is chilled.
  • Give the plants room to trail on all sides, as they are vigorous growers once established .

Growing from Seed

Direct Sow (recommended method) – Place two to four seeds in mounds eight feet (2.4 meters) apart.

Start Indoors – Sow seeds in three-inch (eight centimeters) or larger diameter pots, two to three seeds per pot. Keep under a grow light or in a warm window and, once the plants have reached the height of about an inch (three centimeters), cut away at the base of the stem all but the heartiest shoot. Now you can transplant the seedlings into your garden following the steps below.

Transplanting Seedlings

Place transplants out in mounds, two to a mound, spaced eight feet (2.4 meters) apart. Take special care when putting the plants in the ground as squash roots are easily damaged by handling.

Plant Care

Spaghetti squash needs the same amount of water as most vegetables, that is, one inch (three centimeters) a week, delivered if possible, through a slow morning soak. No special fertilizing is needed. If your plant begins to send vines into garden paths or other places you don’t want them, gently place the offending shoots out of harm’s way. Try to avoid bruising the vines as that leaves them susceptible to diseases and pests.

Harvesting

Spaghetti squash is ready to harvest in around 90 days. The yellow fruits will grow to around nine inches (23 centimeters), lose their luster, harden, and their stems will dry. Cut the stems about an inch (three centimeters) above the fruit and leave them on for better storage. Harvest all your squash before the first frost.

Spaghetti squash makes a great low-carb option to pasta. Roast or boil the flesh then pull it into strands with a fork. Add sauce on top or toss with sautéed vegetables – anything you can do with spaghetti, you can do with spaghetti squash, and without the high carb count.

Storage

Spaghetti squash will save for three to six months in a cool, dark place. For shorter periods (up to two months), it can sit at room temperature as part of a festive fall decorative display.

Easy to grow and fun to eat, spaghetti squash is a gardener’s dream. Make sure you add this late season favorite to your vegetable plot this year.

Do you have a favorite way to eat spaghetti squash? Share it in the comments below!

In general, each plant produces 5 to 25 pounds of yellow squash during the growing season. A 10-foot row of yellow squash averages 20 to 80 pounds of squash.

How many spaghetti squash plants do I need?

Growing Spaghetti Squash

Spaghetti squash requires loose, well-drained soil. I suggest adding some compost to it as well since the plants need nutrient-dense soil. Plant spaghetti squash in hills, with 3 or 4 transplants per hill and 3 feet between each hill.

How long does it take to grow a spaghetti squash?

“Spaghetti squash has a long grow time, often needing 90-100 days after planting to mature,” she explains.

How many vines does a squash plant produce?

Maintaining Squash Trellises

As the squash grows, select three to five healthy vines to grow on and prune off peripheral growth.

How long does it take for squash to produce?

It will be after your last frost date, squash prefer warm soil. Most varieties take 45-60 days from planting to harvest.

Can you plant spaghetti squash next to zucchini?

You can plant different varieties together, but you won’t want to save seeds from the crops produce since they can cross-pollinate and affect later crops. We love growing both yellow summer squash and zucchini together. As your plants grow, make sure the soil is moist but not continually saturated.

Should you stake spaghetti squash?

Because staking pulls the fruit and much of the foliage off of the ground, it is extremely useful in damp climates. This technique reduces the risk of damage by slugs and other ground-dwelling pests that feed on squash plants. It also keeps the plants drier and makes it more difficult for fungal disease to set in.

What can you not plant with squash?

Squash – Companions: corn, lettuce, melons, peas, and radish. Avoid planting near Brassicas or potatoes. Borage is said to improve the growth and flavour of squash.

Is spaghetti squash a vine or bush?

It’s considered a winter squash because it produces large fruits that grow on a squash vine. (Summer squash varieties, like zucchini, grow in a bush rather than a trailing vine and produce smaller fruits with thinner rinds.)

What month to plant spaghetti squash?

Spaghetti squash grows best in full sun and in soil that contains organic matter, such as compost. Wait until the danger frost has passed, which is around mid-March to mid-April in northern areas along the West coast, such as San Francisco. Start spaghetti squash seedlings indoors and transplant them outside.

Do squash need full sun?

All types of squash love sun and heat. So for best results (and bigger harvests), grow squash in full sun once temperatures consistently stay above 70˚.

Will spaghetti squash ripen off the vine?

Well, the short answer is “yes” to the ripening of spaghetti squash off the vine.

Should I pinch off squash flowers?

By midsummer, pinch off remaining flowers and small fruits on vining and winter squash. This will allow the plant to focus its energy on the ripening crop.

How do you keep squash off the ground?

ANSWER: Summer squash are prone to fruit rot in rainy weather. Rain splashes fungal disease organisms in the soil onto the fruit, causing rot. Apply 2 to 4 inches of pine straw under the plants so the fruit does not rest on the ground.

How do you grow squash in a small space?

If space isn’t on your side, then growing squashes upwards is the obvious answer. The easiest way is to train them onto trellis. A simple one-piece trellis can be secured against a sun-facing wall or strong fence. Plant your squashes the same distance apart that they would grow at if left at ground level.

Unsure how to cook spaghetti squash? This post breaks down how to bake spaghetti squash, how to microwave spaghetti squash, and how to cook spaghetti squash in a slow cooker.

How to save spaghetti squash seeds

Click HERE to save this tutorial on How to Cook Spaghetti Squash!

The Best Ways to Cook Spaghetti Squash

Spaghetti squash — what the heck do you do with this stuff? And does it even taste like spaghetti?

Spoiler: cooking spaghetti squash is actually really easy. You don’t have to do much, but spaghetti squash can be a beast to prepare for cooking. I’m going to share with you three ways that you can cook this tasty squash as well as what to do with spaghetti squash once you’ve cooked it.

Does it taste like spaghetti? I think both yes and no. After cooking, you can separate the flesh into thin, spaghetti-like strands of squash that resemble spaghetti. It doesn’t have a super strong taste (such as butternut squash) so it can be easily substituted in place of spaghetti noodles for a healthier, gluten-free “pasta.”

How to Prepare Spaghetti Squash for Cooking

Before I jump into how to cook spaghetti squash, it’s important that I first explain how to prepare spaghetti squash for the various cooking methods. No matter if you’re baking spaghetti squash, microwaving spaghetti squash, or cooking it in a slow cooker, there are a few preparatory steps you need to take first:

  1. Make sure your work surface and the knife are both dry so you don’t end up slipping and cutting yourself.
  2. Spaghetti squash is hard when it is uncooked. Before cooking it, you’re going to want to cut the squash very slowly and very carefully.
  3. Scoop out the seeds and discard the seeds (or roast them for a snack!). Don’t go overboard and scoop too much of the flesh out because you want to keep as much of that as you can.
  4. Brush the cut insides with olive oil.

Once you’ve brushed the inside of the spaghetti squash with olive oil, you’re ready to move onto the specific instructions I’ve shared below for the three cooking methods.

How to Cook Spaghetti Squash 3 Ways

How to Cook Spaghetti Squash in the Oven

Learning how to bake spaghetti squash is arguably the easiest method mentioned in this post. Once the squash is in the oven, you can set a timer and walk away.

Here’s how to bake spaghetti squash:

  1. Wash the outside of your squash thoroughly.
  2. Preheat oven to 400 degrees F.
  3. Cut the spaghetti squash in half from stem to end.
  4. Brush the inside of the squash with olive oil.
  5. Place oiled side down in an oven-safe roasting or baking dish.
  6. Add 1/4 cup of water to the dish, optional, and cover with foil.
  7. Bake until done. (You’ll know the squash is done when it is tender and can easily be pierced with a fork.)

How Long to Bake Spaghetti Squash

When roasting spaghetti squash, it’ll need to bake for roughly 30-45 minutes. When you flake through the flesh (like you would with fish), the squash will separate into thin, spaghetti-like strands (hence the name!)

How to save spaghetti squash seeds

Click HERE to save this tutorial on How to Cook Spaghetti Squash!

How to Microwave Spaghetti Squash

I was a bit skeptical of this method. When I first started hearing about it, I had visions of spaghetti squash exploding all over my microwave, looking like something out of a horror movie. I promise you, this is not at all what happens.

Here’s how to microwave spaghetti squash:

  1. Wash the spaghetti squash and cut it in half. Scoop out the seeds.
  2. Brush the inside of the squash with olive oil.
  3. Place cut side down in an oven-safe roasting or baking dish and add 1/4 cup water to the dish.
  4. Pierce the outer side with a knife a few times. I don’t know if this is really necessary, but it makes me feel better that I’m not going to have a microwave explosion.
  5. Then, cook at full power anywhere from 5 – 15 minutes.

The spaghetti squash cook time using this method will depend on a couple things, like how big your squash is and the wattage of your microwave.

How to Make Spaghetti Squash in a Slow Cooker

  1. Wash the squash, then cut it in half. Scoop out the seeds.
  2. Brush the inside with olive oil.
  3. Then, place the squash oiled side down in a slow cooker.
  4. Add 1/4 cup of water.
  5. Cover and cook for 1 – 2 hours on high or on low for 3 – 4 hours.

How to save spaghetti squash seeds

Click HERE to save this tutorial on How to Cook Spaghetti Squash!

Can You Freeze Spaghetti Squash?

Yes, cooked spaghetti squash can be frozen for up to 8 months. Once cooked, let it cool completely and then packed into freezer bags. You can reheat the frozen squash without thawing it, if desired.

How Long Is Spaghetti Squash Good For?

Cooked spaghetti squash should be eaten within 5 days of making it.

What to Do with Spaghetti Squash

Now that you’ve cooked the spaghetti squash using one of the three techniques mentioned above, you might be wondering: what do I do with it now?

What to do with spaghetti squash is an easy answer: drizzle with melted butter, sprinkle with Parmesan, and season (to taste) with salt and pepper. That is the easiest way to serve it. Serving it this way is SUPER delicious and takes pretty much ZERO time and is an excellent side dish.

But, if you want to get a little more creative, here are 10 great spaghetti squash recipes that I’ve got my eye on to try.

How do you like to cook spaghetti squash?

Love this tutorial on How to Cook Spaghetti Squash? Sign up for Good Life Eats email updates and never miss another recipe!

How to cut side swept bangs

Want to try out new types of bangs without a visit to the salon? Here’s how to cut side swept bangs! In addition to some sharp scissors, you will need patience, a steady hand, and the correct technique. The key to getting the length and angle you want is to cut hair dry. Another tip is to cut bangs extra long and go shorter and try different angles as you gain confidence and skill with cutting bangs yourself at home. These side swept fringe pictures show how there are many variations – from wispy to curly to full. Keep reading for three ways to wear the look and a how to cut side swept bangs tutorial.

How to cut side swept bangs

Start by parting hair to one side (tip: line up the part with the arch or one eyebrow). Now sweep bangs to the side the way you want them to lie and then comb them forward over your forehead before cutting. Use your fingers to find where to cut the fringe – where it sits to the side will be different to when it is hanging straight down. Pick out key points on your face so you can connect the dots when you cut – from mid eye to mid cheek to the bottom of the earlobe for example.

How to cut side swept bangs

To begin cutting, hold the scissors at the brow with the tips pointing down towards the nose. Then cut vertically, snipping choppy pieces while moving downwards at an angle from the eye to the opposite ear. This vertical cut will add flattering texture that works well with bangs worn swept to the side. Don’t worry about getting the lines perfect because the choppy cute will hide any errors.

How to cut side swept bangs

To ensure you’re happy with the results start by cutting hair longer than you actually want. Carpenters say measure twice, cut once but fortunately you can cut hair more than once. Try cutting bangs from the cheekbone to the jawline and wear it for a week to see how the fringe lies and works with your everyday hairstyles. You can keep refining the cut as you gain more skill with the technique and figure out the exact shape and angle of side swept bangs that works for you. Now, enjoy your new look!

It is super easy to cut side bangs at home – saving time and money at the salon! 🙂

How to cut side swept bangs

Start with DRY hair (if it is wet you will cut bangs too short) pulled back, leaving out the pieces you want to cut. Include some longer side pieces to frame your face.

How to cut side swept bangs

Separate the main part of your bangs from the side bits, in the front. This doesn’t have to be perfect, but should come from your side-part and be about 2-3 inches wide.

How to cut side swept bangs

Diagonally lay your finger across your hair where you plan to cut (you will cut at an angle) and hold against your face to imagine length. Leave your finger here and pick up scissors.

REMEMBER: Cut your hair so that it is LONGER than you may think you want! Wherever your finger is, move it down about half an inch. You can always cut again if it’s too long, but you can’t un-cut it!

How to cut side swept bangs

Hold your scissors at the same angle your finger was (move your finger away) and cut across. This will leave a blunt edge that we will fix in the next step, but gives you your length.

How to cut side swept bangs

Holding scissors straight up and down, cut into your bangs to soften the ends. Move your scissors up and down to vary the length of hairs, and don’t overdo this: only cut until the ends are less blunt

How to cut side swept bangs

Onto the side bits! Hold them next to your face to judge evenness and where you’d like them to fall. Right around jaw/chin length is usually good. Remember your measurements!

How to cut side swept bangs

Do what you just did with the main bangs: cut at an angle, then cut vertically to soften. Be careful on the last step as you have less hair to work with, and could cut too much!

How to cut side swept bangs

Ta-da! You’re done, with a new haircut for free! 😃👍

Table of Contents

Side swept bangs can both be an asset or a disaster, depending on how you cut it. A lot of women are obsessed with bangs as a way to hide a large forehead or to add flair to their boring hairstyle. To ensure that it will not be a nightmare, you should know how to cut side swept bangs for the first time. Below, I listed some tips and a step-by-step guide to succeed in your first side-swept bangs.

How to cut side swept bangs for the first time

How to cut side swept bangs

Step #1. Comb some hair to the front

Just like with any bangs, you have to direct some hair forward. After that, grab the hair in the front and comb it well, ensuring that it’s separated from the other hair before you cut. You only need the hair that falls right where your eyebrow starts. Push the rest of the hair and tie it back. Do this on both sides of your face.

Step #2. Hold the hair

First, comb the hair well to make sure it doesn’t have snags that will affect the length. Hold the tips of your hair using your index and middle finger. Imagine you’re holding a dollar bill in between.

Step #3. It’s time to cut

Take your haircutting scissors and snip the hair diagonally. Side swept bangs are only good if you cut them diagonally, so make sure that you keep this in mind. You can start cutting just a quarter of an inch then trim it bit by bit until you reach your desired length. Take note that you should cut diagonally on the same side of your dominant hand that you’ll use to sweep it.

Always check the length in the mirror on every snip so you won’t cut too much than what you intended. If your bangs are still longer than what you like, keep trimming.

Step #4. Touch-ups

After you reached your desired length with a diagonal trim, hold your hair just the same but mid-way. Next, hold the scissors vertically and cut little parts of your bang’s tips. This will add texture to your bangs while preventing it from looking blunt.

Step #5. Sweep it to the side

After finishing these steps, you’re finally done! Just sweep your bangs to the side and see if it has the right length that you want. Feel free to repeat steps 3 and 4 if you want to shorten your bangs a bit. Remember, do so little by little so you wouldn’t cut too much length.

Do you need more guidance? In this video, ROSEBUD shows us how to cut side swept bangs the right way:

Tips in cutting your bangs

Always get the right equipment

Using paper scissors for your bangs will produce rough and inaccurate cuts. If you’re dedicated to styling your own hair at home, I recommend buying a pair of hair cutting shears for the job.

For home haircuts, you don’t really need a very expensive pair of shears. Just make sure that you have a sharp pair that will cut your hair like butter.

Straighten it first

Before you reach for your scissors, straighten your hair so you will have a more accurate length. Also, never cut your bangs when wet because damp hair looks longer than the normal, dry hair. This will make your side-swept bangs look awful.

Go slow

It’s easy to make mistakes if you keep snipping without checking it first. For successful haircuts, I recommend stopping after two to three snips then combing your hair to see the actual length. This has saved me from disastrous bangs in the past, and I still swear by it, no matter what haircut you’re doing.

Never cut the entire length in one go. I’ve seen DIY bangs online where they tie their hair and snip it with scissors. It will not turn out good. You should always go slow and in increment lengths.

Line your hair perfectly

When sectioning your hair for the bangs, make sure that you line up where your bangs start from your scalp. This will ensure that you can cut an accurate length and that your hair won’t look messy after cutting side-swept bangs.

Always tie your hair back

Before you start cutting your bangs, make sure that the rest of your hair is tied back. This will prevent you from accidentally cutting portions of your hair that are not included in the side-swept style. I’ve seen a lot of disastrous haircuts just because the person won’t secure the other areas of the hair not included in the haircut.

Leave it alone

Do your side-swept bangs look a little off? Just leave it alone for a few days. Letting the hair fall on its new position will make your side-swept bangs look more natural. However, if it doesn’t even out after a few weeks, you may need to ask the help of a stylist. You may need to perform touch-up cuts to remove any excess length.

Don’t weigh it down

One of the biggest mistakes when sporting side-swept bangs is weighing it down too much. It gives the ‘cow-licked’ look that doesn’t look good. Always comb it and maintain a nice lift. You can use some hairspray or volumizing spray to keep your bangs looking natural. However, avoid making too stiff, or it will look and feel awkward.

Prepare for it

Cutting your own hair is a big step. And to ensure that you won’t regret it, I recommend doing your research. Ask your hairstylist or consult a friend who has done it in the past. If this is your first time cutting your bangs, don’t expect a salon-quality result. Also, I don’t recommend cutting your bangs if you’re about to attend or go to a big event. Should your haircut fail, you won’t be panicking to find a fix.

Conclusion

Knowing how to cut side swept bangs for the first time is a tricky task. I’ve had my share of haircut fails, but it’s in the practice that I’ve mastered DIY bangs. Again, go slow and be prepared for the result. Invest in a good pair of shears and do your research.

How to cut side swept bangs

How to cut side swept bangs

How to cut side swept bangs

How to cut side swept bangs

*Disclaimer: I am not a professional stylist. Please be careful and use caution when cutting the hair that frames your beautiful face.

Stay up to date when new videos are posted by subscribing to my channel. Simply click the red YouTube button below! Thanks!

Reader Interactions

Comments

Angela Ford says

Great video thanks!!

You did a great job demonstrating cutting your own bangs. I’m a licensed cosmetologist and just wanted to give you some of the terms for the techniques you used. When you cut up into the bangs, it is called ‘point cutting’ and it will texturize them; taking a little bulk out so they aren’t so heavy and the same length. Great job! One of the best tutorial on this subject I’ve seen!

Any tips on styling them? I can never get them to lay nicely…..help please

If you try straightening them downwards toward your nose then sweep them sideways this usually helps (:

I just watched your video and tried this method and it worked out PERFECTLY! This is the way I had my bangs for years. I completely grew my bangs out and had it that way for a year, but when I missed them and wanted them back there was no stylist that could cut them the way I’d had them in the past. You have just made my life so much brighter with this tutorial! I love your blog, you are a joy to watch 🙂 Thank you!

Thanks, Amy! I’m so glad it worked out for you! ((:

I just googled “cut side-swept bangs” and opened up about ten different link in tabs. Your video was the first thing I watched, and I was like, “Ok. Let’s just see what the others are like.”

After looking at all the other pages, I had to re-google “cut side-swept bangs” to find your page again. Perfect tutorial 🙂

Haha, I love it! Thank you for letting me know!

This was awesome! I just finished cutting my bangs using your tutorial and it was so EASY and it looks great! Thank you!

Yay! I’m so happy to hear it, Sarah (:

this was terrible I did not work.

Seriously, seven (yes, SEVEN) professional hairdressers/senior stylists later….I followed your tutorial exactly and my bangs have NEVER LOOKED BETTER. I could kiss you right now if you were standing next to me.

I swear I had walked into hair salons before and said “I will pay any kind of $$ for the best of the best, most senior stylists, whoever… whoever can PLEASE cut my bangs so they don’t look like Edward Scissorhands did it” And every single time I walked out with a total mess on my face! Never again. I will cut my own bangs exactly the way you showed us here for as long as I live, LOL Needless to say – THANK YOU.

P.S. those who didn’t have amazing results following this tutorial, if I had to guess I would say you used the wrong scissors. Get professional scissors, specifically for hair (you can get them at Sally’s, cheap). But it truly matters.

Thank you! Thank you! Thank you.

Thank You so much Melissa! I have tried several types of bangs and had several different people cut them, but I always hated it, but I don’t like having no bangs either. I followed this tutorial and it has been several weeks now and I LOOOOOOVE them! For the first time ever I love bangs on me!

Keep up the good work. You’re awesome! 🙂

Could you post a list of different kind of bangs and their names.
I’m sure lots of people would benefit from it.
Thanks!

You are adorable! I loved this video and can’t wait to give your method a try. Thank you!!

Oh Melissa, you are the best!. I shall give this a try and watching your video, I felt braver now :). You’re very pretty too. Thanks so much. HUGS.

Thank you so much! This was super helpful.

Thank you! Finally had a chance to cut my bangs and I love it!

You. Are. Amazing! This method works perfect. Thanks !

You seem so nice! This looks very helpful. Thanks!

You seem so nice! This looks very helpful. Thanks!

Yes, PLEASE show us how to style your bangs. I dream that one day my bangs will look just like yours 🙂 Thanks!!

Thanks! I’ve been trimming my bangs for a while and I’m going to do it your way today.I can never style mine awesomely. Can you do a video on how you STYLE your side swept bangs? Or is the secret in the cut?!

Ah, this is SO helpful!! I have extremely long hair, and wanted something that would let me have a longer bang (mine falls under my chin, even after cutting). I just did your method, and it looks great!

sue noorda says

Thanks for this tutorial. last Feb. my bangs got too long. I just grabbed the scissors, pulled my hair up and whacked them off. Oh my gosh, what a mistake. My bangs were totally uncontrollable. I went to a hair dresser the next week and she tried to fix them but they still are stupid. They curl up and look ridiculous. I wish I could get them to grow out so I can fix them but my hair only grows about 1/4 inch a month. This will take forever. Thanks for the video. I’m going to do this from now on.

thanks for this tutorial! i trimmed my bangs for the first time today using this as my guide! it didn’t come out as disastrous as my husband was expecting it to be. :))

christie cook says

Thank you I have been trying to do something new instead of straight bangs but not knowing how to get them to the side. When i go to get them cut they dont understand i am trying to get them to grow out some! Thank you loved your tutorial very sweet!

Just found your tutorial on pinterest. Thank you Thank you! I’ve been looking for something like this. I know I can trim my own bangs but didn’t know how to do the sideswept bang. You did a great job of explaining!

This may have just changed my life. I, too, am always growing out my bangs and then cutting them. When I re cut them, the stylist takes several tries to get them the way I want. I just ran up to my bathroom and tried those and PERFECTION! Thanks you! You have another loyal follower on Pinterest.

I tried this (thanks for the post) but it didn’t turn out as nicely as yours. But perhaps that’s only because I have never cut my own hair before and feel that people can see that I did it myself.

Fortunately I moved on to the tutorial for braiding you bangs so I could hide my bad haircut 😉

Thank you so much for this. I tried it and my bangs look great. Loving your Blog. 🙂

I tried this and it totally rocks. Thank you so much I am really enjoying your blog. 🙂

I love the way my bangs turned out! Thank you so much, great job!

It’s called over-directing. You did a great job. 🙂

I just tried this because the last time I got a haircut they didn’t cut it short enough. It totally works! Thank you so much!

Love this, those swept bangs look so gorgeous on you! Can’t wait to watch the video!

Thats exactly how I cut my bangs… the only thing different is that I cut mine so they are the legth down to my upper lip as I part my hair a bit lower.

You are the cutest! I love this tutorial. my sister has used this same technique on my bangs in the past and it absolutely works!

You’ll never guess what I did yesterday – cut this exact fringe into my daughter’s hair!! Now I’m off to neaten it up following your FAB tutorial. Thank you!!

i wish i had your skills when it comes to hair! mine is. SO. boring! ;P

Want to learn how to cut your own bangs? We can teach you how to get professional-looking side-swept bangs in this step-by-step tutorial. We’re also here to let you in on a little secret: you can cut wispy bangs on your own at home and have them turn out just as good as if you had gone to the salon. Insane, right? Why pay for a trim when you can get beautiful side swept bangs in the comfort of your own bathroom? This amazing step-by-step guide from Rose Bud will show you how to cut your own bangs!

How to Cut Your Own Bangs: DIY Side Swept Bangs

Step 1. Set Your Hair

Start by combing back the hair on your crown. After doing this, push the rest of your hair back and tie it into a ponytail. Once you’ve gotten it out of your way, comb the section you’ve designated as your bangs in front of your face.

Tip: Straighten your hair either with a straightening iron or a blow dry before cutting so you know your hair length and tell exactly where your bangs fall.

Step 2. Determine the Length of Your Bangs

How to cut side swept bangs

Using a pintail comb, determine where your bangs will start and end. Hold the comb vertically and locate the arch of your eyebrow — this is where your bangs should start. Do the same thing on the other side to determine where they should end.

Tip: Use the tip of your pintail comb to make a straight wedge up your hair from the hairline. Do the same to the other side of the bangs and along the top part of your bangs.

Step 3. Work on Straight Hair Lines

After sectioning out the beginning and end of your bangs, even out the top. You’re essentially looking to create a rectangular shape. Make sure the wedge on your bangs is only 1-2 inches. You can make your bangs ticker according to your style, but the ideal measurement is 1 to 2 inches max.

Step 4. Tie Your Back Hair Into a Ponytail

If the sides and top of the bangs are already even, tie any stray hairs into a ponytail. This will prevent the hairs from falling back down. Comb your bangs again.

Step 5. You’re Now Ready for The Cut

Now you’re ready to cut! Hold your bangs and give it a twist then hold on to it to keep it in place.

The reason for this is, we want to make the cut look more natural. Once the shortest piece of hair, the centerline, is twisted, the longest one gets twisted over. The longer the hair wraps around, the longer it will be after the cut.

This twist-and-cut technique is for the right-handed where the left hand can do the job of keeping the hair in place while the right-hand does the cutting. This avoids any disastrous situations by ensuring the entire section of your hair isn’t cut at an angle. We instead only want to cut small sections at a time, not the whole thing.

Step 6. Redistribute Your Hair Evenly

How to cut side swept bangs

After twisting your hair, comb the bangs down and distribute them evenly in your grasp. You will have to cut at an angle from the right side downwards.

Step 7. Cut Your Hair by Section

Time to make the cut! Use professional hair cutting scissors and hold it at an angle as shown below. Cut the hair slowly and make sure you open and close the scissors in every cut. Doing one cut is a big no-no; little cuts are always better. This is especially for those who are learning how to cut side swept bangs for the first time. Cutting your own hair can be nerve-racking so it’s always best to cut (if possible) a few strands of hair at a time.

Step 8. Cut at an Angle

After doing the sidecut, comb the bangs down again, but this time, split them evenly into two parts. Hold the left side of the bangs down with your scissors pointing up. Cut little by little upward, this is to give the bangs edge and body. After cutting the first part, move on to the other part. Make sure to be patient as you cut along either side–it is all worth it.

Now comb your bang and leave it at the position you want, and check how the angle and length look on your face.

If you notice some uneven parts, then it’s time to touch up! Leave all the bangs in front of your face and trim those that you missed until they match the neighboring hairs. If needed, create a neat diagonal line. Slowly continue doing this until you get the fringy look that you need.

This is how your side-swept bangs should look by now. It shouldn’t look too freshly cut and the cuts should be edgy.

Step 9. Straighten Your Bangs

After the cut, the next thing to do is the style the hair. A great way to style side-swept bangs is to use a straightening iron. Bump your bangs up by curving your straightening iron in. You wouldn’t want super straight bangs looking too freshly cut.

Step 10. Finish it Off with a Hairspray

For the finishing touch, take your most trusted brand of hairspray and spray your bangs in place.

And you’re all done! Isn’t cutting your own bangs exciting? But before you become scissor happy and try doing it again, refer to this guide to avoid any mistakes, tears and bad photos.

Before and After

One last thing, note these down if you’re wearing a bang

How to cut side swept bangs

Take A Weekly Check

Depending on how fast your hair grows, it could take less than a week for your bangs to be in a ‘craggy’ way. So check your bangs weekly, and keep it trimmed and shining. The first rule of thumb is never cut straight across. Take a little, tiny chop until it gets back to the perfect shape.

Try To Keep It Lifted

Never let weather or water touch your bang. Always protect it from the sun rays, humidity, or even gusts of wind whenever you go out. Keep it clean and hidden with a cap. That helps your bang look shaped when you arrive at work.

Make sure you have dry shampoo in your handbag before leaving home. Spray it over your bang whenever it gets greasy. Try out some more hair products to keep your bang stiff and moisturized.

Don’t forget to download, save, or share this handy infographic for reference:

How to cut side swept bangs

Whatever you want with bangs, whether to make you look younger or to hide your extra wide forehead, you can learn how to cut your own bangs at home. With this step-by-step tutorial, you can cut your bangs at your own phase and just the way you like it. Give expensive hairdressing salons a run for their money with DIY side-swept bangs that rivals the works of professionals!

Have you tried cutting your own bangs or styling it yourself before? We’d love to know if this tutorial on how to cut your own bangs helped. Do share your experience in the comments section below!

Don’t forget to follow our Facebook, Twitter, Instagram, and Pinterest accounts to get the latest makeup, hair, and nail trends!

Editor’s Note: This post was originally published on March 19, 2017, and has been updated for quality and relevancy!

November 06, 2020

If we’re honest, we can’t remember when side-swept bangs weren’t a thing. This style of bangs is ultra-flattering, which is probably why it’s consistently been one of the most popular haircut options over the years. After all, side bangs help to frame your face and highlight your facial features without the awkward grow-out phase that comes with straight-across bangs. That said, as with any hairstyle that’s been around for what seems like forever, figuring out new ways to upgrade the look can be tricky. To help you make side-swept bangs current, we’ve rounded up eight ideas, from pinned-back to long side-swept bangs. Be prepared to get swept away.

1. Side-Swept Bangs With Long Hair

Why we love it: One of the most classic takes on this cut is side-swept bangs with long hair. In our opinion, the perfect way to add a current twist to this pairing is by rocking deep-parted, long side-swept bangs that will complement your length.

How to get the look: Use the end of a rattail comb to part your hair toward the side with your bangs. You can use the arch of your eyebrow as a guideline for where to create the deep part. To keep it in place, mist your hair with the L’Oréal Paris Elnett Precious Oil Satin Hairspray.

2. Lifted Side-Swept Bangs

Why we love it: We’ll always be a fan of adding volume to our hair. By lifting the root of your side-swept bangs, it will create the illusion of a more voluminous mane.

How to get the look: Spritz the L’Oréal Paris Advanced Hairstyle BOOST IT High Lift Creation Spray onto the roots of your side bangs for instant lift.

3. Layers With Side-Swept Bangs

Why we love it: As we mentioned, side bangs alone help to highlight your facial features, but adding layers into the mix will emphasize them even more.

How to get the look: Ask your stylist for a layered haircut (and side-swept bangs) that will flatter your face shape.

4. Pinned-Back Side-Swept Bangs

Why we love it: If you want your hair out of your face, a pinned-back hairstyle is just what you need. This is an effective way to style long side-swept bangs in a pinch.

How to get the look: Pin your bangs behind your ear with a bobby pin or trendy hair clip.

5. Bob With Side-Swept Bangs

Why we love it: Short hair can often seem limiting since you don’t have as much hair to work with. That said, side-swept bangs with short hair are the perfect way to add a bit of texture to a bob haircut without resorting to ultra-short layers.

How to get the look: Turn to your hairdresser for this one. You can ask for longer side-swept bangs that blend into the length of your bob cut or opt for shorter strands.

6. Sleek Side-Swept Bangs

Why we love it: This slick look is edgy and super polished. Not to mention, it’ll help keep your side bangs from straying midday (or night).

How to get the look: Straighten your mane with a flat iron. Then, squeeze a small amount of the L’Oréal Paris Advanced Hairstyle LOCK IT Clean Style Gel onto your fingertips. Apply the gel to your side bangs, slicking them backward and tucking them behind your ear. Add more gel as necessary to finish your sleek look.

7. Braided Side-Swept Bangs

Why we love it: Not only will braiding your side bangs keep them out of your face, but it’ll also create a super cute boho look. This hairstyle gives us groovy ‘70s hair vibes.

How to get the look: Split your side bangs into three equal strands. Then, either French or Dutch braid your bangs along your hairline, stopping just behind your ear. Secure the braid with bobby pins.

Next up: If side-swept bangs aren’t your thing, we have another option that’s hot off the presses. Click over to our article, Hairstyle Trend Alert: Curtain Bangs.

Side-swept bands require regular trimming to stay in tip-top shape, but since we’re still practising social distancing – we advise that you cut your own bangs at home.

We’re going to show you how. All you’ll need is; scissors, a comb, clips, a big piece of plastic and a towel.

Let’s show you how to cut your side-swept bangs:

Prep your hair and cover it up

Before cutting your bangs, you want to ensure that your hair is clean, smooth and free of oil. Wash your hair with TRESemmГ© Platinum Strength Shampoo and Conditioner. This duo fortifies and strengthens hair while leaving it smooth and shiny. These TRESemme Platinum Strength products nourish and make your strands stronger.

Section hair and create a triangle

Clip your hair at the back to keep it in place or tie it into a ponytail as you work on your bangs. Then draw an imaginary triangle from the top of your mane up to your right and left temples. Doing this will ensure that your bangs will be balanced.

Comb and cut

Cut your bangs in the middle and use this as a guide for when you cut your bangs on the sides. Position your scissors horizontally and cut your bangs straight, then comb your hair towards your right side and position your scissors diagonally. Then, cut your bangs downwards and continue to the left side to cut your bangs downwards as well.

Add a bit of texture

Position your scissors vertically and point-cut the tips of your bangs to make your fringe look a little softer. To complete your look and keep flyaways at bay, apply TRESemmГ© Extra Hold Styling Hair Spray to achieve maximum hold and shine.

Now you know how to cut your own side-swept bang. Remember to continue to strengthen your hair with TRESemme Platinum Strength range that will not only keep your hair healthy but give it a sleek, salon finish too.

You’re now ready to rock your gorgeous hair. For more hair care advice, check out these at home hair tips.

How to cut side swept bangs

Introduction: How to Cut Your Own Sidebangs

Welcome to my tutorial! The goal today is to take dull, drab hair and transform it with some sassy, flirty sidebangs. This super easy method takes all of five minutes, but here I’m going to break it down for you, along with some helpful side notes and other options.

Materials Needed: Comb, scissors, clips, mirror, some hair, flat iron/straightener (optional), water bottle (optional).

Preparation: Part your hair down the middle. If you are cutting it wet , make note of your natural texture. Curly hair should be cut longer than desired, otherwise you’re going to have itty bitty curlies right on your hairline. Wavy and straight hair is fine. If you are cutting it dry , flat iron the hair you’ll be cutting. Keep in mind that this will give you more precision, but your bangs may not look exactly the same when you wear your hair natural.

Just as a side note, my mannequin is the CLiC model named Courtney.

Step 1: Create a Triangular Part

It’s important not to make the triangle’s base too wide or too narrow. Your pupil is usually a good guide, but if you’re worried, take a little less hair. You can always cut more off later, but putting it back on costs major mula. Also, don’t make the triangle too tall. If you do you’ll be cutting into your hairstyle, resulting in some serious flyaways and frizzies.

Step 2: Brush Hair to the Opposite Side You Want Your Bangs to Fall

Wait, what? The opposite? Are you sure? Yes, I’m sure. If you want your bangs to go left, brush them right. If you want them to go right, brush them left. This will all make sense in the end, just trust me.

Step 3: Twist and Cut

This step is a teensy bit more complicated than it sounds. Long story short, twist the hair towards the back of the head and cut parallel to your parting line, as shown in the picture.

Why are we twisting the hair? The shortest piece of hair in your sidebangs is the ‘axis’ the hair is twisted on. The longest piece is the one that gets twisted over. The longer the hair travels, the longer it will be after the cut.

What happens if I cut horizontal, instead of parallel? You’ll get a very sharp slant that could look kinda strange, possibly even straight up weird.

What happens if I cut it at the wrong angle? Best case scenario, you get something resembling a blunt cut bang. Worst case scenario, you make an appointment with your local hairdresser and laugh off your mistake.

Where should I cut along the length of the hair? If you want to feature your eyes, cut where my metal clip is. If you want to highlight some beautiful cheekbones, cut around where my blue line is. Anything too much higher than the clip will give you short stubbies. Anything lower will put the bangs in your eyes and draw attention to your nose, which may or may not be good.

Step 4: Marvel at Your Newfound Skill

If you cut it wet, things should be looking pretty fly. If you cut it dry, you may have to wet it down and blowdry it, depending on how unruly your hair is. That’s what I did with Miss Courtney.

Step 5: Style As Desired

You look beautiful! Take a picture and update your facebook. Feel proud as the compliments come flooding in. Courtney here is going on a date so I put her in a trendy (not a Snooki) poof and a twist. I wish I had taken a picture of the twist before I brushed her out. Ah well, hindsight is 20/20.

If you love your new bangs, want to request a tutorial, or have any questions, hit me up and I’ll be sure to answer.

14 People Made This Project!

  • How to cut side swept bangs

How to cut side swept bangs

How to cut side swept bangs

How to cut side swept bangs

How to cut side swept bangs

How to cut side swept bangs

How to cut side swept bangs

How to cut side swept bangs

How to cut side swept bangs

Did you make this project? Share it with us!

Recommendations

How to cut side swept bangs

How to cut side swept bangs

How to cut side swept bangs

How to cut side swept bangs

Remote Control Contest

How to cut side swept bangs

Leather Challenge

How to cut side swept bangs

Tinkercad to Fusion 360 Challenge

How to cut side swept bangs

73 Comments

How to cut side swept bangs

Worked so much better than I was expecting!
Due to lock down i couldn’t go to the salon so I followed this simple tutorial instead, I think it turned out pretty good. First pic is after and the second is before

How to Cut Your Own Bangs: DIY Side Swept Bangs

How to cut side swept bangsWant to learn how to cut your own bangs? Learn how to get professional-looking side-swept bangs in this step-by-step tutorial.

We’re also here to let you in on a little secret: you can cut wispy bangs on your own at home and have them turn out just as good as if you had gone to the salon. Insane, right?

Why pay for a trim when you can get beautiful side swept bangs in the comfort of your own bathroom? This amazing step-by-step guide from Rose Bud will show you how to cut your own bangs!

How to Cut Your Own Bangs: DIY Side Swept Bangs

Step 1. Set Your Hair

How to cut side swept bangs

  1. Start by combing back the hair on your crown.
  2. After doing this, push the rest of your hair back and tie it into a ponytail.
  3. Once you’ve gotten it out of your way, comb the section you’ve designated as your bangs in front of your face.

Tip: Straighten your hair either with a straightening iron or a blow dry before cutting so you know your hair length and tell exactly where your bangs fall.

Step 2. Determine the Length of Your Bangs

How to cut side swept bangsUsing a pintail comb, determine where your bangs will start and end.

If you want traditional bangs, hold the comb vertically and locate the arch of your eyebrow.

For curtain bangs, aim for the point of your chin — this is where your bangs should start. Do the same thing on the other side to determine where they should end.

Tip: Use the tip of your pintail comb to make a straight wedge up your hair from the hairline. Do the same to the other side of the bangs and along the top part of your bangs.

Step 3. Work on Straight Hair Lines

How to cut side swept bangsAfter sectioning out the beginning and end of your bangs, even out the top. You’re essentially looking to create a rectangular shape.

Make sure the wedge on your bangs is only 1-2 inches. You can make your bangs ticker according to your style, but the ideal measurement is 1 to 2 inches max.

Step 4. Tie Your Back Hair Into a Ponytail

How to cut side swept bangs

If the sides and top of the bangs are already even, tie any stray hairs into a ponytail.

This will prevent the hairs from falling back down. Now, comb your bangs again.

Step 5. You’re Now Ready for The Cut

How to cut side swept bangs

Now you’re ready to cut!

Hold your bangs and give it a twist then hold on to it to keep it in place. This twist-and-cut technique is for the right-handed where the left hand can do the job of keeping the hair in place while the right-hand does the cutting.

This avoids any disastrous situations by ensuring the entire section of your hair isn’t cut at an angle. We instead only want to cut small sections at a time, not the whole thing.

Grab your hair where you want your bangs to lie, comb it out, then twist it away from your face. Now, keep a steady hand, and cut down vertically.

Step 6. Redistribute Your Hair Evenly

How to cut side swept bangs

cut your own bangs

After twisting your hair, comb the bangs down and distribute them evenly in your grasp.

You will have to cut at an angle from the right side downwards.

Step 7. Cut Your Hair by SectionHow to cut side swept bangs

Time to make the cut! Use professional hair cutting scissors and hold it at an angle as shown below.

Cut the hair slowly and make sure you open and close the scissors in every cut. Doing one cut is a big no-no; little cuts are always better.

This is especially for those who are learning how to cut side swept bangs for the first time.

Cutting your own hair can be nerve-racking so it’s always best to cut (if possible) a few strands of hair at a time.

Step 8. Cut at an Angle

How to cut side swept bangs

After doing the sidecut, comb the bangs down again, but this time, split them evenly into two parts.

Hold the left side of the bangs down with your scissors pointing up. Cut little by little upward, this is to give the bangs edge and body.

After cutting the first part, move on to the other part. Make sure to be patient as you cut along either side–it is all worth it.

This is how your side-swept bangs should look by now. It shouldn’t look too freshly cut and the cuts should be edgy.

Step 9. Straighten Your Bangs

How to cut side swept bangsAfter the cut, the next thing to do is the style the hair. A great way to style side-swept bangs is to use a straightening iron.

Bump your bangs up by curving your straightening iron in. You wouldn’t want super straight bangs looking too freshly cut

Step 10. Finish it Off with a Hairspray

How to cut side swept bangsFor the finishing touch, take your most trusted brand of hairspray and spray your bangs in place.

And you’re all done! Isn’t cutting your own bangs exciting? But before you become scissor happy and try doing it again, refer to this guide to avoid any mistakes, tears and bad photos.

There you go, DIY stylists! Side-Swept bangs you can proudly wear and declare you cut yourself. Now you know how to get a salon bangs without a huge cut on your paycheck!

Check out the full tutorial below on how to cut your own bangs:

Whatever you want with bangs, whether to make you look younger or to hide your extra wide forehead, you can learn how to cut your own bangs at home. With this step-by-step tutorial, you can cut your bangs at your own phase and just the way you like it. Give expensive hairdressing salons a run for their money with DIY side-swept bangs that rivals the works of professionals!

Recap…

How to cut side swept bangs

Have you tried cutting your own bangs or styling it yourself before?

We’d love to know if this tutorial on how to cut your own bangs helped.

Do share your experience in the comments section below!

Switch up your style with a side fringe.

40 Slides

“Should I get bangs?” It’s a question asked by many women. We’ve all been there — planning a hair change by getting a fringe and then wimping out at the last minute. Just like getting a drastic haircut, cutting your bangs can be a tough decision to make. After all, a fringe can totally transform your look, either for the better or for the worse.

Enter the side bangs. If there’s a fringe style that anyone can rock, it’s the side-swept fringe. It goes well with any face shape (but most especially round faces) and you can wear it at any length, from short to eye-grazing and even down to your jawline. It suits any hair texture too, whether sleek straight, wavy, choppy, or curly. Practical and chic at the same time, side-swept bangs can balance out a wide forehead and provide the perfect finishing touch to any hairstyle.

A hair transformation doesn’t have to mean chopping it all off. Sometimes, all it takes is a small change to your fringe. Take a look at 40 chic styles below.

How to cut side swept bangs

Zendaya’s High Ponytail With Side Bangs

Zendaya pairs a straight high ponytail with sleek side bangs for a perfectly neat look. The fringe is long, ending just above her eyebrow and tucked behind her ear — definitely a clean and elegant way to wear the style.

How to cut side swept bangs

A Guide to the Many Different Types of Bangs

The ways in which you can cut bangs is so vast, so encyclopedic, it could merit its own Dr. Seuss verse. You can chop bangs to frame the eyes; you can sweep bangs to one side. You can wear bangs with a bob; you can wear bangs to your job. (Should we keep going? OK.) You can part bangs right down the middle; you can cut bangs till they’re really little. You can snip bangs to just above your brow; the world is your oyster, do you get it now?

It doesn’t stop there either, you see. Fringe can also vary in length and style — O-M-G. The ends can be blunt, curved, curly, or cropped; there are so many options, in fact, this cut cannot be topped. So, how are you to know which bangs haircut to choose? That’s why we’re here: to do the hard part for you.

No matter your celebrity hair inspo, your face shape, or your reason behind “why,” we’re breaking down every type of bang you could possibly try.

Types of Bangs

  • Arched Bangs
  • Baby bangs
  • “Birkin” bangs
  • Blunt bangs
  • Braided bangs
  • Curtain bangs
  • Curly bangs
  • Layered bangs
  • Micro bangs
  • Retro pinup bangs
  • Shaggy curtain bangs
  • Swoop bangs
  • Wavy bangs
  • Wispy bangs

How to Cut Bangs

We should preface this by saying your first stop to getting bangs should always be to the salon and a hairstylist. This will ensure you don’t botch the ends or cut them too short. That said, if you’re in dire need of a trim, these tips from a pro will help you cut your bangs safely. All you’ll need are sectioning clips, a comb, and hair clipping scissors.

There’s no doubt that sexy side swept bangs are having a moment.

Whether it’s a thick and full fringe like Emma Stone, or something more subtle à la Suki Waterhouse’s wispy fringe, side bangs are everywhere.

But what exactly is a side swept bang?

This hairstyle is achieved with a dramatic side part, a little farther than you would usually part your hair, with the hair then framing your face. As well as looking sexy and trendy, this look is great for hiding fine lines and wrinkle on your forehead.

Who suits a side fringe?

As it subtly frames the face, a side swept bang suits most face shapes and hair colours. People with oval, heart-shaped and long face shapes can all pull off this look. Although those with heart-shaped faces should try and keep the fringe wispier, while people with long-shaped faces should ask their stylist to cut it heavier.

The good news for anyone with a round-shaped face is that this is one of the fringe types that will complement your face. A thick side fringe that is cut an an angle can make round-shaped faces look longer and thinner. If cut the right way, it can also help accentuate cheek bones.

How to cut side swept bangs

Taylor Swift is Queen of the Fringe.

How to style your side swept bangs

Styling a side sept bang is actually pretty easy. If your hair in long then just part your hair slightly wider than usual and blow dry as usual. When it comes to styling your bangs, use a round brush and use a hairdryer to apply heat in a downwards direction.

A natural wave can look cute with this style and add a bit of volume, but a flat iron or straighteners can be used to flatten any unwanted frizz.

Once your side bangs look on point, just spritz a bit a hairspray to keep it in place.

Long hair side swept bangs: Reese Witherspoon

Obviously aware that bangs are flattering on her, the Big Little Lies star has stuck with a fringe religiously throughout her Hollywood career. With beautiful blonde hair, Reese’s long side swept bangs subtly tumble into her wavy hair and perfectly complement her face.

To get this look just blow dry your hair as usual, then use a hair curler to add subtle waves. The bangs can also be finessed with a wand or hair straightener for a sleeker vibe. This style is also super easy to grow out if you go off your bangs.

How to cut side swept bangs

Reese Witherspoon with long hair side swept bangs.

Medium length hair side bangs: Taylor Swift

Over the years, Taylor Swift, has sported more bang types than we can count. Swifty loves a side swept bang and has experimented with a few different types, including a cute medium-length hair look. Taylor’s Swift’s look shows that shorter-haired girls can also rock a cute side bang.

To style this look use a flat iron and then a little bit of wax to secure into place.

How to cut side swept bangs

Taylor Swift with a sleek side fringe.

How to cut side swept bangs

Taylor Swift with a sleek side fringe.

Updo side swept bangs: Dakota Johnson

The 50 Shades of Gray star knows how to style her bangs for an updo to achieve a sultry look. With her long brunette hair swept up, Dakota’s fringe frames her face while the long layers at the side give it a softer look. The look makes her cheekbones pop and is a really pretty look if you can’t be bothered to blow dry the rest of your hair.

How to cut side swept bangs

Dakota Johnson’s updo looks great with bangs.

Curtain side bangs: Alexa Chung

As ever, Alexa Chung is ahead of the curve and is wearing the hairstyle that everyone will soon want. Curtain bangs are completely a thing. By ‘curtains’ we’re not taking Nick Carter in 1995, but more of a subtle fringe part. For this look, your hair needs to be super straight with no cow’s lick, or you’ll forever been trying to flatten them down.

How to cut side swept bangs

Alexa Chung showing how to wear a curtain fringe.

Thick straight hair side bangs: Mandy Moore

Mandy Moore’s sexy bangs prove that girls with very thick hair can still wear bangs. Her medium-length hair looks beautiful parted slightly off centre with tick bangs framing her face.

How to cut side swept bangs

Mandy Moore’s thick hair looks great cut into bangs.

Wavy hair side bangs: Emma Stone

Beautiful Emma Stone always seems to be debuting a new look, but this wavy, choppy style with sweeping bangs is one of our faves. With her hair worn straight, these bangs also show how cute a side fringe can look with a long bob.

How to cut side swept bangs

Emma Stone’s wavy hair with a fringe.

How to cut side swept bangs

Emma Stone with straight hair and bangs.

Wispy side bangs: Suki Waterhouse

Don’t want to commit to a thick fringe? Then Suki’s got your back. The English model and actress has wispy bangs that can either be worn straight down or in a swoop to one side. With shoulder length hair, this type of fringe looks really modern while still being classically pretty.

If you don’t want anything too severe, then show your hairstylist Suki’s photo and emphasis that less is more!

How to cut side swept bangs

Suki Waterhouse with a cute wispy fringe.

Pixie crop side fringe: Michelle Williams

Channeling sexy elf, Michelle Williams is the queen of the pixie crop. She shows that people with short hair can still swoosh their fringe. Michelle’s look is also super easy to style, just blast quickly with a hairdryer and run through a bit of styling wax and you’re good to go!

How to cut side swept bangs

Hairstyle trends may come and go, but side-swept bangs are sticking around. In spite of the best efforts of hair stylists and It girls insisting on the center part, we’re still seeing the side part pop up on runways and in magazines and we like it!

The main question is: how far aside should a side-sweep be?

The styles to try

With the under-cut hairstyle gaining popularity, you can part your side-sweep pretty far over and still be in safe territory. As long as you can see well enough, it’s all a matter of your own personal tastes. We do have a few tips, however, for particularly easy and effective ways to incorporate the side-sweep.

The flip

Separate two-thirds of your hair and flip it to one side, using your fingers to direct it where you want it to go. If you need to, use a little styling putty to keep everything in one place.

The deliberate side part

After you’ve washed your hair, use a tail comb to part your hair really far to one side. One your hair has dried with a side-part, it’ll stay that way until you wash it again.

Bangs only

Part your hair on one side and then use a round brush to blow-dry your bangs in the same direction. Use hairspray to keep them in place.

Faux half-hawk

The side-part is a necessity for this hairstyle. Smooth one side of your hair from front to back and pin in place. Tease the rest of your hair to give it some volume.

How to cut side swept bangs

No matter your texture or length, these side swept bangs are the perfect complement for a sophisticated ‘do. Unlike short or wispy bangs, for example, there’s no commitment to cut your locks as it’s a longer style that casually frames your face, showcasing that inner girl-next-door sweet vibe.

Featuring a side part, you’ll soon discover that long layered hair with side swept bangs is easy to recreate at home in quick steps. Since prep work makes the dream work, it’s necessary to smooth your mane out with an anti-frizz serum – AKA, the MVP of all magic potions.

So, if you have ever wondered how to blow dry side swept bangs in a flirty, feminine way, look no further. We’ll give you the tea to get it, literally, in minutes!

How to cut side swept bangs

Prep your wet hair.

Start with your hair slightly wet, and then apply a serum like Suave Anti-Frizz Smoothing Serum to prep your hair in one simple step. What we love about it? Its lightweight formula will keep frizz under control for 24 hours, making it the ideal product to prep and smooth out your mane without that greasy feeling. Focus on mid-ends, as it’s where we usually need a little bit of extra love!

Are bangs a good idea for thin hair? How can I know if my hair is too thin for bangs? Need new fringe ideas, HELP!

It’s surprising how many girls in the world have difficulty choosing bangs for thin hair. Sometimes this challenge seems to be insoluble, since this hair type is very whimsical, and many girls are wondering how to cut bangs for thin hair. It lacks volume and gets tangled too quickly. However, there are fringe hairstyles for thin hair that can revive your look and add some freshness to it.

Types of Bangs for Thin Hair and Best Banged Haircuts

A fringe is a jewel of many hairdos. There are some kinds of modern hairstyles that require different types of bangs. Let’s sort them out!

1. Side Bangs. Side bangs for thin hair are universal. They can be added to any cut. There’s a tip for this kind of bangs – nearly ¼ of your forehead should be covered with a fringe.

How to cut side swept bangs

3. Wispy Bangs. Wispy bangs for thin hair are always a good idea. They are soft and slightly feathered at the ends. Choose this type of bangs if you don\u2019t want a full thick fringe. Layered wispy fringes suit best women with longer oval faces. \r\n

5. Arched Bangs. Slightly layered arch-shaped fringe like this one will perfectly frame your face. This is a bang style for thin fine hair that looks quite harmonious. \r\n

6. Clip-In Bangs. Classic bangs extensions for thin hair (clip-ins, toppers, etc.) are worth trying if you are not sure if you like wearing your hair with bangs. \r\n

7. Layered Hairstyles. Let\u2019s talk about hairstyles and haircuts for thin hair with bangs. The right hairstyle may be of great help for girls with thin strands. Bangs for thin hair should go well with your face shape. In case your hair is long and thin , consider layers. Medium length hairstyles for thin hair with bangs should definitely involve layers. To complete a layered style, cut face-framing bangs. This hack will also make a round face look slimmer and rather oval than round. \r\n

8. Cascades. These hairstyles create graduation along the entire length. A cascade is a proper haircut for thin curly hair with bangs because it adds volume. A cascade is often completed with a bang up to the eyebrows; it can be straight or side-swept. \r\n

Are bangs a good idea for thin hair? How can I know if my hair is too thin for bangs? Need new fringe ideas, HELP!

It’s surprising how many girls in the world have difficulty choosing bangs for thin hair. Sometimes this challenge seems to be insoluble, since this hair type is very whimsical, and many girls are wondering how to cut bangs for thin hair. It lacks volume and gets tangled too quickly. However, there are fringe hairstyles for thin hair that can revive your look and add some freshness to it.

Types of Bangs for Thin Hair and Best Banged Haircuts

A fringe is a jewel of many hairdos. There are some kinds of modern hairstyles that require different types of bangs. Let’s sort them out!

1. Side Bangs. Side bangs for thin hair are universal. They can be added to any cut. There’s a tip for this kind of bangs – nearly ¼ of your forehead should be covered with a fringe.

How to cut side swept bangs

2. Thick Bangs. Thick bangs for thin hair may appear proper if you choose a blunt bob: with a full fringe and hair cut straight across you can achieve the illusion of denser, thicker hair.

How to cut side swept bangs

3. Wispy Bangs. Wispy bangs for thin hair are always a good idea. They are soft and slightly feathered at the ends. Choose this type of bangs if you don’t want a full thick fringe. Layered wispy fringes suit best women with longer oval faces.

How to cut side swept bangs

4. Thin See-Through Fringe. In case you’re looking for bangs for very thin hair, you should consider such options as see-through front bangs – they’ll add more volume.

How to cut side swept bangs

5. Arched Bangs. Slightly layered arch-shaped fringe like this one will perfectly frame your face. This is a bang style for thin fine hair that looks quite harmonious.

How to cut side swept bangs

6. Clip-In Bangs. Classic bangs extensions for thin hair (clip-ins, toppers, etc.) are worth trying if you are not sure if you like wearing your hair with bangs.

How to cut side swept bangs

7. Layered Hairstyles. Let’s talk about hairstyles and haircuts for thin hair with bangs. The right hairstyle may be of great help for girls with thin strands. Bangs for thin hair should go well with your face shape. In case your hair is long and thin, consider layers. Medium length hairstyles for thin hair with bangs should definitely involve layers. To complete a layered style, cut face-framing bangs. This hack will also make a round face look slimmer and rather oval than round.

How to cut side swept bangs

8. Cascades. These hairstyles create graduation along the entire length. A cascade is a proper haircut for thin curly hair with bangs because it adds volume. A cascade is often completed with a bang up to the eyebrows; it can be straight or side-swept.

How to cut side swept bangs

9. Bobs. Bob hairstyles with bangs for thin hair feature a short back and long front strands. The smooth transition between the lengths is a great choice, as it adds volume and looks very stylish. The bob is one of the fringe haircuts that has many options and can be done with asymmetrical strands.

How to cut side swept bangs

10. Pixies. These are easy short hairstyles for thin hair with bangs. A pixie looks quite feminine yet dashing and even daring. A tousled choppy version of the pixie would suit you if you’re a fan of bold looks.

How to cut side swept bangs

Bangs or no bangs for thin hair – there’s no question if you opt for stylish looks. Bang styles for thin hair can make you more attractive and feminine, and you’ll find an option for each face shape. There are no age criteria for see-through bangs, as different cuts can make you look more youthful or, on the contrary, more reserved. So, don’t be afraid to experiment, especially now, when you’ve got these useful clues!

Reese Witherspoon’s Side-Swept Bangs

How to cut side swept bangs

Bangs. We covet them. Especially long, side-swept bangs that frame the face just so. They grow out beautifully, too, just in case you get sick of them and want a change.

This gallery is dedicated to the side-swept bang. I feature 19 of the best of them, all on celebrities. You’ll learn how to style these bangs, how to get the right cut and much more.

Here, Reese Witherspoon shows off a style with bangs. Witherspoon almost always has bangs. She looks great with side-swept bangs. Also, note how her hair has layers that are tapered along her face.

Some tips if you have bangs or want to get them:

  • Consider the upkeep. Bangs take regular trims. Ask your stylist if they offer free bang trims or learn how to trim your own bangs.
  • Bangs look best on hair that’s naturally straight, but you can pull them off if you have wavy hair and blow them out straight. Bangs do not work well on curly hair.
  • Dry bangs first before drying the rest of your hair. Your bangs are shorter so they dry faster, which is why you want to catch them before they dry all wonky.
  • Once you get the perfect cut, you need to make sure you properly know how to blow dry your bangs. Many, many women suffer from “Bubble Bangs” a bang syndrome that could be avoided if only they put down the round brush and blew their hair dry with a flat or paddle brush. There’s a full report in how to blow dry bangs.
  • You may need a good flat-iron.
  • We love the look of thick, heavy bangs and side-swept bangs. Just avoid the thin, wispy, all-one-length bang — it will make your face look “boxy” and dated. A very hot look right now are thick bangs paired with long, wavy layers. Sexy. (You’ll see pictures in this gallery).
  • Not ready for the thick bangs? Try side-swept bangs paired with long layers. Layering hair with bangs works best because it’s less boxy while allowing your hair to grow out without looking too extreme if you decide to grow out the trend.

Bangs Paired With Long, Blonde Hair

How to cut side swept bangs

I happen to love long, side-swept bangs. Why? Here’s why:

  • Unlike blunt bangs, side-swept bangs don’t need to be trimmed every couple weeks. You get them cut and they grow out beautifully.
  • They suit every face shape. Not all bang hairstyles do. But these? Oh yes , you can wear them and so can everyone else you know. They also suit every hair length. They work with pixie cuts, short hair, shoulder-length, bobs and even long hair.
  • They hide a big forehead. Not that you have one, but I do.
  • They never go out of style. You will never, ever see a list of “beauty trends we wish would die off” with side-swept bangs listed on them.

Delta Goodren

How to cut side swept bangs

Note the side part here on Delta Goodren. Her side-swept bangs work perfectly with her long wavy hair. The key to this look is to have long layers cut into your hair. This look is best on women with thick hair — finer hair will fall flat.

Marion Fedder’s Gorgeous Side-Swept Bangs

How to cut side swept bangs

Marion Fedder has a deep side-part in this picture. The bangs sweep over her forehead beautifully. This look is great for covering up a large forehead and works on hair that’s straight and fine.

Helena Christensen’s Thick, Side-Swept Bangs

How to cut side swept bangs

I have a lot of hair, but it’s thin. So I am envious of women with thick hair, like Helena Christensen here. Her bangs are thick and lush, unlike my wimpy ones which tend to stick to my forehead in hot weather.

If you have thick, naturally wavy hair, as Christensen does, you can wear bangs, you just need to be careful that they aren’t too heavy and thick. Your stylist can remove some of the bulk with a razor.

Emma Stone’s Long, Side-Swept Bangs

How to cut side swept bangs

One of the secrets to a great side-swept bang is that it blends in well with the rest of your hair.

To achieve this look, ask your stylist to cut long bangs at an angle. Once cut, the secret to styling these bangs is to blow-dry them. Brush bangs forward and blow dry them as if they were blunt bangs. Brush them from side to side as you blow dry.

Once dried, spritz hairspray on your fingers, then comb your fingertips through your bangs to maintain this lovely feathery effect.

Sideswept Bangs

How to cut side swept bangs

Why get bangs? Bangs are the great camouflage of the hair world. They can hide a large forehead and even a short one. They cover up fine lines and scars. They can immediately shave a few years off a look and transform a boring long hairstyle into something that looks purposeful. They bring attention to the eyes. They frame a face.

They are the perfect choice for a woman who wants to change her look but doesn’t want to take off dramatic length. A few snips and you can look like an entirely different person.

And if you hate them or tire of them eventually, they grow out. Perfection.

Brittanie loves sharing her knowledge on natural health and beauty.

How to cut side swept bangs

Learn how to cut side-swept bangs.

Matthew T Rader via Unsplash

Cutting my own bangs sounded really intimidating at first. I was sure that I was going to butcher them and end up having to wear a hat for weeks! My hair is a very big deal to me, probably a bigger deal than it should be.

Even though I thought I was going to mess up I still wanted to learn how to do it myself, so I spent hours reading books and articles watching videos, and talking to the retired hairstylists in my family to soak up as much information as I could before trying it out.

To my surprise, the paranoia and research paid off. My first try was a complete success. I have been able to maintain my own side-swept bangs for quite some time now and have even moved on to some other styles. The point is that it looked really challenging, and I was nervous, but it is actually really simple. If I can do it, anyone can; you just need some basic information first.

How to cut side swept bangs

You’ll need a fine-toothed comb and hair-cutting scissors.

What You Need

Before you get started, make sure that you have everything you need:

  • Comb: In my experience, a fine-toothed comb works best.
  • Hair-cutting scissors: Use special hair-cutting scissors, not just any plain old scissors you can find. Using dull or the wrong kind of scissors can mess up your hair completely. They don’t have to be expensive, just made specifically for cutting hair.
  • Hair tie: This is used just to keep the rest of your hair out of your face. You do not want the rest of your hair getting mixed up with your bangs while you are cutting them.
  • Mirror: Just be sure you have a decent clean mirror that is big enough for you to see what you are doing.
  • Chair (optional): I like to sit in a chair or on the counter when cutting my hair. I am more relaxed this way and focus more on my hair than on moving around.

Where to Begin

These first steps and tips will help you get ready.

How to cut side swept bangs

We’ve hit peak D.I.Y., people: From artisanal fluffy coffee to sourdough bread (didn’t you get the memo? You bake now) to eyebrow microblading dupes, it seems like everyone’s jumping on the next viral lockdown challenge. For this tutorial, however, we’re going back to basics—we’re talking OG, Day-One, life-skill classic here—by, drumroll, showing how to cut your bangs at home. Finally, the answer to the question of all ages—nay, the Holy Grail of D.I.Y. hair care—literally at your fingertips. Because we’re all in this together, and our own regrowth is beginning to scare us as well.

On that note, if you’re like us, you’ve A, probably spent 83% of your waking hours asking yourself if you should get bangs (BTW, mostly go for it—unless you’re two bottles of cabernet deep, in which case it’s a hard no and please phone a friend instead for said existential crisis); and B, hey, it’s a great skill to have in your arsenal just in case.

Even if most stylists offer a complimentary fringe trim, knowing how to cut your own bangs properly can save you a tedious trek to the salon and also prove valuable in times you just need a quick refresh.

How to cut side swept bangs

So if you must go on this journey, reader, we’re with you and are here to help you do this right. We spoke with one of our resident hair experts, Unilever In-House Stylist Bailey Pope, to take us through the steps and make sure no

are harmed in the process. “If you can no longer hold out for your stylist, there are a couple of ways to maintain your fringe,” she assures. “Whether you have full bangs or a sweeping, short-to-long fringe, we all know how wrong at-home trims can go—as shown by a quick search on YouTube!” Read on for her easy, YouTube-mishap-proof tips:

How to Cut Your Own Bangs, by Bailey Pope as told to All Things Hair

How to cut side swept bangs

What you need:

  • A comb
  • Sharp scissors (“Scissors that aren’t sharp will make it nearly impossible to get a clean shape,” Bailey warns)
  • Clips

How to cut side swept bangsThe sharper, the better.

What to remember:

  • Clips are important, as they help section hair on each side of your fringe and ensure you don’t alter the amount of hair you want in your fringe
  • Whether you’re going for full bangs or a sweeping fringe, don’t pull hair with much tension; this causes hair to travel further than it would when it lies as normal and you run the risk of cutting it too short!
  • Cut hair after drying and styling as you usually would. Wet hair can shrink up after drying, again increasing the risk of going too short.

How to cut side swept bangsWe love a full, fluffy fringe. Photo credit: indigitalimages.com

How to Cut Your Own Bangs: Full Fringe

Step 2: Section out your pre-existing fringe and use clips on each side to isolate longer hair away from the bang area.

Step 3: Comb straight down and pinch with your index and middle finger sitting on the bridge of your nose, leaving ½ to 1 inch of hair to go past your fingers.

Step 4: With scissors at a 45-degree angle, create a straight line using uniform small “point cuts,” (Ed’s note: or small vertical cuts “into” hair to texturize and lightly remove bulk from the tips) following your current shape, a.k.a. the last shape your stylist created on you, as your reference. See how Bailey does it in the video above!

How to cut side swept bangsPoint-cutting hair involves holding your scissors at an angle and cutting “into” the ends.

Step 5: Comb down and use your fingers to loosen up your fringe to assess length.

Step 6: If you need to go shorter, move up ¼ to ½ inch and repeat. Note: It’s easier to take a few inches off little by little as you need it than to go all too short at once!

How to cut side swept bangsA side-swept fringe is a great lower-maintenance (and super versatile!) bang option.

How to Cut Your Own Bangs: Sweeping or Side-Swept Fringe

Step 1: Wash, dry and style as usual.

Step 2: Section out your pre-existing fringe and use clips on each side to isolate longer hair away from the bang area.

Step 3: Comb hair to where you wear it on a normal day to identify the existing shape of your fringe line.

Step 4: Comb hair to get it sitting uniformly.

Step 5: Hold your fingers parallel to the shape of the pre-existing line.

Step 6: With scissors at a 45-degree angle, create a straight line using uniform small “point cuts,” following your current shape, a.k.a. the last shape your stylist created on you, as your reference.

Step 7: Comb down and use your fingers to loosen up your fringe to assess length.

Step 8: If you need to go shorter, move up ¼ to ½ inch and repeat. Note: It’s easier to take a few inches off little by little as you need it than to go all too short at once!

Ed’s note: Once you have your ideal length, having the right products to keep your fringe looking fresh and full is key. We love the light refresh our bangs get with a midday spritz of TRESemmé Clean Pro Pure Dry Shampoo on the root. Now that you know how to cut your own bangs at home, good luck and get ready to enjoy those fringe benefits!

  1. How to Do a Shingle Haircut Step-by-Step
  2. How Do I Blunt Cut My Hair?
  3. How to Layer the Sides of Hair
  4. How to Cut Piecey Hair
  5. How to Keep Your Bangs From Separating

How to cut side swept bangs

A cowlick is a deviation in the hair that causes the hair to lay in several different directions at once. Cowlicks are most often seen at the crown of the head or near the forehead. If you have a forehead cowlick, cutting bags can be tricky. However, there are several techniques to use to make having bangs look natural. Always work with the inclination of the hair for best results. Always cut longer and trim to shorter to avoid creating the world’s shortest bangs.

Wash the hair, allowing it to dry naturally. Brush out the hair and observe the natural placement of the cowlick along the forehead where it will effect bang placement. Part your hair along the cowlick whether it is in the middle or side of the forehead.

Place your fingers at the edges of your eyebrows. Grasp some hair between your index fingers and middle fingers. Look to see where you will want to cut. Depending on where the cowlick hits, you will create straight bangs or side bangs.

Use a comb to make a sharp division along the finger part line. Pin back the rest of the hair with hair clips and brush the bang hair straight over the eyes.

Wet the hair using a water-filled spray bottle. If the hair starts to dry while you are still cutting, spray the hair again.

Pull the hair straight to the middle of the forehead if you want straight bangs. Angle the side edges of the bangs in toward the bridge of the nose. Cut the bangs to be a little past the eyebrows. Allow the bangs to fall against the forehead and trim any hairs that you missed.

Pull the bangs to one side for side-swept bangs. Hold the hair straight along the side of the head. Trim the bangs along the cheekbone for long bangs. Trim along the eyebrow for short bangs. Typically, side bangs are longer and typically are no shorter than cheekbone length. Trim any hairs that you missed to create the shape you want.

Are your bangs a little too grown out and look like shit, or you are in desperate need of a change and decided on going for bangs vs new boobs? While I’d never discourage someone from seeing a professional hair stylist, these tips will help you out if you’re in a pinch!

Step 1: Prep Hair & Find Existing Bangs or Create Triangular Part

How to cut side swept bangs

I recommend using professional scissors. Here you can purchase some professional Hair Cutting Shears / Scissors with adjustable tension and finger inserts.
For starters: make sure your hair is dry and brushed . For obvious reasons, having a massive tangle will mess up the desired end result. Now that your bangs are fully dried and brushed, let’s carry on.

I had preexisting bangs, so I simply found and separated those from the remainder of my hair.

For the brave souls embarking upon a fresh set, or those whose existing bangs are long gone, they will need to create a triangular part as you see in the picture.

I tend to sweep my bangs over my left eye to cover a nasty scar, therefore, the triangle comes out of that side part. See and examine photo, carefully.

It is important not to make the triangle’s base too wide or too narrow, but if you’re worried, take a little less hair since you can always cut more. Also, do not make the triangle too tall. No more than 2 inches, otherwise you will end up cutting into your hairstyle and you’re bangs will be too thick.

Again, use the above photo as a reference.

Step 2: Brush Bangs to Opposite Side You Want Them to Fall

How to cut side swept bangs

Yes, the opposite side. Since I want my bangs to fall over my left eye, I brushed them over my right eye.

Step 3: Cut Hair below Fingers

How to cut side swept bangs

Alright, Edward Scissorhands, now is your time to shine. Using your fingers, pull bangs to the opposite side you intend to wear them and then cut in a straight, even line below where your fingers are holding them.

Regarding length, this is a personal preference but I decided to cut mine right below my cheek bone.

Pulling and cutting them on the opposite side results in the angle required for side swept bangs.

Step 4: Push Back to Side You Want to Wear Them

How to cut side swept bangs

After cutting your side swept bangs, sweep those babies back to the side you intend to wear them.

You should now notice the angle, which I mentioned in the previous step. The bangs near the center of the face are shorter and become gradually longer as they reach the side of my face.

Step 5: Cut Upwards into the Bangs

How to cut side swept bangs

Since we cut the bangs in a straight line, they are a little too ‘perfect.’

Pull your bangs to the front and cut upwards, into the bangs to break up the straightness of the line.

Obviously you do not want to overdue this step.

Step 6: Examine Result of Cutting Upwards into the Bangs

How to cut side swept bangs

This is the result of cutting upwards into the bangs. You should notice the line is not as straight and looks a little more ‘worn in.’

Step 7: Round Brush and Style

How to cut side swept bangs

Using a round brush and heat from a hair dryer, brush bangs to the side you want them to fall and hold handle up higher (as pictured) to get them to ‘swoop’ across your face.

Step 8: Enjoy Your Bangs and Live Well

How to cut side swept bangs

Once they’re all blow dried and round brushed out, you should be able to tell if they are satisfactory, if not, cut upwards into the bangs a few more times.

Apply a little product or hair spray if you want, and get out there and flaunt your brand new, side swept bangs!

Like this article? Make sure to sign up for the BAS mailing list so you never miss a goddamn thing!

How to cut side swept bangs

As a cosmetologist, one concern I hear over and over again is that people really want to try side swoop bangs, but they don’t want to have to come get their bangs trimmed every 3 weeks to maintain them. I usually teach them a few tricks to help them maintain the look so that they don’t need to come back until they need a full haircut. I wanted to have some side swoop bangs before I going to Snap, so of course, I decided to take pictures along the way so that you can ALL know how to cut your own side swoop bangs at home!

How to cut side swept bangs

Before you start, be sure that your bangs are dry and straight. If you cut them while they are wet, bangs tend to shrink a little when they dry and they become shorter than you had originally planned. NOT good!

How to cut side swept bangs

Follow along with me through these pictures.

1. Part off as much hair as you want included in your bangs. If you want them to be thin, don’t take as much hair. If you want thick bangs, take a bigger section of hair. Keep in mind what your hair texture is like when choosing. My hair is thick, so a medium/thicker bang works well with my hair.

2. Choose where you want your bangs to hit on the side of your face.

3. Brush the section of hair you are working with to the opposite side of your face (Random information: This is also known as taking it across the street in beauty school). Put your fingers where you want your bangs to hit when you pull that hair back over to where you want them to be.

4. Using your fingers as a guide, cut your hair along where your fingers are, keeping your hair pulled the opposite direction that they will be. I like to point cut my bangs, meaning that I don’t cut straight across. I hold the scissors up and down and cut that way. It makes for a less dramatic line. Keep in mind, that could be a little more advanced and could be dangerous to cut towards your fingers. BE SO CAREFUL not to cut your fingers! You can also just cut straight across if that is easier/safer for you.

5. Brush your bangs over to where you want them to be. Style them how you want them.

All done! Enjoy your beautiful side swoop bangs!

I know you will LOVE these other great hair tutorials too! Click on the photos to take you to these posts…

All Fashion Style

  • How to cut side swept bangsPUT YOUR POST TITLE HERE
    PUT SOME DESCRIPTION OF YOUR POST HERE
  • How to cut side swept bangsPUT YOUR POST TITLE HERE
    PUT SOME DESCRIPTION OF YOUR POST HERE
  • How to cut side swept bangsPUT YOUR POST TITLE HERE
    PUT SOME DESCRIPTION OF YOUR POST HERE

How To Cut Side Swept Bangs

How to cut side swept bangs

If you are searching for a new hairstyle that will make your look more current, consider some of the hottest stars on the red carpet this season and go find a stylist who knows how to cut side swept bangs. You can create many different styles with this look and go from young and funky looking to sophisticated and sleek.

Today’s fashion is all about individual style, about having the freedom to enter the board room and the night club touting the same great looks and it be completely acceptable. Side swept bangs are easy to cut and easy to maintain.

When you go to your stylist, he or she will wet or wash your hair before they begin your cut. Whether you want your hair cut long or short on the sides and back, these stylish fringe styled bangs will give you a contemporary, in fashion look.

Your bangs will be wet before they are cut. They will be combed straight down to check for length and ensure accuracy in cutting. The stylist will run their fingers along the bangs to make sure they are even when they begin cutting them. Your stylist may first cut your bangs with cutting shears or they may use only a pair of texturizing shears.

You will find it easy to care for and keep your new hair style if you follow a few simple rules. Always start with clean hair. Find a shampoo and conditioner that work well for you and stay with it. Do not use too much styling product. Remember to treat your hair kindly. Protect it from the sun and wind and heat styling and no matter what style you wear, you will have great looking hair.

This will give you the choppy yet wispy look you are trying to get. It is important to always find a stylist who knows how to cut side swept bangs as well as all modern cuts for you to look your best.

Love Story, cute sweet love Story, Romantic friendship Story to say to someone. Largest collection of best and famous Story about love, very sweet and best love Story to say to a best friend to someone special.

How To Cut Side Swept Bangs

How to cut side swept bangs

If you are searching for a new hairstyle that will make your look more current, consider some of the hottest stars on the red carpet this season and go find a stylist who knows how to cut side swept bangs. You can create many different styles with this look and go from young and funky looking to sophisticated and sleek.

Today’s fashion is all about individual style, about having the freedom to enter the board room and the night club touting the same great looks and it be completely acceptable. Side swept bangs are easy to cut and easy to maintain.

When you go to your stylist, he or she will wet or wash your hair before they begin your cut. Whether you want your hair cut long or short on the sides and back, these stylish fringe styled bangs will give you a contemporary, in fashion look.

Your bangs will be wet before they are cut. They will be combed straight down to check for length and ensure accuracy in cutting. The stylist will run their fingers along the bangs to make sure they are even when they begin cutting them. Your stylist may first cut your bangs with cutting shears or they may use only a pair of texturizing shears.

You will find it easy to care for and keep your new hair style if you follow a few simple rules. Always start with clean hair. Find a shampoo and conditioner that work well for you and stay with it. Do not use too much styling product. Remember to treat your hair kindly. Protect it from the sun and wind and heat styling and no matter what style you wear, you will have great looking hair.

This will give you the choppy yet wispy look you are trying to get. It is important to always find a stylist who knows how to cut side swept bangs as well as all modern cuts for you to look your best.

Tuesday, July 13, 2010

How To Cut Side Swept Bangs

How to cut side swept bangsIf you are analytic for a fresh hairstyle that will accomplish your attending added current, accede some of the hottest stars on the red carpeting this division and go acquisition a stylist who knows how to cut ancillary swept bangs. You can actualize abounding altered styles with this attending and go from adolescent and blue attractive to adult and sleek.

Today’s appearance is all about alone style, about accepting the abandon to access the lath allowance and the night club touting the aforementioned abundant looks and it be absolutely acceptable. Ancillary swept bangs are accessible to cut and accessible to maintain.

When you go to your stylist, he or she will wet or ablution your beard afore they activate your cut. Whether you appetite your beard cut continued or abbreviate on the abandon and back, these beautiful binding styled bangs will accord you a contemporary, in appearance look.

Your bangs will be wet afore they are cut. They will be combed beeline bottomward to analysis for breadth and ensure accurateness in cutting. The stylist will run their fingers forth the bangs to accomplish abiding they are alike back they activate acid them. Your stylist may aboriginal cut your bangs with acid shears or they may use alone a brace of texturizing shears.

You will acquisition it accessible to affliction for and accumulate your fresh beard appearance if you chase a few simple rules. Consistently alpha with apple-pie hair. Acquisition a absterge and conditioner that assignment able-bodied for you and break with it. Do not use too abundant administration product. Remember to amusement your beard kindly. Protect it from the sun and wind and calefaction administration and no amount what appearance you wear, you will accept abundant attractive hair.

This will accord you the inclement yet chiffon attending you are aggravating to get. It is important to consistently acquisition a stylist who knows how to cut ancillary swept bangs as able-bodied as all avant-garde cuts for you to attending your best.

  1. How to Cut Chinese Bangs
  2. How to Part Cornrows Straight Back
  3. How to Do a Beehive Braid Style for a Sew-In
  4. How to Wear a Maang Tikka
  5. How to Keep Your Bangs Straight

How to cut side swept bangs

Having a fringe or, as they say in America, bangs can make a woman look ultra mysterious and sexy. It can also help hide zits or a high forehead. Layered bangs take it a step further- framing your face to create an even more alluring look. Getting a hairstylist to cut bangs for you can be pricey. Here are some tips on how to do it yourself.

Wash your hair. Use shampoo and conditioner. Towel-dry.

Brush your hair thoroughly. Get out all the knots and tangles. If you do not untangle your hair and you start cutting bangs, they will come out crooked.

Stand in front of a large mirror and make a part in your hair. It can be a center part or a side part. Choose a part that you will wear most often. Make sure it is even. The best way to do this is to brush your hair back evenly and see where your hair parts naturally, then smooth it further with your fingers.

Brush a few strands of your hair all the way in front over your forehead evenly to create a thin fringe. Make sure the bangs are evenly distributed along your forehead. In other words, they should incorporate even bits of hair from both temples.

Cut and brush more strands of hair evenly from both sides of the front parts of your hair to thicken your front bangs as much as you want. The farther back they start, the thicker your bangs will be. They should begin about 1 or 2 inches in front of the middle of the top of your head.

Add layers to your bangs by cutting more strands of hair from your hair in front, only this time make each strand that you cut longer and longer than your front bang until the longest strand falls a few inches past your ears.

Hot men’s hair styles haircuts including mens short hairstyles, mens medium hairstyles, mens long hairstyles, celebrity, young styles, curly haircuts, mohawk, wavy hair, straight hair, classic cut, modern, latest hairstyles, punk hair.

How To Cut Side Swept Bangs

Hair Mens Styles, Mens Hairstyles, Mens Haircuts

How to cut side swept bangs

How To Cut Side Swept Bangs

If that you are searching for a new hairstyle which will make your glimpse much more current, look at some of the hottest stars on the red carpet this season and go discover a stylist who knows tips on how to cut side swept bangs. You are able to create a lot of distinct styles with this glance and go from young and funky searching to sophisticated and sleek.

Today’s fashion is all about individual model, about having the freedom to enter the board room as well as the night club touting the same great looks and it be totally acceptable. Side swept bangs are painless to cut and simple to maintain.

When you go to your stylist, he or she will wet or wash your hair ahead of they begin your cut. Whether you want your hair cut long or short on the sides and back, these stylish fringe styled bangs will give you a contemporary, in fashion glance.

Your bangs will be wet prior to they are cut. They might be combed straight down to check for length and ensure accuracy in cutting. The stylist will run their fingers along the bangs to be sure they’re even when they start cutting them. Your stylist may well very first cut your bangs with cutting shears or they may possibly use only a pair of texturizing shears.

You may get it painless to care for and keep your new hair design should you follow a few basic rules. Continually start with clean hair. Discover a shampoo and conditioner that work well for you and stay with it. Don’t use too much styling product. Remember to treat your hair kindly. Protect it from the sun and wind and heat styling and no matter what type you wear, you may have good seeking hair.

This will provide you with the choppy yet wispy seem you might be trying to obtain. It is significant to normally get a stylist who knows ways to cut side swept bangs too as all modern cuts for you to glimpse your very best.

a large directory about hairstyles,fashion,celebrity and celebs

Tuesday, July 13, 2010

How To Cut Side Swept Bangs

How to cut side swept bangsIf you are analytic for a fresh hairstyle that will accomplish your attending added current, accede some of the hottest stars on the red carpeting this division and go acquisition a stylist who knows how to cut ancillary swept bangs. You can actualize abounding altered styles with this attending and go from adolescent and blue attractive to adult and sleek.

Today’s appearance is all about alone style, about accepting the abandon to access the lath allowance and the night club touting the aforementioned abundant looks and it be absolutely acceptable. Ancillary swept bangs are accessible to cut and accessible to maintain.

When you go to your stylist, he or she will wet or ablution your beard afore they activate your cut. Whether you appetite your beard cut continued or abbreviate on the abandon and back, these beautiful binding styled bangs will accord you a contemporary, in appearance look.

Your bangs will be wet afore they are cut. They will be combed beeline bottomward to analysis for breadth and ensure accurateness in cutting. The stylist will run their fingers forth the bangs to accomplish abiding they are alike back they activate acid them. Your stylist may aboriginal cut your bangs with acid shears or they may use alone a brace of texturizing shears.

You will acquisition it accessible to affliction for and accumulate your fresh beard appearance if you chase a few simple rules. Consistently alpha with apple-pie hair. Acquisition a absterge and conditioner that assignment able-bodied for you and break with it. Do not use too abundant administration product. Remember to amusement your beard kindly. Protect it from the sun and wind and calefaction administration and no amount what appearance you wear, you will accept abundant attractive hair.

This will accord you the inclement yet chiffon attending you are aggravating to get. It is important to consistently acquisition a stylist who knows how to cut ancillary swept bangs as able-bodied as all avant-garde cuts for you to attending your best.

How to cut side swept bangs How to cut side swept bangs How to cut side swept bangs How to cut side swept bangs How to cut side swept bangs

How to cut side swept bangs How to cut side swept bangs How to cut side swept bangs How to cut side swept bangs How to cut side swept bangs

How to cut side swept bangs How to cut side swept bangs How to cut side swept bangs How to cut side swept bangs How to cut side swept bangs

How To Cut Side Swept Bangs

How to cut side swept bangsIf you are analytic for a fresh hairstyle that will accomplish your attending added current, accede some of the hottest stars on the red carpeting this division and go acquisition a stylist who knows how to cut ancillary swept bangs. You can actualize abounding altered styles with this attending and go from adolescent and blue attractive to adult and sleek.

Today’s appearance is all about alone style, about accepting the abandon to access the lath allowance and the night club touting the aforementioned abundant looks and it be absolutely acceptable. Ancillary swept bangs are accessible to cut and accessible to maintain.

When you go to your stylist, he or she will wet or ablution your beard afore they activate your cut. Whether you appetite your beard cut continued or abbreviate on the abandon and back, these beautiful binding styled bangs will accord you a contemporary, in appearance look.

Your bangs will be wet afore they are cut. They will be combed beeline bottomward to analysis for breadth and ensure accurateness in cutting. The stylist will run their fingers forth the bangs to accomplish abiding they are alike back they activate acid them. Your stylist may aboriginal cut your bangs with acid shears or they may use alone a brace of texturizing shears.

You will acquisition it accessible to affliction for and accumulate your fresh beard appearance if you chase a few simple rules. Consistently alpha with apple-pie hair. Acquisition a absterge and conditioner that assignment able-bodied for you and break with it. Do not use too abundant administration product. Remember to amusement your beard kindly. Protect it from the sun and wind and calefaction administration and no amount what appearance you wear, you will accept abundant attractive hair.

This will accord you the inclement yet chiffon attending you are aggravating to get. It is important to consistently acquisition a stylist who knows how to cut ancillary swept bangs as able-bodied as all avant-garde cuts for you to attending your best.

How to cut side swept bangs

How to cut side swept bangs

  • FACEBOOK
  • PINTEREST
  • EMAILSHARE

How to cut side swept bangs

Simon Lekias / Getty Images

If we were to pinpoint one downside to bangs, it’s how high-maintenance they are. Whether you’ve maintained the style for a trendy moment or your day-to-day routine, bangs are a commitment. We know the struggle of looking in the mirror just four weeks after getting bangs, stunned to find that what was once a smooth, sharp cut is now an uneven fringe that’s inhibiting your eyesight. And because making frequent trips to the salon just to get a bang trim is unattainable for most, we’re giving you a helping hand. We spoke to hairstylists Jamie Wiley and Nunzio Saviano for a beginner’s guide to trimming the perfect fringe. Keep reading for a step-by-step breakdown of how to cut your own bangs at home.

Meet the Expert

  • Jamie Wiley is a celebrity hairstylist and the artistic director for Pureology. She is based in Elizabethtown, KY at Salon HP.
  • Nunzio Saviano is a celebrity hairstylist in New York City at Nunzio Saviano Salon. He launched “Oxilogica,” a haircare and scalp treatment line.

What You’ll Need:

  • Professional shears
  • Fine-tooth comb
  • Rat-tail comb
  • Alligator clips
  • Anti-frizz cream
  • Leave-in spray
  • Hairspray

Prep Your Hair

” data-caption=”” data-expand=”300″ data-tracking-container=”true” />

After you have gathered all of the necessary tools, Saviano suggests starting on freshly shampooed hair. This will ensure there is no buildup on the hair. “Apply an anti-frizz blow-dry cream before drying bangs using a boar hair round brush,” he says. “I suggest the Time-Release Anti-Frizz Cream ($28), a lightweight, hydrating, anti-frizz blow-dry cream that protects the hair from thermal heat damage and offers conditioning benefits.”

“Create a triangle from one corner of the eye to the other. The center should be one-and-a-half to two inches. Wrap the triangle hair around a boar bristled brush for tension, blow-dry toward the face, and let it fall naturally,” says Saviano.

Section Off Your Hair

” data-caption=”” data-expand=”300″ data-tracking-container=”true” />

Wiley advises, “Always cut your bangs dry, as this is when they are in their most natural state. When your hair is wet, it has the ability to elongate and stretch so when it does dry it will shrink causing your bangs to appear shorter than you desired.”

Now that your hair is completely dry, use a comb to precisely section off the hair you don’t want to cut. Pull this hair back in a ponytail or pin it up with bobby pins. Only your bangs (or soon-to-be bangs) should be left loose and in the shape of a triangle.

“If you are cutting curly hair, the key is prepping hair with a treatment mask like Pureology’s Hydrate Soft Softening Treatment ($38) so that the hair is intensely moisturized. Be sure to rinse out thoroughly and air dry to get your hair in its most natural curl state,” Wiley says.

Love Story, cute sweet love Story, Romantic friendship Story to say to someone. Largest collection of best and famous Story about love, very sweet and best love Story to say to a best friend to someone special.

Saturday, July 10, 2010

How To Cut Side Swept Bangs

How to cut side swept bangs

If you are searching for a new hairstyle that will make your look more current, consider some of the hottest stars on the red carpet this season and go find a stylist who knows how to cut side swept bangs. You can create many different styles with this look and go from young and funky looking to sophisticated and sleek.

Today’s fashion is all about individual style, about having the freedom to enter the board room and the night club touting the same great looks and it be completely acceptable. Side swept bangs are easy to cut and easy to maintain.

When you go to your stylist, he or she will wet or wash your hair before they begin your cut. Whether you want your hair cut long or short on the sides and back, these stylish fringe styled bangs will give you a contemporary, in fashion look.

Your bangs will be wet before they are cut. They will be combed straight down to check for length and ensure accuracy in cutting. The stylist will run their fingers along the bangs to make sure they are even when they begin cutting them. Your stylist may first cut your bangs with cutting shears or they may use only a pair of texturizing shears.

You will find it easy to care for and keep your new hair style if you follow a few simple rules. Always start with clean hair. Find a shampoo and conditioner that work well for you and stay with it. Do not use too much styling product. Remember to treat your hair kindly. Protect it from the sun and wind and heat styling and no matter what style you wear, you will have great looking hair.

This will give you the choppy yet wispy look you are trying to get. It is important to always find a stylist who knows how to cut side swept bangs as well as all modern cuts for you to look your best.

Side-swept pixie haircuts are the latest trend in women’s hairstyles. They work best on those with fine hair because they have a natural tendency to fall flat against the side of your head. The side bangs can be parted in many ways and can be as long or short as you prefer. This is the ultimate guide to getting this haircut style for you!

How to cut side swept bangs

The Side Swept Pixie Haircut

Table of Contents

Is it a very popular hairstyle for women? It is the latest trend in haircuts that can be worn as everyday do, or with some barbering to appear more formal and professional.

– The side swept pixie haircut has bangs that sweep from one side of the forehead to across the other side, while still staying fairly short on top. This creates a framing effect around your entire face so you look young and fresh!

– Side swept pixie haircuts are often cut with layers throughout because they give them their fullness back after being scissor cut off during styling. These layers will also create volume if you have fine hair which won’t hold its weight well without some help getting it up into place

How to Style the Side Swept Pixie Haircut

– Launch a side swept pixie haircut with layers by separating the hair on your head into two sections.

– Twist one section of hair and clip it to the back of your head, away from your face.

– Wrap the other half around to create some volume in front. Secure it at the nape of the neck or topknot for extra hold if needed.

– Finish up by spritzing hairspray over all strands from root to tip before releasing them down onto your shoulders and framing that stunning new look!

What Products to Use for Your Side Swept Pixie Haircut

– Use a volumizing mousse.

– Blow-dry the hair upside down to create volume and use a round brush at the roots.

– Add some texturizing powder for more texture and lift in stubborn areas.

– Finish with hairspray, but finish off by combing through with your fingers too – this will help tames flyaway and stray pieces of hair that won’t stay put!

what products to use for side-swept pixie haircuts? Volumes with mousse blow-dry upside down, add texturizing power, and spray it all out from loose locks into shapely waves.”

Where to Get Your Next Professional Cut if You Want One Done Professionally

How to cut side swept bangs

– The best part about the side-swept pixie haircut is that you can go to your local salon and have a professional cut it for you.

– If this interests you, make sure to do some research on stylists in your area who know how to handle tricky hair types like curly, frizzy, or thinning hair.

Key Takeaways: While I don’t recommend cutting your hair because of its often difficult texture (which leads me into my next section) if you want an even more dramatic look than what’s already been described then take someone else with experience and trust their opinion! It’ll be worth it in the end when all those compliments start rolling in from friends and family members alike. These are just a few

What You Need for a DIY at Home Cut

The side swept pixie haircut is not for the faint of heart. It may seem like a simple hairstyle on paper, but in reality, it’s probably one of the most complicated cuts to get without experience. You need someone who knows what they’re doing and can have patience with you as you find your style and grow into this new cut. The good news there are some things that anyone can do at home if their hair starts growing out too long or needs a touch-up before heading back to the salon

Conclusion

There are many ways to get the side-swept pixie haircut, but we’ve found that this guide is a helpful place to start. The key components of the side-swept pixie cut include an angled fringe and long bangs parted in one direction or another depending on your preference. Remember to always maintain a facile hairstyle with plenty of conditioners for those who have finer hair!

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

Posted on Last updated: April 10, 2021

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

Is your cream cheese frosting runny? No need to throw it out! Here are a few ways you can thicken it up in no time at all. You don’t even need powdered sugar or cornstarch to thicken your icing!

Runny Cream Cheese Frosting? Here’s How To Fix It

1) Add more cream cheese to the frosting: If your frosting is still too thin despite adding some cream cheese, add more until you achieve the desired consistency.

2) Mix in sour cream, milk, or yogurt: If you want to make your frosting lighter and less sweet, just mix in some sour cream or yogurt for a milder flavor.

3) Add flour: If you want your frosting to be fairly thick, just add a little flour. This works pretty well and you can easily get a fluffy consistency. Add a small amount at a time while stirring until you reach desired consistency.

4) Add more powdered sugar: If your frosting is still runny after trying the above steps, add in more powdered sugar until it has the right texture.

5) Beat it: If your frosting is too thin, you can just beat the frosting for a few minutes at medium-high speed until it has the correct texture.

6) Use a different cream cheese: Using a different brand of cream cheese or one with a higher fat content may result in a thicker consistency. Try a different type next time to see what kind of results you get and if they are thicker.

Does cream cheese icing harden?

The answer is yes. Cream cheese icing can become hard and almost solid after being refrigerated. To re-soften, allow cream cheese icing to sit at room temp for an hour or place in an oven heated to 200 F for a few minutes.

Can I leave cream cheese out overnight to soften?

No, you shouldn’t leave cream cheese out overnight. Cream cheese could possibly grow mold or bacteria. It is better to soften cream cheese on the counter for a couple hours at most before using.

How long can you store leftover cream cheese frosting?

Cream cheese frosting should be stored in an airtight container and in the refrigerator. Leftover cream cheese frosting can last up to five days in the refrigerator.

What best thickens cream cheese frosting?

Overall powdered sugar or cornstarch are the most commonly used cream cheese frosting thickeners but if you don’t have either of those I would recommend using more cream cheese or a small amount of all-purpose flour.

Why is my cream cheese frosting grainy?

This is most likely because you didn’t whip the frosting enough or fast enough when adding in more powdered sugar to thicken your cream cheese frosting. To fix this, beat the frosting on medium-high speed for a few minutes until your desired consistency is achieved.

Why does your cream cheese icing separate?

If the ingredients were not brought together cold enough or over mixed, the fat and liquid components of your cream cheese icing could separate.

Why is my cream cheese frosting gummy?

In order for an icing to be smooth and free from lumps, it needs to be mixed for at least five minutes. Cream cheese Icing takes a little longer to mix than other frostings because of the softer consistency.

Can cream cheese frosting go bad?

Yes, but only if it is kept at room temperature. Store it in your fridge for up to five days.

Conclusion

If you follow the above steps, your cream cheese frosting should be thick and fluffy! It may take you a few tries to get it exactly right, but that’s okay, just keep trying and you’ll learn how to change it up a bit.

If you have ever made cream cheese frosting, you may have noticed that it sometimes turns out a little runny.

This can be frustrating, especially if you are trying to make a beautiful cake or cupcake.

In this blog post, we will explore the reasons why cream cheese frosting is sometimes watery and how to fix it.

We will also discuss some tips for thickening cream cheese frosting without cornstarch. So, whether you are a beginner baker or an experienced pastry chef, read on for some helpful tips!

Why is Cream Cheese Frosting Runny or Watery?

There can be several reasons why cream cheese frosting turns out watery.

It could be due to the high moisture content in the cream cheese used, which makes it difficult to achieve a thick consistency with other ingredients like sugar and butter.

If you are using Philadelphia cream cheese, try to use the block rather than the tub or spread which tends to have higher moisture.

The quality of the cream cheese brands matters too.

Some brands have more moisture than others, so it is important to do your research and find a brand that you trust. The maximum moisture allowed by FDA is 55% by weight (1). Also, the stabilizers selection play an important role to keep the fat and water content from separating for a longer shelf life and better quality.

One reason for runny may be that the cream cheese was not at the correct temperature before you started to make the frosting.

If the cream cheese is too cold, it will be difficult to mix and will result in a thin consistency or lumpy as explained here. It is best to use cream cheese that has been at room temperature for about 30 minutes before you start making the frosting.

Another common reason why cream cheese frosting can be runny or watery is if there was too much liquid in the recipe.

For example, this may happen if you add too much milk or cream to the frosting.

A third reason may be that the recipe was not correctly proportioned. In particular, if there is too much sugar in comparison to the amount of cream cheese, then the frosting will likely be watery or runny.

Lastly, freeze-thawing the cream cheese will form ice crystals that draw the water content out of the cheese, end up with a grainy texture.

So, avoid freezing the cream cheese if possible.

How to Fix Runny Cream Cheese Frosting?

One way to thicken your runny cream cheese frosting is by adding butter and/or powdered sugar to it.

Use a ratio of one tablespoon per cup, then mix until smooth before adding more as needed until you achieve desired consistency.

You can also add cornstarch to thicken the frosting without making it too sweet by using a ratio of one tablespoon per cup and mixing thoroughly before adding more/less depending on taste preference (and thickness desired).

Another option is beating in confectioners’ sugar, starting with just a few tablespoons at first until the desired consistency is reached.

If you are using a stand mixer, be sure to use the paddle attachment as opposed to the whisk attachment which will create more air in the frosting and make it less dense (and runny).

Lastly, if your cream cheese frosting is too thin, try refrigerating it for 30 minutes or so before frosting your cake or cupcakes.

This will help thicken up the consistency and make it easier to use for decorating purposes!

How do you Fix Runny Cream Cheese Frosting Without Cornstarch? (Or sugar)

If you don’t have cornstarch, there are a few other ingredients that can be used to thicken cream cheese frosting.

One option is using all-purpose flour. Start by mixing one tablespoon of flour with two tablespoons of water until smooth, then add this mixture to the frosting while beating it at medium speed.

Another option is using instant pudding mix. Just follow the instructions on the package to create a thickener, then add it to your frosting and beat until smooth.

Lastly, you can also use ground nuts like almonds or cashews. Add one cup of ground nuts to the frosting and mix until well combined. This will help thicken up the consistency without adding any additional sweetness.

If your frosting is still too thin after following these steps, try refrigerating it for 30 minutes before frosting anything else! You’d be surprised how much that can help with the thickness and stability of cream cheese frostings in general (and when they’re over-thinned).

Final Thought

The best way to make your cream cheese frosting thicker is by using a high-fat content brand of cream cheese. Only then will you be able to achieve the right consistency without adding too much sugar or liquid into the mix.

If the cream cheese frosting is too thick, add a little milk or cream until it reaches the desired consistency.

So there you have it – a few tips and tricks on how to fix runny cream cheese frosting! Now go forth and make some delicious desserts with your newfound knowledge…

When you’re baking, it’s better to start out with an extra thick frosting, because it is easier to thin out. This is not to say that you cannot thicken frosting, because you can.

However, it is more difficult to do. Thick frosting is great for most baking, and you need a thick buttercream frosting in order to have a solid and well-built cake.

Nobody likes runny frosting, and a firm royal icing is just as important as a thick buttercream frosting.

In this article, we are going to be showing you how to thicken frosting without ruining it. Let’s get started!

What Is Frosting?

Frosting is the sugary, creamy icing that is on top of cakes, cookies, and lots of other baked goods. Frosting is the thick and fluffy icing that will make or break a great cake.

Royal icing, buttercream frosting, and cream cheese frostings are some of the most common frostings.

However, Swiss meringue frosting, Italian meringue frosting, and French buttercream frosting are also just as popular in the prestigious baking world.

How Do You Make Perfect Frosting?

For this purpose, we are going to tell you how to make perfect vanilla buttercream frosting.

The key to great buttercream is butter, more butter, and butter! Jokes aside, whipped butter, with powdered sugar is the way to achieve the perfect consistency of buttercream.

Adding butter to sugar is always delicious, but powdered sugar and butter is what makes the perfect frosting.

To make perfect consistency frosting, use an electric mixer, or even a hand mixer. This will get all the air into your cream frosting, meaning it will be light and airy.

Additionally, make sure that your butter is softened. If your butter is soft, you can gradually add the sugar, without the frosting becoming curdled. Nobody wants warm frosting, so softened butter that is not warm is the key to great buttercream.

Whip the frosting fast, on a medium speed for around eight minutes. When the butter is ready for its desired consistency, add your confectioners sugar. This should always be sifted into the frosting.

How To Thicken Frosting

So, now we know how to make the perfect buttercream, how can you actually thicken frosting?

How To Thicken Buttercream

If your frosting is too runny, it will slide off the cake, and it will not be a spreadable consistency. We need frosting to be thick and firm.

To thicken buttercream, let your buttercream sit in the fridge, making sure to tightly cover the top with plastic wrap. This will help it firm up, and form a hardened skin.

If the frosting has not thickened after being in the fridge, add some more confectioner sugar. Add the ingredients gradually, otherwise it will become clumped. Making frosting is pretty simple, and you need to reach the desired thickness.

How To Thicken Royal Icing

Royal icing is often used on cookies, but you need it to be smooth and thick, Raw egg whites are the key to royal icing, but so is confectioners sugar.

To thicken royal icing, add more sugar, or add corn starch. This will thicken it up. Also, give it time to thicken in the fridge, making sure to tightly cover the top with saran wrap.

Other Popular Ways To Thicken Frosting

What is the best way to thicken frosting? Well, there are many types of frosting, and ways to thicken each. For example, thickening cream cheese frosting is different from thickening whipped cream frosting.

Add Flour

A popular way to thicken frosting is by adding flour. You can use all purpose flour as thickening agent for frosting, but it needs to be cooked. Add flour whilst using an electric mixer or whisk.

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

Add Meringue Powder

Meringue powder is sweet, and is typically used for buttercream. Add meringue powder to buttercream, spoonful at a time. This will thicken up runny frosting.

Add Butter

Butter is an obvious choice for thickening frosting. Although more powdered sugar may be the obvious choice, sometimes butter is better.

To thicken runny icing, add softened butter, one spoon at a time. Continue doing this until it has reached its desired consistency.

Add Unflavored Gelatin

Unflavored gelatin will act as a thickener for frosting, and you should add two spoons at a time. Gelatin acts as a thickening agent, so it should be thicker than using additional sugar.

Add Cream

If you need your frosting firm, add whipping cream to whipped cream frosting, or just regular frosting. Whipping cream will thicken frosting naturally, making frosting thicker.

Try using heavy whipping cream or heavy cream, too. Heavy cream is often the same as whipping cheap, and the more whipping cream, the thicker the icing! Avoid sour cream, as this tastes weird.

How Do You Thicken Cream Cheese Frosting?

Cream cheese frosting is a popular frosting, especially for chocolate cakes or carrot cakes. Cream cheese frosting will differ in its thickness depending on how warm the icing is.

Warm icing is not firm, but cream cheese needs to be softened to be whipped. The best way to thicken a runny cream cheese frosting is to put it in the refrigerator, and let it firm up.

If this does not work, grab a mixing bowl, and add more sugar. When it comes to using the piping bag, you will see that cream cheese frostings are a lot thicker.

You can try adding butter, arrowroot starch, or more powdered sugar to your cream cheese frosting. Thick frosting is the perfect accompaniment to your favorite cakes.

Final Thoughts

Thickening frosting is more difficult to do than thinning out frosting, but with our tips and tricks, you will have no issues.

Thickening agents are necessary for thickening icing, and using things such as heavy cream, softened cream cheese, and more powdered sugar, will make your frosting thicker than ever.

Thank you <% member.data['first-name'] %>.
Your comment has been submitted.

What 3 Others have said

Put a bit of cornflower into the cream cheese, not too much. Have a look at the recipe for Guinness Cake. They’ve updated the recipe, it never used to have cornflower in it.

This has happened to me many times and I have found two solutions. If possible try to source ‘block’ cream cheese which has a lower water content this is what most recipes are based on, whether they mention this fact or not! It’s the most common kind in the USA. In the U.K. you can sometimes get it in Lidle or similar shops selling Eastern European produce. If you can’t find any, decant a tub of cream cheese into a muslin and hang it for 20 minutes or so. A surprising amount of water drains off and what’s left is much thicker and less likely to liquefy. If it’s too late and your mix is already runny, you can add 50-100ml double cream and whip vigorously. The thickening cream starts to thicken the mixture – this can take a few minutes. Keep adding cream a glug at a time and whipping untilit thickens to a spreadable/pipable consistency. It doesn’t alter the taste much and saves you throwing out your icing. For very large batches you’ll need more cream to get the ratio right.

This will work every time: beat sugar and room temp butter FIRST until smooth and creamy, in a magimix or with a beater, and only then add COLD cream cheese until just mixed and your icing will not be runny. It does not have to be Philly, but full fat.

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

To decorate your baked goods like cookies, cakes, cupcakes, muffins or any other sweets, a perfect glazed creamy frosting is all you need. So it is a very important step to thick the frosting as thin frosting you cannot cover well the baked items with.

To have the desired appearance of your dish mostly for cupcakes and cakes thin frosting cannot satisfy you either. But there is nothing to be worried about as several ways we will give you on ticking frosting right here.

Ingredients you need:

  • Cornstarch
  • Gelatin
  • Powdered Sugar
  • Coconut
  • Butter
  • Flour
  • Meringue Powder

Frosting with cornstarch

Before start adding the cornstarch to thin frosting, it is better to grind it in an electric grinder which helps it to be a soft powder and much easier for you to mix it in your base ingredient.

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

The benefits of doing this are your frosting never form small clumps.

  • Add a small amount of cornstarch around 1/2 tablespoon and stir it with 1or 2 tablespoon of milk.
  • Give it a good whisk with your frosting until the cornstarch gets commended well with the frosting mixture.
  • Let it rest for a while doing this your frosting will become more firm and there you have the thicken frosting.

Frosting with Gelatin

Gelatin is also a good agent that helps your frosting get thicken.

  • Add around 1 or 2 tablespoons of plain flavorless gelatin with ½ tablespoon of cold water and mix it well until the gelatin dissolves.
  • Take your frosting and add the gelatin and keep stirring.
  • After giving the mixture a good mix, refrigerate your frosting to get thicken.

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

Frosting with powdered sugar

Powdered sugar is the easiest way and the most common ingredient that is used to thicken the frosting. Especially if your frosting is made with cream cheese or buttercream it works the best for both.

It is very necessary to choose a bowl with depth where you will mix all the ingredients. If you have an electric mixer then it will be a great help just in case you don’t have it or the mixture is not working use a spatula as an alternative.

  • Take a bow and place all the required ingredients you need for a basic frosting recipe including sugar, milk, cream cheese, butter, meringue powder.
  • Next step is to whisk all the ingredients together using an electric beater or a spatula. Continue doing it until the frosting get the perfect smoothness
  • Add ½ cup of powdered sugar per batch while mixing it is recommended. By doing this the runny frosting will get more thicken and will reach the consistency level to your desire.

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

Frosting with coconut

Coconut is another good ingredient you can make your frosting thicken with. If your frosting requires the flavor of coconut then using it is absolutely a good choice as shredded coconut helps the frosting get thicken.

  • Place your frosting in a bowl then add 1 tablespoon of coconut at a time and give it a good mix.
  • Keep gradually adding 1 tablespoon of coconut at a time until the frosting reaches the thickness you want.

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

Frosting with whipped cream

For cupcakes and cakes, a fluffy frosting or icing is very important. So here whipped cream comes out a great help to make the frosting perfectly thicken.

Be sure you take a very cold whipping cream not melted before you start of whisking it. If the whipped cream is runny and to melted leave, it to chill thoroughly.

  • Place your frosting in a bowl and add around 3 to 4 tablespoon of chill whipped cream to it.
  • Whisk the frosting well using an electric beater or spatula. Check the consistency and pour some more whipped cream until it gets firm and frothy
  • You can also add 1 to 2 tablespoon of cornstarch which makes the frosting more stable.

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

Frosting with butter

Butter is a great thickening agent when the ingredient of your frosting is already butter

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

Experience the world of cake decorating like never before with Cake Central Magazine!

When you purchase a digital subscription to Cake Central Magazine, you will get an instant and automatic download of the most recent issue.

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

How Do I Make Strawberry Cream Cheese Icing Thicker?

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

I’ve been having the toughest time trying to create a thick strawberry cream cheese icing. Of course once I put it in the refrigerator/freezer it thickens up but once I pipe it onto the cupcakes it only stays thick for about an hour and then it starts to melt. The recipe consist of strawberry puree, cream cheese, powdered sugar, butte and strawberry extract (optional).

I feel like I have to add so much powdered sugar for it to get a thick consistency but by me adding so much sugar it takes away from the fresh strawberry taste. Any suggestions on how to thicken the frosting?

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

Well, I know what you mean. Tried so many recipes also. I just was this recipe, but the pic doesn,t look so thick. I have ordered some freeze dried strawberries. saw recipes where the people that uses these in their cakes and frosting are raving about using them . so google cakes with freeze dried strawberries. I order blueberry and raspberry also. just haven,t used them yet.so look at this recipe,

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

AYou could try adding pulverized freeze dried strawberries. You’ll get more strawberry flavor without adding moisture.

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

Okay thanks I will try that this weekend.

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

I add dream whip to frosting that I want to thicken up.

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

  • Pin
  • Share
  • Email

I’ve heard it said that one can never have too many friends, and I’ve found the same to be true of cream cheese frosting. There are versions for every occasion—sometimes I want an icing with plenty of butter for structure (like the Cream Cheese Buttercream from my cookbook, BraveTart: Iconic American Desserts); in other cases, I’m more inclined to reach for a fluffy frosting like this one that I can whip up in no time flat.

Easy Cream Cheese Frosting

The traditional method is to simply beat cream cheese and powdered sugar together until smooth, but this tends to produce a frosting that’s runny and thin, as cream cheese itself doesn’t aerate well. It can be made thick and light by increasing the powdered sugar, but at the cost of its flavor and texture, as the excess sugar makes it unbearably sweet and a little gritty, too.

So, when I want a no-fuss frosting in a hurry, I take an entirely different approach, ditching the powdered sugar for a combination of granulated sugar and cream.

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

The cream dissolves the sugar into a totally grit-free foundation, then whips up thick and light, whether you use a hand mixer or a stand mixer (we recommend the KitchenAid Pro Series mixer). In turn, the sugar protects against over-whipping, allowing me to chuck in cold cream cheese a few tablespoons at a time—no waiting around for it to soften. The cream cuts through the density of the cream cheese, aerating it so it’s firm and light.

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

Along the way, this frosting tends to appear slightly curdled, but it’s not! The “curds” are simply tiny bits of cream cheese that have yet to be homogenized, and they’ll disappear soon enough, so keep whipping until the frosting forms a thick and creamy mass. The occasional fleck of cream cheese may slip through, but these bits will disappear on their own in time.

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

Because it’s whipped, this frosting doesn’t feel heavy or dense even when served straight from the fridge; its cool, creamy consistency will melt in your mouth just like a spoonful of cheesecake. My approach uses roughly 70% less sugar than a recipe based on powdered sugar, meaning that this frosting behaves more like cream cheese, giving it a wonderful stability.

As a test, I piped the frosting on a few cupcakes and left them sitting out on the corner of my kitchen range, where they were exposed to the heat of my oven and stovetop running full blast all day. (Those recipes for panna cotta and roasted-cherry ice cream don’t test themselves.) Though the ambient temperature continued to rise, the frosted cupcakes looked as perky as ever, so I decided to continue the test by leaving them out overnight.

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

I fully expected them to ooze into a puddle by morning, yet I found them none the worse for wear. If anything, losing its cool had made the frosting feel even richer and creamier on my tongue.

This isn’t to say I recommend leaving frosted cupcakes out all day in the sun—only that this whipped cream–based frosting is sturdier than you’d expect. That means it’s great for picnics, potlucks, and any other laid-back, casual occasions when cakes deserve an amazing frosting without any fuss.

*This post may contain affiliate links. Please see my disclosure for more details!*

An Easy How-To Guide on How to Make Homemade Cream Cheese Frosting! Another in my series of Back to Basics!

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

This is probably a first on my blog – a complete and utter how-to guide, on just a frosting. Not even a cake itself! Don’t worry, I will be doing more classic ‘Jane’ style recipes, but things like Cream Cheese Frosting need their own post.

Cream Cheese frosting, in case you weren’t aware, is a mixture of butter, sugar, and cream cheese. Occasionally, like with this one, some other bits will be added in… but those are the basics.

The reason I thought that Cream Cheese Frosting needed its own post, is because it can be infuriatingly annoying to make, especially when you live in the UK. If you don’t understand how on earth it could be a problem… just believe it’s true.

Cream Cheese in America for example, comes in two forms. Spreadable, and a block. When Americans then make cream cheese frosting, they use the block form. It has a lot less water in it, it’s a hell of a lot firmer, and it’s perfect for the job.

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

When you live in the UK? We only have spreadable. Spreadable cream cheese is what we use for cheesecakes, so I can’t be sad about it… but my god I wished we had a block version. Like so much.

So! When it comes to making Cream Cheese Frosting in the UK… it’s difficult. I have had a few recipes on my blog now, with slightly different methods on how to make it, and yeah… they will all be replaced with this version now.

The reason cream cheese frosting can be so difficult, is when the cream cheese is beaten on it’s own, it gets runnier. It’s not something that thickens up really. This isn’t helped by the added water content that you can sometimes see, and sometimes not see inside it.

I tend to stick to using Philadelphia full fat original cream cheese, because I find it works best. The cream cheeses in Aldi and Lidl are also good.. but for example, other supermarket own cream cheeses have a lot more water just floating on the top.

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

When you open up a tub, sometimes you can see a little water just sort of sitting there, but if you actually got your cream cheese, and squeezed it through a muslin cloth, a lot more can come out. This is the killer. However, if you use a good quality cream cheese, you don’t HAVE to remove it. It’s just something that could be good to do if you usually struggle with cream cheese frosting!

When it comes to the butter for cream cheese frosting, just like ANY OTHER FROSTING, you want to use actual real butter. The butter tubs you get too spread on your toast on the morning, is not real butter. The kind you want is wrapped in foil, and is absolutely solid when you get it out of the fridge.

You want to use real butter, as once that is cold again, it’s much much firmer. It will help the cream cheese frosting so so much. The only thing though is you have to make sure it’s at room temperature to make the frosting, otherwise it could go lumpy.

For the icing sugar… you just need icing sugar. There isn’t anything fancy here – I personally use Tate & Lyle at the moment because it’s my personal favourite, but any will do. The vanilla is also optional, but I just love the little vanilla bean specks through the frosting!

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

When it comes to making the cream cheese frosting – you have to find the happy medium between beating it enough, and not over beating. I was genuinely shocked and surprised that this worked SO WELL. You can see from the photos just how thick and lovely it is!

You want to beat your equal amounts of butter and icing sugar together until light and fluffy. For a typical American buttercream you would use double the icing sugar to butter, but this time you want equal. The amount you want is based on the amount of cream cheese you have. You want to keep on beating it till it’s really lovely, before you go anywhere near adding the cream cheese!

Say you have 300g of cream cheese, you want half the amount for the butter and sugar. Therefore, you want 150g of Unsalted Butter, and 150g of Icing Sugar. If you have 250g of Cream cheese, you want 125g of butter and sugar. Make sense? I hope so!

Once the buttercream has been beaten for at least 3-4 minutes, and is light and fluffy and smooth, you add in the cream cheese. If there is a lot of water on the top, you want to get rid of that, but generally I don’t squeeze it out.

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

Add in the cream cheese, and vanilla, and using the beater (not the whisk), you beat the mixture together. I use colder cream cheese, not room temperature, and it can look a little funny at first. Beating them can make it seem like there are lumps, but just keep on beating. I beat mine for about two minutes, and suddenly the lumps disappeared and the frosting thickened up beautifully.

My past recipes, and lots of other recipes can sometimes suck – and now I realise why. The order of the ingredients was wrong, the ingredient quantities was wrong, and so on! Honestly, this cream cheese frosting is life changing.

I will say though, I will never call this foolproof. I don’t believe any cream cheese frosting is foolproof – because sometimes it will go wrong. Too much water in the cream cheese, the wrong butter as people won’t read my notes on using the correct butter, different mixers etc. However, it’s damn close!

If you have any problems with the frosting – please comment below! Sometimes, as I have mentioned, it will still end up runny. There isn’t much you can do about runny cream cheese frosting once it’s got to that stage.

Adding more icing sugar won’t help the situation – but you can probably still use the mix in something else! Make some cream cheese truffles, or use the mix in an ice cream or something – it definitely won’t go to waste! Just try your best to use the correct ingredients, and try and use an electric mixer if you can! Happy cream cheese frosting making! x

Keep adding cream a glug at a time and whipping untilit thickens to a spreadablepipable consistency. Heres How To Fix It 1 Add more cream cheese to the frosting.

How to thicken cream cheese frosting
Cinnamon Zucchini Cake With Cream Cheese Frosting Recipe Nom Nom 3 Bizcocho Reposteria Budin

To cut down on the.

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

How to thicken cream cheese frosting. As the fats from the cream cheese and butter cool the frosting will change consistency and become much thicker. 2 Mix in sour cream milk or yogurt. You only need a few simple ingredients to make cream cheese icing.

Of course once I put it in the refrigeratorfreezer it thickens up but once I pipe it onto the cupcakes it only stays thick for about an hour and then it starts to melt. How to Thicken Cream Cheese Frosting. Sprinkle an additional 1 to 2 Tbsp 15 to 30 ml into the frosting and mix well.

You can also add meringue powder to thicken the frosting and keep it stable. If it is Philly then the fridge and icing sugar should save it if it is not then dont bother. How do you thicken cream cheese frosting.

If you want your. How do I make my cream cheese frosting thicker. Give it an hour in the fridge to see if.

Too densethick for a light-textured cake- how do I make it fluffier. If your frosting requires the flavor of coconut then using it is absolutely a good choice as. Add a little cocoa powder or melted chocolate to taste for Chocolate Cream Cheese frosting.

Mix cream cheese with butter make sure the butter isnt too soft. If playback doesnt begin. If its too late and your mix is already runny you can add 50-100ml double cream and whip vigorously.

Next add the confection sugar the vanilla and lemon juice. Most frostings contain powdered sugar or icing sugar and the most common way to thicken a. Butter cream cheese lemon juice vanilla powdered sugar and just a little pinch of salt to carry the flavors.

Of powdered sugar but you can certainly use less down to as little as 2 c if you like a less-sweet thicker firmer more cream cheesey frosting. Try using proper cream cheese rather than Philadelphia or equivalent. Ive always used 3-12 to 4 c.

Add more powdered sugar. No extra powdered sugar required. The easiest way to thicken up cream cheese frosting is to pop it in the refrigerator.

Stir the cream cheese frosting and continue to add more powdered sugar until the desired consistency is achieved. The best way to thicken cream cheese frosting is to refrigerate it for 5-10 minutes. You want the cheese and butter to mix but it must be some what firm.

T Im making red velvet cupcakes but the cake parts came out really soft and delicate so the typical dense homemade cream cheese frosting seems too heavy for them especially since I. There are several solutions to restore the thick texture to your cream cheese frosting. If you want to make your frosting lighter and less sweet just mix in some sour.

Look up cream cheese frosting recipes to give you an idea of quantities. Add more icing sugar do it bit by bit. Its sometimes called curd cheese and is much thicker.

Or if youre using low fat make sure youre using full fat. How to Thicken Cream Cheese Frosting – YouTube. The BEST Cream Cheese Frosting Recipe – Just 5 Ingredients.

Powdered sugar to the mixture. Hold it over a bowl or sink and apply pressure and watch liquid drip out. Most frostings contain powdered sugar and the most common way to thicken a runny frosting is by gradually mixing in a bit more powdered sugar to offset the liquid ingredients.

To this add 1 block of cream cheese. Heavy cream to the mixture. If playback doesnt begin shortly try restarting your device.

To drain scoop out your cream cheese onto the centre of a square of muslin cloth. Adding Dry Thickening Ingredients 1. But the way they are put together can make all the difference.

Gather up the cloth and twist it like you would the top of a piping bag. The thickening cream starts to thicken the mixture – this can take a few minutes. Start with soft butter.

Add more icing sugar do it bit by bit. HOW TO MAKE CREAM CHEESE FROSTING. Cream cheese frosting can vary in consistency based on temperature.

If your frosting is still too thin despite adding some cream cheese add more. The recipe consist of strawberry puree cream cheese powdered sugar butte and. Mix in a bit of meringue powder alongside the powdered sugar.

As the butter cools itll help firm up the frosting. The BEST Cream Cheese Frosting Recipe – Just 5 Ingredients. Only add the sugar a little at a time.

Dont over mix with a hand mixer or youll wind up with thin icing. I got about 30ml out of mine. Coconut is another good ingredient you can make your frosting thicken with.

Oh or make a small quantity of butter cream and add the runny mess to that. Cream cheese frosting. Ive been having the toughest time trying to create a thick strawberry cream cheese icing.

How to thicken cream cheese frosting
Perfect Cream Cheese Frosting Recipes Cream Cheese Frosting Frosting Recipes Cream Cheese Frosting Recipe

How to thicken cream cheese frosting
Cream Cheese Cool Whip Frosting Recipe Recipe Desserts Cool Whip Frosting Frosting Recipes

How to thicken cream cheese frosting
Whipped Cream Recipe 3 Ways Regular Stabilized Cream Cheese Whipped Frosting How To Cool Whip Icing Recipe Recipes With Whipping Cream Whipped Frosting

How to thicken cream cheese frosting
Cream Cheese Pudding Cool Whip Frosting Annette S Recipe Whipped Frosting Cool Whip Frosting Frosting Recipes

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

​I love baking cupcakes and I take a special interest in topping them with different frosting designs and flavors. If you’re a baker like me, there’s a big chance that you’ve encountered a batch of runny frosting before. Thin frosting is very hard to add on cupcakes because they tend to fall off or not spread evenly.

Getting the right frosting consistency is important if you want to come up with the perfect batch of cupcakes to serve at parties or as simple desserts after meals. Today, I will share different ways on how to thicken frosting, depending on the type you’re serving and the available ingredients you have in your kitchen.

Things You Need

Ingredients:

There are many thickening agents you can choose from, depending on the type of frosting you need to fix. The most common one is powdered sugar, although some bakers prefer cornstarch because it doesn’t add any flavor to the frosting.

You can also use meringue powder or heavy cream to make your frosting thicker. Butter is often used to thicken cream cheese frosting and Italian buttercream.

While flour is technically another thickening agent, you should only use it for cooked frosting. Raw flour tastes weird, so don’t use it to thicken cold frosting.

Equipment:

  • Bowl
  • Electric or hand whisk or mixer

Procedure

Option 1: By adding powdered sugar

Powdered sugar is the most common thickening ingredient for frosting. This is because most frosting is composed largely of sugar to begin with.

It is important to add just the right amount of sugar because most frostings are already sweet. Adding too much sugar might make your frosting too thick or too sweet. When this happens, you will need to add more liquid into the frosting, which defeats the purpose of adding the thickening agent in the first place.

I recommend adding ½ cup of powdered sugar per batch. Mix the frosting well using a hand whisk or electric mixer until the frosting sticks to the whisk instead of falling off.

Optional: Add meringue powder

An optional step is to add meringue powder to balance out the sweetness of the powdered sugar. Meringue powder does not have its own taste so you can safely add it to make your frosting thicker.

As a baseline, add 1 to 2 teaspoons of meringue powder for every ½ cup of powdered sugar. If you’re using less than half a cup of sugar, then you can just leave out the meringue powder altogether.

Option 2: By adding cornstarch

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

​Some bakers prefer using cornstarch because it doesn’t add any taste to the frosting. I personally like using this for frosting that are already on the super sweet side.

Before mixing in the cornstarch with your thin frosting, you may want to grind it in an electric grinder first. This helps to further break it down into a soft powder and makes it easier to mix it in your base ingredient. This also prevents it from forming small clumps all over your frosting.

Add ½ teaspoon of cornstarch into a bowl of frosting and whisk it by hand or by an electric mixer. Add another ½ teaspoon if you still find the frosting’s consistency a bit thin for your taste.

Option 3: By adding heavy whipping cream

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

If you need a fluffy frosting for your cupcakes or as icing on a cake, then you may want to use heavy whipping cream as a thickening agent.

To do this, add 3 to 4 tablespoons of the cream into your bowl of frosting and whisk with an electric mixer. Check the consistency and add more, preferably at 1 tablespoon increments, until the frosting becomes light and frothy.

Option 4: By adding butter

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

​Butter is another great thickening agent, especially if your frosting already has butter as an ingredient.

Add 1 tablespoon of butter at a time and mix well with a hand whisk or electric mixer. To make it easier to mix in, allow butter to soften slightly before adding it to the frosting. Don’t let it melt though!

Don’t worry if the consistency of your frosting doesn’t immediately improve. Butter usually liquefies when exposed to heat, so you may want to refrigerate your frosting for a few minutes to allow the butter to properly set in.

Option 5: By adding flour

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

​If you’re cooking frosting and it turns out to be a bit runny, you can add flour into the pot to make it thicker. Remember, however, that flour only works as a thickening agent when you’re making warm frosting because it tastes weird when it is not cooked properly.

Add 1 to 2 teaspoons of flour into the warm frosting and stir slowly over low heat for a few minutes. Once you notice that the frosting is starting to thicken, remove the pot from the stove and let it cool to room temperature.

Conclusion

Nobody likes runny frosting on their cupcakes, and these options will help you make sure this never happens. But don’t limit yourself to the options I listed above. There are other thickening ingredients you can use – you just need to check what’s available in your kitchen!

Is this article helpful? Do you have a favorite way of making frosting thicker? Please share them in the comments’ section below. I’d like to hear more about it! And don’t forget to share this article and my tips with your baker friends.

Say goodbye to runny frosting and hello to thick, fluffy ones!

Share on:

Sharing is caring!

  • Share
  • Tweet
  • Pin

Learn to make the best cream cheese frosting with my proven tips and troubleshooting guide for light and fluffy frosting that’s thick enough to pipe. *Video tutorial is included!

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

Table of Contents

Why you’ll love this recipe:

This cream cheese frosting is my absolute favorite frosting ever! In my book, a good cream cheese frosting should be:

  • Smooth and creamy
  • Light and fluffy
  • Not overly sweet
  • With a slight tang
  • And thick enough to pipe

Ingredients you need:

  • Cream cheese – It’s important to use the “right” type of cream cheese for proper consistency. You need a brick-style, full fat, plain block of cream cheese for sturdy thick frosting.
  • Butter – I recommend unsalted butter, so you can control the saltiness. If you need sturdier, more stable frosting, you may increase the butter amount up to 1.5 cups. That way you’ll get more like a cream cheese buttercream, which is still delicious.
  • Powdered sugar – Don’t be surprised by low amount of sugar in my recipe compared to the most recipes online. It’s no mistake, but you’ll still get the most delicious frosting, which is still plenty sweet!

The “secret” to perfectly smooth frosting is softened cream cheese and butter. Cold cream cheese will yield lumpy frosting.

Simply take cream cheese and butter out of the fridge for 1-2 hours in advance.

How to make this frosting:

It’s really quick and easy to make this frosting.

  1. Beat cream cheese and butter on medium high speed until nice and fluffy for about 2 minutes.
  2. Add powdered sugar and stir on low speed until incorporated. Then increase the speed to medium high and whip until smooth and fluffy.
  3. Add salt and vanilla extract and whip for another 30 seconds or so.
  4. And voila! Frost your cakes or cupcakes right away, or refrigerate it until ready to use.

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

Troubleshooting Common Issues

And before you make your frosting, read through the following troubleshooting guide to avoid any mistakes that could ruin your work without salvage.

What causes runny cream cheese frosting:

  • Make sure to use full fat, brick-style cream cheese, because brick-style cream cheese has lower water content, which is crucial for a thick frosting. Reduced fat or low fat cream cheeses or cream cheese spreads contain higher water content, which melts the sugar making a cream cheese soup.
  • Too soft butter can also make the frosting a bit loose. Room temperature butter should be firm, yet soft enough to leave a little dent when you push on it.
  • Avoid adding too much liquids to flavor your frosting. Up to 1 teaspoon of liquids, like vanilla extract, would be ok. And add extracts at the very end, so that it won’t melt the sugar causing a runny frosting.
  • Opt for dry flavorings, like lemon zest, vanilla paste or vanilla beans, freeze-dried fruit powders, cocoa powder, etc.
  • Don’t over-beat cream cheese and butter, or the mixture may heat up and melt the sugar, again making a soupy frosting.

How to fix runny frosting:

Adding more powdered sugar won’t help you if you already got runny frosting, because your frosting is runny is due to excess moisture in it, and adding more sugar will just melt it. Also, putting it in the fridge won’t help in this case as well, because moisture doesn’t thicken in cold temperature.

Instead, try adding up to 1/2 cup of cornstarch into the runny frosting. Cornstarch helps to thicken the frosting without altering the flavor by absorbing excess moisture.

Too sweet frosting:

If you think your frosting is too sweet, add a pinch of salt. Salt will balance out the sweetness and it’ll taste much better!

Grainy frosting:

This could happen if there’s not enough moisture in the frosting, and sugar isn’t incorporated properly.

FIX: Try adding 1-2 tablespoons of heavy cream and whip it again.

Lumpy frosting:

It’s likely that you used cold cream cheese. Make sure to soften your cream cheese at room temperature, about 1 hour on the counter. Also, check your powdered sugar. If it has lots of lumps, I suggest sifting it before adding it to the frosting.

How to thicken cream cheese frostingCheck out my Red Velvet Cupcakes recipe

Make-Ahead Tip:

You can definitely make this frosting in advance.

  • Keep it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. Bring it to room temperature and re-whip before using.
  • You can also freeze it for up to 3 months! Simply thaw it overnight in the fridge. Then bring it to room temperature and re-whip before using.

This post may contain affiliate links. Read our disclosure policy.

  • Pin
  • Share
  • Recipe

Cream Cheese Frosting – my absolute favorite! A rich and luxurious, melt-in-your-mouth frosting made with just a handful of basic ingredients.

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

Cream Cheese Frosting Recipe

This decadent, silky smooth, cloud-like frosting is what dreams are made of! It’s perfect for just about any type of cake and it is so easy to make!

And it brings one more layer of heavenly flavor to an already delicious cake. A frosting like this is where the statement “icing on the cake” likely started. Perfect upgrade.

You can prepare it in a stand mixer or with a hand mixer, just use whichever you prefer. Just keep to my number one tip of chilling!

Best Cakes to go with Cream Cheese Frosting

Here’s a list of my favorite cakes to pair with it:

  • Carrot Cake
  • Chocolate Cake (you can make it chocolate cream cheese frosting too, see note below)
  • Coconut Cake
  • Lemon Blueberry Cake
  • Pumpkin Cake
  • Red Velvet Cake
  • Spice Cake
  • Zucchini Cake

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

4 Ingredients for Cream Cheese Frosting

  1. Cream cheese: I recommend Philadelphia (not sponsored it’s just the only cream cheese I buy, delicious flavor and consistent consistency). Do not use Neufchâtel cheese (aka low fat cream cheese).
  2. Unsalted butter: Since there’s already salt in the cream cheese I highly recommend going with unsalted butter so frosting isn’t too salty.
  3. Powdered sugar: Also known as confectioners sugar. No substitutes here, this very fine sugar makes for a smooth, non-gritty frosting.
  4. Vanilla extract: I recommend sticking with real vanilla for best flavor.

How to thicken cream cheese frostingHow to thicken cream cheese frosting

How to Make the Best Cream Cheese Frosting

Three easy steps to making this simple frosting:

  1. In a mixing bowl, or in the bowl of an electric stand mixer fitted with the paddle attachment, cream together cream cheese and butter until smooth and slightly fluffy.
  2. Add powdered sugar and vanilla and mix on low speed until combined. Then increase speed to high and whip for a few minutes until light and fluffy.
  3. Transfer frosting to freezer and freeze 3 minutes. Remove and mix with mixer just briefly. Repeat this process up to 2 more times until frosting is more firm.

How to thicken cream cheese frostingHow to thicken cream cheese frosting

How Long Can This Frosting Sit Out?

For food safety it shouldn’t sit out longer than 2 hours, but keep in mind it should be kept cool so it doesn’t get runny (if that comes before two hours. Even at room temperature (70 degrees) frosting can start to run so I recommend chilling shortly after frosting.

Does Cream Cheese Frosting Need to be Refrigerated?

  • Yes. Cream cheese frosting does need to be refrigerated (and can be chilled 4 – 5 days in an airtight container).
  • Keep in mind upon chilling through it does harden up some so bring nearly to room temp before using or serving.
  • Once you’ve added it to your cake the cake should be stored in an airtight container and chilled.

Can You Freeze Cream Cheese Frosting?

  • Yes cream cheese frosting can be frozen in an airtight container up to 3 months.
  • Thaw for one day in the refrigerator then let rest on the counter to bring nearly to room temperature.
  • Preferably rewhip for a minute with a mixer before using.

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

Can You Tint It with Color?

Yes absolutely. You can use gel food coloring, liquid food coloring (they make natural versions now), or powdered coloring such as beet powder (sift first). Remember when tinting a little goes a long way.

How do You Make Chocolate Cream Cheese Frosting?

To make chocolate cream cheese frosting just add 6 Tbsp unsweetened cocoa powder (sifted) to the mixture when adding powdered sugar. You can see it on this cake here.

How do You Thicken Cream Cheese Frosting (My Best Tip)?

My number one tip for cream cheese frosting is to make ingredients cool again. When cream cheese (and butter) gets softer it get’s runnier. I started doing this years ago and it’s been a game changer:

  • Upon completion of mixing frosting freeze the frosting in mixing bowl in short bursts, just a few minutes at a time.
  • Then mix again using the electric stand mixer or hand mixer.
  • Freeze briefly again. Mix again.
  • This really just firms it back up quickly. Just don’t overdue it with freezing or it will get clumpy and become too hard for spreading over a soft cake.
  • Work quickly to frost cake or cupcakes before it starts to return to warm room temperature again.
  • Another thing that helps thicken is to add a little more powdered sugar.

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

Tips for Success

  • Use good quality cream cheese. The store brands can tend to have a runnier consistency. Don’t use whipped cream cheese in a tub.
  • Don’t melt butter! If you have to soften in the microwave soften in short bursts on a low power, rotating butter every few seconds. But should just soft.
  • Never add liquid. Save that for buttercream frosting, cream cheese frosting will be too runny if you try to add cream or milk.
  • Whip and whip frosting to make it fluffy, but also be careful not to overdue it so it has some stability.
  • Keep chilled and when out of the fridge keep at a cool temperature, don’t serve a cream cheese frosted cake outdoors on a hot summer day unless you’ve got a way to keep it cold or serve right away.

Variations

Try adding one of these ingredients for a fun flavor boost:

  • ground cinnamon
  • crushed freeze dried strawberries or blueberries.
  • lemon zest
  • coconut extract
  • vanilla bean

Posted on Last updated: March 2, 2022

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

Go to Home » Post Archive » How to Thicken a No-Bake Cheesecake

This post may contain affiliate links. If you click one of these links and make a purchase, I may earn a commission at no additional cost to you. In addition, as an Amazon Associate I earn from qualifying purchases.

It can generally go without saying that there are many, many different recipes out there for a quick and easy dessert dish.

After all, it depends entirely on what you are in the mood to eat.

If you are in the mood for something baked, there’s a good chance that you are going to be spending a fair bit of time tending to your baking recipe, measuring out the ingredients, and making sure that everything is baking the way it should.

More often than not, if you have to bake a dessert, you are going to be spending at least an hour dealing with it. Not everyone has that much time to spare in their days.

It could be that you need to prepare this dessert in a quick and timely manner for another event or it could be that you simply aren’t in the mood to dedicate that much time and effort to baking something.

Thankfully, because there are many people out there who feel the same way, people are coming up with more and more variants on traditional baked recipes that don’t rely on baking.

How to thicken cream cheese frosting

In fact, there are some recipes that fall under the name of “no-bake” that involve absolutely no baking.

Of course, these recipes are going to taste somewhat different than the traditional baked recipe but for people who are working on a deadline or people who don’t have the patience to bake, these recipes can be the perfect answer to a specific craving.

One of the most popular variants of this recipe is the no-bake cheesecake.

Because cheesecake is often a fickle recipe in the first place and even experienced bakers have trouble getting it to work right, a no-bake cheesecake is right up the alley for people who do not want all of the hassle of dealing with the tough ingredients.

However, if you want your cheesecake to replicate the ones that you